No preview available
HomeMy WebLinkAboutOrdinance 5714ORDINANCE NO. 5714 AN ORDINANCE WAIVING THE REQUIREMENTS OF FORMAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING AND APPROVING THE PURCHASE OF AN OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM FROM BLUEINGREEN, LLC OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS IN THE AMOUNT OF $1,780,825.00 PLUS ANY APPLICABLE TAXES FOR THE NOLAND WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT WHEREAS, the ultraviolet light system the City has used for wastewater disinfection since August of 1999 is near the end of its useful life as a primary disinfection system; and WHEREAS, the City has worked with B1ueInGreen, LLC in a multi-year pilot test of an ozone disinfection system which is not available from any other source; and WHEREAS, the ozone disinfection system has been shown to reduce contaminants and color more than the City's current ultraviolet system and also has many environmental benefits above and beyond those of ultraviolet or other disinfection systems. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS: Section 1. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hereby finds that such circumstances constitute an exceptional situation where competitive bidding is deemed not feasible or practical, and therefore waives the requirements of formal competitive bidding and authorizes the purchase of an ozone disinfection system from B1ueInGreen, LLC of Fayetteville, Arkansas in the amount of $1,780,825.00 plus applicable taxes for the Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant. PASSED and APPROVED this 7tn day of October, 2014. APPROVED;/) ATTEST: \\\\1111111// �����,FF; Y�•� T R,� Y :,FAYETTEVILLE 4== By: 4!k� if. A!�A , Mayor SON RA E. SMITH, City Clerk/Treasurer .City of Fayetteville, Arkansas 113 West Mountain Street `^ d Fayetteville, AR 72701 479-575-83 TDD - rqr 479-521-1316 Text File File Number: 2014-0413 Agenda Date: 10/7/2014 Version: 1 Status: Agenda Ready In Control: City Council File Type: Resolution Agenda Number: C. 2 AN ORDINANCE WAIVING THE REQUIREMENTS OF FORMAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING AND APPROVING THE PURCHASE OF AN OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM FROM BLUEINGREEN, LLC OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS IN THE AMOUNT OF $1,780,825.00 PLUS ANY APPLICABLE TAXES FOR THE NOLAND WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT WHEREAS, the ultraviolet light system the City has used for wastewater disinfection since August of 1999 is near the end of its useful life as a primary disinfection system; and WHEREAS, the City has worked with B1ueInGreen, LLC in a multi-year pilot test of an ozone disinfection system which is not available from any other source; and WHEREAS, the ozone disinfection system has been shown to reduce contaminants and color more than the City's current ultraviolet system and also has many environmental benefits that outweigh those of ultraviolet or other disinfection systems. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS: Section 1. That the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas hereby finds that such circumstances constitute an exceptional situation where competitive bidding is deemed not feasible or practical, and therefore waives the requirements of formal competitive bidding and authorizes the purchase of an ozone disinfection system from B1ueInGreen, LLC of Fayetteville, Arkansas in the amount of $1,780,825.00 plus applicable taxes for the Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant. City of Fayetteville, Arkansas Page 1 Printed on 10/9/2014 Billy Ammons, CH21VI Hill Submitted By City of Fayetteville Staff Review Form 2014-0413 Legistar File ID 10/7/2014 City Council Meeting Date - Agenda Item Only N/A for Non -Agenda Item 9/19/2014 Wastewater Treatment Plant / Utilities Department Submitted Date Division / Department Action Recommendation: Approval of a bid waiver with BlueinGreen, LLC and approval of a contract with Bluein Green, LLC to purchase an ozone disinfection system for the Paul R. Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant in the amount of $1,780,825.00. 5400.5800.5801.00 Account Number 10008.1 Project Number Budgeted Item? Yes Budget Impact: Water/Sewer Fund UV Disinfection System Replacement Current Budget Funds Obligated Current Balance Does item have a cost? Yes Item Cost Budget Adjustment Attached? No Budget Adjustment Project Title $ 2,158,914.00 �— 2,158,914.00 $ 1,780,825.00 Remaining Budget $ 378,089.00 V20140710 Previous Ordinance or Resolution # N/A Original Contract Number: N/A Comments: Approval Date: d CITY OF • Tay � ev1 e ARKANSAS MEETING OF OCTOBER 7, 2014 TO: Mayor and City Council THRU: Don Marr, Chief of Staff Tim Nyander, Interim Utilities Director Water & Sewer Committee FROM: Billy Ammons, Wastewater Treatment DATE: September 19, 2014 CITY COUNCIL AGENDA MEMO SUBJECT: Approval of bid waiver and purchase of ozone disinfection system equipment for the Paul R. Noland wastewater plant from BluelnGreen, LLC of Fayetteville, AR. RECOMMENDATION: City Administration recommends approval of a bid waiver with BluelnGreen, LLC to purchase an ozone disinfection system for the Paul R. Noland wastewater treatment plant in the amount of $1,780,825 exclusive of any applicable taxes. BACKGROUND: Disinfection of wastewater discharged from the City's Paul R. Noland wastewater treatment plant is required by the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit issued by the State for this facility. Since August of 1999, this required disinfection has been accomplished by using ultraviolet light (UV), which at the time of purchase was the most environmentally friendly cost effective disinfection method available. That UV disinfection system is near the end of its useful life from the standpoint of being used as a primary disinfection system, although the system does still function and can be pressed into service as a backup or intermittent use system. BluelnGreen, a local innovative environmental systems firm has developed a process to cost-effectively utilize ozone for wastewater disinfection, which has many additional environmental benefits above and beyond those offered by UV or other disinfection systems. The BluelnGreen system is protected by various patents and pending patents and there is no other system on the market that uses this same type of technology to introduce dissolved ozone into the water stream to be disinfected. It is neither practical nor feasible therefore to competitively bid the purchase of this equipment. DISCUSSION: The City of Fayetteville has worked diligently over a multi-year period in cooperation with BluelnGreen to pilot test and prove that the new technology can and will function at the City's facility and City Staff as well as CH2M HILL staff are confident that the system can meet all applicable NPDES standards. In addition, samples of plant effluent treated with ozone have been analyzed on several occasions for emerging contaminants of concern (ECC), including various hormones and pharmaceuticals that typically pass through conventional wastewater treatment processes and are discharged into the receiving stream. In the case of the Noland Mailing Address: 113 W. Mountain Street www.fayetteville-ar.gov Fayetteville, AR 72701 facility, that discharge goes into the White River and eventually into Beaver Lake which is the source of drinking water for the City of Fayetteville as well as most of Northwest Arkansas. The Noland plant effluent was found to have 30 of the ECC's present before disinfection and 16 of those were reduced beyond the detection limit by the ozone disinfection process with 13 of the remaining 14 reduced by at least 25%. By contrast, the existing UV disinfection process reduced no analytes to the detection level and only reduced 10 by as much as 25%. Ozone disinfection also removes virtually all color from the treated effluent and provides a very high level of oxygenation. Even though staff is recommending that the equipment purchase be made via this requested bid waiver, the installation of the equipment will be competitively bid in the near future. Since the BluelnGreen equipment is so new, any potential contractor bidding on the installation would have likely felt pressure to place a higher than normal markup on the equipment in order to guarantee performance. By utilizing this requested bid waiver to procure the equipment, the City will be able to hold BluelnGreen responsible for delivering a fully functional system of individual components with a full 2 -year guarantee. BUDGET/STAFF IMPACT: Funds are available within the Disinfection System Replacement project budget. Attachments: Staff Review Form- City of Fayetteville - Purchase Order Request � PO� p ues Requisition o.: Date: �7 y 9/19/2014 (Not a Purchase Order) P.O Number: All PO Requests shall be scanned to the Purchasing e-mail: Purchasing@fayetteville-ar.gov. Purchase shall not be made until an actual PO has been issued. Vendor' 16503 Vendor BlueinGreen, Inc. Mail 1- Yes r No Legistar#: #: Name: 2014-0413 FOB Point: Taxable Address: Attn: Clete Brewer, 535 W Research Blvd, Suite 135 r Yes r No Expected Delivery Date: Zip Code: Ship to code: Quotes Attached City: Fayetteville State: AR 72701 Fay r Yes I No Requester's Employee #: Extension: Requester: Cheryl Partain 2548 8224 Item Description Quantity Unit of Issue Unit Cost Extended Cost Account Number Project.Sub# Inventory # Fixed Asset # 1 UV Disinfection System at Noland. 1 Unit of Issue 1,780,825.00 $1,780,825.00 5400.5800.5801.00 10008.1 Multiple 2 $0.00 3 $0.00 4 $0.00 5 $0.00 g $0.00 7 $0.00 8 $0.00 9 $0.00 10 $0.00 Shipping/Handling Lot $0.00 pecial Instructions: Subtotal: $1,780,825.00 Tax: $0.00 Total: $1,780,825.00 Approvals: Mayor: Department Director: Purchasing Manager: Chief Financial Officer: Budget Director: IT Director: Dispatch Manager: Utilities Manager: Other: NORTHWEST ARKANSAS DEMOCRAT -GAZETTE NORTHWESTAR�SAS THE MORNING NEWS OF SPRINGDALE THE MORNING NEWS OF ROGERS SPADE R:SLLC NORTHWEST ARKANSAS TIMES BENTON COUNTY DAILY RECORD 212 NORTH EAST AVENUE, FAYETTEVILLE, ARKANSAS 72701 1 P.O. BOX 1607, 72702 1479-442-1700 1 WWW.NWANEWS.COM AFFIDAVIT OF PUBLICATION I, Karen Caler, do solemnly swear that I am the Legal Clerk of the Northwest Arkansas Newspapers, LLC, printed and published in Washington and Benton County, Arkansas, bona fide circulation, that from my own personal knowledge and reference to the files of said publication, the advertisement of: City of Fayetteville - Ordinance 5714 Was inserted in the Regular Editions on: October 16, 2014 Publication Charges: $ 103.76 V� GLA—P—� C Karen Caler Subscribed and sworn to before me This J(p day of ()+ , 2014. LN& 1'4�& Notary Public My Commission Expires: CATHY WILES Arkansas - Benton County Notary Public - Comm#E 12397118 My Commission Expires Feb 20, 2024 RECEIVED OCT 202014 CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE CITY CLERK'S OFFICE * *NOTE* * Please do not pay from Affidavit. Invoice will be sent. City of Fayetteville Staff Review Form 2015-0122 Legistar File ID N/A City Council Meeting Date - Agenda Item Only N/A for Non -Agenda Item Billy Ammons 3/2/2015 Wastewater Treatment Plant/ Utilities Department Submitted By Submitted Date Division / Department Action Recommendation: City Administration recommends approval of the contract between the City of Fayetteville and BluelnGreen, LLC. The Fayetteville City Council approved the bid waiver on October 7, 2014 as Ordinance 5714 to authorize the equipment purchase for the Ozone Disinfection System at the Paul R. Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant in the amount of $1,780,825 exclusive of any applicable taxes. This request is to finalize the contract which was not provided during the October 7th Council approval request. Budget Impact: 5400.5800.5801.00 Water/Sewer Account Number Fund 10008.1 UV Disinfection System Replacement Project Number Project Title Budgeted Item? Yes Current Budget $ 2,158,914.00 Funds Obligated $ - Current Balance $ 2,158,914.00 Does item have a cost? Yes Item Cost $ 1,780,825.00 Budget Adjustment Attached? No Budget Adjustment Remaining Budget $ 378,089.00 V20140710 Previous Ordinance or Resolution # 5714 Original Contract Number: N/A Comments: Approval Date: CITY OF T ayl i le ARKANSAS TO: Mayor Lioneld Jordan THRU: Don Marr, Chief of Staff Tim Nyander, Utilities Director Water & Sewer Committee FROM: Billy Ammons, Regional Business Manager, CH2M HILL DATE: March 2, 2015 SUBJECT: Mayors signature approval on the contract between the City of Fayetteville and BluelnGreen, LLC of Fayetteville, AR. The Fayetteville City Council approved the bid waiver on October 7, 2014 as Ordinance 5714 to authorize the equipment purchase for the Ozone Disinfection System at the Paul R. Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant for $1,780.825. RECOMMENDATION: City Administration recommends approval of the contract between the City of Fayetteville and BluelnGreen, LLC. The Fayetteville City Council approved the bid waiver on October 7, 2014 as Ordinance 5714 to authorize the equipment purchase for the Ozone Disinfection System at the Paul R. Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant in the amount of $1,780,825 exclusive of any applicable taxes. This request is to finalize the contract which was not provided during the October 7th Council approval request. BACKGROUND: BluelnGreen, LLC, completed a 2 -phase pilot study at the Noland WWTP which consisted of using its HyDOZ® technology to mix a concentrated ozone solution with the plant's treated effluent. The study that began in 2011 and concluded in 2012, produced pilot scale disinfection results that complied with the plant's NPDES permit requirements for pathogenic bacteria and demonstrated the removal of emerging contaminants of concern, such as antibiotic residuals, when compared to ultraviolet disinfection. In addition to disinfection, the injection of ozone into the plant effluent using HyDOZ® creates a residual dissolved oxygen by-product as a result of the breakdown of ozone in water and improved effluent color and clarity. Accordingly, the existing effluent post -aeration system will no longer be required since the ozone disinfection will produce sufficient dissolved oxygen to comply with the plant's NPDES permit requirements for dissolved oxygen. DISCUSSION: The City of Fayetteville has worked diligently over a multi-year period in cooperation with BluelnGreen to pilot test and prove that the new technology can and will function at the City's facility and City Staff as well as CH2M HILL staff are confident that the system can meet all applicable NPDES standards. In addition, samples of plant effluent treated with ozone have been analyzed on several occasions for emerging contaminants of concern (ECC), including various hormones and pharmaceuticals that typically pass through conventional wastewater treatment processes and are discharged into the receiving stream. In the case of the Noland facility, that discharge goes into the White River and eventually into Beaver Lake which is the Mailing Address: 113 W. Mountain Street www.fayetteville-ar.gOV Fayetteville, AR 72701 source of drinking water for the City of Fayetteville as well as most of Northwest Arkansas. The Noland plant effluent was found to have 30 of the ECC's present before disinfection and 16 of those were reduced beyond the detection limit by the ozone disinfection process with 13 of the remaining 14 reduced by at least 25%. By contrast, the existing UV disinfection process reduced no analytes to the detection level and only reduced 10 by as much as 25%. Ozone disinfection also removes virtually all color from the treated effluent and provides a very high level of oxygenation. Even though staff recommended that the equipment purchase be made via bid waiver, the installation of the equipment was competitively bid and was awarded to JL Bryson Construction, Inc. By utilizing this requested bid waiver to procure the equipment, the City was able to hold BluelnGreen responsible for delivering a fully functional system of individual components with a full 2 -year guarantee. BUDGET/STAFF IMPACT: Funds are available within the Disinfection System Replacement project budget. Attachments: Staff Review Form BluelnGreen Contract AGREEMENT BETWEEN CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE AND BLUEINGREEN, LLC THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the day ofMW" the year 2015 by and between the CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE (CITY) and BLUEINGREEN, LLC (CONTRACTOR). 1. As a result of the passage and approval of Ordinance #5714 on October 7, 2014 by the City Council of the City of Fayetteville, Arkansas which authorizes the City to purchase an ozone disinfection system from BlueInGreen, LLC for the amount approved in the ordinance, the City agrees to purchase and BlueInGreen, LLC agrees to furnish the ozone disinfection system equipment, materials, supplies, spare parts and other services as described in the Contract Documents for the satisfactory completion of the Paul R. Noland WWTP — Ozone Disinfection Facilities Project. 2. Such ozone disinfection system equipment, materials, supplies, spare parts and services shall be covered and paid for under Purchase Order No. 14-0000436-100 issued to BlueInGreen, LLC by the City dated December 19, 2014. The stated Purchase Order includes delivery of equipment to the Paul R. Noland WWTP site, equipment warranty, and performance and payment bonding as required and excludes any applicable taxes. 3. Terms and conditions of performance and payment bonding shall be covered under Bond No. SSB0429077 issued to the City by Surety dated December 19, 2014, a copy of which has been filed with the Washington County Circuit Clerk. 4. BlueInGreen, LLC agrees to commence preparation of equipment shop drawings on or before December 19, 2014 for intended submittal to the City. 5. Upon receiving written approval of the submitted ozone disinfection system equipment shop drawings from the City, a lead time of 14 weeks shall be granted to BlueInGreen, LLC for completion of equipment fabrication and assembly, subject to acts of God; after which time the City shall immediately be notified of intent to ship equipment to the Paul R. Noland WWTP located at 1500 Foxhunter Road, Fayetteville, AR 72701. 6. Final payment shall be made no later than August 19, 2015 or until such time that all ozone disinfection system equipment installation and field services and all required training activities as outlined in the Contract Specifications have been satisfactorily completed. 7. The term Contract Documents as used herein shall mean and include the following exhibits (attached): 7.1 Purchase Order No. 14-0000436-100 (Exhibit 1) 7.2 Performance and Payment Bond No. SSB0429077 (Exhibit 2) 7.3 Contract Specifications (Exhibit 3) 7.4 Contract Drawings (Exhibit 4) 8. The City shall directly compensate BlueInGreen, LLC at such times and in such percentages of the Purchase Order amount as set forth below: 8.1 50% - due upon receipt of approved purchase order 8.2 20% - due at approval of equipment shop drawings 8.3 20% - due at notice of intent to ship equipment to jobsite 8.4 10% - due upon successful completion of equipment installation, startup and training 9. BlueInGreen, LLC shall warrant that the ozone disinfection system shall meet and comply with the performance criteria as stated in the Contract Documents for no less than 24 months of operation beginning with the date of beneficial use of the ozone disinfection system (established in writing by City) or 3 months following the date when all components of the ozone disinfection system arrive at the jobsite (acknowledged in writing by City), whichever occurs first. Prolonged or recurring outage of any component of the ozone disinfection system furnished by BluelnGreen, LLC which prevents the intended use of the ozone disinfection system and which is experienced during the 24 month warranty period shall be cause for reasonable extension of the warranty period. All labor and materials to correct any mechanical or electrical problem, equipment defect or process malfunction during the 24 month warranty period, provided that these warranty matters do not relate to or result from misuse of equipment or improper maintenance of equipment, shall be provided by BlueInGreen, LLC. 10. BlueInGreen, LLC shall provide a qualified and technically competent and responsible person familiar with the ozone disinfection system for coordination with the General Contractor on the Paul R. Noland WWTP — Ozone Disinfection Facilities Project and to provide assistance during installation, mechanical/electrical startup of the equipment, performance demonstration testing and training of plant staff. 11. Other 11.1. Terms used in this Agreement may not have the same meanings given in Article 1 of the General Conditions. 11.2. The City and BlueInGreen, LLC each binds itself, it partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 11.3. Changes, modifications, or amendments in scope, price or fee to this agreement shall not be allowed without a prior formal amendment to the agreement approved by the Mayor and the City Council in advance of the change in scope, cost or fee. 11.4 City contracts and documents prepared while performing City contractual work are subject to the Arkansas Freedom of Information Act. If a Freedom of Information Act request is presented to the City of Fayetteville, BlueInGreen, LLC will do everything possible to provide the documents in a prompt and timely 2 manner as prescribed in the Arkansas Freedom of Information Act (A.C.A. §25- 19-101 et. seq.). B1ueInGreen, LLC reserves the right to object to a request under the FOIA where it involves disclosure of confidential or proprietary information. Only legally authorized photocopying costs pursuant to the FOIA may be assessed for this compliance. 11.5 This contract between the City and BlueInGreen, LLC must be interpreted under Arkansas Law. IN WITNESS THEREOF, CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE and BLUEINGREEN, LLC have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to City of Fayetteville and B1ueInGreen, LLC. @AJ► , Printedo� I h�&i;V}tile op FAYETTEVILLE m s [C -,A ATTEST Signature 1 � � Printed Name & Title " U_L,� T v,,,,� Address for giving nodes: 113 W. Mountain Fayetteville, AR 72701 4 CONTRACTOR BLUEINGREEN, LLC BY Signature Clete Brewer, Chief Executive Officer /:7 1�fc li �i�«,sr , 00 Printed Name & Title ATTEST [CORPORATE SEAL] Signature Printed Name & Title Address for giving notices: 700 W. Research Center Blvd Fayetteville, AR 72701 (If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign). 399884C.GN1 TABLE OF CONTENTS EXHIBIT 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS....................................................................................... Pages 0640 Warranty Bond......................................................................... 1- 2 0700 General Conditions.................................................................. 1- 26 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work...................................................................1- 3 01 29 00 Payment Procedures................................................................1- 5 01 31 13 Project Coordination............................................................... 1- 4 01 31 19 Project Meetings..................................................................... 1- 3 013300 Submittal Procedures..............................................................1- 9 261413 Forms: Transmittal of Contractor's Submittal 9 01 43 33 Manufacturers' Field Services ................................................ 1- 4 Form: Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation 01 43 34 Special Services.......................................................................1- 3 Certificate of Proper Installation 01 64 00 Owner -Furnished Products...................................................... 1- 4 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data ........................................... 1- 7 Forms: Maintenance Summary Form 01 91 14 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup ................................. 1- 6 Unit Process Startup Form. Performance Demonstration/Certification Form DIVISION 9—FINISHES 09 90 04 Painting....................................................................................1- 17 Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) Product Data Sheet (PDS) DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL 26 05 02 Basic Electrical Requirements ................................................. 1- 7 26 05 04 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods .................................. 1- 12 26 05 05 Conductors...............................................................................1- 15 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes.................................................................1- 28 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems .................................... 1- 21 261413 Switchboards............................................................................1- 9 26 20 00 Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors ......................................... 1- 12 PW/WBG/399884 TABLE OF CONTENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 0001 10-1 399884C.GN1 Pages 26 22 00 Low -Voltage Transformers...................................................... 1- 4 26 24 16 Panelboards..............................................................................1- 6 26 24 19 Low -Voltage Motor Control .................................................... 1- 10 26 27 26 Wiring Devices........................................................................ 1- 8 DIVISION 40—PROCESS INTEGRATION 4005 15 Piping Support Systems........................................................... 1- 11 Table 1: Nonchemical Areas Table 2: Chemical Areas 40 27 00 40 27 00.01 40 27 00.09 40 27 00.10 40 27 02 409001 ,o •• ll Process Piping—General.................................................. Piping Schedule Legend Piping Schedule Cement -Mortar Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings ....... Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings—Special Service .......... Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings .................... Process Valves and Operators ........................................... Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems ............. I&C Components Instrument Calibration Sheet I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet Performance Acceptance Test Sheet ...... 1- 20 Owner -Furnished Package Control Systems ........................... 1- 17 I&C Components DIVISION 44—POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT 44 42 56.04 Submersible Pumps.................................................................. 1- 7 Data Sheets: Pump and Motor 44 42 56.18 Ozone Disinfection System ...................................................... 1- 42 Supplement 1: Ozone Disinfection System – Additional Functional Requirements Supplement 2: PLC-08-01/RIO-08-01 Ethernet Data Exchange Table DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY) END OF SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PW/WBG/399884 0001 10-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 T E p'F' �0$ AR ANAS REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER ;.o No.12790 /-,.1 G THIS DOCUMENT WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED AND SIGNED BY BRIAN J. FUERST PE NO. 12790 ON 09/30/2014 THIS COPY IS NOT A SIGNED AND SEALED DOCUMENT T E O F X00 AR AN AS REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER n1 0 No.11611 ,`J0l THIS DOCUMENT WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED AND SIGNED BY MICHAEL W. LOFTUS PE NO. 11611 ON 09/30/2014 THIS COPY IS NOT A SIGNED AND SEALED DOCUMENT t// --c;1 AT E O F L �0 AR ANS AS REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER No.11519 11 5" KE THIS DOCUMENT WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED AND SIGNED BY P.Y. KESKAR PE NO. 11519 ON 09/30/2014 THIS COPY IS NOT A SIGNED AND SEALED DOCUMENT AT E d' X00 AR ANS AS REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER No.12841 a.l Iim THIS DOCUMENT WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED AND SIGNED BY MARK G. NANNINGA PE NO. 12841 ON 09/30/2014 THIS COPY IS NOT A SIGNED AND SEALED DOCUMENT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ® RLI Insurance Company RLI 9028 N. Undbergh or. Peoria,lL 61615 P.O. Box 3967 Peoria, IL 61612 �t�pl�llll�ln�lil(Nl�lun uQUISInIIIIII MINI M Fax: (309) Doo ZD: 018028060003 Type: LIE Kind: PERFORMANCE BOND Recorded: 12/23/2014 at 02:06:00 PH Fee Alit: $25.00 Pane 1 of 3 Washington County, AR K le Sylvester Circuit clerk Bond No. SSB0429077 I B032 00000944 Bili a ameof u LLC FLle � {Legal Ti»elName or Subcontractor) 700 W, Research Center Bivd.. Favettevitle, A13-72701 (Address of Subcontractor) as Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and RLI Insurance Company as Surety, herelnafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Name of Surety) Cly gf Fanfievlile. AR. (Legal Thle/Name of Contractor) 113 W, MoME!tain St.. Fayetteville, AR. 72701 (Address of Contractor) as Obligee, hereinafter called Obligee, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinbelow defined, in the amount of One Million, Seven Hundred Eighty Thousand, Eight Hundred Twenty Five Dollars ( 11.780.820 1, far the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement dated ___ 12/1912014 entered into a subcontract with Obligee for Suooly ozone disinfection system for City of Fayetteville. AR- Wait@water Treatment Plant in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by NIA (Full name of Archllect) Which subcontract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereafter referred to as the subcontract. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Principal shall prompilly make ppayment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the subo n act, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions: 1. A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Principal for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably required for use In the performance of the contract labor and material being construed to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the subcontract. 2. The above named Pdncipai and Surety, hereby ointly and several) agree with the Obligee that every claimant as herein defined, who has not been paid in full before the expiration of) a period of ninety ((90) days after the date on which the last of such claimant's work or labor was done or performed, or materials werg furnished by such claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to final Judgment for such sum or sums as may be just�lyy due claimant, and have execution thereon. The Obligee shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit. 3. No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant, (a) After the expiration of one f1 j year following the date on which Principal ceased work on said subcontract, it being understood, however, that if a limitation embodied In this bond is prohibited by any law controi ing the construction hereof, such limitation shall be deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the mirimum period of limitation permitted by such law. (b) Other than In a state court of competent Jurisdiction in and for the county or other political subdivision of the state in which the pproject or any part thereof, is situated, or in the United States District Court for the district in which the project, or any part thereo{, Is situated, and not elsewhere. 4. The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment of payments made in good faith hereunder. Signed and sealed this 19th day of December A.D., 2014 . IN THE PRESENCE OF: SUBCONTRACT LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND. This bond Is issued simultaneously with another bornd in favor of the obNgee conditioned for the run and faithful performance of the Revised to March, 1960. LC Principal by (Seal) RU Insyr btl ia�+4 (Seal) s.�� ; ., qty by w1t. '�..J4111,10% .. Attorney in Fact 1 C0018004 -50S RLIO 9RLI 025 N.nraaceCompanr SUBCONTRACT PERFORMANCE 9035 N. [dndEergh 13r. Peoria, IL b 1615 n� � P.G. Box 3967 Peoria. It. 61612 BOND FORMA Phone: (30W92- 1000 Fuc: (3091653-1610 Bona No, SSB0429077 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That. Rluel en LLC - It= roam dm name or legal tide of the subcontractor at 7gg W Resegreh fencer Blvd.. FBy iteyllig AR. 72701 Hera inert the address of the subs: imW as Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and RU irttnrontrr("ampanx. _, __ Illinois as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ri �n of FaveuOYtljr p Has incnila name oc legal tab of then General Ceneactor I i 1 W Mrtnmaln St _ Fa nevitte AR 77701 as Obligee, hereinafter �.• Has inert the some of the tonal Coon= called Obligee, in the amount of One Millin Seven Hundred FFIBitty Thn�FigW Hapdred TwenprFbye Dollars( S 1190 R2 an ), for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement dated 12/192014 entered into a subcontract with Obligee for ,Stmolvomedisinfecitonsystem for Cityofewene"at. •n WasteotirTre•rn,entPiano. in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by NIA Fun Ilam of Artaater which subcontract is by reference made a part hereof; and is hereafter refereed to as the subcontract. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Principal shall promptly and faidtibliy perform said subcontract. then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. Whenever Principal shall be, and be declared by Obligee to be in default under the subcontract, Obligee havingperfonned Obligee's obligations thereunder. (1) Surety may promptly remedy the default subject to the provisions of paragraph 3 herein, or, (2) Obligee after reasonable notice to Surety may, or Surety upon demand of Obligee may strange for the performance ofPrincipars obligation under the subcontract subject to the provisions of paragraph 3 herein; (3) The balance of the subcontract price, as defined below, shall be credited against the reasonable cost ofcompletmg performance of the subcontract. Ifcompleted by the Obligec, and the reasonable cost exceeds the balance of the subcontract price, the Surety shall pay to the Obligee such excess, but in no event shall the aggregate liability of the Surety exceed the amount of this bond. If the Surety arranges completion or remedies the default, that portion of the balance of the subcontract price as may be requited to complete the subcontract or remedy the default and to reimburse the Surety for its outlays shall be paid to the Surety at the times and in the monner as said sums would have been payable to the Principal had theca been no default under the subcontract. The term "balance of the subcontract price," its used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by the Obliges to the Principal under the subcontract and any amendments thereto, less the amounts heretofore properly paid by Obligee under the subcontract. Any Suit under this bond must be instituted before the expiration of two years from date on which final payment under the subcontract falls duo. No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the Obligee named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of the Obligee. Signed and sealed this 19th day of December A.D., _2Q14_• Bluetftj,LC IN THE PRESENCE OF. by (Seal) Subeoona Petformanco Bond Form A. Recommended for use whoa the General Contractor hes hied Pafbtmaoce Bond spwDycd yY the Amakan Insdnue orAtchuau, AIA Form No. 107, sd tune 1, 1955. (Seal) by � (Seal) ICemtL y 12" Aaomey in Fact �" _� Cii� rr s��• e • yyy`.'yy�• � y�fi ••�4M.�Neeaa ey :~', 00021006.50,0 �ttttt14H1131f(s''` RLI' P.O. Box 39671 Peori4 IL 61612-3967 Phone: (800)64S-2402, Fax: (309)689-2036 Know All Men by These Presents: POWER OF ATTORNEY RLI Insurance Company Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company That this Power of Attorney is not valid or in effect unless attached to the bond which it authorizes executed, but may be detached by the approving officer if desired. That this Power of Attorney may be effective and given to either or both of RLI Insurance Company and Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, required for the applicable bond. That ILLI Insurance Company, a Illinois corporation, and/or Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, a Washington corporation (as applicable), each authorized and licensed to do business in all states and the District of Columbia do hereby make, constitute and appoint: Cathy Heiliaer, Diane Kern, Brigette Burgess, Jeffrey Holmes, Stuart DeSelms, jointly or severally in the City o1, tutsa . State of as Attorney in Fact, with 1411 power and authority hereby conferred upon him/her to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver for and on its behalf as Surety, in general, any and all bonds, uadertakitu , and recogamwes m an amount not to exceed Ten Million Dopers ( 111 .000. 0 1 for any single obligation. The acknowledgment and execution of such bond by the said Attorney in Fact shall be as binding upon this Company as if such bond had been executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of this Company. RLI Insurance Company and Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, as applicable, have each further certified that the following is a true and exact copy of the Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each such corporation, and now in force, to -wit: "AU bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney or other obligations of the Corporation shall be executed in the corporate name of the Corporation by the President, Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, Treasurer, or any Vice President, or by such other officers as the Board of Directors may authorize. The Presl eut any Vice President, Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, or the Treasurer may appoint Attorneys in Fact or Agents who shall have authority to issue bonds, policies or undertakings In the name of the Corporation. The corporate seal is not necessary for the validity of any bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney or other obligations of the Corporation. The signature of any such officer and the corporate seal may be printed by facsimile or other electronic image." IN WnMSS WHEREOF, RLI Insurance Company and/or Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, as applicable, have caused these presents to be executed by its respective Vice President with its corporate seal affixed this „j jA day of JWL 2M. AND ,,,�pq,alr,,nry,yy RLI Insurance Company •,,..•.,•• •,•� a�+�..•••""••, Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company IWORA ap '_. SEAL . -- •., 1979 t - �, °. .•' Roy C. Die Vice President State ofIllinois ......•� �+,,% �'••....•`S n� SS '`��'a,�r ASMNG'tQ ,•.�� y�tlNO� �a County Of Peoria ��`�+a.r„lit y,pugld�,N CER'T'IFICATE On this 1 l th day of July , 2014 before me, a Notary Public, personally appeared _Ka C. Die —who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that he signed the above Power of Attorney as the aforesaid officer of the RLI Insurance Company and/or Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of said corporation. 1, the undersigned officer of RLI Insurance Company, a stock corporation of the State of Illinois, and/or Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, a Washington corporation, do hereby ee"If that the attached Power of Attorney is in full force and effect and is irrevocable; and furthermore, that the Resolution of the Company as set forth in the Power of Attorney, is now in force. In testimony whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and the seat of the RI.i Insurance Com�man and/or Contracto�t Bonjh and Insurance Company this 19th . day ofDacember 2014 j . g,C, RLI Insurance Company M. Bock/ Notary Public Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company Ev, FFICIAL SEAL"htoy C. Die Vice President JACQt1EUNE M. BOCKIER311 �IIaS10NExPMSWIWI 3574049020212 A0059913 ** CHANGE ORDER ** �'UhCHASE ORDER A711AN747 VENDOR NO. 16503 BlueinGreen, LLC Attn: Clay Thompson 535 W Research Blvd., Ste 135 Fayetteville Alt 72701 Each Package Must Be Marked Exactly As Shawn Here Clty of Fayeftdle, Arkansas DA'L'E 12/19/14 FOB Fyv PURCHASE ORDER # 14-0400436-100 TERMS NET 30 DAY Unit pet °NumbOr Issue UMt Ptlae TOTALS 1.00 LOT a) Ozone Disinfection System at Nola Contract ##2338 Per Ordinance #5714 FA # 300946 thru #300959 12/19/14 C/O #1 to correct PO description 5400.5800.5801.00 10008 1 SHIP TO: OAH/rreatmentPlant City a#Fayetieviile 1500 Foxhunter Rd Fayetteville Aft 72701 1780825.00 1780825.00 Sales Tax Total: $.00 Partain, C Purchase Order Total: 1780825.00 CONDMONs 1. Sona itwnFaad invoice In duptlmte to 3 No subatthrNano wdhout prior approval. e. F.O.S. Fayethw tc unless aMerwine agreed Accou nis Payable upon. No adre for packing and clAvcry will City of Fayetlevida 4. Dlacaanls dfeedvo to loth of Wowidg nm t bo allowed 113 Wast Mountain Fayef rwille, AR 72701 S. Ordere muat be shippod to full urJew 7. NO C.O.D. ORDERS. dharwise nolifwd. 2. Mark all packagos with P.O. number t3. Pre -pay treigid and add to Invoke. Ship as shave above. All orders must be to 113 W. Mountain SL, Rant scan% axanpanlsd by a pm*hVsGp, naim oewwiee spea" gtmtMly shipped and P.O, numbs: jA V,-6 PURCHASING AGENT VENDOR COPY SECTION 0640 WARRANTY BOND W and as principal ("Principal"), as surety ("Surety"), are hereby jointly and severally held and firmly bound unto the City of Fayetteville for the payment of Dollars ($ ), subject to the terms and conditions provided herein. WHEREAS, Principal executed and entered into that certain Agreement with City of Fayetteville for PAUL R. NOLAND WWTP — OZONE DISINFECTION FACILITIES dated , 2014 (the "Contract"), the provisions of which are incorporated herein by reference, and unless otherwise defined herein all defined terms used or referred to herein shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in the Contract. In addition to other obligations and liabilities, the Contract required Principal to perform the Work for the Project and to furnish this Bond to City of Fayetteville in compliance with Article 22 of the General Conditions. NOW THEREFORE, the obligations of Principal and Surety herein shall remain in full force and effect as provided herein, subject to becoming null and void upon the occurrence of either or both of the conditions that (a) Principal shall fully perform and satisfy all obligations and liabilities of Principal under the warranty and guarantee provisions of Article 29 of the General Conditions, as modified or supplemented by the Supplementary Conditions or any other applicable Contract Documents, at any time within ONE YEAR after the date of Final Acceptance or such longer period of time as may be prescribed therein(the "Warranty Period"), all of which includes without limitation either correcting the defective Work, or removing and replacing it with nondefective Work, or paying all direct, indirect or consequential costs of such correction or removal and replacement, all as provided therein, or (b) City of Fayetteville shall fail to institute a lawsuit, action or other proceeding under this Bond before the expiration of three (3) months following the end of the Warranty Period. 0640 1 FURTHER PROVIDED, that (a) any changes, modifications, amendments, alterations or supplementations in or to the Contract, and Contract Documents or the Work, or the giving by City of Fayetteville of any extension of time for the performance of the Contract, or any other forbearance on the part of either City of Fayetteville or Principal to the other, shall not in any way release the Principal or Surety, or either of them, from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety of any of the foregoing being hereby waived, (b) in no event shall the aggregate liability of Surety exceed the amount set out herein, and (c) the rights and obligations hereof shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of Principal, Surety, City of Fayetteville and their respective heirs, legal representatives, partners, privies, successors and assigns, provided that nothing herein shall authorize the assignment of any such rights and obligations. Date of project final completion is . The bond shall be 50% of the final project value and shall effective for a period of ONE YEAR. The ONE YEAR Bond provided by the Principal and Surety does not change the TWO-YEAR warranty required of the equipment supplier B1ueInGreen, LLC. Executed on the day of 20 (Seal) Witness: ) Attest: ) (Seal) Surety END OF SECTION 0640 0640 2 L' ® RLI Insurance Company 9025 N. Lindbergh Dr. Peoria, IL 61615 P.O. Box 3967 Peoria, IL 61612-3967 Phone: 309-692-1000 Fax: 309-683-16 10 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS; — • •.-gymd–,k"XTUX7 MAINTENANCE BOND Bond No. SSB0429077 That We, of BlueinGreen LLC 0 W Research enter Blvd Fa etteville AR 72701 (hereinafter called the "Principal"), as Principal, and RLI Insurance Company Peoria Illinois, of as Surety, an illitransact business in the State rkanaa� corporation duly licensed to of _ A (hereinafter called the Surety„ ), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto Ci of Fa etteville AR 72701 the Obligee), in the sum of (hereinafter called Dollars ($1,780,825.00*****°), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we, the said Principal and the said Sure bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. ty, Sealed with our seals and dated this _ 3rd day of F hr iary O1 WHEREAS, the said Principal has heretofore entered into a contract with said Obligee dated 1 /2014 Su 1 ozone disinfections stem for City of Fa etteville AR Wastewater Treatment Plant. , for and; WHEREAS, the said Principal is required to guarantee the item/work installed under said contract, against defects in materials or workmanship which may develop during the period of 2 year(s) from the date of acceptance of the contract. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND IS SUCH, that if said Principal shall faithfully carry out and perform the said guarantee, and shall, on due notice, repair and make good at its own expense any and all defects in materials or workmanship in the said work which may develop during the period specified above or shall pay over, make good and reimburse to the said Obligee all direct loss and damage which said Obligee may sustain by reason of failure or default of said Principal so to do, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise shall remain in full force and effect. BlueinGreen LLC Principa By. RLI Insurance Company By:t iane Kerr► Attorney in Fact C0064212-50,0 tent D5991 SECTION 0700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. Definitions 2. Additional Instructions and Detail Drawings 3. Schedules, Reports and Records 4. Drawings and Specifications 5. Shop Drawings 6. Materials, Services and Facilities 7. Inspection and Testing 8. Substitutions 9. Patents 10. Surveys, Permits, and Regulations 11. Protection of Work, Property, and Persons 12. Supervision by Contractor 13. Changes in the Work 14. Changes in Contract Price 15. Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages 16. Correction of Work 17. Subsurface Conditions 18. Suspension of Work, Termination and Delay 19. Payments to Contractor 20. Acceptance of Final Payment as Release 21. Insurance 22. Contract Security 23. Assignments 24. Indemnification 25. Separate Contracts 26. Subcontracting 27. Engineer's Authority 28. Land and Rights -of -Way 29. Guaranty 30. Taxes 31. Excess Engineering Costs 32. Documents to be Kept on the Job Site 33. Prosecution of the Work 34. Sanitary Facilities 0700.doc 1. DEFINITIONS 1.1 Wherever used in the Contract Documents, the following terms shall have the meanings indicated which shall be applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: 1.2 ADDENDA - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Agreement which modify or interpret the Contract Documents, Drawings and Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1.3 BONDS - Performance and Payment Bonds, Warranty Bonds and other instruments of security, furnished by the Contractor and his surety in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER - A written order to the Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents, or authorizing an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time. 1.5 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - The contract, including Advertisement For Bids, Information For Bidders, Bid Form, Bid Bond, Agreement, Payment Bond, Performance Bond, Notice Of Award, Notice To Proceed, Change Order, Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda. 1.6 CONTRACT PRICE - The total monies payable to the Contractor under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 1.7 CONTRACT TIME - The number of calendar days stated in the Contract Documents for the completion of the Work. 1.8 CONTRACTOR - The person, firm or corporation with whom the City of Fayetteville has executed the Agreement. 1.9 DRAWINGS - The part of the Contract Documents which show the characteristics and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by the Engineer. 1.10 ENGINEER — The Engineering Department of the City of Fayetteville, or their authorized representative. 1.11 FIELD ORDER - A written order effecting a change in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, issued by the Engineer to the Contractor during construction. 1.12 OWNER — The City of Fayetteville. 1.13 PROVIDE — Furnish and install, complete in place, operating, tested and approved. 0700.doc 2 1. 14 PROJECT - The undertaking to be performed as provided in the Contract Documents. 1.15 PRODUCTS — The materials, systems, and equipment provided by the Contractor. 1.16 PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE - The authorized representative of the City of Fayetteville who is assigned to the Project site or any part thereof. 1.17 SHOP DRAWINGS - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures, schedules and other data which are prepared by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, Manufacturer, Supplier or Distributor, which illustrate how specific portions of the Work shall be fabricated or installed. 1.18 SPECIFICATIONS - A part of the Contract Documents consisting of written descriptions of a technical nature of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship. 1.19 SUBCONTRACTOR -An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. 1.20 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS - Modifications to General Conditions required by a Federal agency for participation in the Project and approved by the agency in writing prior to inclusion in the Contract Documents. 1.21 SUPPLIERS - Any person, supplier or organization who supplies materials or equipment for the Work, including that fabricated to a special design, but who does not perform labor at the site. 1.22 WORK - Produce and deliver the equipment, materials and services as required by the Contract Documents. 1.23 WRITTEN NOTICE - Any notice to any party of the Agreement relative to any part of this Agreement in writing and considered delivered and the service thereof completed, when posted by electronic mail or certified or registered mail to the said party at his last given address, or delivered in person to said party or his authorized representative on the Work. 2. ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND DETAIL DRAWINGS 2.1 The Contractor may be furnished additional instructions and detail drawings, by the Engineer, as necessary to carry out the Work required by the Contract Documents. 2.2 The additional drawings and instructions thus supplied will become a part of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall carry out the Work in accordance with the 0700.doc 3 additional detail drawings and instructions. 3. SCHEDULES, REPORTS AND RECORDS 3.1 The Contractor shall submit to the City of Fayetteville such schedule of quantities and costs, progress schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, records and other data as the City of Fayetteville may reasonably request concerning Work performed or to be performed. 4. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 4.1 The intent of the Drawings and Specifications is that the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and all incidental work necessary to complete the Project in an acceptable manner, ready for use, occupancy or operation by the City of Fayetteville. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement but not duplicate each other. An item of Work indicated in one and not the other shall be performed by the Contractor just as if it had been indicated in both. 4.2 Figure dimensions on Drawings shall govern over scale dimensions, and detailed Drawings shall govern over general Drawings. The Contractor shall not perform Work based on "scaled" measurements of Drawings, but shall obtain written instructions from the Engineer as to the dimensions to be used before proceeding with the Work. 4.3 Any discrepancies found between the Drawings and Specifications and site conditions or any inconsistencies or ambiguities in the Drawings or Specifications shall be immediately reported to the Engineer, in writing, who shall promptly correct such inconsistencies or ambiguities in writing. Work done by the Contractor after his discovery of such discrepancies, inconsistencies or ambiguities shall be done at the Contractor's risk. 4.4 The Specifications are written in imperative and abbreviated form. The imperative language is directed at the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Incomplete sentences shall be completed by inserting "shall," "the Contractor shall," "shall be:" and similar mandatory phrases by inference in the same manner as they are applied to notes on the Drawings. The words "shall be:" shall be supplied by inference where a colon () is used within sentences or phrases. Except as worded to the contrary, all indicated requirements shall be performed whether stated imperatively or otherwise. 4.5 Whenever the term "Work Included" is used as an article or paragraph heading in Part 1 of a Specification Section, it is merely a listing of the significant items described with the section and is not intended to "scope" the section or to imply a trade responsibility." 0700.doc 4.6 Whenever the words "approved," "satisfactory," "directed," "submitted," "inspected," or similar words or phrases are used in the Contract Documents, it shall be assumed that the term "Engineer or his representative" follows the verb as the object of the clause, such as "approved by the Engineer or his representative," or "submitted to the Engineer or his representative." 5. SHOP DRAWINGS 5.1 The Contractor shall provide Shop Drawings as may be necessary for the prosecution of the Work as required by the Contract Documents. The Engineer shall promptly review all Shop Drawings. The Engineer's approval of any Shop Drawing shall not release the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents. The approval of any Shop Drawings which substantially deviates from the requirement of the Contract Documents shall be evidenced by a Change Order. 5.2 When submitted for the Engineer's review, Shop Drawings shall bear the Contractor's certification that the Contractor has reviewed, checked and approved the Shop Drawings and that they are in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 5.3 Portions of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or sample submission shall not begin until the Shop Drawing or submission has been approved by the Engineer. A copy of each approved Shop Drawing and each approved sample shall be kept in good order by the Contractor at the site and shall be available to the Engineer. 6. MATERIALS, SERVICES AND FACILITIES 6.1 It is understood that, except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all equipment, materials and services. 6.2 Materials and equipment shall be so stored as to ensure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the Work. Stored materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work shall be located so as to facilitate prompt inspection. 6.3 Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer. 6.4 Materials, supplies and equipment shall be in accordance with samples submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 6.5 Materials, supplies or equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall not be purchased by the Contractor subject to a chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. 7. INSPECTION AND TESTING 0700.doc 5 7.1 All materials and equipment used in the construction of the Project shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with the requirements stated in the Contract Documents. 7.2 The Contractor shall provide at his expense the necessary testing and inspection services required by the Contract Documents, unless otherwise provided. 7.3 The City of Fayetteville shall provide all other inspection and testing services not required by the Contract Documents. 7.4 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved by someone other than the Contractor, the Contractor will give the Engineer timely notice of readiness. The Contractor will then furnish the Engineer the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. 7.5 Neither observations by the Engineer nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 7.6 The Engineer and his representatives will at all times have access to the Work. In addition, authorized representatives and agents of any participating Federal or State agency shall be permitted to inspect all work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials, and other relevant data and records during normal business hours and in the presence of the Contractor. The Contractor will provide proper facilities for such access and observation of the Work and also for any inspection, or testing thereof. 8. SUBSTITUTIONS 8.1 Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment is identified on the Drawings or Specifications by reference to brand name or catalogue number, it shall be understood that this is referenced for the purpose of defining the performance or other salient requirements and that other products of equal capacities, quality and function shall be considered. The Contractor may recommend the substitution of a material, article, or piece of equipment of equal substance and function for those referred to in the Contract Documents by reference to brand name or catalogue number, and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such material, article, or piece of equipment is of equal substance and function to that specified, the Engineer may approve its substitution and use by the Contractor. Any cost differential shall be deductible from the Contract Price and the Contract Documents shall be appropriately modified by Change Order. The Contractor warrants that if substitutes are approved, no major changes in the function or general design of the Project will result. Incidental changes or extra component parts required to accommodate the substitute will be made by the Contractor without a change in the Contract Price or 0700.doc 6 Contract Time. 9. PATENTS 9.1 The Contractor shall pay all applicable royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights by third parties and save the City of Fayetteville harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the City of Fayetteville shall be responsible for any such loss when particular process, design, or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless the Contractor promptly gives such information to the Engineer. 10. SURVEYS, PERMITS, REGULATIONS (NOT USED) 11. PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND PERSONS (NOT USED) 12. SUPERVISION BY CONTRACTOR (NOT USED) 13. CHANGES IN THE WORK 13.1 The City of Fayetteville may at any time, as the need arises, order changes within the scope of the Work without invalidating the Agreement. If such changes increase or decrease the amount due under the Contract Documents, or in the time required for performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment shall be authorized by Change Order. 13.2 The Engineer, also, may at any time, by issuing a Field Order, make changes in the details of the Work. The Contractor shall proceed with the performance of any changes in the Work so ordered by the Engineer unless the Contractor believes that such Field Order entitles him to a change in Contract Price or Time, or both, in which event the Contractor shall give the Engineer Written Notice thereof within fifteen (15) days after the receipt of the ordered change, and the Contractor shall not execute such changes pending the receipt of an executed Change Order or further instruction from the City of Fayetteville. 14. CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE 14.1 The Contract Price may be changed only by a Change Order. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be determined by one or more of the following methods in the order of precedence listed below: 14. 1.1 Unit prices previously approved. 0700.doc 14.1.2 An agreed lump sum. 14.1.3 The actual cost for labor, direct overhead, materials, supplies equipment, and other services necessary to complete the work. In addition there shall be added an amount to be agreed upon but not to exceed fifteen (15) percent of the actual cost of the Work to cover the cost of general overhead and profit. 14.2 The unit price of an item of Unit Price Work shall be subject to re-evaluation and adjustments under the following conditions: 14.2.1 If the total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to five (5) percent or more of the Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs by more than 25 percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 14.2.2 If there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and 14.2.3 If Contractor believes that it has incurred additional expense as a result thereof; or 14.2.4 If Engineer believes that the quantity variation entitle it to an adjustment in the Unit Price, either Engineer or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 13, if the parties are unable to agree as to the effect of any such variations in the quantity of Unit Price Work performed. 15. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES (NOT USED) 16. CORRECTION OF WORK 16.1 The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all Work rejected by the Engineer for failure to comply with the Contract Documents, whether incorporated in the construction or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re -execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and without expense to the City of Fayetteville and shall bear the expense of making good all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. 16.2 All removal and replacement Work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not take action to remove such rejected Work within ten (10) days after receipt of Written Notice, the City of Fayetteville may remove such Work and store the materials at the expense of the Contractor. 17. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS (NOT USED) 0700.doc 18. SUSPENSION OF WORK, TERMINATION AND DELAY 18.1 The City of Fayetteville may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety days or such further time as agreed upon by the Contractor, by Written Notice to the Contractor and the Engineer which notice shall fix the date on which Work shall be resumed. The Contractor will resume that Work on the date so fixed. The Contractor will be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension. 18.2 If the Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, or if the Contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for the Contractor or for any of his property, or if the Contractor files a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or to reorganize under the bankruptcy or applicable laws, or if the Contractor repeatedly fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, or if the Contractor repeatedly fails to make prompt payments to Subcontractors for labor, material or equipment or if the Contractor disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public body having jurisdiction of the Work or if the Contractor disregards the authority of the Engineer, or if the Contractor otherwise violates any provision of the Contract Documents, then the City of Fayetteville may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety a minimum of ten (10) days from delivery of a Written Notice, terminate the services of the Contractor and take possession of the Project and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor, and finish the Work by whatever method the City of Fayetteville may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and indirect costs of completing the Project, including compensation for additional professional services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor will pay the difference to the City of Fayetteville. Such costs incurred by the City of Fayetteville will be determined by the Engineer and incorporated in a Change Order. 18.3 Where the Contractor's services have been so terminated by the City of Fayetteville, said termination shall not affect any right of the City of Fayetteville against the Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of monies by the City of Fayetteville due the Contractor will not release the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. 18.4 After ten (10) days from delivery of a Written Notice to the Contractor and the Engineer, the City of Fayetteville may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, elect to abandon the Project and terminate the Contract. In such case, the Contractor shall be paid for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable profit. 0700.doc 9 18.5 If, through no act or fault of the Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the City of Fayetteville or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Engineer fails to act on any request for payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the City of Fayetteville fails to pay the Contractor substantially the sum approved by the Engineer or awarded by arbitrators within thirty (3 0) days of its approval and presentation, then the Contractor may, after ten (10) days from delivery of a Written Notice to the City of Fayetteville and the Engineer, terminate the Contract and recover from the City of Fayetteville payment for all Work executed and all expenses sustained. In addition and in lieu of terminating the Contract, if the Engineer has failed to act on a request for payment or if the City of Fayetteville has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, the Contractor may upon ten (10) days notice to the City of Fayetteville and the Engineer stop the Work until the Contractor has been paid all amounts then due, in which event and upon resumption of the Work, Change Orders shall be issued for adjusting the Contract Price or extending the Contract Time or both to compensate for the costs and delays attributable to the stoppage of the Work. 18.6 If the performance of all or any portion of the Work is suspended, delayed, or interrupted as a result of a failure of the City of Fayetteville or Engineer to act within the time specified in the Contract Documents, or if no time is specified, within a reasonable time, an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, shall be made by Change Order to compensate the Contractor for the costs and delays necessarily caused by the failure of the City of Fayetteville or Engineer. 19. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR (NOT USED) 20. ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT AS RELEASE 20.1 The Acceptance by the Contractor of final payment shall be and shall operate as a release to the City of Fayetteville of all claims and all liability to the Contractor other than claims in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted by the Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with this Work and for every act and neglect of the City of Fayetteville and others relating to or arising out of this Work. Any payment, however, final or otherwise, shall not release the Contractor or his sureties from any obligations under the Contract Documents or the Performance Bond and Payment Bonds and Warranty Bond. 21. INSURANCE (NOT USED) 22. CONTRACT SECURITY 22.1 The Contractor shall furnish the City of Fayetteville with a Performance and Payment Bond in penal sums equal to the amount of the Contract Price, conditioned upon the performance by the Contractor of all undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of the Contract Documents, and upon the prompt payment by the Contractor to all persons supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the 0700.doc 10 Work provided by the Contract Documents. Such Bonds shall be executed by the Contractor and a corporate bonding company licensed to transact such business in the state in which the Work is to be performed and named on the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds" as published in the Treasury Department Circular Number 570. The expense of these Bonds shall be borne by the Contractor. If at any time a surety on any such bond is declared a bankrupt or loses its right to do business in the state in which the Work is to be performed or is removed from the list of Surety Companies accepted on Federal Bonds, Contractor shall within ten (10) days after notice from the City of Fayetteville to do so, substitute an acceptable Bond (or Bonds) in such form and sum and signed by such other surety or sureties as may be satisfactory to the City of Fayetteville. The premiums on such Bond shall be paid by the Contractor. No further payments shall be deemed due nor shall be made until the new surety or sureties have furnished an acceptable Bond to the City of Fayetteville. 22.2 At the time of Final Acceptance of the Work by the City of Fayetteville, the Contractor shall furnish to the City of Fayetteville a Warranty Bond in the amount of fifty (50) percent of the amount of the final Contract Price. The Warranty Bond shall guarantee the Work in accordance with Article 29 of the General Conditions ONE YEAR from the date of Final Payment or as otherwise specified and is in addition to the TWO YEAR WARRANTY furnished by B1uelnGreen, LLC. It shall be on the form shown in Section 0640 - Warranty Bond. 23. ASSIGNMENTS 23.1 Neither the Contractor nor the City of Fayetteville shall sell, transfer, assign or otherwise dispose of the Contract or any portion thereof, or of his right, title or interest therein, or his obligations thereunder, without consent of the other party. 24. INDEMNIFICATION 24.1 The Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the City of Fayetteville and the Engineer and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses including attorneys' fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claims, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom; and is caused in whole or in part by any negligent or willful act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. 24.2 In any and all claims against the City of Fayetteville or the Engineer, or any of their agents or employees, by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation shall not be limited in any way by any 0700.doc 11 limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefits acts. 24.3 The obligation of the Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the Engineer, his agents or employees arising out of the preparation or approval of maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or Specifications, or the giving of or failure to give directions or instructions by the Engineer, or his agents, or employees, provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of injury or damage. 25. SEPARATE CONTRACTS 25.1 The City of Fayetteville reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this Project. The Contractor shall afford other Contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their Work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his Work with theirs. If the proper execution or results of any part of the Contractor's Work depends upon the Work of any other Contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any defects in such Work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. 25.2 The City of Fayetteville may perform additional Work related to the Project, or the City of Fayetteville may let other contracts containing provisions similar to these. The Contractor will afford the other Contractors who are parties to such Contracts (or the City of Fayetteville, if the City of Fayetteville is performing the additional Work himself), reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of Work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his Work with theirs. 25.3 If the performance of additional Work by other Contractors or the City of Fayetteville is not noted in the Contract Documents prior to the execution of the Contract, written notice thereof shall be given to the Contractor prior to starting any such additional Work. If the Contractor believes that the performance of such additional Work by the City of Fayetteville or others involves him in additional expense or entitles him to an extension of the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided in Section 14. 26. SUBCONTRACTING 26.1 Nothing contained in this Contract shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor and the City of Fayetteville. 27. ENGINEERS AUTHORITY 0700.doc 12 27.1 The Engineer shall act as the City of Fayetteville's representative during the construction period. The Engineer shall decide questions which may arise as to quality and acceptability of materials furnished and Work performed. The Engineer shall interpret the intent of the Contract Documents in a fair and unbiased manner. The Engineer will make visits to the site and determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. 27.2 The Contractor will be held strictly to the intent of the Contract Documents in regard to the quality of materials, workmanship and execution of the Work. Inspections may be made at the factory or fabrication plant of the source of material supply. 27.3 The Engineer will not be responsible for the construction means, controls, techniques, sequences, or construction safety. 27.4 The Engineer shall promptly make decisions relative to interpretation of the Contract Documents. 27.5 The Engineer will have authority to determine the actual quantities and classifications of items of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor, and the written decisions of Engineer on such matters will be final, binding on Engineer and Contractor and not subject to appeal (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions). 28. LAND AND RIGHTS-O&WAY (NOT USED) 29. GUARANTY 29.1 If within two years after the date of Final Payment or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Document, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to City of Fayetteville and in accordance with City of Fayetteville's written instructions, either correct such defective Work, or if it has been rejected by City of Fayetteville, remove it from the site and replace it with non -defective Work. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, City of Fayetteville may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replace, and all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such correction, removal and replacement (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, surveyors, and other professionals) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Acceptance of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Written Agreement. 30. TAXES 0700.doc 13 30.1 The City of Fayetteville will pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required by the law of the place where the Work is performed. 31. EXCESS ENGINEERING COSTS (NOT USED) 32. DOCUMENTS TO BE KEPT ON THE JOB SITE (NOT USED) 33. PROSECUTION OF THE WORK (NOT USED) 34. SANITARY FACILITIES (NOT USED) 0700.doc 14 (THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK) END OF SECTION 0700 0700.doc 15 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 399884C.GN1 A. This section summarizes the Work covered in detail in the Contract Documents. B. Owner: The City of Fayetteville, Arkansas, 113 West Mountain Street, Fayetteville, AR 72701 is contracting for work described in the Contract Documents. 1. Contract Identification: Paul R. Noland WWTP — Ozone Disinfection Facilities. 2. Location: Fayetteville, Arkansas. C. Engineer: CH2MHILL. 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Contract includes but is not limited to Work that will provide the Owner with a primary means to disinfect treated wastewater at the Paul R. Noland WWTP in compliance with current regulatory requirements and includes furnishing and installing all equipment comprising the ozone disinfection system where shown and as specified and includes all piping, valves, instrumentation and control equipment and includes all heating, ventilating and structural modifications within the existing Chlorination Building and inclusive of all piping, valves, equipment, instrumentation and control equipment and structural modifications at the existing Chlorine Contact Basin and includes associated site work and electrical improvements as shown and specified. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. During the construction period, Contractor shall have use of the plant premises for execution of the Work. Use of premises is limited by Owner's right to perform duties and functions as stated in the General Conditions and in this Section. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 SUMMARY OF WORK 011100-1 399884C.GN1 1.04 OWNER'S USE OF PREMISES A. The Owner reserves the right to occupy completed areas of the Contract prior to Substantial Completion provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construction sequence shall be determined by Contractor subject to Owner's need for continuous operation of existing facilities and subject to the requirements as indicated or specified. B. Contractor shall exercise caution and schedule operations to ensure that functioning of present facilities will not be disrupted. Shutdown of Owner's operating facilities to perform the Work shall be held to a minimum length of time and shall be coordinated with Owner who shall have control over the timing and schedule of such shutdowns. 1.06 PRE -PURCHASED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. The Owner has entered into an agreement with the Ozone Disinfection Facilities System Supplier to pre -purchase the ozone disinfection facilities equipment specified herein in Section 44 42 56.18, Ozone Disinfection System and arrange for this equipment to be shipped to the jobsite. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, unloading and properly storing the equipment in accordance with written instructions provided by the System Supplier and installing the ozone disinfection system equipment and the reminder of the Work shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. C. The Owner shall coordinate equipment delivery to the jobsite with the Contractor so as not to impact the Contractor's work schedule. 1.07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, appurtenances, operation and maintenance manuals, training, startup, testing and performance demonstration services necessary to perform the Work required at the lump sum and unit prices for the items listed in the Agreement (Section 0500). Such lump sum and unit prices shall represent full compensation for such work. B. All Work shown on the Contract Drawings and specified in the Contract Documents shall be included in the Bid Form (Section 0310). SUMMARY OF WORK PW/WBG/399884 01 1100-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 1.08 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS A. After execution of Agreement, Contractor will be furnished at no cost, three (3) sets of contract Documents consisting of full-size Contract Drawings and the Project Manual. These copies are in addition to those used in preparation of the Agreement. B. Additional copies of Contract Documents may be obtained from the Engineer upon request of Contractor and approval of Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 SUMMARY OF WORK 011100-3 399884C.GN1 SECTION 0129 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Schedule of Values: Submit on Contractor's standard form. 2. Application for Payment. 3. Final Application for Payment. 1.02 CASH ALLOWANCES (NOT USED) 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Prepare a separate Schedule of Values for each schedule of the Work under the Agreement. B. Upon request of Engineer, provide documentation to support the accuracy of the Schedule of Values. C. Unit Price Work: Reflect unit price quantity and price breakdown from conformed Bid Form. D. Lump Sum Work: 1. List bonds and insurance premiums, mobilization, demobilization, preliminary and detailed progress schedule preparation, equipment testing, facility startup, and contract closeout separately. 2. Break down by Division 2 through 49 with appropriate subdivision of each Specification. E. An unbalanced or front-end loaded schedule will not be acceptable. F. Summation of the complete Schedule of Values representing all the Work shall equal the Contract Price. G. Submit Schedule of Values in a spreadsheet format compatible with latest version of Excel. 1.04 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Comply with Section 0700, General Conditions. Where discrepancies exist between this section, and Section 0700, General Conditions shall govern. PW/WBG/399884 PAYMENT PROCEDURES JANUARY 12, 2015 012900-1 399884C.GN1 B. Transmittal Summary Form: Attach one Summary Form with each detailed Application for Payment for each schedule and include Request for Payment of Materials and Equipment on Hand as applicable. Execute certification by authorized officer of Contractor. C. Use detailed Application for Payment Form suitable to Engineer. D. Provide separate form for each schedule as applicable. E. Include accepted Schedule of Values for each schedule or portion of lump sum Work and the unit price breakdown for the Work to be paid on a unit priced basis. F. Include separate line item for each Change Order and Work Change Directive executed prior to date of submission. Provide further breakdown of such as requested by Engineer. G. Preparation: 1. Round values to nearest dollar. 2. Submit Application for Payment, including a Transmittal Summary Form and detailed Application for Payment Form(s) for each schedule as applicable, a listing of materials on hand for each schedule as applicable, and such supporting data as may be requested by Engineer. 1.05 MEASUREMENT—GENERAL A. Weighing, measuring, and metering devices used to measure quantity of materials for Work shall be suitable for purpose intended and conform to tolerances and specifications as specified in National Institute of Standards and Technology, Handbook 44. B. Whenever pay quantities of material are determined by weight, material shall be weighed on scales furnished by Contractor and certified accurate by state agency responsible. Weight or load slip shall be obtained from weigher and delivered to Owner's representative at point of delivery of material. C. If material is shipped by rail, car weights will be accepted provided that actual weight of material only will be paid for and not minimum car weight used for assessing freight tariff, and provided further that car weights will not be acceptable for material to be passed through mixing plants. D. Vehicles used to haul material being paid for by weight shall be weighed empty daily and at such additional times as required by Engineer. Each vehicle shall bear a plainly legible identification mark. PAYMENT PROCEDURES PW/WBG/399884 012900-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 E. Materials that are specified for measurement by the cubic yard measured in the vehicle shall be hauled in vehicles of such type and size that actual contents may be readily and accurately determined. Unless all vehicles are of uniform capacity, each vehicle must bear a plainly legible identification mark indicating its water level capacity. Vehicles shall be loaded to at least their water level capacity. Loads hauled in vehicles not meeting above requirements or loads of a quantity less than the capacity of the vehicle, measured after being leveled off as above provided, will be subject to rejection, and no compensation will be allowed for such material. F. Units of measure shown on Bid Form shall be as follows, unless specified otherwise. Item Method of Measurement CY Cubic Yard—Field Measure by Engineer within limits specified or shown EA Each—Field Count by Engineer GAL Gallon—Field Measure by Engineer HR Hour LB Pound(s)—Weight Measure by Scale LF Linear Foot—Field Measure by Engineer SF Square Foot SY Square Yard TON Ton—Weight Measure by Scale (2,000 pounds) 1.06 PAYMENT A. Payment for all Lump Sum Work shown or specified in Contract Documents is included in the Contract Price. Payment will be based on a percentage complete basis for each line item of the accepted Schedule of Values. B. Payment for Lump Sum Work covers all Work specified or shown within the limits or Specification sections as follows: All Work shown on Drawings and in Specifications. C. Payment for unit price items covers all the labor, materials, and services necessary to furnish and install the items. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-3 399884C.GN1 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR UNUSED PRODUCTS A. Payment will not be made for following: 1. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material. 2. Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in manner not called for under Contract Documents. 3. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been placed by reason of failure of Contractor to conform to provisions of Contract Documents. 4. Material not unloaded from transporting vehicle. 5. Defective Work not accepted by Owner. 6. Material remaining on hand after completion of Work. 1.08 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Partial Payment: No partial payments will be made for materials and equipment delivered or stored unless Shop Drawings and preliminary operation and maintenance data is acceptable to Engineer. B. Final Payment: Will be made only for products incorporated in Work; remaining products, for which partial payments have been made, shall revert to Contractor unless otherwise agreed, and partial payments made for those items will be deducted from final payment. 1.09 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR UNDELIVERED, PROJECT -SPECIFIC MANUFACTURED OR FABRICATED EQUIPMENT A. Notwithstanding above provisions, partial payments for undelivered (not yet delivered to Site or not stored in the vicinity of Site) products specifically manufactured for this Project, excluding off the shelf or catalog items, will be made for products listed below when all following conditions exist: 1. Partial payment request is supported by written acknowledgment from Suppliers that invoice requirements have been met. 2. Equipment is adequately insured, maintained, stored, and protected by appropriate security measures. 3. Each equipment item is clearly marked and segregated from other items to permit inventory and accountability. 4. Authorization has been provided for access to storage Site for Engineer and Owner. 5. Equipment meets applicable Specifications of these Contract Documents. PAYMENT PROCEDURES PW/WBG/399884 012900-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 B. Payment of 15 percent of manufacturer's quoted price for undelivered, Project -specific manufactured equipment will be made following Shop Drawing approval. Thereafter, monthly payments will be made based on progress of fabrication as determined by Engineer, but in no case will total of payments prior to delivery exceed 50 percent of manufacturer's quoted price. C. Failure of Contractor to continue compliance with above requirements shall give cause for Owner to withhold payments made for such equipment from future partial payments. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-5 399884C.GN1 SECTION 01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 FACILITY OPERATIONS A. Continuous operation of Owner's facilities is of critical importance. Schedule and conduct activities to enable existing facilities to operate continuously, unless otherwise specified. B. Perform Work continuously during critical connections and changeovers, and as required to prevent interruption of Owner's operations. C. When necessary, plan, design, and provide various temporary services, utilities, connections, temporary piping and heating, access, and similar items to maintain continuous operations of Owner's facility. D. Do not close lines, open or close valves, or take other action which would affect the operation of existing systems, except as specifically required by the Contract Documents and after authorization by Owner and Engineer. Such authorization will be considered within 48 hours after receipt of Contractor's written request. E. Existing plant facilities shall remain in operation except as noted below: Temporary removal of existing chlorination contact basin from service shall be permitted as required to perform Work as shown and specified. F. Process or Facility Shutdown: 1. The following may be shutdown at some time during the Work: The existing Contact Basin may be temporarily removed from service as required to perform work as shown and specified. 2. Provide 7 days advance written request for approval of need to shut down a process or facility to Owner and Engineer. 3. Power outages will be considered upon 48 hours written request to Owner and Engineer. Describe the reason, anticipated length of time, and areas affected by the outage. Provide temporary provisions for continuous power supply to critical facility components. G. Install and maintain bypass facilities and temporary connections as required to keep Owner's treatment operations on line. Sequences other than those specified or indicated on the Drawings will be considered upon written request to Owner and Engineer, provided they afford equivalent continuity of operations. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PROJECT COORDINATION 013113-1 399884C.GN1 H. Do not proceed with Work affecting a facility's operation without obtaining Owner's and Engineer's advance approval of the need for and duration of such Work. I. Relocation of Existing Facilities: 1. During construction, it is expected that minor relocations of Work will be necessary. 2. Provide complete relocation of existing structures and Underground Facilities, including piping, utilities, equipment, structures, electrical conduit wiring, electrical duct bank, and other necessary items. 3. Use only new materials for relocated facility. Match materials of existing facility, unless otherwise shown or specified. 4. Perform relocations to minimize downtime of existing facilities. 5. Install new portions of existing facilities in their relocated position prior to removal of existing facilities, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer. 6. Periodic reexamination shall be jointly performed to include, but not limited to, cracks in structures, settlement, leakage, and similar conditions. 1.02 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: 1. Photographically document all phases of the Project including preconstruction, construction progress, and post -construction. 2. Engineer shall have right to select subject matter and vantage point from which photographs are to be taken. B. Preconstruction and Post -Construction: 1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is started, and again upon issuance of Substantial Completion, take a minimum of 48 photographs of Site and property adjacent to perimeter of Site. 2. Particular emphasis shall be directed to structures both inside and outside the Site. 3. Format: Digital, minimum resolution of 2176 by 3264. C. Construction Progress Photos: 1. Photographically demonstrate progress of construction, showing every aspect of Site and adjacent properties as well as interior and exterior of new or impacted structures. 2. Monthly: Take 50 photographs using digital, minimum resolution of 2176 by 3264. PROJECT COORDINATION PW/WBG/399884 0131 13-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 D. Documentation: 1. Digital Images: a. Electronic image shall have date taken embedded into image. b. Archive using a photo management system that provides listing of photographs including date, keyword description, and direction of photograph. 1.03 REFERENCE POINTS AND SURVEYS A. Owner's Responsibilities: Establish horizontal reference points or coordinate system with bench marks and reference points for Contractor's use as necessary to lay out Work. B. Location and elevation of bench marks, if any, are shown on Drawings. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Provide additional survey and layout required to layout the Work. 2. Notify Engineer at least 3 working days in advance of time when grade and line to be provided by Owner will be needed. 3. Check and establish exact location of existing facilities prior to construction of new facilities and any connections thereto. 4. In event of discrepancy in data or staking provided by Owner, request clarification before proceeding with Work. 5. Maintain complete accurate log of survey work as it progresses as a Record Document. 6. On request of Engineer, submit documentation. 7. Provide competent employee(s), tools, stakes, and other equipment and materials as Engineer may require to: a. Check layout, survey, and measurement work performed by others. b. Measure quantities for payment purposes. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGE OF MATERIALS A. Meet with Engineer prior to starting to performing any equipment demolition or piping designated to be salvaged. Engineer will indicate locations where equipment is to be disconnected and stored. B. Provide new or repair damaged equipment or material specified or indicated to be salvaged. Clean and protect equipment from dust, dirt, natural elements, and store as directed. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PROJECT COORDINATION 013113-3 399884C.GN1 3.02 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PATCHING A. Cut, fit, adjust, or patch Work and work of others, including excavation and backfill as required, to make Work complete. B. Obtain prior written authorization of Engineer before commencing Work to cut or otherwise alter: 1. Structural or reinforcing steel, structural column or beam, elevated slab, trusses, or other structural member. 2. Weather -resistant or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Work of others. C. Refinish surfaces to provide an even finish. 1. Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection. 2. Refinish entire assemblies. 3. Finish restored surfaces to such planes, shapes, and textures that no transition between existing work and the Work is evident in finished surfaces. D. Restore existing work, Underground Facilities, and surfaces that are to remain in completed Work including concrete -embedded piping, conduit, and other utilities as specified and as shown on Drawings. E. Make restorations with new materials and appropriate methods as specified for new Work of similar nature; if not specified, use recommended practice of manufacturer or appropriate trade association. F. Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces and fill voids. G. Remove specimens of installed Work for testing when requested by Engineer. END OF SECTION PROJECT COORDINATION PW/WBG/399884 0131 13-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL 399884C.GN1 A. Engineer shall schedule physical arrangements for meetings throughout progress of the Work, prepare meeting agenda with regular participant input and distribute with written notice of each meeting, preside at meetings, record minutes to include significant proceedings and decisions, and reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 7 days after each meeting to participants and parties affected by meeting decisions. 1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Contractor shall be prepared to discuss the following subjects, as a minimum: 1. Required schedules. 2. Status of Bonds and insurance. 3. Sequencing of critical path work items. 4. Progress payment procedures. 5. Project changes and clarification procedures. 6. Use of Site, access, office and storage areas, security and temporary facilities. 7. Major product delivery and priorities. 8. Contractor's safety plan and representative. B. Attendees will include: 1. Owner's representatives. 2. Contractor's office representative. 3. Contractor's resident superintendent. 4. Contractor's quality control representative. 5. Subcontractors' representatives whom Contractor may desire or Engineer may request to attend. 6. Engineer's representatives. 7. Others as appropriate. 1.03 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULES REVIEW MEETING A. As set forth in Section 0700, General Conditions and Section 0132 00, Construction Progress Documentation. PW/WBG/399884 PROJECT MEETINGS JANUARY 12, 2015 0131 19-1 399884C.GN1 1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Engineer will schedule regular progress meetings at Site, conducted monthly to review the Work progress, Progress Schedule, Schedule of Submittals, Application for Payment, contract modifications, and other matters needing discussion and resolution. B. Attendees will include: 1. Owner's representative(s), as appropriate. 2. Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers, as appropriate. 3. Engineer's representative(s). 4. Others as appropriate. 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL MEETINGS A. Scheduled by Engineer as necessary to review test and inspection reports, and other matters relating to quality control of the Work. B. Attendees will include: 1. Contractor. 2. Contractor's designated quality control representative. 3. Ozone Disinfection System Supplier, as necessary. 4. Engineer's representatives. 1.06 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Engineer will schedule meetings as required at Site to review specific requirements of PICS Work. B. Attendees will include: 1. Contractor. 2. Owner. 3. Ozone Disinfection System Supplier. 4. Engineer's representatives. 1.07 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual Specification sections or as arranged by Engineer or Contractor, convene at Site prior to commencing the Work of that section. B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, the Work of that section. PROJECT MEETINGS PW/WBG/399884 013119-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Notify Engineer 5 days in advance of meeting date. D. Provide suggested agenda to Engineer to include reviewing conditions of installation, preparation and installation or application procedures, and coordination with related Work and work of others. 1.08 FACILITY STARTUP MEETINGS A. Schedule and attend facility startup meetings. The first of such meetings shall be held prior to submitting a startup schedule and testing plan and shall include preliminary discussions regarding such plan. B. Agenda items shall include, but not be limited to, content of the startup schedule and testing plan, including procedures to be used, coordination needed between various parties in attendance, and potential problems associated with startup. C. Attendees will include: 1. Contractor. 2. Contractor's designated quality control representative. 3. Subcontractors and equipment manufacturer's representatives whom Contractor deems to be directly involved in facility startup. 4. Engineer's representatives. 5. Owner's operations personnel. 6. Others as required by Contract Documents or as deemed necessary by Contractor. 1.09 OTHER MEETINGS A. In accordance with Contract Documents and as may be required by Owner and Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 PROJECT MEETINGS JANUARY 12, 2015 013119-3 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS 399884C.GN1 A. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by Contractor that requires Engineer's approval. B. Deferred Submittal: Information submitted by Contractor, if any, for portions of design that are to be submitted to permitting agency for approval prior to installation of that portion of the Work, along with Engineer's review documentation that submittal has been found to be in general conformance with Project's design. C. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by Contractor that requires Engineer's review and determination that submitted information is in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract. 1.02 PROCEDURES A. Direct submittals to Engineer, unless specified otherwise. B. Electronic Submittals: Submittals may be made in electronic format. 1. Each submittal shall be an electronic file in Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF). Use the latest version available at time of execution of the Agreement. 2. Electronic files that contain more than 10 pages in PDF format shall contain internal bookmarking from an index page to major sections of the document. 3. PDF files shall be set to open "Bookmarks and Page" view. 4. Add general information to each PDF file, including title, subject, author, and keywords. 5. PDF files shall be set up to print legibly at 8.5 -inch by 11 -inch, 11 -inch by 17 -inch, or 22 -inch by 34 -inch. No other paper sizes will be accepted. 6. Submit new electronic files for each resubmittal. 7. Include a copy of the Transmittal of Contractor's Submittal form, located at end of section, with each electronic file. 8. Engineer will reject submittal that is not electronically submitted, unless specifically accepted. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-1 399884C.GN1 9. Provide Engineer with authorization to reproduce and distribute each file as many times as necessary for Project documentation. 10. Detailed procedures for handling electronic submittals will be discussed at the preconstruction conference. C. Transmittal of Submittal: Contractor shall: a. Review each submittal and check for compliance with Contract Documents. b. Stamp each submittal with uniform approval stamp before submitting to Engineer. 1) Stamp to include Project name, submittal number, Specification number, Contractor's reviewer name, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with Contract Documents. 2) Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. 2. Complete, sign, and transmit with each submittal package, one Transmittal of Contractor's Submittal form in format approved by Engineer. 3. Identify each submittal with the following: a. Numbering and Tracking System: 1) Sequentially number each submittal. 2) Resubmission of submittal shall have original number with sequential alphabetic suffix. b. Specification section and paragraph to which submittal applies. C. Project title and Engineer's project number. d. Date of transmittal. e. Names of Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier, and manufacturer as appropriate. 4. Identify and describe each deviation or variation from Contract Documents. D. Format: 1. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of Contract Documents. 2. Package submittal information by individual specification section. Do not combine different specification sections together in submittal package, unless otherwise directed in specification. 3. Present in a clear and thorough manner and in sufficient detail to show kind, size, arrangement, and function of components, materials, and devices, and compliance with Contract Documents. 4. Index with labeled tab dividers in orderly manner. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/399884 013300-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 E. Timeliness: Schedule and submit in accordance Schedule of Submittals, and requirements of individual specification sections. F. Processing Time: 1. Time for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. 2. Engineer will act upon Contractor's submittal and transmit response to Contractor not later than 14 days after receipt, unless otherwise specified. 3. Resubmittals will be subject to same review time. 4. No adjustment of Contract Times or Price will be allowed as a result of delays in progress of Work caused by rejection and subsequent resubmittals. G. Resubmittals: Clearly identify each correction or change made. H. Incomplete Submittals: 1. Engineer will return entire submittal for Contractor's revision if preliminary review deems it incomplete. 2. When any of the following are missing, submittal will be deemed incomplete: a. Contractor's review stamp; completed and signed. b. Transmittal of Contractor's Submittal; completed and signed. C. Insufficient number of copies. I. Submittals not required by Contract Documents: 1. Will not be reviewed and will be returned stamped "Not Subject to Review." 2. Engineer will keep one copy and return submittal to Contractor. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual specification sections. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Copies: Five. 2. Identify and Indicate: a. Applicable Contract Drawing and Detail number, products, units and assemblies, and system or equipment identification or tag numbers. b. Equipment and Component Title: Identical to title shown on Drawings. PW/WBG/399884 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JANUARY 12, 2015 013300-3 399884C.GN 1 C. Critical field dimensions and relationships to other critical features of Work. Note dimensions established by field measurement. d. Project -specific information drawn accurately to scale. 3. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams as follows: a. Modify to delete information that is not applicable to the Work. b. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 4. Product Data: Provide as specified in individual Specifications. 5. Deferred Submittal: See Drawings for list of deferred submittals. a. Contractor -design drawings and product data related to permanent construction. 1) Written and graphic information. 2) Drawings. 3) Cut sheets. 4) Data sheets. 5) Action item submittals requested in individual specification section. b. Prior to installation of indicated structural or nonstructural element, equipment, distribution system, or component or its anchorage, submit required supporting data and drawings for review and acceptance by Engineer. 6. Foreign Manufacturers: When proposed, include names and addresses of at least two companies that maintain technical service representatives close to Project. C. Samples: 1. Copies: Two, unless otherwise specified in individual Specifications. 2. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of quality. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Manufacturer name. b. Model number. C. Material. d. Sample source. 3. Manufacturer's Color Chart: Units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 4. Full-size Samples: a. Size as indicated in individual specification section. b. Prepared from same materials to be used for the Work. C. Cured and finished in manner specified. d. Physically identical with product proposed for use. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/399884 013300-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 D. Action Submittal Dispositions: Engineer will review, comment, stamp, and distribute as noted: Approved: a. Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal. b. Distribution: 1) One copy furnished Owner. 2) One copy furnished Resident Project Representative. 3) One copy retained in Engineer's file. 4) Remaining copies returned to Contractor appropriately annotated. 2. Approved as Noted: a. Contractor may incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal, in accordance with Engineer's notations. b. Distribution: 1) One copy furnished Owner. 2) One copy furnished Resident Project Representative. 3) One copy retained in Engineer's file. 4) Remaining copies returned to Contractor appropriately annotated. 3. Partial Approval, Resubmit as Noted: a. Make corrections or obtain missing portions, and resubmit. b. Except for portions indicated, Contractor may begin to incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal, in accordance with Engineer's notations. C. Distribution: 1) One copy furnished Owner. 2) One copy furnished Resident Project Representative. 3) One copy retained in Engineer's file. 4) Remaining copies returned to Contractor appropriately annotated. 4. Revise and Resubmit: a. Contractor may not incorporate product(s) or implement Work covered by submittal. b. Distribution: 1) One copy furnished Resident Project Representative. 2) One copy retained in Engineer's file. 3) Remaining copies returned to Contractor appropriately annotated. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-5 399884C.GN1 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Copies: Submit three copies, unless otherwise indicated in individual specification section. 2. Refer to individual specification sections for specific submittal requirements. 3. Engineer will review each submittal. If submittal meets conditions of the Contract, Engineer will forward copy to appropriate parties. If Engineer determines submittal does not meet conditions of the Contract and is therefore considered unacceptable, Engineer will retain one copy and return remaining copy with review comments to Contractor, and require that submittal be corrected and resubmitted. B. Certificates: 1. General: a. Provide notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. b. Signed by officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 2. Welding: In accordance with individual specification sections. 3. Installer: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying installer complies with requirements as specified in individual specification section. 4. Material Test: Prepared by qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. 5. Certificates of Successful Testing or Inspection: Submit when testing or inspection is required by Laws and Regulations or governing agency or specified in individual specification sections. 6. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation: In accordance with Section 0143 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. C. Construction Photographs: In accordance with Section 0131 13, Project Coordination, and as may otherwise be required in Contract Documents. D. Closeout Submittals: In accordance with Section 0177 00, Closeout Procedures. E. Contractor -design Data (related to temporary construction): 1. Written and graphic information. 2. List of assumptions. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/399884 013300-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. List of performance and design criteria. 4. Summary of loads or load diagram, if applicable. 5. Calculations. 6. List of applicable codes and regulations. 7. Name and version of software. 8. Information requested in individual specification section. F. Deferred Submittals: See Drawings for list of deferred submittals. 1. Contractor -design data related to permanent construction: a. List of assumptions. b. List of performance and design criteria. C. Summary of loads or load diagram, if applicable. d. Calculations. e. List of applicable codes and regulations. f. Name and version of design software. g. Factory test results. h. Informational submittals requested in individual specification section. 2. Prior to installation of indicated structural or nonstructural element, equipment, distribution system, or component or its anchorage, submit calculations and test results of Contractor -designed components for review by Engineer. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures in accordance with individual specification section. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: As required in Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. I. Payment: 1. Application for Payment: In accordance with Section 0129 00, Payment Procedures. 2. Schedule of Values: In accordance with Section 0129 00, Payment Procedures. J. Schedules: 1. Schedule of Submittals: Prepare separately or in combination with Progress Schedule as specified in Section 0132 00, Construction Progress Documentation. a. Show for each, at a minimum, the following: 1) Specification section number. PW/WBG/399884 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JANUARY 12, 2015 01 3300-7 399884C.GN1 2) Identification by numbering and tracking system as specified under Paragraph Transmittal of Submittal. 3) Estimated date of submission to Engineer, including reviewing and processing time. b. On a monthly basis, submit updated Schedule of Submittals to Engineer if changes have occurred or resubmittals are required. 2. Progress Schedules: In accordance with Section 0132 00, Construction Progress Documentation. K. Special Guarantee: Supplier's written guarantee as required in individual specification sections. L. Statement of Qualification: Evidence of qualification, certification, or registration as required in Contract Documents to verify qualifications of professional land surveyor, engineer, materials testing laboratory, specialty Subcontractor, trade, Specialist, consultant, installer, and other professionals. M. Submittals Required by Laws, Regulations, and Governing Agencies: 1. Promptly submit promptly notifications, reports, certifications, payrolls, and otherwise as may be required, directly to the applicable federal, state, or local governing agency or their representative. 2. Transmit to Engineer for Owner's records one copy of correspondence and transmittals (to include enclosures and attachments) between Contractor and governing agency. N. Test, Evaluation, and Inspection Reports: 1. General: Shall contain signature of person responsible for test or report. 2. Factory: a. Identification of product and specification section, type of inspection or test with referenced standard or code. b. Date of test, Project title and number, and name and signature of authorized person. C. Test results. d. If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in compliance with Contract Documents, identify corrective action necessary to bring into compliance. e. Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer. f. Other items as identified in individual specification sections. 3. Field: a. As a minimum, include the following: 1) Project title and number. 2) Date and time. 3) Record of temperature and weather conditions. 4) Identification of product and specification section. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PW/WBG/399884 013300-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 1.05 PART 2 PART 3 399884C.GN1 5) Type and location of test, Sample, or inspection, including referenced standard or code. 6) Date issued, testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and name and signature of laboratory inspector. 7) If test or inspection deems material or equipment not in compliance with Contract Documents, identify corrective action necessary to bring into compliance. 8) Provide interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer. 9) Other items as identified in individual specification sections. O. Testing and Startup Data: In accordance with Section 0191 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. P. Training Data: In accordance with Section 0143 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section", is part of this specification. 1. Forms: Transmittal of Contractor's Submittal. PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES JANUARY 12, 2015 013300-9 399884C.GN1 TRANSMITTAL OF CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTAL (ATTACH TO EACH SUBMITTAL) Spec. and Para. No. CH2MHILL Contains Variation to Contract No DATE: TO: Submittal No.: ❑ New Submittal ❑ Resubmittal Project: Project No.: Specification Section No.: (Cover only one section with each transmittal) FROM: Schedule Date of Submittal: Contractor SUBMITTAL TYPE: ❑ Shop Drawing ❑ Sample ❑ Informational ❑ Deferred The following items are herebv submitted: Number of Copies Description of Item Submitted (Type, Size, Model Number, Etc.) Spec. and Para. No. Drawing or Brochure Number Contains Variation to Contract No Yes Contractor hereby certifies that (i) Contractor has complied with the requirements of Contract Documents in preparation, review, and submission of designated Submittal and (ii) the Submittal is complete and in accordance with the Contract Documents and requirements of laws and regulations and governing agencies. By: Contractor (Authorized Signature) 399884C.GN1 SECTION 0143 33 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Person -Day: One person for 8 hours within regular Contractor working hours. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Training Schedule: Submit, in accordance with requirements of this Specification, not less than 21 days prior to start of equipment installation and revise as necessary for acceptance. 2. Lesson Plan: Submit, in accordance with requirements of this Specification, proposed lesson plan not less than 21 days prior to scheduled training and revise as necessary for acceptance. 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Authorized representative of the manufacturer, factory trained, and experienced in the technical applications, installation, operation, and maintenance of respective equipment, subsystem, or system, with full authority by the equipment manufacturer to issue the certifications required of the manufacturer. Additional qualifications may be specified in the individual Specification section. B. Representative subject to acceptance by Owner and Engineer. No substitute representatives will be allowed unless prior written approval by such has been given. C. Manufacturer's Representative or Manufacturer's Equipment Representative as used in this section shall be equivalent to System Supplier as used in this and other sections herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FULFILLMENT OF SPECIFIED MINIMUM SERVICES A. Furnish manufacturers' services, when required by an individual specification section, to meet the requirements of this section. PW/WBG/399884 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES JANUARY 12, 2015 014333-1 399884C.GN1 B. Where time is necessary in excess of that stated in the Specifications for manufacturers' services, or when a minimum time is not specified, time required to perform specified services shall be considered incidental. C. Schedule manufacturer' services to avoid conflict with other onsite testing or other manufacturers' onsite services. D. Determine, before scheduling services, that conditions necessary to allow successful testing have been met. E. Only those days of service approved by Engineer will be credited to fulfill specified minimum services. F. When specified in individual Specification sections, manufacturer's onsite services shall include: 1. Assistance during product (system, subsystem, or component) installation to include observation, guidance, instruction of Contractor's assembly, erection, installation or application procedures. 2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for product (system, subsystem, or component) to function as warranted by manufacturer and necessary to furnish Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. Providing, on a daily basis, copies of manufacturers' representatives field notes and data to Engineer. 4. Revisiting the Site as required to correct problems and until installation and operation are acceptable to Engineer. 5. Resolution of assembly or installation problems attributable to or associated with respective manufacturer's products and systems. 6. Assistance during functional and performance testing, and facility startup and evaluation. 7. Training of Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of respective product as required. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION A. A Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation form, a copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed and signed by equipment manufacturer's representative. B. Such form shall certify signing party is a duly authorized representative of manufacturer, is empowered by manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate their equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to ensure equipment is complete and operational. MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES PW/WBG/399884 014333-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3.03 TRAINING A. General: 1. Furnish manufacturers' representatives for detailed classroom and hands-on training to Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of specified product (system, subsystem, component) and as may be required in applicable Specifications. 2. Furnish trained, articulate personnel to coordinate and expedite training, to be present during training coordination meetings with Owner, and familiar with operation and maintenance manual information specified in Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Manufacturer's representative shall be familiar with facility operation and maintenance requirements as well as with specified equipment. 4. Furnish complete training materials, to include operation and maintenance data, to be retained by each trainee. B. Training Schedule: List specified equipment and systems that require training services and show: a. Respective manufacturer. b. Estimated dates for installation completion. c. Estimated training dates. 2. Allow for multiple sessions when several shifts are involved. 3. Adjust schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel as deemed necessary by Owner, and to allow full participation by manufacturers' representatives. Adjust schedule for interruptions in operability of equipment. 4. Coordinate with Section 0132 00, Construction Progress Documentation, and Section 0191 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. C. Lesson Plan: When manufacturer or vendor training of Owner personnel is specified, prepare a lesson plan for each required course containing the following minimum information: 1. Title and objectives. 2. Recommended attendees (such as, managers, engineers, operators, maintenance). 3. Course description, outline of course content, and estimated class duration. 4. Format (such as, lecture, self -study, demonstration, hands-on). 5. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. 6. Resumes of instructors providing training. PW/WBG/399884 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES JANUARY 12, 2015 014333-3 399884C.GN1 D. Pre -startup Training: 1. Coordinate training sessions with Owner's operating personnel and manufacturers' representatives and with submission of operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Complete at least 7 days prior to beginning of facility startup. E. Post -startup Training: If required in Specifications, furnish and coordinate training of Owner's operating personnel by respective manufacturer's representatives. 3.04 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section", is part of this Specification. Form: Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. a. For systems, complete the following certificate for each system component. END OF SECTION MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES PW/WBG/399884 014333-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION OWNER EQPT TAG NO: PROJECT NO: EQPT SERIAL NO: EQPT/SYSTEM: SPEC. SECTION: I hereby certify that the above -referenced equipment/system has been: (Check Applicable) ❑ Installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. ❑ Inspected, checked, and adjusted. ❑ Serviced with proper initial lubricants. ❑ Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards. ❑ All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed. ❑ Functional tests. ❑ System has been performance tested, and meets or exceeds specified performance requirements. (When complete system of one manufacturer) Note: Attach any performance test documentation from manufacturer. Comments: I, the undersigned Manufacturer's Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate their equipment and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to ensure equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. Date: Manufacturer: By Manufacturer's Authorized Representative: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Wo (Authorized Signature) MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION 0143 33 SUPPLEMENT - 1 SECTION 0143 34 SPECIAL SERVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS 399884C.GN1 A. Functional Testing: Tests necessary to demonstrate that the installed ozone disinfection system equipment functions as specified and operates in the manner intended. Functional testing is a prerequisite to performance testing for installed equipment specified herein. B. Performance Testing: Tests necessary to demonstrate, after successful functional testing, that the ozone disinfection system equipment meets specified performance requirements. C. Contractor: The entity, under contract with the Owner, whose responsibilities include the installation and testing of the specified equipment provided under this Contract. D. System Supplier: The entity under separate contract with the Owner to supply the ozone disinfection system equipment and assist Contractor in providing the special services indicated. 1.02 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. System Supplier shall furnish a qualified representative who is technically competent and intimately familiar with each component comprising the ozone disinfection system equipment being provided. B. If System Supplier's representative is found deficient in training or experience by Owner or Engineer, furnish replacement representative after acceptance of resume and other qualification documentation of proposed representative. 1.03 INSTALLATION AND FIELD SERVICE A. System Supplier shall comply with the requirements of Section 44 42 56.18, Ozone Disinfection System for field services. 1.04 COMMISSIONING ASSISTANCE A. Functional Testing: System Supplier shall assist the Contractor in performing functional testing of the ozone disinfection system equipment. Furnish representative to assist with test and necessary adjustments. PW\VWBG\399884 SPECIAL SERVICES JANUARY 12, 2015 014334-1 399884C.GN1 B. Performance Testing: 1. The System Supplier shall assist the Contractor in conducting performance testing of the ozone disinfection system equipment. Furnish representative to assist with tests as specified and to correct malfunctions. 2. Performance Testing shall not begin until the Functional Testing has been satisfactorily completed and accepted by the Owner. C. Startup Assistance: System Supplier shall assist the Contractor with startup of the ozone disinfection system equipment. 1. System Supplier's representative shall be present during any prestartup meeting scheduled by the Engineer or Contractor. 2. Furnish labor and materials, tools, instruments, and services for checking, testing, and startup specified. 3. Develop a standard record of testing. This record shall: a. Be subject to approval of Engineer. b. Include name of each piece of equipment and sub -assembly, if applicable. C. Have provisions for recording dates of completion for checking, inspection, verification of instrumentation and controls, and completion of all tests. d. Allow space for describing equipment problems and for signature of Engineer indicating acceptance. 1.05 CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION A. A Certificate of Proper Installation form, a copy of which is attached to this section, shall be completed and signed by the System Supplier's representative. B. Such form shall certify signing party is a duly authorized representative of the System Supplier, is empowered by System Supplier to inspect, approve, and operate their ozone disinfection system equipment and is authorized to make recommendations required to ensure that the ozone disinfection system equipment is complete, operational and functions properly as a system. 1.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. The System Supplier's representative shall instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance techniques for the installed ozone disinfection system. B. Training services shall include classroom and field instruction, as stated in the Specifications. SPECIAL SERVICES PW\WBG\399884 014334-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Pre -startup Training: 1. Pre -startup training shall be completed at least 14 days prior to actual startup. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data shall be reviewed and accepted before initiation of pre -startup training. D. Post -Startup Training: The System Supplier's representative shall provide post -startup training of Owner's operating personnel following actual startup of the ozone disinfection system to review information not covered in Pre - Startup training that is critical to system operation and control. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section", is part of this Specification. 1 PW\WBG\399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Forms: Certificate of Proper Installation. END OF SECTION SPECIAL SERVICES 014334-3 OWNER EQPT TAG 399884C.GN1 CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION EQPT SERIAL NO: EQPT/SYSTEM: PROJECT NO: SPEC. SECTION: I hereby certify that the above -referenced equipment/system has been: (Check Applicable) Comments: ❑ Installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. ❑ Inspected, checked, and adjusted. ❑ Serviced with proper initial lubricants. ❑ Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards. ❑ All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed. ❑ Functional tests. ❑ System has been performance tested, and meets or exceeds specified performance requirements. Note: Attach any performance test documentation from System Supplier. I, the undersigned System Supplier's Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the System Supplier, (ii) empowered by the System Supplier to inspect, approve, and operate its equipment and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to ensure that the Ozone Disinfection Equipment furnished by the System Supplier is complete, operational and satisfactorily functions as an integrated system, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. 20 System Supplier N System Supplier Authorized Representative: PW\WBG\399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 (Authorized Signature) CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION 0143 34 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 SECTION 0178 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Detailed information for the preparation, submission, and Engineer's review of Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Data, as required by individual Specification sections. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Preliminary Data: Initial and subsequent submissions for Engineer's review. B. Final Data: Engineer -accepted data, submitted as specified herein. C. Maintenance Operation: As used on Maintenance Summary Form is defined to mean any routine operation required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of equipment. Examples of typical maintenance operations are lubrication, belt tensioning, adjustment of pump packing glands, and routine adjustments. 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Equipment and System Data: 1. Preliminary Data: a. Do not submit until Shop Drawing for equipment or system has been reviewed and approved by Engineer. b. Submit prior to shipment date. 2. Final Data: Submit Instructional Manual Formatted data not less than 30 days prior to installation of equipment or system equipment or system demonstration of performance testing. Submit Compilation Formatted and Electronic Media Formatted data prior to Substantial Completion of Project. B. Materials and Finishes Data: 1. Preliminary Data: Submit at least 15 days prior to request for final inspection. 2. Final Data: Submit within 10 days after final inspection. 1.04 DATA FORMAT A. Prepare preliminary data in the form of an instructional manual. Prepare final data in data compilation format on electronic media. PW/WBG/399884 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 12, 2015 017823-1 399884C.GN1 B. Instructional Manual Format: 1. Binder: Commercial quality, permanent, three-ring or three -post binders with durable plastic cover. 2. Size: 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, minimum. 3. Cover: Identify manual with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA" and list: a. Project title. b. Designate applicable system, equipment, material, or finish. C. Identity of separate structure as applicable. d. Identify volume number if more than one volume. 4. Spine: a. Project title. b. Identify volume number if more than one volume. 5. Title Page: a. Contractor name, address, and telephone number. b. Subcontractor, Supplier, installer, or maintenance contractor's name, address, and telephone number, as appropriate. 1) Identify area of responsibility of each. 2) Provide name and telephone number of local source of supply for parts and replacement. 6. Table of Contents: a. Neatly typewritten and arranged in systematic order with consecutive page numbers. b. Identify each product by product name and other identifying numbers or symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 7. Paper: 20 -pound minimum, white for typed pages. 8. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 9. Three -hole punch data for binding and composition; arrange printing so that punched holes do not obliterate data. 10. Material shall be suitable for reproduction, with quality equal to original. Photocopying of material will be acceptable, except for material containing photographs. C. Data Compilation Format: 1. Compile all Engineer -accepted preliminary O&M data into a hard -copy, hard -bound set. 2. Each set shall consist of the following: a. Binder: Commercial quality, permanent, three-ring or three -post binders with durable plastic cover. b. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, VOLUME NO. OF ", and list: 1) Project title. 2) Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW/WBG/399884 017823-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3) If entire volume covers equipment or system provided by one Supplier include the following: a) Identity of general subject matter covered in manual. b) Identity of equipment number and Specification section. C. Provide each volume with title page and typed table of contents with consecutive page numbers. Place contents of entire set, identified by volume number, in each binder. d. Table of contents neatly typewritten, arranged in a systematic order: 1) Include list of each product, indexed to content of each volume. 2) Designate system or equipment for which it is intended. 3) Identify each product by product name and other identifying numbers or symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. C. Section Dividers: 1) Heavy, 80 pound cover weight, tabbed with numbered plastic index tabs. 2) Fly -Leaf - a) For each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. b) List with Each Product: (1) Name, address, and telephone number of Subcontractor, Supplier, installer, and maintenance contractor, as appropriate. (2) Identify area of responsibility of each. (3) Provide local source of supply for parts and replacement. c) Identity of separate structure as applicable. f. Assemble and bind material, as much as possible, in same order as specified in the Contract Documents. D. Electronic Media Format: Portable Document Format (PDF): a. After all preliminary data has been found to be acceptable to Engineer, submit Operation and Maintenance data in PDF format on CD. b. Files to be exact duplicates of Engineer -accepted preliminary data. Arrange by specification number and name. C. Files to be fully functional and viewable in most recent version of Adobe Acrobat. PW/WBG/399884 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 12, 2015 017823-3 399884C.GN1 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Informational: 1. Data Outline: Submit two copies of a detailed outline of proposed organization and contents of Final Data prior to preparation of Preliminary Data. 2. Preliminary Data: a. Submit two copies for Engineer's review. b. If data meets conditions of the Contract: 1) One copy will be returned to Contractor. 2) One copy will be forwarded to Resident Project Representative. 3) One copy will be retained in Engineer's file. C. If data does not meet conditions of the Contract: 1) All copies will be returned to Contractor with Engineer's comments (on separate document) for revision. 2) Engineer's comments will be retained in Engineer's file. 3) Resubmit two copies revised in accordance with Engineer's comments. 3. Final Data: Submit two copies in format specified herein. 1.06 DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Content For Each Unit (or Common Units) and System: 1. Product Data: a. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to specific product. b. Clearly annotate each sheet to: 1) Identify specific product or part installed. 2) Identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information. C. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. d. Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests. e. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. f. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, detailed assembly drawings showing each part with part numbers and sequentially numbered parts list, and diagrams required for maintenance. g. Spare parts ordering instructions. h. Where applicable, identify installed spares and other provisions for future work (e.g., reserved panel space, unused components, wiring terminals). 2. As -installed, color -coded piping diagrams. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW/WBG/399884 017823-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 4. Drawings: Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Format: 1) Provide reinforced, punched, binder tab; bind in with text. 2) Reduced to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, or 11 inches by 17 inches folded to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. 3) Where reduction is impractical, fold and place in 8 -1/2 -inch by 11 -inch envelopes bound in text. 4) Identify Specification section and product on Drawings and envelopes. b. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. C. Control and flow diagrams. d. Coordinate drawings with Project record documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 5. Instructions and Procedures: Within text, as required to supplement product data. a. Format: 1) Organize in consistent format under separate heading for each different procedure. 2) Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 3) Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, including: a) Proper procedures in event of failure. b) Instances that might affect validity of guarantee or Bond. b. Installation Instructions: Including alignment, adjusting, calibrating, and checking. C. Operating Procedures: 1) Startup, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions. 2) Test procedures and results of factory tests where required. 3) Regulation, control, stopping, and emergency instructions. 4) Description of operation sequence by control manufacturer. 5) Shutdown instructions for both short and extended duration. 6) Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable. 7) Safety precautions. 8) Special operating instructions. d. Maintenance and Overhaul Procedures: 1) Routine maintenance. 2) Guide to troubleshooting. 3) Disassembly, removal, repair, reinstallation, and re- assembly. 6. Guarantee, Bond, and Service Agreement: In accordance with Section 0177 00, Closeout Procedures. PW/WBG/399884 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 12, 2015 017823-5 399884C.GN1 B. Content for Each Electric or Electronic Item or System: 1. Description of Unit and Component Parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests. C. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d. Interconnection wiring diagrams, including control and lighting systems. 2. Circuit Directories of Panelboards: 3. Electrical service. 4. Control requirements and interfaces. 5. Communication requirements and interfaces. 6. List of electrical relay settings, and control and alarm contact settings. 7. Electrical interconnection wiring diagram, including as applicable, single -line, three -line, schematic and internal wiring, and external interconnection wiring. 8. As -installed control diagrams by control manufacturer. 9. Operating Procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Startup and shutdown sequences, normal and emergency. C. Safety precautions. d. Special operating instructions. 10. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine maintenance. b. Guide to troubleshooting. C. Adjustment and checking. d. List of relay settings, control and alarm contact settings. 11. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 12. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. C. Maintenance Summary: 1. Compile individual Maintenance Summary for each applicable equipment item, respective unit or system, and for components or sub -units. 2. Format: a. Use Maintenance Summary Form bound with this section or electronic facsimile of such. b. Each Maintenance Summary may take as many pages as required. C. Use only 8 -1/2 -inch by 11 -inch size paper. d. Complete using typewriter or electronic printing. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PW/WBG/399884 017823-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. Include detailed lubrication instructions and diagrams showing points to be greased or oiled; recommend type, grade, and temperature range of lubricants and frequency of lubrication. 4. Recommended Spare Parts: a. Data to be consistent with manufacturer's Bill of Materials/Parts List furnished in O&M manuals. b. "Unit" is the unit of measure for ordering the part. C. "Quantity" is the number of units recommended. d. "Unit Cost" is the current purchase price. 1.07 DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Content for Architectural Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. C. Information required for reordering special -manufactured products. 2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product. C. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. B. Content for Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. C. Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. 1.08 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section", is part of this Specification. 1. Forms: Maintenance Summary Form. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA JANUARY 12, 2015 017823-7 PROJECT: 1. EQUIPMENT ITEM 2. MANUFACTURER MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM CONTRACT NO.: 3. EQUIPMENT/TAG NUMBER(S) 4. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS) 5. NAMEPLATE DATA (hp, voltage, speed, etc.) 6. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE a. Name b. Address 7. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Telephone No. 399884C.GN1 Maintenance Operation Comments Frequency Lubricant If Applicable List briefly each maintenance operation required and refer to specific information in manufacturer's standard maintenance manual, if applicable. (Reference to manufacturer's catalog or sales literature is not acceptable.) List required frequency of each maintenance operation. Refer by symbol to lubricant required. PW/WBG/399884 MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM JANUARY 12, 2015 0178 23 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GNI 8. LUBRICANT LIST Reference Symbol Shell Exxon Mobile Chevron Texaco BP Amoco Or Equal List symbols used in No. 7 above. List equivalent lubricants, as distributed by each manufacturer for the specific use recommended. Note: Identify parts provided by this Contract with two asterisks. 9. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR OWNER'S INVENTORY. Part No. Description Unit Quantity Unit Cost Note: Identify parts provided by this Contract with two asterisks. MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM PW/WBG/399884 0178 23 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 SECTION 019114 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Functional Test: Test or tests in presence of Engineer and Owner to demonstrate that installed equipment meets manufacturer's installation, calibration, and adjustment requirements and other requirements as specified. B. Performance Test: Test or tests performed after any required functional test in presence of Engineer and Owner to demonstrate and confirm individual equipment meets performance requirements specified in individual sections. C. Unit Process: As used in this section, a unit process is a portion of the facility that performs a specific process function, such as ozone disinfection system. D. Unit Process Performance Demonstration: 1. A demonstration, conducted by Contractor and System Supplier, with assistance of Owner, to demonstrate and document the performance of the unit process, both manually and automatically based on criteria developed in conjunction with Owner and as accepted by Engineer. Refer to and comply with specific requirements given in individual sections of the specifications. 2. Such demonstration is for the purposes of (i) verifying to Owner that the unit process performs as a whole, and (ii) documenting performance characteristics of completed unit process for Owner's records. Neither the demonstration nor the evaluation is intended in any way to make performance of a unit process the responsibility of Contractor, unless such performance is otherwise specified. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Facility Startup and Performance Demonstration Plan. 2. Functional and performance test results. 3. Completed Unit Process Startup Form for each unit process. 4. Completed Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP 019114-1 3 99884C. GN 1 1.03 FACILITY STARTUP AND PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION PLAN A. Develop a written plan, in conjunction with Owner's operations personnel; to include the following: 1. Step-by-step instructions for startup of each item of equipment or component comprising the unit process. 2. Unit Process Startup Form (sample attached), to minimally include the following: a. Description of the unit process, including equipment numbers/nomenclature of each item of equipment or component comprising the unit process and all included devices. b. Detailed procedure for startup of the unit process, including valves to be opened/closed, order of equipment or component startup, etc. C. Startup requirements for each unit process, including water, power, chemicals, etc. d. Space for evaluation comments. 3. Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification Form (sample attached), to minimally include the following: a. Description of unit processes included in the facility startup. b. Sequence of equipment or component startup to achieve unit process startup. C. Description of computerized operations or those operations managed by programmable logic controllers, included in the unit process. d. Contractor and System Supplier certification that unit process is capable of performing its intended function(s), including fully automatic operation. e. Signature spaces for Contractor, System Supplier and Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Facility Startup Meetings: Schedule, in accordance with requirements of Section 0131 19, Project Meetings, to discuss test schedule, test methods, materials, chemicals and liquids required, facilities operations interface, and Owner involvement. B. Contractor's Testing and System Supplier Startup Representative: 1. Designate and furnish one or more personnel to coordinate and expedite testing and facility startup. EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP 019114-2 PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2. Representative(s) shall be present during startup meetings and shall be available at all times during testing and startup. C. Provide spare valves, gauges, piping, test equipment and other materials and equipment required for testing and startup. D. Provide Subcontractor and equipment manufacturers' staff adequate to prevent delays. Schedule ongoing work so as not to interfere with or delay testing and startup. E. The terms "manufacturer's representative" and "manufacturer's responsibilities" where used herein shall be equivalent to "system supplier" and "system supplier's responsibilities", respectively. F. Owner will: Provide water, power, chemicals, and other items as required for startup, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Support Contractor during startup and testing. 3. Provide labor and materials as required for laboratory analyses. 4. Provide other services as called for in other sections. 3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING A. Preparation: 1. Complete installation before testing. 2. Furnish qualified manufacturers' representatives, when required by individual Specification sections. 3. Obtain and submit from equipment manufacturer's representative Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation Form, in accordance with Section 0143 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, when required by individual Specification sections. 4. Equipment Test Report Form: Provide written test report for each item of equipment to be tested, to include the minimum information: a. Owner/Project Name. b. Equipment or item tested. C. Date and time of test. d. Type of test performed (Functional or Performance). e. Test method. f. Test conditions. g. Test results. h. Signature spaces for Contractor, System Supplier and Engineer as witness. PW/WBG/399884 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND JANUARY 12, 2015 FACILITY STARTUP 0191 14-3 399884C.GN1 5. Cleaning and Checking: Prior to beginning functional testing: a. Calibrate testing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Inspect and clean equipment, devices, connected piping, and structures to ensure they are free of foreign material. C. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. d. Turn rotating equipment by hand when possible to confirm that equipment is not bound. e. Open and close valves by hand and operate other devices to check for binding, interference, or improper functioning. f. Check power supply to electric -powered equipment for correct voltage. g. Adjust clearances and torque. h. Test piping for leaks. 6. Ready -to -test determination will be based at least on the following: a. Acceptable Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Notification by Contractor of equipment readiness for testing. C. Receipt of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, if so specified. d. Adequate completion of work adjacent to, or interfacing with, equipment to be tested. e. Availability and acceptability of manufacturer's representative, when specified, to assist in testing of respective equipment. f. Satisfactory fulfillment of other specified manufacturer's responsibilities. g. Equipment and electrical tagging complete. h. Delivery of all spare parts and special tools. B. Functional Testing: 1. Conduct as specified in individual Specification sections. 2. Notify Owner and Engineer in writing at least 10 days prior to scheduled date of testing. 3. Prepare Equipment Test Report summarizing test method and results. 4. When, in Engineer's opinion, equipment meets functional requirements specified, such equipment will be accepted for purposes of advancing to performance testing phase, if so required by individual Specification sections. Such acceptance will be evidenced by Engineer/Owner's signature as witness on Equipment Test Report. C. Performance Testing: 1. Conduct as specified in individual Specification sections. 2. Notify Engineer and Owner in writing at least 10 days prior to scheduled date of test. EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP 019114-4 PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. Performance testing shall not commence until equipment has been accepted by Engineer as having satisfied functional test requirements specified. 4. Type of fluid, gas, or solid for testing shall be as specified. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, furnish labor, materials, and supplies for conducting the test and taking samples and performance measurements. 6. Prepare Equipment Test Report summarizing test method and results. 7. When, in Engineer's opinion, equipment meets performance requirements specified, such equipment will be accepted as to conforming to Contract requirements. Such acceptance will be evidenced by Engineer's signature on Equipment Test Report. 3.03 STARTUP OF UNIT PROCESSES A. Prior to unit process startup, equipment within unit process shall be accepted by Engineer as having met functional and performance testing requirements specified. B. Make adjustments, repairs, and corrections necessary to complete unit process startup. C. Startup shall be considered complete when, in opinion of Engineer, unit process has operated continuously, as specified in individual Specification sections, without interruption, failure or malfunctioning. This period is in addition to functional or performance test periods specified elsewhere. D. Interruption, failure or malfunction may include any of the following events: 1. Failure of Contractor to provide and maintain qualified onsite startup personnel and spare parts and tools as scheduled. 2. Failure to meet specified functional operation period. 3. Failure of any equipment or component that is not satisfactorily corrected within 4 hours after failure. 4. Other as may be determined by Engineer. E. An interruption, failure or malfunction will require startup then in progress to be stopped. After corrections are made, startup test period shall start from beginning again. 3.04 PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION A. When, in the opinion of Engineer, successful startup of all equipment and components comprising the unit process has been achieved, performance demonstration shall begin. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP O1 91 14-5 399884C.GN1 B. Demonstrate proper operation of required interfaces within and between individual equipment and components comprising the unit process. C. Document, as defined in Startup and Performance Demonstration Plan, the successful performance of the unit process including automatic controls. D. Certify, on the Performance Demonstration/Certification Form, that the unit process is capable of performing its intended function(s), including manual and fully automatic operation. 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. Supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this Specification: 1. Unit Process Startup Form. 2. Performance Demonstration/Certification Form. END OF SECTION EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP 019114-6 PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 UNIT PROCESS STARTUP FORM OWNER: PROJECT: Unit Process Description: (Include description and equipment number of all equipment and devices): Startup Procedure (Describe procedure for sequential startup and evaluation, including valves to be opened/closed, order of equipment startup, etc.): Startup Requirements (Water, power, chemicals, etc.): Evaluation Comments: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 UNIT PROCESS STARTUP FORM 01 91 14 SUPPLEMENT - 399884C.GN1 PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION/CERTIFICATION FORM OWNER: PROJECT Unit Processes Description (List unit processes involved in facility startup): Unit Processes Startup Sequence (Describe sequence for startup, including computerized operations, if any): Contractor Certification that Facility is capable of performing its intended function(s), including fully automatic operation: Contractor: Date: , 20 System Supplier: IID: ;00 Engineer: (Authorized Signature) PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION/ CERTIFICATION FORM 01 91 14 SUPPLEMENT - 1 SECTION 09 90 04 PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES 399884C.GN1 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. NACE International (MACE): RPO 188, Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. 2. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. 3. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. b. PA 3, Guide to Safety in Paint Applications. C. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. d. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. e. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. f. SP 5, Joint Surface Preparation Standard White Metal Blast Cleaning. g. SP 6, Joint Surface Preparation Standard Commercial Blast Cleaning. h. SP 7, Joint Surface Preparation Standard Brush -Off Blast Cleaning. i. SP 10, Joint Surface Preparation Standard Near -White Blast Cleaning. j. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. k. SP 12, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High- and Ultrahigh -Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating. 1. SP 13, Surface Preparation of Concrete. In. Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Nonporous Substrates. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Terms used in this section: 1. Coverage: Total minimum dry film thickness in mils or square feet per gallon. PW/WBG/399884 PAINTING JANUARY 12, 2015 099004-1 399884C.GN1 2. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 3. HCl: Hydrochloric Acid. 4. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness, mils. 5. MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness per Coat, mils. 6. Mil: Thousandth of an inch. 7. PDS: Product Data Sheet. 8. PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet. 9. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. 10. SFPG: Square Feet per Gallon. 11. SFPGPC: Square Feet per Gallon per Coat. 12. SP: Surface Preparation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Product Data Sheets: 1) For each product, furnish a Product Data Sheet (PDS), the manufacturer's technical data sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable). The PDS form is appended to the end of this section. 2) For each paint system, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS). The PSDS form is appended to the end of this section. 3) Furnish copies of paint system submittals to coating applicator. 4) Indiscriminate submittal of manufacturer's literature is not acceptable. b. Detailed chemical and gradation analysis for each proposed abrasive material. 2. Samples: a. Reference Panel: 1) Prior to start of surface preparation, furnish a 4 -inch by 4 -inch steel panel prepared to specified requirements for each grade of sandblast specified herein. a) Provide panel representative of steel used, and prevent from deterioration of surface quality. b) Upon approval by Engineer, preserve panel as reference source for inspection. 2) Paint: a) Before painting work is started, prepare minimum 8 -inch by 10 -inch Sample with type of paint and application specified, on similar substrate to which paint is to be applied. PAINTING PW/WBG/399884 099004-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 b) Furnish additional Samples as required until colors, finishes, and textures are approved. c) Approved Samples to be quality standard for final finishes. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Applicator's Experience: List of references substantiating this requirement as specified. 2. Manufacturer's written verification that submitted products are suitable for the intended use. 3. Factory Applied Coatings: Manufacturer's certification stating factory applied coating system meets or exceeds requirements specified herein. 4. If manufacturer of finish coating differs from that of shop primer, provide both manufacturers' written confirmation that materials are compatible. 5. Coating Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator's Experience: Minimum 5 years' practical experience in application of specified products. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting emission of volatile organic compounds. 2. Perform surface preparation and painting in accordance with recommendations of the following: a. Paint manufacturer's instructions. b. SSPC PA 3, Guide to Safety in Paint Applications. C. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Site in unopened containers that plainly show designated name, date of manufacture, color, and manufacturer. B. Store paints in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain temperature range recommended by paint manufacturer. PW/WBG/399884 PAINTING JANUARY 12, 2015 099004-3 399884C.GN1 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply paint in temperatures outside of manufacturer's recommended maximum or minimum allowable, or in dust, smoke - laden atmosphere, damp or humid weather. 2. Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dewpoint of ambient air. Strictly adhere to coating manufacturer's recommendations. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other small areas. B. Fusion Bonded Coating: Provide appropriate liquid repair kits for field use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Paint manufacturer shall be nationally recognized manufacturer of paints and protective coatings and regularly engaged in production of such materials that have essentially identical service conditions as this Project. B. Minimum of 5 years' verifiable experience in manufacture of specified products. PAINTING PW/WBG/399884 099004-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying most of the products specified herein: 1. Sherwin Williams. 2. TNEMEC. 3. Ameron. 4. Carboline. 2.03 ABRASIVE MATERIALS A. Select abrasive type and size to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for specific primer and coating system to be applied. 2.04 PAINT MATERIALS A. General: 1. Material Quality: Manufacturer's highest quality products and suitable for the intended service. 2. Materials, Including Primer and Finish Coats: Produced by same paint manufacturer. 3. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by paint manufacturer of particular coating. B. Products: Product Definition Acrylic Latex Single component, gloss asspecified Acrylic Sealer Clear acrylic Alkyd Enamel Optimum quality, gloss or semigloss finish asspecified, medium long oil Bituminous Paint Single -component, coal -tar pitch based Block Filler Primer -sealer designed for rough masonry surfaces, 100% acrylic emulsion Coal -Tar Epoxy Amine, polyamide, or phenolic epoxy type; 70% volume solids minimum, suitable for immersion service DTM Acrylic Primer Surface tolerant, direct -to -metal water borne acrylic primer DTM Acrylic Finish Surface tolerant, direct -to -metal water borne acrylic finish coat PW/WBG/399884 PAINTING JANUARY 12, 2015 099004-5 399884C.GN1 PAINTING 099004-6 Product Definition Epoxy Filler/Surfacer 100 percent solids epoxy trowel grade filler and surfacer, nonshrinking, suitable for application to concrete and masonry. Approved for potable water contact and conforming to NSF/ANSI 61, where required Epoxy Primer Converted epoxy primer containing rust - inhibitive pigments High Build Epoxy Polyamidoamine epoxy, minimum 69% volume solids, capability of 4 MDFT to 8 MDFT per coat Inorganic Zinc Primer Solvent or water based, having 85% metallic zinc content in the dry film; follow manufacturer's recommendation for to coatin Latex Primer Sealer Waterborne vinyl acrylic primer/sealer for interior gypsum board and plaster. Capable of providing uniform seal and suitable for use with specified finish coats. NSF Epoxy Polyamidoamine epoxy, approved for potable water contact and conforming to NSF/ANSI 61 Epoxy, High Solids Polyamidoamine epoxy, 80% volume solids, minimum, suitable for immersion service Polyurethane Enamel Two -component, aliphatic or acrylic based polyurethane; high gloss finish Rust -Inhibitive Primer Single -package steel primers with anticorrosive pigment loading Silicone/Silicone Acrylic Elevated temperature silicone or silicone/acrylic based Stain, Concrete Aclylic, water repellent, penetrating stain PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.05 COLORS A. Provide as selected by Owner. B. Formulate with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials, which might be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at Site. C. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Any authorized manufacturer may supply matches. 2.06 SHOP FINISHES A. Shop Blast Cleaning: Reference paragraph Shop Coating Requirements, this section. B. Surface Preparation: Provide Engineer minimum 7 days' advance notice to start of shop surface preparation work and coating application work. C. Shop Coating Requirements: 1. When required by equipment Specifications, such equipment shall be primed and finish coated in shop by manufacturer and touched up in field with identical material after installation. 2. Where manufacturer's standard coating is not suitable for intended service condition, Engineer may approve use of a tie -coat to be used between manufacturer's standard coating and specified field finish. In such cases, tie -coat shall be surface tolerant epoxy as recommended by manufacturer of specified field finish coat. Coordinate details of equipment manufacturer's standard coating with field coating manufacturer. D. Pipe: 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: a. Use SSPC standards as a guide for desired prepared surface. Follow recommendations of pipe and coating manufacturers for means and methods to achieve SSPC-equivalent surface. b. Prior to blast cleaning, grind smooth surface imperfections including, but not limited to, delaminating metal or oxide layers. C. Surface preparation and application of primer coats shall be performed by pipe manufacturer. PW/WBG/399884 PAINTING JANUARY 12, 2015 099004-7 399884C.GN1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Surface Preparation Inspection: 1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and printed directions and recommendations of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. In event of conflict, more stringent shall apply. 2. Notify Engineer minimum 7 days' prior to start of surface preparation work or coating application work. 3. Perform work only in presence of Engineer, unless Engineer grants prior approval to perform work in Engineer's absence. B. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed system. Consult coatings manufacturer's written instructions for these requirements. Do not immerse coating until completion of curing cycle. C. The intention of these Specifications is for new, interior and exterior masonry and metal and submerged metal surfaces to be painted, whether specifically mentioned or not, except as modified herein. Concealed structural steel surfaces shall receive prime coat only, unless modified herein. Exterior concrete surfaces will not be painted, unless specifically indicated herein. D. Perform painting in accordance with recommendations of the following: 1. Paint manufacturer's instructions. 2. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction. 3.02 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Protect all surfaces adjacent to, or downwind of Work area from overspray. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages resulting from overspray. B. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not specified elsewhere. C. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. D. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage. E. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors. PAINTING PW/WBG/399884 099004-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3.03 FIELD SANDBLASTING A. Perform sandblasting for items and equipment where specified, and as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed. Materials, equipment, procedures shall meet requirements of SSPC. 3.04 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Metal Surface Preparation: 1. General: a. Submit samples prior to surface preparation blasting. b. Conform to current SSPC specifications as follows: 1) Solvent Cleaning: SP 1. 2) Hand Tool Cleaning: SP 2. 3) Power Tool Cleaning: SP 3. 4) White Metal Blast Cleaning: SP 5. 5) Commercial Blast Cleaning: SP 6. 6) Brush -Off Blast Cleaning: SP 7. 7) Near -White Blast Cleaning: SP 10. 8) Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: SP 11. 9) High Pressure Waterjetting: SP 12. C. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning, wet- or vacu-blast methods may be required. Follow coatings manufacturers' recommendations for wet -blast additives and first coat application. d. Hand -tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power -tool cleaning. 2. Blast Cleaning Requirements: a. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local, air pollution and environmental control regulations for blast cleaning and disposition of spent aggregate and debris. b. Alternatives to standard abrasive blast cleaning methods subject to Engineer review. B. Concrete Surface Preparation: 1. Do not begin until 30 days after concrete has been placed. 2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 13. 3. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods. PW/WBG/399884 PAINTING JANUARY 12, 2015 099004-9 399884C.GN1 4. Brush-off blast clean concrete surfaces to remove loose concrete and to provide a tooth for binding. If brush-off blasting is impractical, surface may be acid etched with muriatic acid solution. Approval is subject to producing desired profile equivalent to No. 80 grit flint sandpaper. Acid etching of vertical or overhead surfaces will not be accepted. 5. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to painting. C. Plastic and FRP Surface Preparation: 1. Hand sand with medium grit sandpaper to provide tooth for coating system. 2. Large areas may be power sanded or brush-off blasted, provided sufficient controls are employed so surface is roughened without removing excess material. D. Gypsum Board Surface Preparation: Typically, new gypsum board surfaces need no special preparation before painting. 1. Surface Finish: Dry, free of dust, dirt, powdery residue, grease, oil, or any other contaminants. E. Masonry Surface Preparation: 1. Complete and cure masonry construction for 14 days or more before starting surface preparation work. 2. Remove oil, grease, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent washing, or other suitable cleaning methods. 3. Clean masonry surfaces of mortar and grout spillage and other surface deposits using one of the following: a. Nonmetallic fiber brushes and commercial muriatic acid followed by rinsing with clean water. b. Brush-off blasting. C. Water blasting. 4. Do not damage masonry mortar joints or adjacent surfaces. 5. Leave surfaces clean and, unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, dry prior to painting. 6. Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Uniform texture and free of surface imperfections that would impair intended finished appearance. 7. Masonry Surfaces to be Clear Coated: Free of discolorations and uniform in texture after cleaning. PAINTING PW/WBG/399884 099004-10 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3.05 PAINT MIXING A. Multiple -Component Coatings: 1. Prepare using contents of container for each component as packaged by paint manufacturer. 2. No partial batches will be permitted. 3. Do not use multiple -component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. 4. Mix only components specified and furnished by paint manufacturer. 5. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within same generic type of coating. B. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use. C. Where more than one coat of material is applied within given system, alternate color to provide visual reference that required number of coats has been applied. 3.06 PAINT APPLICATION A. General: 1. Inspection: Schedule with Engineer in advance for cleaned surfaces and all coats prior to succeeding coat. 2. Apply coating in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations. Allow sufficient time between coats to ensure thorough drying of previously applied paint. 3. Fusion Bonded Coating Application: Electrostatic, fluidized bed, or flocking. 4. Paint units to be bolted together and to structures, prior to assembly or installation. 5. Extent of Coating (Immersion): Coatings shall be applied to internal vessel and pipe surfaces, nozzle bores, flange gasket sealing surfaces, carbon steel internals, and stainless steel internals, unless otherwise specified. B. Shop Primed or Factory Finished Surfaces: 1. Inspection: Schedule inspection for compliance with Specifications of shop primed or factory finished items with Engineer in advance of delivery to Site. 2. Hand or power sand areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded coating, feathering the edges. Follow with a spot primer using specified primer. 3. For two -package or converted coatings, consult coatings manufacturer for specific procedures as relates to manufacturer's products. PW/WBG/399884 PAINTING JANUARY 12, 2015 099004-11 399884C.GN1 4. Prior to application of finish coats, clean shop -primed surfaces free of dirt, oil, and grease and apply mist coat of specified primer, 1 -mil dry film thickness. 5. After welding, prepare and prime holdback areas as required for specified paint system. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Manufacturer Applied Paint Systems: 1. Repair abraded areas on factory finished items in accordance with equipment manufacturer's directions. 2. Carefully blend repaired areas into original finish. D. Porous Surfaces, Such As Concrete and Masonry: 1. Filler/Surfacer: Use coating manufacturer's recommended product to fill air holes, bug holes, and other surface voids or defects. 2. Prime Coat: a. May be thinned to provide maximum penetration and adhesion. b. Type and Amount of Thinning: Determined by paint manufacturer and dependent upon surface density and type of coating. 3. Surfaces Specified to Receive Water Base Coating: Damp, but free of running water, just prior to application of coating. E. Film Thickness and Coverage: 1. Number of Coats: a. Minimum required, irrespective of coating thickness. b. Additional coats may be required to obtain minimum required paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences in manufacturers' products, and atmospheric conditions. 2. Application Thickness: a. Do not exceed coating manufacturer's recommendations. b. Use wet film thickness gauge to measure proper coating thickness during application. 3. Film Thickness Measurement and Electrical Inspection of Coated Surface: a. Perform with properly calibrated instruments. b. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with Specifications. C. Coats will be subject to inspection by Engineer and coating manufacturer's representative. 4. Visually inspect concrete, nonferrous metal, plastic, and wood surfaces to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained. PAINTING PW/WBG/399884 099004-12 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 5. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other similar areas, where insufficient film thickness are likely to be present, and ensure proper millage in these areas. 6. Apply additional coats as required to complete hiding of underlying coats. Hiding shall be so complete that additional coats would not increase hiding. 3.07 PROTECTIVE COATINGS SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the following application schedule. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from Engineer before starting work in question. B. System No. 2 Submerged Metal—Domestic Sewage: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 5, White Metal Blast Prime in accordance 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT Cleaning with manufacturer's 1 coat, 3 MDFT recommendations Coal -Tar Epoxy 2 coats, 16 MDFT 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Metal surfaces below a plane 1 foot above maximum liquid surface, metal surfaces above maximum liquid surface which are part of immersed equipment, concrete embedded surfaces of metallic items, such as wall pipes, pipes, pipe sleeves, access manholes, gate guides and thimbles, and structural steel, except reinforcing steel, and the following specific surfaces: 1) Interior and exterior surfaces of steel piping noted in Piping Schedule as shown. C. System No. 5 Exposed Metal—Mildly Corrosive: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near -White Metal Blast Cleaning Epoxy Primer 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT Polyurethane Enamel 1 coat, 3 MDFT Use on the following items or areas: a. Exposed metal surfaces, located inside or outside of structures and exposed to weather or in highly humid atmosphere, such as pipe galleries and similar areas and the following specific surfaces: 1) Metal doors and frames. 2) Metal surfaces located inside the ozone room. PW/WBG/399884 PAINTING JANUARY 12, 2015 099004-13 399884C.GN1 D. System No. 19 Concrete Tank Lining—Domestic Sewage: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Prime in accordance 1 coat, 75 SFPG Paragraph Concrete with manufacturer's Surface Preparation recommendations Epoxy, High Solids 3 coats, Gloss) 250 SFPGPC 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Concrete surfaces below a plane 1 foot above maximum liquid surface, and the following specific surfaces. E. System No. 27 Aluminum and Dissimilar Metal Insulation: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 1, Solvent Cleaning Prime in accordance 1 coat, 75 SFPG Paragraph Masonry with manufacturer's Surface Preparation recommendations Bituminous Paint 1 coat, 10 MDFT 1. Use on aluminum surfaces embedded or in contact with concrete 3.08 ARCHITECTURAL PAINT SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the following application schedule. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from Engineer before starting work in question. B. System No. 109 Masonry, Semi -Gloss: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Block Filler 1 coat, 75 SFPG Paragraph Masonry Surface Preparation Acrylic Latex (Semi- 2 coats, Gloss) 240 SFPGPC 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. New masonry walls. PAINTING PW/WBG/399884 099004-14 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. System No. 115 Gypsum Board and Plaster, Semi -gloss: Surface Pre Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Latex Primer/Sealer 1 coat, 350 SFPG Paragraph Gypsum Board Surface Preparation Acrylic Latex (Semi- 2 coats, Gloss or Flat) or Alkyd 240 SFPGPC (Semi -gloss or Flat 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. New gypsum wallboard. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Equipment: 1. Provide magnetic type dry film thickness gauge, to test coating thickness specified in mils, as manufactured by Nordson Corp., Anaheim, CA; Mikrotest. 2. Provide electrical holiday detector, low voltage, wet sponge type, to test completed coating systems, 20 mils or less MDFT, for holidays and discontinuities as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, San Gabriel, CA, Model M-1. 3. Provide high voltage holiday detector for coatings in excess of 20 mils MDFT. Unit as recommended by coating manufacturer. B. Testing: Thickness and Continuity Testing: a. Measure coating thickness specified in mils with magnetic type dry film thickness gauge in accordance with SSPC PA 2. b. Check each coat for correct millage. Do not make measurement within 8 hours, minimum, after application of coating. C. Test finish coat, 20 mils thick or less, except zinc primer, galvanizing, and elastomeric coatings, for holidays and discontinuities with electrical holiday detector, low voltage, wet sponge type in accordance with NACE RPO 188. d. Holiday detect coatings in excess of 20 mils MDFT with high voltage units recommended by coating manufacturer, and in accordance with NACE RPO 188. e. After repaired and recoated areas have dried sufficiently, retest each repaired area. Final test may also be conducted by Engineer. PW/WBG/399884 PAINTING JANUARY 12, 2015 099004-15 399884C.GN 1 C. Unsatisfactory Application: 1. Clean and top coat surfaces found to have improper finish color or insufficient film thickness. 2. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections shall be cause for rejection. 3. Repair defects in coating system per written recommendations of coating manufacturer. 4. Leave staging up until Engineer has inspected surface or coating. Replace staging removed prior to approval by Engineer. D. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays: 1. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint manufacturer. 2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, and feather edges. Follow with primer and finish coat in accordance with Specifications. Depending on extent of repair and appearance, finish sanding and topcoat may be required. 3. Repair fusion bonded coatings as recommended by original applicator. 4. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage -repair coats, in a manner, which will present uniform texture and color -matched appearance. 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. In accordance with Section 0143 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, coating manufacturer's representative shall be present at Site as follows: 1. On first day of application of any coating. 2. Minimum of two additional Site inspection visits as required to resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with, manufacturers' product. 3. As required to verify full cure of coating prior to coated surfaces being placed into immersion service. 3.11 CLEANUP A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute fire hazard in closed metal containers or destroy at end of each day. B. Upon completion of work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from Site or destroy in legal manner. C. Completely remove paint spots, oil, or stains from adjacent surfaces and floors and leave entire job clean. PAINTING PW/WBG/399884 099004-16 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3.12 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this Specification: 1. Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS). 2. Product Data Sheet (PDS). END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 PAINTING JANUARY 12, 2015 099004-17 399884C.GN1 PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET Complete this PSDS for each coating system, include all components of the system (surface preparation, primer, intermediate coats, and finish coats). Include all components of a given coating system on a single PSDS. Paint System Number from Spec.): Paint System Title from Spec.): Coating Supplier: Representative: Surface Preparation: Paint Material Generic Product Name/Number (Proprietary) Min. Coats, Covera e F- PW/WBG/399884 PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET JANUARY 12, 2015 09 90 04 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 PAINT PRODUCT DATA SHEET Complete and attach manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet to this PDS for each product submitted. Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following parameters at temperature (F)/relative humidity: Tem erature/RH 50/50 70/30 90/25 Induction Time max.: Surface Profile Requirements: min.: Pot Life Shelf Life Drying Time Curing Time Min. Recoat Time Max. Recoat Time Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following: Mixing Ratio: Maximum Permissible Thinning: Ambient Temperature Limitations: min.: max.: Surface Temperature Limitations: min.: max.: Surface Profile Requirements: min.: max.: PW/WBG/399884 PAINT PRODUCT DATA SHEET JANUARY 12, 2015 09 90 04 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 SECTION 26 05 02 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED SECTIONS A. Requirements specified within this section apply to Division 26, Electrical. Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual sections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): National Electrical Installation Standards. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Provide manufacturers' data for the following: a. Electrical service components. b. Telephone service components. C. Nameplates, signs, and labels. 1.04 SCOPE OF WORK A. The major tasks part of the slope of work of the electrical subcontractor are summarized herein. However the electrical subcontractor is responsible to perform all electrical work associated with providing a fully operational ozone disinfection system. B. Major tasks are as follows: 1. Modify existing GE Spectra switchboard DP -1 as shown on Drawing E-2. PW/WBG/399884 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 260502-1 399884C.GN1 1.05 2. Furnish, install, wire and terminate following new distribution boards as shown on Drawing E-2: a. DP -2. b. DP -3. C. DP -4. d. Mini power center MPZ with all associated electrical work including lighting. 3. Furnish, install and terminate all raceways, interconnecting power data, fiber-optic and control wiring as shown on the electrical drawings for following Owner furnished equipment: a. Ozone generators #1 and #2. b. Chillers #1 and #2. C. Oxygen concentrators #l, #2 and #3. d. Off gas destruct units #1 and #2. e. Ozone master control MCP -08 including three VFDs. f. Ozone remote I/O panel FP -08-01. 4. Modification of existing panelboard including all interconnecting raceways, cables and termination at the exhaust fan motors. 5. All cables #10 and above shall be aluminum. Raceway and cable sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings. 6. Provide startup and testing support to the ozone system installation contractor as required. 7. Provide Arc Flash safety labels on electrical distribution equipment as specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC. B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label. C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of hazardous area indicated. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/399884 260502-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. The following areas are classified hazardous Class I, Division 1, Group D, due to the potential for occurrence of hazardous concentrations of combustible gases, and for exposure to corrosive environment. Use materials and methods required for such areas. 1. Inside wet well containing wastewater. B. The following areas are classified hazardous, Class I, Division 2, Group D, due to the potential for accumulation of hazardous concentrations of combustible gases, and for exposure to corrosive environment. Use materials and methods required for such areas. 1. Enclosed, below grade valve and metering vaults with closed piping systems containing wastewater. C. The following areas are classified nonhazardous, wet, and corrosive. Use materials and methods required for such areas. 1. Inside of dewatering wet well. 2. Within 10 -foot envelope around ozone generation and disinfection equipment. 3. Areas within Chemical Building. D. The following areas are classified nonhazardous and wet. Use materials and methods required for such areas. 1. Outdoor abovegrade areas not covered above. 2. Equipment Room in UV Disinfection Building. 3. Belowgrade vaults. 4. Screen rooms. E. The following areas are classified as indoor and dry: 1. Administration and Laboratory Building. 2. Electrical Room. F. The following areas are not classified. Use dust -tight and oil -tight NEMA 12 materials and methods. 1. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Areas not covered above. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260502-3 399884C.GN1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 2.02 2.03 2.04 A. Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer. B. Material and equipment installed in heated and ventilated areas shall be capable of continuous operation at their specified ratings within an ambient temperature range of -20 degrees F to 120 degrees F. C. Materials and equipment installed outdoors shall be capable of continuous operation at their specified rating within the ambient temperature range stated in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. D. Equip panels installed outdoors in direct sun with sun shields. EQUIPMENT FINISH A. Manufacturer's standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance with Section 09 90 04, Painting, light gray color finish as approved by Owner. NAMEPLATES A. Material: Laminated plastic. B. Attachment Screws: Stainless steel. C. Color: Black, engraved to a white core. D. Letter Height: 1. Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: inch. 2. Other electrical equipment: 1/4 inch. SIGNS AND LABELS A. Sign size, lettering, and color shall be in accordance with NEMA Z535.4. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/399884 260502-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible for actual location of equipment and devices and for proper routing and support of raceways, subject to approval of Engineer. B. Check approximate locations of light fixtures, switches, electrical outlets, equipment, and other electrical system components shown on Drawings for conflicts with openings, structural members, and components of other systems and equipment having fixed locations. In the event of conflicts, notify Engineer in writing. C. Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise specified. D. Keep openings in boxes and equipment closed during construction. E. Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully perform cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following such work, restore surfaces to original condition. 3.02 ANCHORING AND MOUNTING A. Equipment anchoring and mounting shall be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements for seismic zone criteria given in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. 3.03 COMBINING CIRCUITS INTO COMMON RACEWAY A. Homerun circuits shown on Drawings indicate functional wiring requirements for power and control circuits. Circuits may be combined into common raceways in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Analog control circuits from devices in same general area to same destination. a. No power or AC discrete control circuits shall be combined in same conduit with analog circuits. b. No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC control circuits, fire alarm circuits, paging system circuits shall be combined with power or Class 1 circuits. PW/WBG/399884 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 260502-5 399884C.GN1 C. Analog circuits shall be continuous from source to destination. Do not add TJB, splice, or combine into a multi -pair cable without authorization of Engineer. d. Raceways shall be sized per General Circuit and Raceway schedule and do not exceed40 percent fill. e. Changes shall be documented on record drawings. 2. Discrete control circuits from devices in the same general area to the same destination. a. No power or analog control circuits shall be combined in same conduit with discrete circuits. b. No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC control circuits, fire alarm circuits, and paging system circuits shall be combined with power or Class 1 circuits. C. Raceways shall be sized per the General Circuit and Raceway Schedule and do not exceed40 percent fill. d. Changes shall be documented on record drawings. 3. Power circuits from loads in same general area to same source location (such as: panelboard, switchboard, low voltage motor control center). a. Lighting Circuits: Combine no more than three circuits to a single raceway. Contractor shall be responsible for increasing conduit and conductor size if derating is required by NEC. b. Receptacle Circuits, 120 -Volt Only: Combine no more than three circuits to a single raceway. Contractor shall be responsible for increasing conduit and conductor size if derating is required by NEC. C. All Other Power Circuits: Do not combine power circuits without authorization of Engineer. 3.04 NAMEPLATES, SIGNS, AND LABELS A. Arc Flash Protection Warning Signs: 1. Field mark motor control centers and panelboards to warn qualified persons of potential arc -flash hazards. Locate marking so to be clearly visible to persons before working on energized equipment. 2. Use arc flash hazard boundary, energy level, PPE level and description, shock hazard, bolted fault current, and equipment name from the short circuit, coordination and Arc Flash study specified in Section 26 05 70, Electrical Systems Analysis as basis for warning signs. B. Equipment Nameplates: 1. Provide a nameplate to label electrical equipment including switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, motor starters, transformers, terminal junction boxes, disconnect switches, switches and control stations. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/399884 260502-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2. Switchgear, motor control center, transformer, and terminal junction box nameplates shall include equipment designation. 3. Disconnect switch, starter, and control station nameplates shall include name and number of equipment powered or controlled by that device. 4. Switchboard and panelboard nameplates shall include equipment designation, service voltage, and phases. 3.05 LOAD BALANCE A. Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and distribution equipment. B. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and other equipment where balancing is required. C. When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads, maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that lists final circuit arrangement. 3.06 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices and equipment by removing debris and vacuuming. B. Touchup Paint: 1. Touchup scratches, scrapes and chips on exterior and interior surfaces of devices and equipment with finish matching type, color, and consistency and type of surface of original finish. 2. If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entire equipment in a manner that provides a finish equal to or better than factory finish, that meets requirements of Specification, and is acceptable to Engineer. 3.07 PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATION A. Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects of moisture on insulation and contact surfaces. B. When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at Contractor's convenience in areas where subject to dampness, moisture, dirt or other adverse atmosphere until completion of construction, ensure adequate protection from these atmospheres is provided and acceptable to Engineer. END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 260502-7 399884C.GN1 SECTION 26 05 04 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. A1011/A101IM, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low Alloy and High -Strength Low Alloy Formability. C. E814, Method of Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops. 2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 18, Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors. 4. International Society of Automation (ISA): RP12.06.01, Wiring Practices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation—Part 1: Intrinsic Safety. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit -Breaker Enclosures. C. C12.1 Code for Electricity Metering d. C12.6 Phase -Shifting Devices Used in Metering, Marking and Arrangement of, Terminals for e. CP 1, Shunt Capacitors. f. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts. g. ICS 5, Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. h. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches. b. 248, Standard for Low Voltage Fuses. C. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. PW/WBG/399884 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS JANUARY 12, 2015 AND METHODS 260504-1 399884C.GN1 d. 489, Standard for Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. f. 810, Standard for Capacitors. g. 943, Standard for Ground -Fault Circuit -Interrupters. h. 1059, Standard for Terminal Blocks. i. 1479, Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Provide manufacturers' data for the following: a. Control devices. b. Control relays. C. Circuit breakers. d. Fused switches. e. Nonfused switches. f. Timers. g. Fuses. h. Magnetic contactors. i. Intrinsic safety barriers. j. Firestopping. k. Enclosures: Include enclosure data for products having enclosures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMAL MAGNETIC, LOW VOLTAGE A. General: 1. Type: Molded case. 2. Trip Ratings: 15-800 amps. 3. Voltage Ratings: 120, 240, 277, 480, and 600V ac. 4. Suitable for mounting and operating in any position. 5. NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. B. Operating Mechanism: 1. Overcenter, trip -free, toggle type handle. 2. Quick -make, quick -break action. 3. Locking provisions for padlocking breaker in open position. 4. ON/OFF and TRIPPED indicating positions of operating handle. 5. Operating handle to assume a center position when tripped. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/399884 AND METHODS JANUARY 12, 2015 260504-2 399884C.GN1 C. Trip Mechanism: 1. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. 2. Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X to l OX for frames greater than 100 amps. 3. Two and three pole, common trip. 4. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole. 5. Test button on cover. 6. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise. 7. Do not provide single -pole circuit breakers with handle ties where multi -pole circuit breakers are shown. D. Short Circuit Interrupting Ratings: Equal to, or greater than, available fault current or interrupting rating shown. E. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker as specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection of personnel). Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker. 2. Push -to -test button. F. Magnetic Only Type Breakers: Where shown; instantaneous trip adjustment which simultaneously sets magnetic trip level of each individual pole continuously through a 3X to l OX trip range. G. Accessories: Shunt trip, auxiliary switches, handle lock ON devices, mechanical interlocks, key interlocks, unit mounting bases, double lugs as shown or otherwise required. Shunt trip operators shall be continuous duty rated or have coil -clearing contacts. H. Connections: 1. Supply (line side) at either end. 2. Mechanical wire lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown. 3. Lugs removable/replaceable for breaker frames greater than 100 amperes. 4. Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating breaker or conductor ampacity. 5. Use bolted bus connections, except where bolt -on is not compatible with existing breaker provisions. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260504-3 399884C.GN1 I. Enclosures for Independent Mounting: 1. See Article Enclosures. 2. Service Entrance Use: Breakers in required enclosure and required accessories shall be UL 489 listed. 3. Interlock: Enclosure and switch shall interlock to prevent opening cover with switch in the ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel. 2.02 NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE A. NEMA KS 1. B. Quick -make, quick -break, motor rated, load -break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions. C. Lugs: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity. D. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures. E. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel. 2.03 FUSE, 250 -VOLT AND 600 -VOLT A. Power Distribution, General: 1. Current -limiting, with 200,000 ampere rms interrupting rating. 2. Provide to fit mountings specified with switches. 3. UL 248. B. Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 1 Amp to 600 Amps: 1. Class: RK -1. 2. Type: Dual element, with time delay. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bussmann; Types LPS-RK (600 volts) and LPN -RK (250 volts). b. Littelfuse; Types LLS -RK (600 volts) and LLN-RK (250 volts). C. Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 601 Amps to 6,000 Amps: 1. Class: L. 2. Double O -rings and silver links. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bussmann; Type KRP-C. b. Littelfuse, Inc.; Type KLPC. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/399884 AND METHODS JANUARY 12, 2015 260504-4 3 99884C.GN 1 D. Cable Limiters: 1. 600V or less; crimp to copper cable, bolt to bus or terminal pad. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Bussmann; K Series. E. Ferrule: 1. 600V or less, rated for applied voltage, small dimension. 2. Ampere Ratings: 1/10 amp to 30 amps. 3. Dual -element time -delay, time -delay, or nontime-delay as required. 4. Provide with blocks or holders as indicated and suitable for location and use. 5. Manufacturers: a. Bussmann. b. Littlefuse, Inc. 2.04 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH A. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 Designation A600. B. Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard. C. Indicating Light: Push -to -test. D. Pushbutton Color: 1. ON or START: Black. 2. OFF or STOP: Red. E. Pushbutton and selector switch lockable in OFF position where indicated. F. Legend Plate: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Engraving: Enamel filled in high contrasting color. 3. Text Arrangement: 11-character/spaces on one line, 14-character/spaces on each of two lines, as required, indicating specific function. 4. Letter Height: 7/64 -inch. G. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Heavy -Duty, Oil -Tight Type: a. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P. b. Square D Co.; Type T. C. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type 10250T. PW/WBG/399884 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS JANUARY 12, 2015 AND METHODS 260504-5 399884C.GN1 2.05 2. Heavy -Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion -Resistant Type: a. Square D Co.; Type SK. b. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P. C. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type E34. d. Crouse -Hinds; Type NCS. TERMINAL BLOCK, 600 VOLTS A. UL 486E and UL 1059. B. Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes. C. Capable of termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment, panels, or boxes. D. Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke. E. Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity metal. F. Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal. G. Current bar shall ensure vibration -proof connection. H. Terminals: 1. Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than stripping. 2. Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space. 3. Individual, rail mounted. I. Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field -marked tags. J. Manufacturers: 1. Weidmuller, Inc. 2. Ideal. 3. Electrovert USA Corp. 2.06 TIME DELAY RELAY A. Industrial relay with contacts rated 5 amps continuous, 3,600VA make, 360VA break. B. NEMA ICS 2 Designation: B150 (150 volts). BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/399884 AND METHODS JANUARY 12, 2015 260504-6 2.07 I 2.09 399884C.GN1 C. Solid-state electronic, field convertible ON/OFF delay. D. One normally open and one normally closed contact (minimum). E. Repeat accuracy plus or minus 2 percent. F. Timer adjustment from 1 second to 60 seconds, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. G. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Square D Co.; Type F. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. General Electric Co. RESET TIMER A. Drive: Synchronous motor, solenoid -operated clutch. B. Mounting: Semiflush panel. C. Contacts: 10 amps, 120 volts. D. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Eagle Signal Controls; Bulletin 125. 2. Automatic Timing and Controls; Bulletin 305. ELAPSED TIME METER A. Drive: Synchronous motor. B. Range: 0 hour to 99,999.9 hours, nonreset type. C. Mounting: Semiflush panel. D. Manufacturers and Products: 1. General Electric Co.; Type 240, 2 -1/2 -inch Big Look. 2. Eagle Signal Controls; Bulletin 705. PHASE MONITOR RELAY A. Features: 1. Voltage and phase monitor relay shall drop out on low voltage, voltage unbalance, loss of phase, or phase reversal. PW/WBG/399884 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS JANUARY 12, 2015 AND METHODS 260504-7 399884C.GN1 2. Contacts: Single -pole, double -throw, 10 amperes, 120/240V ac. Where additional contacts are shown or required, provide magnetic control relays. 3. Adjustable trip and time delay settings. 4. Transient Protection: 1,OOOV ac. 5. Mounting: Multipin plug-in socket base. B. Manufacturer and Product: Automatic Timing and Controls; SLD Series, or approved other. 2.10 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS A. Carbon Steel Framing Channel: 1. Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12 -gauge minimum, ASTM A101 l/A1011M, Grade 33. 2. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. B. Paint Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with electro -deposited rust inhibiting acrylic or epoxy paint. C. PVC Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with 40 -mil polyvinyl chloride coating. D. Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel, 12 -gauge minimum. E. Extruded Aluminum Framing Channel: 1. Material: Extruded from Type 6063-T6 aluminum alloy. 2. Fittings fabricated from Alloy 5052-H32. F. Nonmetallic Framing Channel: 1. Material: Fire retardant, fiber reinforced vinyl ester resin. 2. Channel fitting of same material as channel. 3. Nuts and bolts of long glass fiber reinforced polyurethane. G. Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc. 2. Unistrut Corp. 3. Aickinstrut. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/399884 AND METHODS JANUARY 12, 2015 260504-8 399884C.GN1 2.11 SWITCHBOARD MATTING A. Provide matting having a breakdown of 20 kV minimum. B. Manufacturer: U.S. Mat and Rubber Company. 2.12 FIRESTOPS A. General: 1. Provide UL 1479 classified hourly fire -rating equal to, or greater than, the assembly penetrated. 2. Prevent the passage of cold smoke, toxic fumes, and water before and after exposure to flame. 3. Sealants and accessories shall have fire -resistance ratings as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E814, by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Firestop System: 1. Formulated for use in through -penetration firestopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire -rated walls and floors. 2. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material: 3M Brand Fire Barrier Caulk CP25, Putty 303, Wrap/Strip FS 195, Composite Sheet CS 195 and Penetration Sealing Systems 7902 and 7904 Series. 3. Two -Part, Foamed -In -Place, Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning Corp. Fire Stop Foam, General Electric Co. Pensil 851. 4. Fire Stop Devices: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes, for raceway and cable fittings. 2.13 ENCLOSURES A. Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely painted using an electrodeposition process so interior and exterior surfaces as well as bolted structural joints have a complete finish coat on and between them. B. Color: Manufacturer's standard color (gray) baked -on enamel, unless otherwise shown. C. Barriers: Provide metal barriers within enclosures to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260504-9 399884C.GN1 D. Enclosure Selections: Except as shown otherwise, provide electrical enclosures according to the following table: ENCLOSURES Location Finish Environment NEMA 250 Type Indoor Finished Dry 1 Indoor Unfinished Dry 1 Indoor Unfinished Industrial Use 12 Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet 4 Indoor and Outdoor Any Denoted "WP" 3R Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet and Corrosive 4X 304 Stainless Steel Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet, Dust or Oil 13 Indoor and Outdoor Any Hazardous Gas 7 Indoor and Outdoor Any Hazardous Dust 9 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH A. Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, oil -tight type in nonhazardous, indoor, dry locations, including motor control centers, control panels, and individual stations. B. Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, watertight and corrosion -resistant type in nonhazardous, outdoor, or normally wet areas. 3.03 INDUSTRIAL CAPACITORS A. Provide suitable hangers or mounting brackets for wall or ceiling mounting. 3.04 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL A. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment, raceway, and cable tray systems. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/399884 AND METHODS JANUARY 12, 2015 260504-10 399884C.GN1 B. Channel Type: 1. Interior, Wet or Dry (Noncorrosive) Locations: a. Aluminum Raceway: Extruded aluminum. b. PVC -Coated Conduit: PVC coated. C. Steel Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Carbon steel or paint coated. 2. Interior, Corrosive (Wet or Dry) Locations: a. Aluminum Raceway: Extruded aluminum. b. PVC Conduit: Type 316 stainless steel or nonmetallic. C. PVC -Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered: Type 316 stainless steel, nonmetallic, or PVC -coated steel. 3. Outdoor, Noncorrosive Locations: a. Steel Raceway: Carbon steel or paint coated framing channel, except where mounted on aluminum handrail, then use aluminum framing channel. b. Aluminum Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Aluminum framing channel. 4. Outdoor Corrosive Locations: a. PVC Conduit: Type 316 stainless steel or nonmetallic. b. Aluminum Raceway: Aluminum. C. PVC -Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered: Type 316 stainless steel, nonmetallic, or PVC coated steel. C. Paint cut ends prior to installation with the following: 1. Carbon Steel Channel: Zinc -rich primer. 2. Painted Channel: Rust -inhibiting epoxy or acrylic paint. 3. Nonmetallic Channel: Epoxy resin sealer. 4. PVC -Coated Channel: PVC patch. 3.05 SWITCHBOARD MATTING A. Install 36 -inch width at switchgear, switchboard, motor control centers, and panelboards. B. Matting shall run full length of all sides of equipment that have operator controls or afford access to devices. 3.06 FIRESTOPS A. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency. PW/WBG/399884 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS JANUARY 12, 2015 AND METHODS 26 05 04-11 399884C.GN1 B. Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide firestops with fire -resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. END OF SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS PW/WBG/399884 AND METHODS JANUARY 12, 2015 260504-12 SECTION 26 05 05 CONDUCTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES 399884C.GN1 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC): CS 8, Specification for Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 kV through 46 W. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. C. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric -Lay -Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium -Hard, or Soft. d. B496, Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric - Lay -Stranded Copper Conductors. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating -Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV Through 500 W. b. 386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V. C. 404, Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 V to 500000 V. 4. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association, Inc. (ICEA): a. S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification. b. S-73-532, Standard for Control Thermocouple Extensions and Instrumentation Cables. C. T-29-520, Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests with Theoretical Heat Input of 210,000 Btu/hour. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): a. CC 1, Electric Power Connectors for Substations. b. WC 57, Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and Instrumentation Cables. C. WC 70, Standard for Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy. d. WC 71, Standard for Nonshielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts for Use in the Distribution of Electric Energy. e. WC 74, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy. PW/WBG/399884 CONDUCTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 260505-1 399884C.GN 1 1.02 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air -Handling Spaces. 7. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): TIA-568-C, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 13, Standard for Safety for Power -Limited Circuit Cables. b. 44, Standard for Safety for Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables. C. 62, Standard for Safety for Flexible Cord and Cables. d. 486A -486B, Standard for Safety for Wire Connectors. e. 486C, Standard for Safety for Splicing Wire Connectors. f. 510, Standard for Safety for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape. g. 854, Standard for Safety for Service -Entrance Cables. h. 1072, Standard for Safety for Medium -Voltage Power Cables. i. 1277, Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical -Fiber Members. j. 1569, Standard for Safety for Metal -Clad Cables. k. 1581, Standard for Safety for Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Wire and cable. b. Wire and cable accessories. C. Cable fault detection system. 2. Manufactured Wire Systems: a. Product data. b. Rating information. C. Dimensional drawings. d. Special fittings. 3. Busway: a. Product data. b. Rating information. C. Dimensional drawings. d. Special fitting. e. Equipment interface information for equipment to be connected to busways. 4. Cable Pulling Calculations: Ensure submitted and reviewed before cable installation. CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/399884 260505-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Conductors above the size of #10 AWG shall be aluminum. Conductors #10 and smaller shall be copper. Raceway and cable sizes are noted on the Drawings. 2.02 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Type: 1. 120 -Volt and 277 -Volt Lighting, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 2. 120 -Volt Receptacle Circuits, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 3. All Other Circuits: Stranded aluminum. C. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2, except for sizes No. 6 and larger, with XHHW-2 insulation. D. Flexible Cords and Cables: 1. Type SOW -A/50 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation in accordance with UL 62. 2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC 70. E. Aluminum Conductors: Compact stranding, aluminum alloy with XHHW-2 insulation. PW/WBG/399884 CONDUCTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 260505-3 399884C.GN1 2.03 600 -VOLT RATED CABLE A. General: 1. Type TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray Flame Test at 70,000 Btu per hour, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13 meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725. 2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark. 3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit. 4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet locations. 5. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil -resistant. B. Type 3, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements. 1. Outer Jacket: 45 -mil nominal thickness. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35 -mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.31 -inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven -strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. b. 20 AWG, seven -strand tinned copper drain wire. C. Insulation: 15 -mil nominal PVC. d. Jacket: 4 -mil nominal nylon. e. Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red. 5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. C. Belden. C. Type 4, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements. 1. Outer Jacket: 45 -mil nominal. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35 -mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.32 -inch nominal OD. CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/399884 260505-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 4. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven -strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. b. 20 AWG, seven -strand, tinned copper drain wire. C. Insulation: 15 -mil nominal PVC. d. Jacket: 4 -mil nylon. e. Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and blue. 5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. C. Belden. 2.04 300 -VOLT RATED CABLE A. General: 1. Type PLTC, meeting requirements of UL 13 and NFPA 70, Article 725. 2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark. 3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit. 4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 105 degrees C. 5. Passes Vertical Tray Flame Test. 6. Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil -resistant. B. Type 20, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57. 1. Outer Jacket: 35 -mil nominal. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35 -mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.26 -inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven -strand concentric, ASTM B8. b. 20 AWG, seven -strand tinned copper drain wire. C. Insulation: 15 -mil PVC. d. Color Code: Pair conductors black and white. 5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. PW/WBG/399884 CONDUCTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 260505-5 399884C.GN1 C. Type 21, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting requirements of NEMA WC 57. 1. Outer Jacket: 35 -mil nominal thickness. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35 -mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.28 -inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven -strand concentric, ASTM B8. b. 20 AWG, seven -strand tinned copper drain wire. C. Insulation: 15 -mil PVC. d. Color Code: Triad conductors; black, red, and white. 5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. 2.05 SPECIAL CABLES A. Type 30, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Telephone and Data Cable, 300V: 1. Category 6 UTP, UL listed, and third party verified to comply with TIA/EIA 568-C Category 6 requirements. 2. Suitable for high speed network applications including gigabit ethernet and video. Cable shall be interoperable with other standards compliant products and shall be backward compatible with Category 5 and Category 5e. 3. Provide four each individually twisted pair, 23 AWG conductors, with FEP insulation and blue PVC jacket. 4. NFPA 70 Plenum (CMP) rated; comply with flammability plenum requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 262. 5. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1 -inch minimum at a temperature of minus 20 degrees C maximum without jacket or insulation cracking. 6. Manufacturer and Product: Belden; 7852A. B. Type 31, Data Highway Cable: 1. Meet or exceed electrical characteristics of Allen-Bradley Catalog No. 1770 -CD. 2. Approved by Allen-Bradley for use with A -B programmable logic controller systems. 3. Outer Jacket: Blue PVC. 4. Shield: 1.35 -mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 5. Drain: 55 percent tinned copper braid and drain wire. CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/399884 260505-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 2.06 2.07 399884C.GN1 6. Dimension: 0.243 -inch nominal OD. 7. Conductors: a. One pair 20 AWG, seven -strand tinned copper. b. Insulation: Polyethylene. C. Color Code: Blue and clear. S. Manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley. b. Belden. C. Fiber -Optic Cable: Fiber-optic cable shall be multimode 62.5 micron cable as manufactured by Belden or equal. GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE or THHN/THWN, insulation. B. Direct Buried: Bare stranded copper. ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Tape: 1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7 -mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33+, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510. 2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5 -mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 88. 3. Arc and Fireproofing: a. 30 -mil, elastomer. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) 3M; Scotch Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass cloth tapebinder. 2) Plymouth; 53 Plyarc, with 77 Plyglas glass cloth tapebinder. B. Identification Devices: 1. Sleeve: a. Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine -printed black markings. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Raychem; Type D -SCE or ZH-SCE. 2) Brady, Type 3PS. PW/WBG/399884 CONDUCTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 260505-7 399884C.GN 1 2. Heat Bond Marker: a. Transparent thermoplastic heat bonding film with acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive. b. Self -laminating protective shield over text. C. Machine printed black text. d. Manufacturer and Product: 3M Co.; Type SCS -HB. 3. Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stamped on plate. 4. Tie -On Cable Marker Tags: a. Chemical -resistant white tag. b. Size: 1/2 inch by 2 inches. C. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type CM -SCE. 5. Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat -shrink sleeve, 2 -inch minimum. C. Connectors and Terminations: 1. Nylon, Self -Insulated Crimp Connectors: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulug. 3) ILSCO. 2. Nylon, Self -Insulated, Crimp Locking -Fork, Torque -Type Terminator: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. b. Seamless. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulink. 3) ILSCO; ILSCONS. 3. Self -Insulated, Freespring Wire Connector (Wire Nuts): a. UL 486C. b. Plated steel, square wire springs. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts. 2) Ideal; Twister. 4. Self -Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector: a. Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel. b. Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel. C. Manufacturers: 1) 3M Co. 2) Thomas & Betts. 3) Marrette. CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/399884 260505-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 D. Cable Lugs: 1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1. 2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal. 3. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Color -Keyed. 2) Burndy; Hydent. 3) ILSCO. 4. Uninsulated, Bolted, Two -Way Connectors and Terminators: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Locktite. 2) Burndy; Quiklug. 3) ILSCO. E. Cable Ties: 1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY -RAP. F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation: 1. Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Single wall for insulation and strain relief. 3. Dual Wall, adhesive sealant lined, for sealing and corrosion resistance. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON. b. Raychem; RNF-100 and ES -2000. 2.08 PULLING COMPOUND A. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-based lubricant; UL listed. B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead - covered wire and cable. C. Approved for intended use by cable manufacturer. D. Suitable for zinc -coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass raceways. PW/WBG/399884 CONDUCTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 260505-9 399884C.GN 1 E. Manufacturers: 1. Ideal Co. 2. Polywater, Inc. 3. Cable Grip Co. 2.09 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS A. System Rating: 1. 20 amperes load -carrying capacity each phase with final assemblies consisting of maximum of three-phase conductors. 2. Composition: Type MC cable with 90 degrees C insulation and stranded copper conductors. B. Cable Configuration: Three, single-phase, five -wire circuit with standard color wire coding: 1. 208/120 Volt: Black, red, blue, white, green. 2. 480/277 Volt: Brown, orange, yellow, white, green. C. Locking Mechanism: Latch/strike with voltage clearly marked on latch. D. NFPA 262 listed for use in air handling plenums, listed to connect or disconnect under load, and manufactured in accordance with NFPA 70, Article No. 604. 2.10 WARNING TAPE A. As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Conductor and cable sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings. CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/399884 260505-10 JANUARY 12, 2015 3.02 399884C.GN1 C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. D. Terminate conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated. E. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A -486B for copper conductors and aluminum conductors. F. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center -to -center spacing as required by equipment terminals. G. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means, bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on center. H. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or cables. I. Concrete -Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors, pull through each raceway a mandrel approximately 1/4 inch smaller than raceway inside diameter. J. Cable Tray Installation: 1. Install wire and cable parallel and straight in tray. 2. Bundle, in groups, wire and cable of same voltage having a common routing and destination; use cable ties, at maximum intervals of 8 feet. 3. Clamp cable bundles prior to making end termination connections. 4. Separate cables of different voltage rating in same cable tray with barriers. 5. Fasten wires, cables, and bundles to tray with nylon cable straps at the following maximum intervals: a. Horizontal Runs: 20 feet. b. Vertical Runs: 5 feet. POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: 1. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide. 2. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors. PW/WBG/399884 CONDUCTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 260505-11 399884C.GN1 3. Colors: System Conductor Color All Systems Equipment Green Grounding 240/120 Volts, Grounded Neutral White Single -Phase, Three- One Hot Leg Black Wire Other Hot Leg Red 208Y/120 Volts, Grounded Neutral White Three -Phase, Four- Phase A Black Wire Phase B Red Phase C Blue 240/120 Volts, Three- Grounded Neutral White Phase, Four -Wire, Phase A Black Delta, Center Tap, High (wild) Leg Orange Ground on Single- Phase C Blue Phase 480Y/277 Volts, Grounded Neutral White Three -Phase, Four- Phase A Brown Wire Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Note: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation. 4. Tracer: Outer covering of white with identifiable colored strip, other than green, in accordance with NFPA 70. B. Conductors Above 600 Volts: 1. Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide. 2. Colors: a. Grounded Neutral: White. b. Phase A: Brown. C. Phase B: Orange. d. Phase C: Yellow. 3.03 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify power, instrumentation, and control conductor circuits at each termination, and in accessible locations such as manholes, handholes, panels, switchboards, motor control centers, pull boxes, and terminal boxes. CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/399884 260505-12 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 B. Circuits Appearing in Circuit Schedules: Identify using circuit schedule designations. C. Circuits Not Appearing in Circuit Schedules: 1. Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit. 2. Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one circuit, add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to make it unique. D. Method: 1. Conductors 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bond markers. 2. Cables and Conductors 2 AWG and Larger: a. Identify with marker plates or tie -on cable marker tags. b. Attach with nylon tie cord. 3. Taped -on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted. 3.04 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring in lighting and receptacle circuits. B. Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distribution conductors 6 AWG and larger, unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer. C. Connections and Terminations: 1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. Wire nuts are not allowed on stranded conductors. 2. Install nylon self -insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation and control, circuit conductors. 3. Install self -insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection of power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller. 4. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors 4 AWG through 2/0 AWG. 5. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit conductors 3/0 AWG and larger. 6. Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit conductors 10 AWG and larger. 7. Place no more than one conductor in any single -barrel pressure connection. PW/WBG/399884 CONDUCTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 260505-13 399884C.GN1 8. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer. 9. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used. 10. Where aluminum conductors are provided, apply oxide -inhibiting compound at joints and terminations. 11. Compression Lugs: a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shall provide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until crimp is complete. b. Install connectors designed for aluminum conductors utilizing compression barrel termination of conductor and terminating in dual rated lug. C. Do not use plier type crimpers. D. Do not use soldered mechanical joints. E. Splices and Terminations: 1. Insulate uninsulated connections. 2. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape or single wall heat shrink. 3. Outdoors, Dry Locations: Use flame retardant, cold- and weather -resistant tape or single wall heat shrink. 4. Below Grade and Wet or Damp Locations: Use dual wall heat shrink. F. Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps. G. Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers: 1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure. 2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal, remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors. H. Control and Instrumentation Wiring: 1. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated, locking -fork compression lugs. 2. Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions. 3. Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips. 4. Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made under Section 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled connections. CONDUCTORS PW/WBG/399884 260505-14 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 5. Cable Protection: a. Under Infinite Access Floors: May install without bundling. b. All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex conduit under floor or grouped into bundles at least 1/2 inch in diameter. C. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables. d. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over shield. I. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install minimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet in other assemblies. 3.05 FIBER-OPTIC CABLE A. Coordinate installation, testing and termination requirements with Specification Section 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems. 3.06 CONDUCTOR ARC AND FIREPROOFING A. Wrap conductors of same circuit entering from separate conduit together as single cable. B. Follow tape manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Secure tape at intervals of 5 feet with bands of tapebinder. Each band to consist of a minimum of two wraps directly over each other. 3.07 BUSWAY A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70. B. Maximum Support Spacing: 10 feet. END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 CONDUCTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 260505-15 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES 399884C.GN1 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): HB, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. C. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. d. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. e. D149, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies. 3. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 569B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 4. National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA): Installation standards. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). C. C80.3, Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). d. C80.5, Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC). e. C80.6, Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC). f. RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. g. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. h. TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. i. TC 6, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. j. TC 14, Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. k. VE 1, Metallic Cable Tray Systems. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 RACEWAY AND BOXES 260533-1 399884C.GN1 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 1, Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 5, Standard for Safety for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings. C. 6, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit — Steel. d. 6A, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit — Aluminum, Red Brass and Stainless. e. 360, Standard for Safety for Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. f. 514B, Standard for Safety for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. g. 651, Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. h. 651A, Standard for Safety for Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit. i. 797, Standard for Safety for Electrical Metallic Tubing — Steel. j. 870, Standard for Safety for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. k. 1242, Standard for Safety for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit — Steel. 1. 1660, Standard for Safety for Liquid -Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. In. 1684, Standard for Safety for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. n. 2024, Standard for Safety for Optical Fiber and Communication Cable Raceway. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Literature: a. Flexible metal, liquid -tight conduit. b. Wireways. C. Surface metal raceway. d. Device boxes for use in hazardous areas. e. Junction and pull boxes used at or below grade. f. Large junction and pull boxes. g. Terminal junction boxes. 2. Precast Manholes and Handholes: a. Dimensional drawings and descriptive literature. b. Traffic loading calculations. C. Accessory information. Telecommunications Pathway Cable Tray: a. Dimensional drawings, calculations, and descriptive information. b. NEMA load/span designation and how it was selected. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Support span length and pounds -per -foot actual and future cable loading at locations, with safety factor used. d. Location and magnitude of maximum simple beam deflection of tray for loading specified. e. Layout drawings and list of accessories being provided. 4. Cable Tray Systems: a. Dimensional drawings, calculations, and descriptive information. b. NEMA load/span designation and how it was selected. C. Support span length and pounds -per -foot actual and future cable loading at locations, with safety factor used. d. Location and magnitude of maximum simple beam deflection of tray for loading specified. e. Layout drawings and list of accessories being provided. 5. Equipment and machinery proposed for bending metal conduit. 6. Method for bending PVC conduit less than 30 degrees. 7. Conduit Layout: a. Provide drawings for conduit installations underground and concealed conduits including, but not limited to ductbanks, under floor slabs, concealed in floor slabs, and concealed in walls. b. Provide plan and section showing arrangement and location of conduit and duct bank required for: 1) Low and medium voltage feeder and branch circuits. 2) Instrumentation and control systems. 3) Communications systems. 4) Empty conduit for future use. C. Electronic CAD with scale not greater than 1 inch equals 20 feet. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 0145 33, Special Inspection and Testing. 2. Manufacturer's certification of training for PVC -coated rigid galvanized steel conduit installer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 RACEWAY AND BOXES 260533-3 399884C.GN1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.3 and UL 797. 2. Material: Hot -dip galvanized with chromated and lacquered protective layer. B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.5 and UL 6A. 2. Material: Type 6063, copper -free aluminum alloy. C. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. 2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors. D. PVC Schedule 80 Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. 2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors. E. Flexible Metal, Liquid -Tight Conduit: 1. UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors. 2. Material: Galvanized steel with extruded PVC jacket. F. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of UL 1. 2. Material: Galvanized steel. G. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid -Tight Conduit: 1. Material: PVC core with fused flexible PVC jacket. 2. UL 1660 listed for: a. Dry Conditions: 80 degrees C insulated conductors. b. Wet Conditions: 60 degrees C insulated conductors. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Carlon; Carflex or X -Flex. b. T & B; Xtraflex LTC or EFC. H. Innerduct: Resistant to spread of fire, per requirements of UL 2024. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.02 FITTINGS A. Electric Metallic Tubing: 1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Type: Steel body and locknuts with steel or malleable iron compression nuts. Set screw and drive -on fittings not permitted. 3. Electro zinc -plated inside and out. 4. Raintight. 5. Coupling Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type 95T. b. Crouse -Hinds. C. Thomas & Betts. 6. Connector Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type ETP. b. Crouse -Hinds. C. Thomas & Betts. B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: 1. General: a. Meet requirements of UL 514B. b. Type: Threaded, copper -free. Set screw fittings not permitted. 2. Insulated Bushing: a. Material: Cast aluminum, with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type AB. 3. Grounding Bushing: a. Material: Cast aluminum with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees, with solderless lugs. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type ABLG. 4. Conduit Hub: a. Material: Cast aluminum, with insulated throat. b. UL listed for use in wet locations. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) O-Z/Gedney; Type CHA. 2) Thomas & Betts; Series 370AL. 3) Meyers; Series SA. 5. Conduit Bodies: a. Manufacturers and Products (For Normal Conditions): 1) Appleton; Form 85 threaded unilets. 2) Crouse -Hinds; Mark 9 or Form 7 -SA threaded condulets. 3) Killark; Series O electrolets. b. Manufacturers (For Hazardous Locations): 1) Appleton. PW/WBG/399884 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 12, 2015 260533-5 399884C.GN1 C. 0 E. 2) Crouse -Hinds. 3) Killark. 6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer. 7. Conduit Sealing Fitting: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Type EYF-AL or EYM-AL. 2) Crouse -Hinds; Type EYS-SA or EZS-SA. 3) Killark; Type EY or Type EYS. 8. Drain Seal: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Type EYDM-A. 2) Crouse -Hinds; Type EYD-SA or Type EZD-SA. 9. Drain/Breather Fitting: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Type ECDB. 2) Crouse -Hinds; ECD. 10. Expansion Fitting: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Deflection/Expansion Movement: Steel City; Type DF -A. 2) Expansion Movement Only: Steel City; Type AF -A. 11. Cable Sealing Fittings: a. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit. b. Bushing: Neoprene at connector entry. C. Manufacturer and Product: Appleton; CG -S. PVC Conduit and Tubing: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 3. 2. Type: PVC, slip-on. Flexible Metal, Liquid -Tight Conduit: 1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing rated for 105 degrees C. 2. Insulated throat and sealing O -rings. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Thomas & Betts; Series 5331. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series 4Q. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Body: Galvanized malleable iron. 3. Throat: Nylon insulated. 4. 1-1 /4 -Inch Conduit and Smaller: One screw body. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 5. 1 -1/2 -Inch Conduit and Larger: Two screw body. 6. Manufacturer and Product: Appleton; Series 7400. F. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid -Tight Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Type: High strength plastic body, complete with lock nut, O-ring, threaded ferrule, sealing ring, and compression nut. 3. Body/compression nut (gland) design to ensure high mechanical pullout strength and watertight seal. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Carlon; Type LT. b. O-Z/Gedney; Type 4Q -P. C. Thomas & Betts; Series 6300. G. Flexible Coupling, Hazardous Locations: 1. Approved for use in atmosphere involved. 2. Rating: Watertight and UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1 and 2 areas. 3. Outer bronze braid and an insulating liner. 4. Conductivity equal to a similar length of rigid metal conduit. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Crouse -Hinds; Type ECGJH or Type ECLK. b. Appleton; EXGJH or EXLK. H. Watertight Entrance Seal Device: 1. New Construction: a. Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring, pressure ring, grommet seal, and pressure clamp. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type FSK or Type WSK, as required. 2. Cored -Hole Application: a. Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring, and membrane clamp. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Series CSM. 2.03 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc -plated or cadmium -plated. B. Cast Metal: 1. Box: Malleable iron. 2. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, malleable iron, with stainless steel screws. PW/W13G/399884 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 12, 2015 260533-7 [W-99►I1 3. Hubs: Threaded. 4. Lugs: Cast Mounting. 5. Manufacturers and Products, Nonhazardous Locations: a. Crouse -Hinds; Type FS or Type FD. b. Appleton; Type FS or Type FD. C. Killark. 6. Manufacturers and Products, Hazardous Locations: a. Crouse -Hinds; Type GUA or Type EAJ. b. Appleton; Type GR. C. Cast Aluminum: 1. Material: a. Box: Cast, copper -free aluminum. b. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, cast copper -free aluminum with stainless steel screws. 2. Hubs: Threaded. 3. Lugs: Cast mounting. 4. Manufacturers and Products, Nonhazardous Locations: a. Crouse -Hinds; Type FS -SA or Type FD -SA. b. Appleton; Type FS or Type FD. C. Killark. 5. Manufacturers and Products, Hazardous Locations: a. Crouse -Hinds; Type GUA-SA. b. Appleton; Type GR. D. PVC -Coated Cast Metal: 1. Type: One-piece. 2. Material: Malleable iron, cast ferrous metal, or cast aluminum. 3. Coating: a. Exterior Surfaces: 40 -mil PVC. b. Interior Surfaces: 2 -mil urethane. 4. Manufacturers: a. Robroy Industries. b. Ocal. E. Nonmetallic: 1. Box: PVC. 2. Cover: PVC, weatherproof, with stainless steel screws. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Carlon; Type FS or Type FD, with Type E98 or Type E96 covers. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Outlet Box Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article Outlet and Device Boxes. B. Conduit Bodies Used as Junction Boxes: As specified under Article Fittings. C. Large Sheet Steel Box: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Box: Code -gauge, galvanized steel. 3. Cover: Full access, screw type. 4. Machine Screws: Corrosion -resistant. D. Large Cast Metal Box: 1. NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Box: Cast malleable iron, with drilled and tapped conduit entrances and exterior mounting lugs. 3. Cover: Hinged screws. 4. Gasket: Neoprene. 5. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Manufacturers and Products, Surface Mounted Nonhinged Type: a. Crouse -Hinds; Series W. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series Y. 7. Manufacturer and Product, Surface Mounted, Hinged Type: O-Z/Gedney; Series YW. 8. Manufacturers and Products, Recessed Type: a. Crouse -Hinds; Type WJBF. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series YR. E. Large Cast Aluminum Box: 1. NEMA 250 Type 4. 2. Box: Cast copper -free aluminum, with drilled and tapped conduit entrances and exterior mounting lugs. 3. Cover: Nonhinged. 4. Gasket: Neoprene. 5. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Manufacturers and Products, Surface Mounted Type: a. Crouse -Hinds; Series W -SA. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series YS -A, YL -A. C. Killark. PW/WBG/399884 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 12, 2015 260533-9 399884C.GN1 F. Large Stainless Steel Box: 1. NEMA 250 Type 4X. 2. Box: 14 -gauge, ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 stainless steel, with white enamel painted interior mounting panel. 3. Cover: Hinged with screws. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers: a. Hoffinan Engineering Co. b. Robroy Industries. C. Wiegman. G. Large Steel Box: 1. NEMA 250 Type 3R. 2. Box: 12 -gauge steel, with white enamel painted interior and gray primed exterior, over phosphated surfaces. Provide gray finish as approved by Owner. 3. Cover: Hinged with screws. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Robroy Industries. C. Wiegman. H. Large Nonmetallic Box: 1. NEMA 250 Type 4X. 2. Box: High -impact, fiberglass -reinforced polyester or engineered thermoplastic, with stability to high heat. 3. Cover: Hinged with screws. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Conduit hubs and mounting lugs. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Crouse -Hinds; Type NJB. b. Carlon; Series N, C, or H. C. Robroy Industries. 2.05 TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET A. Material: Code -gauge galvanized steel box with hinged doors and 3/4 -inch fire-resistant plywood backboard, meeting requirements of telephone service provider. B. Finish: Provide gray finish as approved by Owner. C. Minimum Size: 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-10 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.06 TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLET A. Provide outlet boxes and cover plates meeting requirements of TIA 569B. 2.07 TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX A. Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown. B. Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer. C. Terminal Blocks: 1. Separate connection point for each conductor entering or leaving box. 2. Spare Terminal Points: 25 percent, minimum. 2.08 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. General: 1. Meet requirements of UL 5. 2. Material: Two-piece, code -gauge steel. 3. Finish: Factory applied rust inhibiting primer and gray semi -gloss finish suitable for field painting. 4. Configuration: Single, 1 -17/32 -inch by 2 -3/4 -inch section, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fittings and Accessories: 1. Wire clips at 30 inches on center. 2. Couplings, cover clips, supporting clips, ground clamps, and elbows as required; to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Outlets: 1. Provide bracket or device covers as required to support wiring devices indicated. 2. Wiring Devices and Device Plates: In accordance with Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices. 3. Manufacturers: a. The Wiremold Co. b. Walker. 2.09 METAL WIREWAYS A. Meet requirements of UL 870. B. Type: Steel -enclosed, lay -in type. PW/WBG/399884 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 12, 2015 26 05 33 - 11 399884C.GN1 C. Cover: Removable, screw type. D. Rating: Outdoor raintight. E. Finish: Rust inhibiting phosphatizing primer and gray baked enamel. F. Hardware: Plated to prevent corrosion; screws installed toward the inside protected by spring nuts or otherwise guarded to prevent wire insulation damage. G. Knockouts: Without knockouts, unless otherwise indicated. H. Manufacturers: 1. Circle AW. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D. 2.10 NONMETALLIC WIREWAY A. Rating: Outdoor, corrosion resistant, raintight, NEMA Type 12 and Type 3R. B. Type: Fiberglass -enclosed, with removable cover. C. Captivated, corrosion -resistant cover screws. D. Oil -resistant gaskets. E. Meet UL cold impact test to minus 35 degrees C. F. Manufacturer: Hoffinan. 2.11 ACCESSORIES A. Duct Bank Spacers: 1. Modular Type: a. Nonmetallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes. b. Suitable for all types of conduit. C. Manufacturers: 1) Underground Device, Inc. 2) Carlon. 2. Template Type: a. Nonmetallic, custom made one-piece spacers. b. Suitable for all types of conduit. C. Material: HDPE or polypropylene, 1/2 -inch minimum thickness. d. Conduit openings cut 1 inch larger than conduit outside diameter. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-12 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 e. Additional openings for stake -down, rebar, and concrete flow through as required. f. Manufacturer and Product: SP Products; Quik Duct. B. Identification Devices: 1. Raceway Tags: a. Material: Permanent, nylon. b. Shape: Round. C. Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved. d. Tags relying on adhesives or taped -on markers not permitted. 2. Warning Tape: a. Material: Polyethylene, 4 -mil gauge with detectable strip. b. Color: Red. C. Width: Minimum 3 inches. d. Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below tape. e. Identifying Letters: Minimum 1 -inch -high permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. f. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Panduit; Type HTDU. 2) Reef Industries; Terra Tape. 3. Buried Raceway Marker: a. Material: Sheet bronze, consisting of double -ended arrows, straight for straight runs and bent at locations where runs change direction. b. Designation: Engrave to depth of 3/32 inch; ELECTRIC CABLES, in letters 1/4 -inch high. C. Minimum Dimension: 1/4 inch thick, 10 inches long, and 3/4 inch wide. C. Raceway Coating: Clean and paint in accordance with Section 09 90 04, Painting. D. Heat Shrinkable Tubing: 1. Material: Heat -shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Semi -flexible with meltable adhesive inner liner. 3. Color: Black. 4. Manufacturers: a. Raychem. b. 3M. E. Wraparound Duct Band: 1. Material: Heat -shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hot -melt adhesive. PW/WBG/399884 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 12, 2015 260533-13 399884C.GN1 2. Width: 50 mm minimum. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type TWDB. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Conduit and tubing sizes shown are based on use of copper conductors. Reference Section 26 05 05, Conductors, concerning conduit sizing for aluminum conductors. B. Comply with NECA Installation Standards. C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted. D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture. E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust -tight seals until time for pulling in conductors. F. Aluminum Conduit: Do not install in direct contact with concrete. Install in PVC sleeve or cored hole through concrete walls and slabs. G. Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate may collect above sealing fitting. H. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point. I. Group raceways installed in same area. J. Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from parallel runs. K. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid obstruction of passageways. L. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planes. M. Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell with reinforcing steel. N. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations. O. Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit, PVC -coated galvanized conduit, or IMC installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc -rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-14 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 P. Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors, wires, or cables. Q. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams without Engineer approval. R. Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under slab, with no part embedded within slab. S. Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed. T. Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and Category 6 data cables in strict conformance with the requirements of TIA 569B. 3.02 INSTALLATION IN CAST -IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE A. Minimum Cover: 2 inches, including fittings. B. Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel location or configuration. C. Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to ensure raceways remain in position. D. Conduit larger than 1 inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls, foundations, columns, or beams unless approved by Engineer. E. Slabs and Walls (Requires Engineer Approval): 1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of slab or wall thickness. 2. Install within middle two -fourths of slab or wall. 3. Separate conduit less than 2 -inch trade size by a minimum ten times conduit trade size, center -to -center, unless otherwise shown. 4. Separate conduit 2 -inch and greater trade size by a minimum eight times conduit trade size, center -to -center, unless otherwise shown. 5. Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with minimum separation of 1 inch. 6. Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside dimension of expansion/deflection fittings at expansion joints. 7. Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water surface elevation in walls of water holding structures. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 05 33-15 399884C.GN1 F. Columns and Beams (Requires Engineer Approval): 1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of beam thickness. 2. Conduit cross-sectional area not to exceed 4 percent of beam or column cross section. 3.03 CONDUIT APPLICATION A. Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch. 1. Exterior, Exposed: Rigid aluminum. 2. Interior, Exposed: Rigid aluminum B. Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete): Rigid aluminum. C. Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors: PVC. D. Direct Earth Burial: PVC. E. Transition from Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed: Rigid aluminum. F. Under Equipment Mounting Pads: PVC. G. Corrosive Areas: Rigid Aluminum. 3.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type transformers, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other locations approved by Engineer where flexible connection is required to minimize vibration: 1. Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible, liquid -tight conduit. 2. Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible. 3. Wet or Corrosive Areas: Flexible, nonmetallic liquid -tight. 4. Dry Areas: Flexible, metallic liquid -tight. 5. Hazardous Areas: Flexible coupling suitable for Class I, Division 1 and 2 areas. B. Suspended Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Flexible steel, nonliquid-tight conduit. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-16 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 SECTION 26 24 19 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which shall be followed for this section: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 2. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 402, Standard for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum). b. ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements. C. ICS 2, Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts. d. ICS 2.3, Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600V. e. ICS 18, Motor Control Centers. f. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 98, Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches. b. 489, Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. C. 845, Motor Control Centers. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. CT: Current Transformer. B. LCD: Liquid Crystal Display. C. N.C.: Normally Closed. D. N.O.: Normally Open. E. THD: Total Harmonic Distortion. F. VT: Voltage Transformer. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 262419-1 3.05 399884C.GN1 C. Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas Required to be Oiltight and Dust -Tight: Flexible metal, liquid -tight conduit. D. Flexible Conduit Length: 18 inches minimum, 60 inches maximum; sufficient to allow movement or adjustment of equipment. PENETRATIONS A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown. B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not permitted. C. Fire -Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around penetrations to maintain fire -resistance rating using fire penetration seal as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. Apply to metallic conduit protruding through concrete floor slabs to a point 2 inches above and 2 inches below concrete surface. D. Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout dry -pack, or use watertight seal device. E. Entering Structures: 1. General: Seal raceway at first box or outlet with oakum or expandable plastic compound to prevent entrance of gases or liquids from one area to another. 2. Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor: a. Provide a watertight seal. b. Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on each side. C. With Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on accessible side. d. Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal device into construction with one or more integral flanges. e. Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal device in a permanent, watertight manner. 3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: a. Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer. b. Terminate conduit with flexible metal conduit at junction box or condulet attached to exterior surface of equipment prior to penetrating equipment. C. Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant, as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 RACEWAY AND BOXES 26 05 33-17 399884C.GN1 3.06 4. Corrosive -Sensitive Areas: a. Seal conduit passing through room walls. b. Seal conduit entering equipment panel boards and field panels containing electronic equipment. C. Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant, as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 5. Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and install watertight entrance seal device. 6. Nonwaterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without Concrete Encasement): a. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or watertight entrance seal device. b. Fill space between raceway and sleeve with expandable plastic compound or oakum and lead joint, on each side. 7. Manholes and Handholes: a. Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings. b. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall. C. Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of wall, unless otherwise shown. SUPPORT A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 requirements. Do not exceed 10 feet in any application. Do not support from piping, pipe supports, or other raceways. B. Application/Type of Conduit Strap: 1. Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum or stainless steel. 2. Rigid Steel or EMT Conduit: Zinc coated steel, pregalvanized steel or malleable iron. 3. PVC -Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: PVC -coated metal. 4. Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic or PVC -coated metal. C. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows: 1. Wood: Wood screws. 2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. 3. Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by powder charge, with lock washers and nuts. 4. Steelwork: Machine screws. 5. Location/Type of Hardware: a. Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Galvanized. b. Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel. C. Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 26 05 33 - 18 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 D. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or hangers. E. Support aluminum conduit on concrete surfaces with stainless steel or nonmetallic spacers, or aluminum or nonmetallic framing channel. 3.07 BENDS A. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance. B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable diameter, 15 inches minimum. C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings. D. Avoid field -made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending. E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so that bends are parallel. F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of run, and raceways are same size. G. PVC Conduit: 1. Bends 30 Degrees and Larger: Provide factory -made elbows. 2. Use manufacturer's recommended method for forming smaller bends. H. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility. 3.08 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS A. Provide on raceways at structural expansion joints and in long tangential runs. B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 50 degrees F maximum temperature variation. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PW/WBG/399884 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 12, 2015 260533-19 399884C.GN1 3.09 PVC CONDUIT A. Solvent Welding: 1. Apply manufacturer recommended solvent to joints. 2. Install in order that joint is watertight. B. Adapters: 1. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type. 2. PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit or IMC: PVC female adapter. C. Belled -End Conduit: Bevel unbelled end of joint prior to joining. 3.10 WIREWAYS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway, unless otherwise shown. C. Applications: 1. Metal wireway in indoor dry locations. 2. Nonmetallic wireway in indoor wet, outdoor, and corrosive locations. 3.11 CABLE TRAYS A. Install in accordance with NEMA VE 1, section Application Information. B. Install accessories as necessary for complete system. C. Install in order that joints are not made at support brackets. D. Install horizontal section support brackets between support point and quarter point of tray span. E. Provide ceiling trapeze for horizontal cable tray. F. Install support within 2 feet on each side of expansion joints and within 2 feet of fitting extremity. G. Provide expansion joints in accordance with NEMA VE 1 for 50 degrees F maximum temperature variation. H. Install horizontal tray level, plumb, straight, and true to line or grade within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and within a cumulative maximum of 1/2 inch. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-20 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 I. Install vertical tray plumb within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Install without exposed raw edges. K. Maintain 12 -inch vertical separation between multi -tiered trays having a common support, and at crossover locations. L. Provide bonding jumper at each expansion joint and adjustable connection. 3.12 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES A. Cast Metal Enclosure: Install manufacturer's premolded insulating sleeve inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs. B. Nonmetallic, Cabinets, and Enclosures: 1. Terminate conduit in threaded conduit hubs, maintaining enclosure integrity. 2. Metallic Conduit: Provide ground terminal for connection to maintain continuity of ground system. 3. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: 4. General: a. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is not required. b. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal boxes having threaded hubs. C. Utilize sealing locknuts or threaded hubs on sides and bottom of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures. d. Terminate conduits at threaded hubs at the tops of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 boxes and enclosures. e. Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X boxes and enclosures. 5. Aluminum Conduit: a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure. b. Install grounding bushing at source enclosure. C. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment ground bus or ground pad. 6. Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide gland compression, insulated connectors. 7. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable iron connectors. 8. Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquid -tight strain relief connectors. 9. PVC -Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Provide PVC -coated, liquid -tight, metallic connector. 10. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut, except where threaded hubs required above. PW/WBG/399884 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 12, 2015 260533-21 399884C.GN1 C. Motor Control Center, Switchboard, Switchgear, and Free -Standing Enclosures: 1. Terminate metal conduit entering bottom with grounding bushing; provide grounding jumper extending to equipment ground bus or grounding pad. 2. Terminate PVC conduit entering bottom with bell end fittings. 3.13 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS A. Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one manhole, handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour. B. Cover: Maintain minimum 1 -foot cover above conduit and concrete encasement, unless otherwise shown. C. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts. D. Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same transverse line. E. Union type fittings not permitted. F. Spacers: 1. Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers designed for such purpose, to secure and separate parallel conduit runs in a trench or concrete encasement. 2. Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support of the type conduit used, but in no case greater than 10 feet. G. Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement. H. Transition from Underground to Exposed: Rigid galvanized steel conduit. I. Installation with Other Piping Systems: 1. Crossings: Maintain minimum 12 -inch vertical separation. 2. Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12 -inch separation. 3. Installation over valves or couplings not permitted. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-22 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 Provide expansion fittings that allow minimum of 4 inches of movement in vertical conduit runs from underground where exposed conduit will be fastened to or will enter building or structure. K. Backfill: As specified in Section 3123 23.15, Trench Backfill. Do not backfill until inspected by Owner. 3.14 UNDER SLAB RACEWAYS A. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts. B. Support raceways so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement. C. Install raceways with no part embedded within slab and with no interference with slab on grade construction. D. Raceway spacing, in a single layer or multiple layers: 1. 3 inches clear between adjacent 2 -inch or larger raceway. 2. 2 inches clear between adjacent 1 -1/2 -inch or smaller raceway. E. Multiple Layers of Raceways: Install under slab on grade in trench below backfill zone, as specified in Section 3123 23.15, Trench Backfill. F. Individual Raceways and Single Layer Multiple Raceways: Install at lowest elevation of backfill zone with spacing as specified herein. Where conduits cross at perpendicular orientation, installation of conduits shall not interfere with placement of under slab fill that meets compaction and void limitations of earthwork specifications. G. Under slab raceways that emerge from below slab to top of slab as exposed, shall be located to avoid conflicts with structural slab rebar. Coordinate raceway stub ups with location of structural rebar. H. Fittings: 1. Union type fittings are not permitted. 2. Provide expansion/deflection fittings in raceway runs that exit building or structure below slab. Locate fittings 18 inches, maximum, beyond exterior wall. Raceway type between building exterior wall to fitting shall be PVC -coated rigid steel. 3. Couplings: In multiple raceway runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same traverse line. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 RACEWAY AND BOXES 260533-23 399884C.GN1 3.15 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. General: 1. Install plumb and level. 2. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in wiring or raceway system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 3. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required; seal unused openings. 4. Install galvanized mounting hardware in industrial areas. B. Size: 1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural conditions. Box extensions not permitted. a. Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such that conduit knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space. 2. Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4 -inch octagonal device box, unless otherwise required for installed fixture. 3. Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2 -inch by 4 -inch device box. C. Locations: 1. Drawing locations are approximate. 2. To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features, relocate outlets as directed by Owner. 3. Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout, unless otherwise shown. D. Mounting Height: 1. General: a. Dimensions given to centerline of box. b. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or finish, adjust up or down to avoid interference. C. Do not straddle CMU block or other construction joints. 2. Light Switch: a. 48 inches above floor. b. When located next to door, install on lock side of door. 3. Thermostat: 54 inches above floor. 4. Telephone Outlet: a. 15 inches above floor. b. 6 inches above counter tops. C. Wall Mounted: 52 inches above floor. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-24 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 5. Convenience Receptacle: a. General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor. b. General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom or side flush with top of backsplash, or 6 inches above counter tops without backsplash. C. Outdoor Areas: 24 inches above finished grade. 6. Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. E. Flush Mounted: 1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of boxes flush with finished surface. 3. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box. F. Supports: 1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member. 2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows: a. Wood: Wood screws. b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields. C. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. d. Steelwork: Machine screws. 3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields. 4. Provide plaster rings where necessary. 5. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported. G. Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where required by fixture terminal temperature. H. Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate strength to support fixture. 3.16 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. General: 1. Install plumb and level. 2. Installed boxes shall be accessible. 3. Do not install on finished surfaces. PW/WBG/399884 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 12, 2015 260533-25 399884C.GN1 4. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by applicable codes. 5. Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are required and allowed by applicable codes. 6. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate conductor installation. 7. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap -off, or redirect multiple conduit runs. 8. Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of three right-angle bends. B. Flush Mounted: 1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box. 3. Make edges of boxes flush with final surface. C. Mounting Hardware: 1. Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Galvanized. 2. Noncorrosive Wet Areas: Stainless steel. 3. Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel. D. Supports: 1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member. 2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows: a. Wood: Wood screws. b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields. C. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. d. Steelwork: Machine screws. 3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields. 4. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported. E. At or Below Grade: 1. Install boxes for below grade conduit flush with finished grade in locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways. 2. If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location. RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-26 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. Obtain Owner's written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas, roadways, or walkways. 4. Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights. 3.17 EMPTY RACEWAYS A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end. B. Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells. C. Provide nylon pull cord. D. Identify, as specified in Article Identification Devices, with waterproof tags attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point. 3.18 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Raceway Tags: 1. Identify origin and destination. 2. For exposed raceways, install tags at each terminus, near midpoint, and at minimum intervals of every 50 feet, whether in ceiling space or surface mounted. 3. Install tags at each terminus for concealed raceways. 4. Provide nylon strap for attachment. B. Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above underground or concrete -encased raceways. Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of run. C. Buried Raceway Marker: 1. Install at grade to indicate direction of underground raceway. 2. Install at bends and at intervals not exceeding 100 feet in straight runs. 3. Embed and secure to top of concrete base, sized 14 inches long, 6 inches wide, and 8 inches deep; top set flush with finished grade. 3.19 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction. B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust -tight seals over conduit openings during construction. PW/WBG/399884 RACEWAY AND BOXES JANUARY 12, 2015 260533-27 399884C.GN1 C. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars. D. Touch up coating damage to PVC -coated conduit with patching compound approved by manufacturer. Compound shall be kept refrigerated according to manufacturers' instructions until time of use. END OF SECTION RACEWAY AND BOXES PW/WBG/399884 260533-28 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D877, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes. b. D923, Standard Practice for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids. C. D924, Standard Test Method for Dissipation Factor (or Power Factor) and Relative Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of Electrical Insulating Liquids. d. D971, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Oil Against Water by the Ring Method. e. D974, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color -Indicator Titration. f. D1298, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), or API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method. g. D1500, Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM Color Scale). h. D1524, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field. i. D1533, Standard Test Method for Water in Insulating Liquids by Coulometric Karl Fischer Titration. j. D1816, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin Using VDE Electrodes. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulating Resistance of Rotating Machinery. b. 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating - Current Cable Terminators Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5kV through 500kV. C. 81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System. d. 95, Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric Machinery (2300V and Above) with High Direct Voltage. e. 386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-1 399884C.GN1 f. 400, Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems. g. 450, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead -Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications. h. C2, National Electrical Safety Code. i. C37.20.1, Standard for Metal -Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear. j. C37.20.2, Standard for Metal -Clad Switchgear. k. C37.20.3, Standard for Metal -Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear. 1. C37.23, Standard for Metal -Enclosed Bus. in. C62.33, Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge -Protective Devices. 3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICER): a. S-93-639, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cables for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy. b. S-94-649, Concentric Neutral Cables Rated 5 through 46 kV. C. S-97-682, Standard for Utility Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 through 46 kV. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. AB 4, Guidelines for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications. b. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. C. WC 74, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy. 5. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (META): ATS, Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance. C. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. d. 101, Life Safety Code. 7. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). 8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): CFR 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests: a. Schedule for performing inspection and tests. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 260800-2 399884C.GN1 b. List of references to be used for each test. C. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s). d. Sample copy of individual device test form. e. Sample copy of individual system test form. 2. Energization Plan: Prior to initial energization of electrical distribution equipment; include the following: a. Owner's representative sign -off form for complete and accurate arc flash labeling and proper protective device settings for equipment to be energized. b. Staged sequence of initial energization of electrical equipment. C. Lock -Out -Tag -Out plan for each stage of the progressive energization. d. Barricading, signage, and communication plan notifying personnel of newly energized equipment. 3. Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested within 30 days after completion of test: 4. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. In accordance with Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. b. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by Engineer and returned, insert a copy of each in Operation and Maintenance Manual. 5. Programmable Settings: At completion of Performance Demonstration Test, submit final hardcopy printout and electronic files on compact disc of as -left setpoints, programs, and device configuration files for: a. Protective relays. b. Intelligent overload relays. C. Variable frequency drives. d. Power metering devices. e. Uninterruptible power supplies. f. Electrical communications modules. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Firm Qualifications: 1. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority. 2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of electrical equipment and systems being tested. 3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems. 4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by NICET or NETA and having a minimum of 5 years' testing experience on similar projects. 5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS [e SS -9 HE [axe 011 6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to Project at ratio not to exceed two certified to one noncertified assistant or apprentice. 7. Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive Project report outlining services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and opinions. 8. In compliance with OSHA CFR 29, Part 1910.7 criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories. B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to or greater than requirements established by NETA ATS. C. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS. 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment listed herein has been installed. B. Perform tests with apparatus de -energized whenever feasible. C. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be: 1. Scheduled with Owner prior to de-energization. 2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating plant equipment. D. Notify Owner at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Perform tests in accordance with requirements of Section 0191 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. B. Tests and inspections shall establish: 1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and standards. 2. Installation operates properly. 3. Equipment is suitable for energization. 4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 101, and IEEE C2. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 260800-4 399884C.GN1 C. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and manufacturer's recommendations. D. Set, test, and calibrate protective relays, circuit breakers, and other applicable devices in accordance with values established by short circuit, coordination, and harmonics studies as specified in Section 26 05 70, Electrical Systems Analysis. E. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanical movement. F. Adjust and set electromechanical electronic relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer. G. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approved Submittals. H. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness. I. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored. J. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench/screw driver to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified in NETA ATS. K. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer. L. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts. M. Inform Engineer of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70. N. Investigate and repair or replace: 1. Electrical items that fail tests. 2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Damaged electrical equipment. O. Electrical Enclosures: 1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior. 2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior. 3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces. 4. Repair or replace, as determined by Owner door and panel sections having dented surfaces. 5. Repair or replace, as determined by Owner poor fitting doors and panel sections. PW/WBG/399884 COMMISSIONING OF JANUARY 12, 2015 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-5 399884C.GN1 6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices. 7. Replace missing or damaged hardware. 8. Finish: a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars. b. If required because of extensive damage, as determined by Owner, refinish entire assembly. P. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the Contract Documents or approved Submittals. 3.02 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP A. Voltage Field Test: 1. Check voltage at point of termination of power company supply system to Project when installation is essentially complete and is in operation. 2. Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and unloaded conditions. 3. Unbalance Corrections: a. Make written request to power company to correct condition if balance (as defined by NEMA) exceeds 1 percent, or if voltage varies throughout the day and from loaded to unloaded condition more than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal. b. Obtain written certification from responsible power company official that voltage variations and unbalance are within their normal standards if corrections are not made. B. Equipment Line Current Tests: 1. Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment. 2. Make line current check after power company has made final adjustments to supply voltage magnitude or balance. 3. If phase current for a piece of equipment is above rated nameplate current, prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and corrective action taken. 3.03 SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Insulator damage and contaminated surfaces. 2. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. 3. Proper operation of indicating devices. 4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages. 5. Proper operation of drawout elements. 6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 260800-6 399884C.GN1 7. Check door and device interlocking system by: a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position. b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position. 8. Check nameplates for proper identification of: a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one -line diagram. b. Pushbutton. C. Control switch. d. Pilot light. e. Control relay. f. Circuit breaker. 9. Verify circuit breaker ratings, sizes, and types conform to those specified. 10. Check bus and cable connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter applied to bolted joints. a. Ohmic value to be zero. b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100. 12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 11. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by: a. Closure attempt for locked open devices. b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices. C. Key exchange to operate devices in OFF -NORMAL positions. 12. Verify performance of each control device and feature. 13. Control Wiring: a. Compare wiring to local and remote control and protective devices with elementary diagrams. b. Proper conductor lacing and bundling. C. Proper conductor identification. d. Proper conductor lugs and connections. 14. Exercise active components. 15. Perform phasing check on double -ended equipment to ensure proper bus phasing from each source. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Each phase of each bus section. C. Phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for 1 minute. d. With switches breakers open. e. Control wiring except that connected to solid state components. f. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. PW/WBG/399884 COMMISSIONING OF JANUARY 12, 2015 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-7 399884C.GN1 2. Overpotential Tests: a. Each phase of each bus section. b. Phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for 1 minute. C. Test results evaluated on a pass/fail basis. 3. Current Injection Tests: a. For entire current circuit in each section. b. Secondary injection for current flow of 1 ampere. C. Test current at each device. 4. Control Wiring: a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal. 5. Operational Test: a. Initiate control devices. b. Check proper operation of control system in each section. 3.04 PANELBOARDS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work: 1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules. 2. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. 3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components. 4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. 5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection for overcurrent protective devices. B. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instruction: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Each phase of each bus section. C. Phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for 1 minute. d. With switches breakers open. e. Control wiring except that connected to solid state components. f. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 260800-8 399884C.GN1 2. Ground continuity test ground bus to system ground. 3.05 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Physical and insulator damage. 2. Proper winding connections. 3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100. 12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 4. Defective wiring. 5. Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices. 6. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing. 7. Free and properly installed resilient mounts. 8. Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages. 9. Verify tap -changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under normal operating conditions. 10. Verify proper secondary voltage phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground after energization and prior to loading. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.5 for each: 1) Winding -to -winding. 2) Winding -to -ground. b. Test Duration: 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes. C. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14. d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. C. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings. 2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by manufacturer. 3.06 LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Physical and insulator damage. 2. Proper winding connections. 3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100. 12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 4. Defective wiring. PW/WBG/399884 COMMISSIONING OF JANUARY 12, 2015 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-9 399884C.GN1 3.07 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 6 and larger for: a. Physical damage. b. Proper connections in accordance with single -line diagram. C. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius where applicable. d. Color coding conformance with specification. e. Proper circuit identification. 2. Mechanical Connections For: a. Proper lug type for conductor material. b. Proper lug installation. C. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100. 12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables For: a. Proper shield grounding. b. Proper terminations. C. Proper circuit identification. 4. Control Cables For: a. Proper termination. b. Proper circuit identification. 5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals and grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices. B. Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 6 and Larger: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000 -volt do megohmmeter for 600 -volt insulated conductors. b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors for 1 minute. C. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type. d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms. 2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections. 3.08 METAL ENCLOSED BUSWAYS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Inspect for: a. Proper connections. b. Proper bracing, suspension alignment, and enclosure ground. PW/WBG/399884 COMMISSIONING OF JANUARY 12, 2015 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-11 399884C.GN1 PC C. Check if orientation of ventilated bus provides proper cooling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and if ventilation openings are not blocked. d. Proper phase relationship using continuity test. e. Supports at maximum allowable intervals. 2. For busways rated for outdoors, check for: a. Check bus orientation for proper location of breathers or weep - hole plugs. b. Removal of weep -hole plugs. C. Proper installation of joint shields. d. Proper operation of space heaters. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1 b. Each phase of each bus section. C. Phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for 1 minute. d. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. 2. Overpotential Tests: a. Phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for 1 minute. b. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis. 3. Contact Resistance Tests: a. At each uninsulated bus connection. b. On insulated bus, measure resistance of bus section and compare values with adjacent phases. 3.09 SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper blade pressure and alignment. 2. Proper operation of switch operating handle. 3. Adequate mechanical support for each fuse. 4. Proper contact -to -contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse. 5. Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 6. Proper phase barrier material and installation. 7. Verify fuse sizes and types correspond to one -line diagram or approved Submittals. 8. Perform mechanical operational test and verify electrical and mechanical interlocking system operation and sequencing. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 260800-12 3.10 399884C.GN1 B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for 1 minute on each pole. C. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. 2. Contact Resistance Tests: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or similar switches. MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 100amperes and larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 100 amperes and larger. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper mounting. 2. Proper conductor size. 3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one -line diagram. 4. Cracked casings. 5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 6. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation. 7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one -line diagram. 8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated conductors. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000 -volt do megohmmeter for 480 -volt and 600 -volt circuit breakers and 500 -volt do megohmmeter for 240 -volt circuit breakers. b. Pole-to-pole and pole -to -ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute. C. Pole-to-pole and pole -to -ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute. d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. PW/WBG/399884 COMMISSIONING OF JANUARY 12, 2015 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-13 399884C.GN1 2. Contact Resistance Tests: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers. 3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify: a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay. b. Short -time pickup and delay. C. Ground fault pickup and delay. d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method. e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer's published time -current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-3. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.7. g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-4. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.8. 3.11 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper mounting, cell fit, and element alignment. 2. Proper operation of racking interlocks. 3. Check for damaged arc chutes. 4. Proper contact condition. 5. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 6. Perform mechanical operational and contact alignment tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 7. Check operation of closing and tripping functions of trip devices by activating ground fault relays, undervoltage shunt relays, and other auxiliary protective devices. 8. Verify primary and secondary contact wipe, gap setting, and other dimensions vital to breaker operation are correct. 9. Check charging motor, motor brushes, associated mechanism, and limit switches for proper operation and condition. 10. Check operation of electrically operated breakers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 11. Check for adequate lubrication on contact, moving, and sliding surfaces. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000 -volt do megohmmeter for 480 -volt and 600 -volt circuit breakers. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 260800-14 399884C.GN1 b. Pole-to-pole and pole -to -ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute. C. Pole-to-pole and pole -to -ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute. d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. 2. Contact Resistance Tests: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers. 3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify: a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay. b. Short -time pickup and delay. C. Ground fault pickup and delay. d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method. e. Trip characteristic when adjusted to setting sheet parameters shall be within manufacturer's published time -current tolerance band. 3.12 PROTECTIVE RELAYS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Visually check each relay for: a. Tight cover gasket and proper seal. b. Unbroken cover glass. C. Condition of spiral spring and contacts. d. Disc clearance. e. Condition of case shorting contacts if present. 2. Mechanically check each relay for: a. Freedom of movement. b. Proper travel and alignment. 3. Verify each relay: a. Complies with Contract Documents, approved Submittal, and application. b. Is set in accordance with recommended settings from Coordination Study. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation resistance test on each circuit to frame, except for solid state devices. 2. Test on nominal recommended setting for: a. Pickup parameters on each operating element. b. Timing at three points on time -current curve. C. Pickup target and seal -in units. PW/WBG/399884 COMMISSIONING OF JANUARY 12, 2015 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-15 399884C.GN1 d. Special tests as required to check operation of restraint, directional, and other elements in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. 3. Phase angle and magnitude contribution tests on differential and directional relays after energization to vectorially verify proper polarity and connections. 4. Current Injection Tests: a. For entire current circuit in each section. b. Secondary injection for current flow of 1 ampere. C. Test current at each device. 3.13 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Visually check current, potential, and control transformers for: a. Cracked insulation. b. Broken leads or defective wiring. C. Proper connections. d. Adequate clearances between primary and secondary circuit wiring. 2. Verify Mechanically: a. Grounding and shorting connections have good contact. b. Withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation, when applicable, operate properly. 3. Verify proper primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential transformers. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Current Transformer Tests: a. Insulation resistance test of transformer and wiring -to -ground at 1,000 volts do for 30 seconds. b. Polarity test. 2. Potential Transformer Tests: a. Insulation resistance test at test voltages in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.9, for 1 minute on: 1) Winding -to -winding. 2) Winding -to -ground. b. Polarity test to verify polarity marks or H1 -X1 relationship as applicable. 3. Insulation resistance measurement on instrument transformer shall not be less than that shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.5. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 26 08 00-16 3.14 3.15 3.16 399884C.GN1 METERING A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Verify meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams. 2. Verify meter multipliers. 3. Verify meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents. 4. Check calibration of meters at cardinal points. 5. Check calibration of electrical transducers. GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control center, panelboard, switchboard, and switchgear assemblies for proper connection and tightness. 2. Ground bus connections in motor control center, panelboard, switchboard, and switchgear assemblies for proper termination and tightness. 3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding. 4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness. 5. Accessible exothermic -weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Fall -of -Potential Test: a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of main ground system's resistance. b. Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no greater than 3 ohm(s). 2. Two -Point Direct Method Test: a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of ground resistance between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points. b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by 0.50 ohm. GROUND FAULT SYSTEMS A. Inspection and testing limited to: 1. Zero sequence grounding systems. 2. Residual ground fault systems. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260800-17 399884C.GN1 3.17 B. Visual and Manual Inspection: 1. Neutral main bonding connection to ensure: a. Zero sequence sensing system is grounded ahead of neutral disconnect link. b. Ground strap sensing system is grounded through sensing device. C. Neutral ground conductor is solidly grounded. 2. Verify control power has adequate capacity for system. 3. Manually operate monitor panels for: a. Trip test. b. No trip test. C. Nonautomatic rest. 4. Zero sequence system for symmetrical alignment of core balance transformers about current carrying conductors. 5. Relay check for pickup and time under simulated ground fault conditions. 6. Verify nameplate identification by device operation. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Test system neutral insulation resistance with neutral ground link removed; minimum 1 megohm. 2. Determine relay pickup by primary current injection at the sensor. Relay pickup current within plus or minus 10 percent of device dial or fixed setting. 3. Test relay timing by injecting 300 percent of pick-up current or as specified by manufacturer. Relay operating time in accordance with manufacturer's time -current characteristic curves. 4. Test system operation at 55 percent rated control voltage, if applicable. 5. Test zone interlock system by simultaneous sensor current injection and monitoring zone blocking functions. AC INDUCTION MOTORS A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 5 horsepower and larger. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper electrical and grounding connections. 2. Shaft alignment. 3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways. 4. Operate motor and check for: a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise. b. Overheating. C. Correct rotation. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 26 08 00-18 3.18 399884C.GN1 d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or motor inherent protectors for functionability and proper operation. e. Excessive vibration, in excess of values in NETA ATS, Table 100.10. 5. Check operation of space heaters. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by NETA ATS, Table 100.1 for: 1) Motors above 200 horsepower for 10 -minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes. 2) Motors 200 horsepower and less for 1 -minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds and 60 seconds. b. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturers. 2. Calculate polarization index ratios for motors above 200 horsepower. Investigate index ratios less than 1.5 for Class A insulation and 2.0 for Class B insulation. 3. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full -load amperes. 5. Overpotential Tests: a. Applied do voltage in accordance with IEEE 95. b. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis. LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. 2. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices. 3. Proper overload protection for each motor. 4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages. 5. Proper operation of drawout elements. 6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. 7. Check door and device interlocking system by: a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position. b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position. 8. Check nameplates for proper identification of- a. fa. Equipment title and tag number with latest one -line diagram. b. Pushbuttons. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 11001,911111M 399884C.GN1 C. Control switches. d. Pilot lights. e. Control relays. f. Circuit breakers. 9. Verify circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents. 10. Verify current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract Documents. 11. Check bus connections for high resistance by low-resistance ohmmeter 12. Ohmic value to be zero. a. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100. 12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 13. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by: a. Closure attempt for locked open devices. b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices. C. Key exchange to operate devices in OFF -NORMAL positions. 14. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of motor control center. 15. Control Wiring: a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with elementary diagrams. b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling. C. Check for proper conductor identification. d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections. 16. Exercise active components. 17. Inspect contactors for: a. Correct mechanical operations. b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure. C. Correct torque of connections. 18. Compare overload heater rating with full -load current for proper size. 19. Compare motor protector circuit breaker with motor characteristics for proper size. 20. Perform phasing check on double -ended motor control centers to ensure proper bus phasing from each source. B. Electrical Tests: Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Bus section phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for 1 minute on each phase. C. Contactor phase -to -ground and across open contacts for 1 minute on each phase. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 260800-20 399884C.GN1 d. Starter section phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground on each phase with starter contacts closed and protective devices open. e. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. 2. Current Injection through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full - Load Current and Monitor Trip Time: a. Trip time in accordance with manufacturer's published data. b. Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds. 3. Control Wiring Tests: a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal board and each device terminal. C. Insulation resistance test at 1,000 volts do on control wiring, except that connected to solid state components; 1 megohm minimum insulation resistance. 4. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation. 3.19 HARMONIC DISTORTION TESTS: A. Following harmonic distortion tests shall be performed by the ozone disinfection supplier as specified in Section 44 42 56.18, Ozone Disinfection System. The electrical subcontractor shall provide field support as needed. 1. Ozone generator #l. 2. Ozone generator #2. 3. VFDs in ozone master control panel MCP -08- 3.20 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures. 2. Ground connections to ground bus. B. Electrical Tests: Varistor Type Arrestors: a. Clamping voltage test. b. Rated RMS voltage test. C. Rated do voltage test. d. Varistor arrestor test values in accordance with IEEE C62.33, Section 4.4 and Section 4.9. END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 COMMISSIONING OF JANUARY 12, 2015 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-21 SECTION 2614 13 SWITCHBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES 399884C.GN1 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. b. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): a. 489, Standard for Safety for Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. b. 891, Standard for Safety for Switchboards. C. 1561, Standard for Safety for Dry -Type General Purpose and Power Transformers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Descriptive product information. 2. Itemized Bill of Material. 3. Dimensional drawings. 4. Operational description. 5. One -line, three -line, and control schematic drawings. 6. Connection and interconnection drawings. 7. Circuit Breakers: Copies of time -current characteristics. 8. Bus data. 9. Incoming line section equipment data. 10. Transformer section equipment data. 11. Conduit entrance locations. 12. Anchoring instructions and details. B. Informational Submittals: 1. 2. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Manufacturer's installation instructions. Factory Test Report. SWITCHBOARDS 261413-1 399884C.GN1 3. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 0145 33, Special Inspection and Testing. 4. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. 1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage and deliver prior to 70 percent Project completion the following spare parts: 1. Fuses: One complete set of spare fuses of each current rating, both power and control. 2. Lights: One complete set of spare indicating lights. 3. Paint: One pint, to match enclosure exterior finish in color and quality. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: 1. General Electric. 2. Westinghouse. 3. Siemens. 4. Square D. B. "or -equal" or substitute products will be considered. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment suitable for 480Y/277 -volt, three-phase, three -wire electrical system having available short-circuit current at line terminals as shown on Drawings. SWITCHBOARDS PW/WBG/399884 261413-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 B. Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891. C. Switchboard and its major components to be manufactured and assembled by single manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation and maintenance, spare parts replacement, and manufacturer's services. D. Lifting lugs on equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds. E. Operating Conditions: 1. Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C. 2. Equipment shall be fully rated without derating for the above operating conditions. 2.03 STATIONARY STRUCTURE A. Type: NEMA PB 2 construction, dead front, completely metal enclosed, self-supporting. B. Sections bolted together to form one rigid assembly capable of being moved into position and bolted directly to floor without use of floor sills. 2.04 ENCLOSURE A. Equipment Finish: Baked enamel applied over rust -inhibiting phosphated base coating. 1. Color: a. Exterior: Gray finish as approved by Owner. b. Interior: White. C. Unpainted Parts: Plated for corrosion resistance. B. Indoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1: 1. Rear, full -height, bolt -on panels for each enclosure section. 2. Cable Termination Access: Padlock provision. 3. Front Access: a. Service line and load terminations, internal devices, device and bolted bus connections, and protective device removal, serviceable from front only. b. Sections aligned across back to permit placement flush against wall. C. Working Space: As required by NFPA 70. PW/WBG/399884 SWITCHBOARDS JANUARY 12, 2015 261413-3 399884C.GN1 4. Front and Rear Access: a. With service line and load terminations, internal devices, and device and bolted bus connections serviceable from rear and protective devices serviceable from front. b. Align sections across back and front with NFPA 70 required working space in front, back, and sides. 5. Transition sections as required or shown. 6. Side and Top Covers: Removable, captive, screw -on plates with formed edges on each side. 7. Front Cover: Hinged door with formed edges. C. Aisle -less Outdoor Enclosure: 1. NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosing NEMA 250, Type 1, enclosed switchboard. 2. Hinged, full -height doors with three-point latch operated by vault -type handle with multiple padlocking provisions for each front switchboard section. 3. Minimum 10 -inch front access space between exterior door and front of interior switchboard doors. 4. Gasketed doors, end panels, and sloped roof having 4 -inch minimum overhang on all sides. 5. Support assembly on 4 -inch modular base. 6. Steel bottom enclosure and support assembly undercoated with coal tar emulsion. 7. Ventilating louvers with filters in front door and rear panels. 8. Adjustable thermostat for temperature range of 50 degrees F to 70 degrees F. D. Enclosure Transformer and Panelboards: 1. Transformer, primary and secondary main circuit breakers, and secondary panelboard section enclosed in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 2. Self -cooled, Encapsulated, Dry -type Transformer: a. Manufacturer's standard insulation and temperature rise, in accordance with UL 1561. b. Full -capacity, 2-1/2 percent voltage taps, two above and two below normal voltage. C. Primary Voltage: 480 Single-phase with current -limiting fuses in primary circuit. d. Secondary Voltage: 240/120 volts, single-phase, three -wire. e. kVA Rating: As required. SWITCHBOARDS PW/WBG/399884 261413-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. Panelboard: a. Full, short-circuit current rated in accordance with UL 489. b. Thermal magnetic, quick -make, quick -break, indicating type, noninterchangeable, molded -case circuit breaker. C. Number and breaker ampere rating as shown on Drawings. 11 111 MIMS] .61 A. Material: Phase isolated and insulated copper throughout entire length of sufficient cross section to limit temperature rise at rated current to 55 degrees C. B. Bus Arrangement: A -B -C, left-to-right, top -to -bottom, and front -to -rear, as viewed from front. C. Brace for short-circuit currents as shown. D. Main Horizontal Bus: Nontapered, continuous current rating as shown. E. Neutral Bus: Continuous current rating as shown. F. Ground Bus: 1. Copper. 2. Rating: As shown. 3. Bolted to each vertical section. 4. Bus Connections and Joints: Bolted. G. Extend each bus entire length of switchboard. 2.06 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Main and Branch Feeder Protective Devices: Group mounted, suitable for use with 75 degree C wire at full 75 degree C ampacity when mounted in switchboard. 2. Arrangement: Fully rated main and branch feeder and fully rated as shown branch feeder circuit breakers. Breakers 225 -Ampere Frame and Above: Continuously adjustable magnetic pickups five to ten times trip rating. 3. Breakers600-Ampere Frame and Above: Solid-state trip unit. 4. Interrupting Rating: 18,000 amperes rms symmetrical at rated voltage of 480V and 32,000 amperes rms symmetrical short -time rating. PW/WBG/399884 SWITCHBOARDS JANUARY 12, 2015 261413-5 399884C.GN1 5. Breakers 2,000 -Ampere through 3,000 -Ampere Frame: UL 489 listed and labeled 100 percent application in accordance with NFPA 70. 6. Mechanical interlock to prevent opening compartment door while breaker is in closed position. B. Ground Fault Protection: 1. Ground sensor encircling phase conductors and neutral conductor, where used. 2. Solid-state sensing relay and monitor/test panel. 3. Zero sequence current detection, adjustable over range shown. 4. Monitor panel with fault detection indicating light, test, and reset buttons. 5. Control Power Source: Suitable to operate circuit protective device when connected to faulted phase conductor. 2.07 SOLID-STATE TRIP UNIT A. Flux -shift trip and current sensors. B. Protective Programmers: 1. Self -powered, automatic rms sensing micro -electronic processor. 2. No external relays or accessories. 3. Printed circuit cards with gold-plated contacts. 4. Programmable Controls: a. Fixed-point, with repetitive accuracy and precise unit settings. b. Trip adjustments made by nonremovable, discrete step switching. 5. Field -Installable Rating Plugs: a. Long-time pickup LED indicator and test receptacle. b. Matching load and cable requirements. C. Interlocked with tripping mechanism. d. Breaker to remain trip -free with plug removed. e. Keyed rating plugs to prevent incorrect application. 6. Long-time pickup light. 7. Selective Coordination Time/Current Curve Shaping Adjustable Functions: a. Current setting. b. Long-time pickup. C. Long-time delay. d. Instantaneous pickup with short -time for main and feeders. 8. Fault Trip Indicators: Mechanical push -to -reset type for overload and short-circuit overload trip. 9. Rejection Pins: For each programmer frame size. SWITCHBOARDS PW/WBG/399884 261413-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Ground Fault Sensor: 1. Neutral bar single -ratio CT mounted in cable compartment. 2. Molded epoxy construction. 3. Shorting bar. 2.08 CONTROL WIRING A. Control, Instrumentation, and Power/Current Circuits: NFPA 70, Type SIS, single -conductor, Class B, stranded copper, rated 600 volts. B. Transducer Output/Analog Circuits: Shielded cable rated 600 volts, 90 degrees C minimum. C. Conductor Lugs: Preinsulated, self-locking, spade -type, with reinforced sleeves. D. Identification: Individually, with permanent wire markers at each end. E. Enclose in top and vertical steel wiring troughs, and front -to -rear in nonmetallic wiring troughs. F. Splices: Not permitted in switchboard wiring. 2.09 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Enclosed in steel wiring troughs. B. Rated 600 volts, 30 amperes minimum, one-piece barrier type with strap screws. C. Shorting type for current transformer leads. D. Provide terminal blocks for: 1. Conductors connecting to circuits external to switchboard. 2. Internal circuits crossing shipping splits. 3. Equipment parts requiring replacement and maintenance. E. Spare Terminals: Not less than 20 percent. F. Group terminal blocks for external circuit wiring leads. G. Maintain 6 -inch minimum space between columns of terminal blocks. H. Identification: Permanent, for each terminal and columns of terminal blocks. I. Manufacturer: General Electric; Type EB -5. PW/WBG/399884 SWITCHBOARDS JANUARY 12, 2015 261413-7 399884C.GN 1 2.10 IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: 1. Master: a. Deep -etched aluminum, with manufacturer's name and model number. b. Riveted to main vertical section. 2. Circuit Breaker Cubicle and Door -Mounted Device: a. Engraved, phenolic. b. Color: Black with white. C. Characters: Block -type, 3/16 -inch high. d. Size: Manufacturer's standard. e. Inscription: As shown on one -line diagram. f. Blank plates for future spaces. g. Attachment Screws: Self -tapping. B. Section Identification: 1. Engraved metallic, riveted to each vertical section. 2. Serial number, bus rating, and section reference number. 3. Size: Manufacturer's standard. C. Cubicle Labels: 1. Nonmetallic, applied inside each cubicle compartment. 2. Device serial number, rating, and description. D. Metering Instruments: Meter type identified on meter face below pointer or dial. E. Control Switches: Deep etched, aluminum escutcheon plate. F. Relays and Devices: 1. Stamped metallic, riveted to instrument case. 2. Manufacturer's name, model number, relay type, and rating data. G. Switchboard Sign: 1. Two signs each on front of switchboard. 2. Engraved, phenolic. 3. Size: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Color: Red with white. 5. Characters: Gothic -type, 1 inch high. 6. Inscription: DANGER/HIGH VOLTAGE/KEEP OUT. 7. Attachment: Four rivets each sign. SWITCHBOARDS PW/WBG/399884 261413-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.11 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) A. All switchboards shall include "built-in" surge protection devices appropriately rated and coordinated with other SPDs in the distribution system. 2.12 FACTORY TESTING A. Performance tests in accordance with UL 891 and production tests in accordance with NEMA PB -2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Secure to mounting pads with anchor bolts of sufficient size and number adequate for specified seismic conditions. C. Install plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall. D. Coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary feeders. END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 SWITCHBOARDS JANUARY 12, 2015 261413-9 399884C.GN1 SECTION 26 20 00 LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED SECTIONS A. This section applies only when referenced by a motor -driven equipment specification. Application, horsepower, enclosure type, mounting, shaft type, synchronous speed, and deviations from this section will be listed in the equipment specification. Where such deviations occur, they shall take precedence over this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. b. 620, Guide for the Presentation of Thermal Limit Curves for Squirrel Cage Induction Machines. C. 841, Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry—Premium Efficiency Severe Duty Totally Enclosed Fan -Cooled (TEFL) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors—Up to and Including 370 kW (500 hp). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. C50.41, Polyphase Induction Motors for Power Generating Stations. C. MG 1, Motors and Generators. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): a. 83, Standard for Safety for Thermoplastic -Insulated Wire and Cables. b. 674, Standard for Safety for Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations. C. 2111, Standard for Safety for Overheating Protection for Motors. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 262000-1 399884C.GN1 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CISD-TEFL: Chemical industry, severe -duty enclosure. B. DIP: Dust -ignition -proof enclosure. C. EXP: Explosion -proof enclosure. D. Inverter Duty Motor: Motor meeting applicable requirements of NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Parts 30 and 31. E. Motor Nameplate Horsepower: That rating after any derating required to allow for extra heating caused by the harmonic content in the voltage applied to the motor by its controller. F. ODP: Open drip -proof enclosure. G. TEFC: Totally enclosed, fan -cooled enclosure. H. TENV: Totally enclosed, nonventilated enclosure. I. WPI: Open weather protected enclosure, Type I. J. WPII: Open weather protected enclosure, Type II. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Descriptive information. 2. Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 3. Additional Rating Information: a. Service factor. b. Locked rotor current. C. No load current. d. Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (for example, variable torque) and minimum allowable motor speed for that load classification. e. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and power factor. 4. Enclosure type and mounting (such as, horizontal, vertical). 5. Dimensions and total weight. 6. Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70. 7. Bearing type. 8. Bearing lubrication. 9. Bearing life. 10. Space heater voltage and watts. LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS PW/WBG/399884 262000-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 PART 2 2.01 2.02 399884C.GN1 11. Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motor thermal protection. 12. Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 13. Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the motor. 14. Description and rating of submersible motor moisture sensing system. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 0145 33, Special Inspection and Testing. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of - 1 . f: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. GENERAL General Electric. Reliance Electric. MagneTek. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc., Motors and Drives Division. Baldor. U.S. Electrical Motors. TECO -Westinghouse Motor Co. Toshiba International Corp., Industrial Division. WEG Electric Motors Corp. Or approved other. A. For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and accessories of a single manufacturer. B. In order to obtain single source responsibility, use a single supplier to provide drive motor, its driven equipment, and specified motor accessories. C. Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1. D. For motors used in hazardous (classified) locations, Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D, and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G provide motors that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark. E. Motors shall be specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with a NEMA design letter classification to fit the application. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 262000-3 399884C.GN1 F. Lifting lugs on motors weighing 100 pounds or more. G. Operating Conditions: 1. Maximum ambient temperature not greater than 40 degrees C. 2. Motors shall be suitable for operating conditions without reduction being required in nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding rated temperature rise. 3. Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 2.03 HORSEPOWER RATING A. As designated in motor -driven equipment specification. B. Constant Speed Applications: Brake horsepower of driven equipment at any operating condition not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor. C. Adjustable Frequency and Adjustable Speed Applications (Inverter Duty Motor): Driven equipment brake horsepower at any operating condition not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor. 2.04 SERVICE FACTOR A. Inverter -duty Motors: 1.0 at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted. B. Other Motors: 1.15 minimum at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted. 2.05 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RATING A. System Frequency: 60 Hz. Voltage Rating: Unless otherwise indicated in motor -driven equipment specification: Volta a Rating Size Voltage Phase 1/2 hp and smaller 115 1 3/4 hp through 400 hp 460 3 LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS PW/WBG/399884 262000-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Suitable for full voltage starting. D. Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage. 2.06 EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR A. For all motors except single-phase, under 1 hp, multispeed, short -time rated and submersible motors, or motors driving gates, valves, elevators, cranes, trolleys, and hoists: 1. Efficiency: a. Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59. b. Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with NEMA MG 1 or as indicated in motor -driven equipment specification. 2. Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load shall be manufacturer's standard or as indicated in motor -driven equipment specification. 2.07 LOCKED ROTOR RATINGS A. Locked rotor kVA Code F or lower, if motor horsepower not covered by NEMA MG 1 tables. B. Safe Stall Time: 12 seconds or greater. 2.08 INSULATION SYSTEMS A. Single -Phase, Fractional Horsepower Motors: Manufacturer's standard winding insulation system. B. Motors Rated Over 600 Volts: Sealed windings in accordance with NEMA MG 1. C. Three-phase and Integral Horsepower Motors: Unless otherwise indicated in motor -driven equipment specification, Class F at nameplate horsepower and designated operating conditions except EXP and DIP motors which must be Class B with Class B rise. 2.09 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures to conform to NEMA MG 1. B. TEFC and TENV: Furnish with drain hole with porous drain/weather plug. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 262000-5 399884C.GN1 C. Explosion -Proof (EXP): 1. TEFC listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I, Division 1, Group C and D hazardous locations. 2. Drain holes with drain and breather fittings. 3. Integral thermostat opening on excessive motor temperature in accordance with UL 2111 and NFPA 70. 4. Terminate thermostat leads in terminal box separate from main terminal box. D. Dust -Ignition -Proof (DIP): 1. TEFC listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class II, Division 1, Group E. 2. Integral thermostat opening on excessive motor temperature in accordance with UL 2111 and NFPA 70. 3. Thermostat leads to terminate in a terminal box separate from main terminal box. E. Submersible: In accordance with Article Special Motors. F. Chemical Industry, Severe -Duty (CISD-TEFC): In accordance with Article Special Motors. 2.10 TERMINAL (CONDUIT) BOXES A. Oversize main terminal boxes for motors. C. 0 Diagonally split, rotatable to each of four 90 -degree positions. Threaded hubs for conduit attachment. Except ODP, furnish gaskets between box halves and between box and motor frame. Minimum usable volume in percentage of that specified in NEMA MG 1, Section 1, Paragraph 4.19 and NFPA 70, Article 430: Terminal Box Usable Values Voltage Horsepower Percentage Below 600 15 through 125 500 Below 600 150 through 300 275 Below 600 350 through 600 225 Above 600 All sizes 200 LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS PW/WBG/399884 262000-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 E. Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in each terminal box. F. Coordinate motor terminal box conduit entries versus size and quantity of conduits shown on Drawings. 2.11 BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION A. Horizontal Motors: 1. 3/4 hp and Smaller: Permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings, or regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs. 2. 1 hp through 400 hp: Regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs. 3. Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life for ball and roller bearings as defined in ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. B. Regreasable Antifriction Bearings: 1. Readily accessible, grease injection fittings. 2. Readily accessible, removable grease relief plugs. C. Oil Lubrication Systems: 1. Oil reservoirs with sight level gauge. 2. Oil fill and drain openings with opening plugs. 3. Provisions for necessary oil circulation and cooling. D. Inverter Duty Rated Motors, Bearing Isolation: Motors larger than 50 hp shall have electrically isolated bearings to prevent stray current damage. 2.12 NOISE A. Measured in accordance with NEMA MG 1. B. Motors controlled by adjustable frequency drive systems shall not exceed sound levels of 3 dBA higher than NEMA MG 1. 2.13 BALANCE AND VIBRATION CONTROL A. In accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 7. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 262000-7 3S•�:�Y��e ►il 2.14 EQUIPMENT FINISH A. Protect Motor for Service Conditions: 1. ODP Enclosures: Indoor industrial atmospheres. 2. Other Enclosures: Outdoor industrial atmospheres, including moisture and direct sunlight exposure. B. External Finish: Prime and finish coat manufacturer's standard. C. Internal Finish: Bore and end turns coated with clear polyester or epoxy varnish. 2.15 SPECIAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES A. Screen Over Air Openings: Stainless steel on motors with ODP, WPI, and WPII enclosures meeting requirements for guarded machine in NEMA MG 1, and attached with stainless steel screws. B. Winding Thermal Protection: Thermostats: a. Motors for constant speed application 10 hp through 100 hp. b. Bi -metal disk or rod type thermostats embedded in stator windings. C. Automatic reset contacts rated 120 volts ac, 5 amps minimum, opening on excessive temperature. (Provide manual reset at motor controller.) d. Leads extending to separate terminal box for motors 100 hp and larger. 2. Thermistors: a. Motors for adjustable speed application 20 hp and larger. b. Thermistor embedded in each stator phase winding before winding dip and bake process. C. In intimate contact with winding conductors. d. Control module rated for 120V ac power supply. e. Control module automatically reset contact for external use rated 120 V ac, 5 amps minimum, opening on abnormally high winding temperature. Provide manual reset at motor controller. C. Nameplates: 1. Raised or stamped letters on stainless steel or aluminum. 2. Display motor data required by NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 10.39 and Paragraph 10.40 in addition to bearing numbers for both bearings. LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS PW/WBG/399884 262000-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 Premium efficiency motor nameplates to display NEMA nominal efficiency, guaranteed minimum efficiency, full load power factor, and maximum allowable kVAR for power factor correction capacitors. D. Anchor Bolts: Provide meeting manufacturer's recommendations and of sufficient size and number for specified seismic condition. 2.16 SPECIAL MOTORS A. Requirements in this article take precedence over conflicting features specified elsewhere in this section. B. Chemical Industry, Severe -Duty (CISD-TEFC): 1. In accordance with IEEE 841. 2. TEFC in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 3. Suitable for indoor or outdoor installation in severe -duty applications including high humidity, chemical (corrosive), dirty, or salty atmospheres. 4. Motor Frame, End Shields, Terminal Box, and Fan Cover: Cast iron. 5. Ventilating Fan: Corrosion -resistant, nonsparking, external. 6. Drain and Breather Fittings: Stainless steel. 7. Nameplate: Stainless steel. 8. Gaskets between terminal box halves and terminal box and motor frame. 9. Extra slinger on rotor shaft to prevent moisture seepage along shaft into motor. 10. Double shielded bearings. 11. 125,000 hours minimum L-10 bearing life for direct -connected loads. 12. External Finish: Double -coated epoxy enamel. 13. Coated rotor and stator air gap surfaces. 14. Insulation System, Windings, and Connections: a. Class F insulation, Class B rise or better at 1.0 service factor. b. Multiple dips and bakes of nonhygroscopic polyester varnish. 15. Service Factor: a. At 40 Degrees C Ambient: 1.15. b. At 65 Degrees C Ambient: 1.00. 16. Safe Stall Time Without Injurious Heating: 20 seconds minimum. C. Severe -duty Explosion -proof: Meet requirements for EXP enclosures and CISD-TEFC motors. D. Severe -duty, Dust -ignition -proof: Meet requirements for DIP enclosures and CISD-TEFC motors. E. Multispeed: Meet requirements for speeds, number of windings, and load torque classification indicated in motor -driven equipment specification. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 262000-9 399884C.GN1 F. N Inverter Duty Motor: 1. Motor supplied power by adjustable voltage and adjustable frequency drives shall be inverter duty rated. 2. Suitable for operation over entire speed range indicated. 3. Provide forced ventilation where speed ratio is greater than published range for motor provided. 4. When installed in Division 1 hazardous (classified) location shall be identified as acceptable for variable speed when used in Division 1 location. Submersible Pump Motor: 1. Manufacturers: a. Reliance Electric. b. ITT Flygt Corp. C. Approved other. 2. At 100 Percent Load: Submersible Pump Motors Horsepower Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor 5 through 10 80 82 10.1 through 50 85 82 50.1 throu h 100 87 82 Over 100 89 82 3. Insulation System: Manufacturer's standard Class B or Class F. 4. Motor capable of running dry continuously. 5. Enclosure: a. Hermetically sealed, watertight, for continuous submergence up to 65 -foot depth. b. Listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous atmosphere. C. Seals: Tandem mechanical. 6. Bearing and Lubrication: a. Permanently sealed and lubricated, replaceable antifriction guide and thrust bearings. b. Minimum 15,000 hours L-10 bearing life. 7. Inrush kVA/horsepower no greater than NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70, Code F. 8. Winding Thermal Protection: a. Thermal sensor and switch assembly, one each phase, embedded in stator windings and wired in series. LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS PW/WBG/399884 262000-10 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 b. Switches normally closed, open upon excessive winding temperature, and automatically reclose when temperature has cooled to safe operating level. C. Switch contacts rated at 5 amps, 120V ac. 9. Motor Seal Failure Moisture Detection: a. Probes or sensors to detect moisture beyond seals. b. Probe or sensor monitoring module for mounting in motor controller, suitable for operation from 120V ac supply. C. Monitoring module with control power transformer, probe test switch and test light, and two independent 120V ac contacts, one opening and one closing when flux of moisture is detected. 10. Bearing Overtemperature Protection for Motors Larger than 100 hp: a. Sensor on lower bearing housing monitoring bearing temperature. b. Any monitoring relay necessary to provide 120V ac contact opening on bearing overtemperature. 11. Winding thermal protection, moisture detection, and bearing overtemperature specified above may be monitored by single device providing two independent 120V ac contacts, one closing and one opening on malfunction. 12. Connecting Cables: a. Two separate cables, one containing power and grounding conductors, and the other containing control and grounding conductors. b. Each cable suitable for hard service, submersible duty with watertight seal where cable enters motor. C. Length: As required for actual installation but not less than 25 feet minimum. d. UL 83 listed and sized in accordance with NFPA 70. 2.17 FACTORY TESTING A. Tests: 1. In accordance with IEEE 112 for polyphase motors. 2. Routine (production) tests in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Test multispeed motors at all speeds. 3. For energy efficient motors, test efficiency and power factor at 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of rated horsepower: a. In accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, and NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59. and Paragraph 12.60. b. For motors 500 hp and larger where facilities are not available to test by dynamometer (Test Method B), determine efficiency by IEEE 112, Test Method F. C. On motors of 100 hp and smaller, furnish certified copy of motor efficiency test report on an identical motor. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS JANUARY 12, 2015 262000-11 399884C.GN1 B. Test Report Forms: 1. Routine Tests: IEEE 112, Form A-1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Align motor carefully and properly with driven equipment. C. Secure equipment to mounting surface with anchor bolts. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Furnish manufacturer's representative at Site in accordance with Section 0143 33, Manufacturers' Field Services for installation assistance, inspection, equipment testing, and startup assistance for motors larger than 40 hp. END OF SECTION LOW -VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS PW/WBG/399884 262000-12 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 SECTION 26 22 00 LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C57.96, Guide for Loading Dry Type Transformers. 2. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA): 409, Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Dry -Type Transformers. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. ST 20, Dry -Type Transformers for General Applications. C. TP 1, Guide For Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. b. 489, Standard for Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. C. 1561, Standard for Dry -Type, General Purpose, and Power Transformers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Descriptive information. 2. Dimensions and weight. 3. Transformer nameplate data. 4. Schematic and connection diagrams. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Test Report: Sound test certification for dry type power transformers (0 to 600 -volt, primary). 2. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 0145 33, Special Inspection and Testing. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200-1 Q U*, A[SM►f PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. UL 1561, NEMA ST 20, unless otherwise indicated. B. Dry -type, self -cooled, two -winding, with aluminum windings. C. Units larger than 5 kVA suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. D. Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Table 4.2 of NEMA TP 1. Maximum Sound Level per NEMA ST 20: 1. 40 decibels for 0 kVA to 9 kVA. 2. 45 decibels for 10 kVA to 50 kVA. 3. 50 decibels for 51 kVA to 150 kVA. 4. 55 decibels for 151 kVA to 300 kVA. 5. 60 decibels for 301 kVA to 500 kVA. E. Overload capability: Short-term overload per IEEE C57.96. F. Wall Bracket: For single-phase units, 15 kVA to 37-1/2 kVA, and for three-phase units, 15 kVA to 30 kVA. G. Vibration Isolators: 1. Rated for transformer's weight. 2. Isolation Efficiency: 99 percent, at fundamental frequency of sound emitted by transformer. 3. Less Than 30 kVA: Isolate entire unit from structure with external vibration isolators. 4. 30 kVA and Above: Isolate core and coil assembly from transformer enclosure with integral vibration isolator. H. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Co. 2. Square D Co. 3. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2.02 MINI -POWER CENTER (MPC) A. General: Transformer, primary and secondary main circuit breakers, and secondary panelboard section enclosed in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PW/WBG/399884 262200-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 2.03 399884C.GN1 B. Transformer: 1. Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Core and Coil: Encapsulated. 3. Full capacity, 2-1/2 percent voltage taps, two above and two below normal voltage. 4. Primary Voltage: 480V single-phase. 5. Secondary Voltage: 240/120 volts, single-phase, three -wire. C. Panelboard: Full, UL 489, short-circuit current rated. 1. Type: Thermal -magnetic, quick -make, quick -break, indicating, with noninterchangeable molded case circuit breakers. 2. Number and Breaker Ampere Ratings: As required. GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER A. Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer's standard. B. Core and Coil: 1. Encapsulated for single-phase units 1/2 kVA to 25 kVA and for three- phase units 3 kVA to 15 kVA. 2. Thermosetting varnish impregnated for single-phase units 37.5 kVA and above, and for three-phase units 30 kVA and above. C. Enclosure: 1. Single -Phase, 3 kVA to 25 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 2. Single -Phase, 37-1/2 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated. 3. Three -Phase, 3 kVA to 15 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 4. Three -Phase, 30 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated. 5. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 6. Corrosive Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R stainless steel. D. Voltage Taps: 1. Three -Phase, 30 kVA and Above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. E. Impedance: 4.5 percent minimum on units 75 kVA and larger. PW/W13G/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS JANUARY 12, 2015 262200-3 399884C.GN1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA and manufacturer's instructions. B. Load external vibration isolator such that no direct transformer unit metal is in direct contact with mounting surface. C. Provide moisture -proof, flexible conduit for electrical connections. D. Connect voltage taps to achieve (approximately) rated output voltage under normal plant load conditions. E. Provide wall brackets for single-phase units, 15 kVA to 167-1/2 kVA, and three-phase units, 15 kVA to 112 kVA. END OF SECTION LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PW/WBG/399884 262200-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES 399884C.GN1 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. C62.1, Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits. b. C62.11, Standards for Metal -Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Power Circuits. 2. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA): 407, Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. 289, Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. C. AB 1, Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit -Breaker Enclosures. d. KS 1, Enclosed Switches. e. LA 1, Surge Arrestors. f. PB 1, Panelboards. g. PB 1. 1, General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 67, Standard for Panelboards. b. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches. C. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. d. 489, Standard for Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. f. 870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings. g. 943, Standard for Ground -Fault Circuit -Interrupters. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of panelboard, protective device, accessory item, and component. PW/WBG/399884 PANELBOARDS JANUARY 12, 2015 262416-1 399884C.GN1 1.03 1.04 2. Manufacturer's shop drawings including dimensioned plan, section, and elevation for each panelboard type, enclosure, and general arrangement. 3. Tabulation of features for each panelboard to include the following: a. Protective devices with factory settings. b. Provisions for future protective devices. C. Space for future protective devices. d. Voltage, frequency, and phase ratings. e. Enclosure type. f. Bus and terminal bar configurations and current ratings. g. Provisions for circuit terminations with wire range. h. Short circuit current rating of assembled panelboard at system voltage. i. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of auxiliary components. j. Wiring and schematic diagrams detailing control wiring, and differentiating between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. 2. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 0145 33, Special Inspection and Testing. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled as defined in NEC Article 100. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following material: Item Touch-up paint for panelboards PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Quantity One half-pint container A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. PANELBOARDS PW/WBG/399884 262416-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2. General Electric Co. 3. Square D Co. 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide low voltage panelboards for application at 600V or less in accordance with this Section including panelboards installed in other equipment specified in Sections 26 24 19, Low -Voltage Motor Control, 26 14 13, Switchboards, 26 23 00, Low -Voltage Switchgear, and 26 26 00.01, Power Distribution Units. B. Provide equipment in accordance with NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and UL 67. C. Wire Terminations: 1. Panelboard assemblies, including protective devices, shall be suitable for use with 75 degrees C or greater wire insulation systems at NEC 75 degrees C conductor ampacity. 2. In accordance with UL 486E. D. Load Current Ratings: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, load current ratings for panelboard assemblies, including bus and circuit breakers, are noncontinuous as defined by NEC. Continuous ratings shall be 80 percent of noncontinuous rating. 2. Where indicated "continuous", "100 percent", etc., selected components and protective devices shall be rated for continuous load current at value shown. E. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Integrated equipment short circuit rating for each panelboard assembly shall be no less than the following: Minimum SCCR at 208Y/120 or 120/240 volts shall be 18,000 amperes rms symmetrical. 2. Minimum SCCR at 480Y/277 volts shall be 32,000 amperes rms symmetrical. F. Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. In accordance with NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, UL 98, and UL 489. 2. Protective devices shall be adapted to panelboard installation. a. Capable of device replacement without disturbing adjacent devices and without removing main bus. b. Spaces: Cover openings with easily removable cover. 3. Series -Connected Short Circuit Ratings: Devices shall be fully rated; series -connected ratings unacceptable. PW/WBG/399884 PANELBOARDS JANUARY 12, 2015 262416-3 399884C.GN1 G. Circuit Breakers: 1. General: Thermal -magnetic unless otherwise indicated, quick -make, quick -break, molded case, of indicating type showing ON/OFF and TRIPPED positions of operating handle. 2. Noninterchangeable: In accordance with NEC. 3. Bus Connection: Bolt -on circuit breakers in 480Y/277 -volt, and plug-in circuit breakers in 208Y/120 and 240/120 -volt branch circuit panelboards. 4. Trip Mechanism: a. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. b. Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X to IOX for frames greater than 100 amps. C. Two and three pole, common trip. d. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole. e. Test button on cover. f. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise. 5. Unacceptable Substitution: a. Do not substitute single -pole circuit breakers with handle ties for multi -pole breakers. b. Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single -pole spaces. 6. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker as specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection of personnel). a. Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker. b. Push -to -test button. C. Reset button. H. Enclosures: 1. Provide as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 2. Material: Type 1, Type 3R, and Type 3S shall be code -gauge, hot -dip galvanized sheet steel with reinforced steel frame. 3. Finish: Rust inhibitor prime followed by manufacturer's standard gray baked enamel or lacquer. PANELBOARDS PW/WBG/399884 262416-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 Bus: 1. Material: Copper full sized throughout length. 2. Provide for mounting of future protective devices along full length of bus regardless of number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and tap as required for current and future positions. J. Feeder Lugs: Main, feed -through, and neutral shall be replaceable, bolted mechanical or crimp compression type. K. Equipment Ground Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of ground conductors, and bonded to box. 1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions. 2. Provide individual termination points for all other grounding conductors such as feeder, grounding electrode, etc. 3. Termination points shall be bolted crimp compression lugs for conductors 6 AWG and larger. L. Neutral Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of neutral conductors, and isolated from box. 1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions. 2. Provide individual termination points for all other neutral conductors. 3. Termination points shall be bolted crimp compression lugs for conductors 6 AWG and larger. M. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances for future protective device ampere ratings indicated. 2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Branch Protective Devices: 1. Locking: Furnish devices with provisions for handle padlocking. 2. Load Connections: Wire lugs shall be mechanical or crimp compression type, removable/replaceable, and suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating switch nor conductor ampacity. 3. Provide a nameplate for each circuit, blanks for spares. 2.04 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPDs) A. All panelboards shall include "built-in" surge protection devices appropriately rated and coordinated with other SPDs in the distribution system. PW/WBG/399884 PANELBOARDS JANUARY 12, 2015 262416-5 399884C.GN1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install in accordance with NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.1 and manufacturers' written installation instructions. B. Install securely, plumb, in-line and square with walls. C. Install top of cabinet trim78 inches above floor, unless otherwise shown. Install cabinet so tops of protective device operating handles are no more than 78 inches above the floor. D. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. F. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle, and wrap with nylon wire ties. 3.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD A. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish. B. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard. 3.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD A. Provide engraved identification for each protective device. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS PW/WBG/399884 262416-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Descriptive information. 2. Itemized Bill of Material. 3. Dimensional drawings. 4. Front Panel Elevations. 5. Conduit entrance locations. 6. Bus data. 7. Protective Devices: Copies of time -current characteristics. 8. Operational description. 9. Anchoring instructions and details. 10. Typed Tabulation: a. Motor name; tag (equipment) numbers as shown on Drawings. b. Motor horsepower. C. Nameplate full load current. d. Measured load current and voltage. e. Heater model number and relay setting. f. Protective device trip settings. g. Manufacturer's solid state starter switch or dip switch or program settings. h. Attach above typed, tabulated data to a copy of starter manufacturer's overload heater or setting selection tables for starters provided. 11. Control diagrams. 12. One -line diagrams. 13. Schematic (elementary) diagrams. 14. Outline diagrams. 15. Interconnection diagrams. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Factory test reports, certified. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide products manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories that conform to UL Standards and have applied UL Listing Mark. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Shipping Splits: Established by Contractor to facilitate ingress of equipment to final installation location within building. LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 262419-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of. 1. Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer. 2. GE Industrial Systems. 3. Schneider Electric/Square D Services. 4. Allen-Bradley. 5. Siemens. 2.02 GENERAL A. Like Items of Equipment: Same manufacturer as low voltage switchboard and panelboards for standardization. B. Make adjustments necessary to wiring, conduit, disconnect devices, motor starters, branch circuit protection, and other affected material or equipment to accommodate motors actually provided under this Contract. C. Controllers: NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, Class A. D. Control Transformer: 1. Two winding, 120 -volt secondary, primary voltage to suit. 2. Two current -limiting fuses for primary circuit. 3. One fuse in secondary circuit. 4. Mount within starter unit. E. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. F. Lifting lugs on equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds. G. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. H. Seismic Zone and Importance Factor shall be as specified in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements. I. Operating Conditions: 1. Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C. 2. Altitude: 1,200 above sea level. 3. Equipment to be fully rated. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 262419-3 399884C.GN1 J. Enclosures: In accordance with NEMA 250. K. Equipment Finish: 1. Electrocoating process applied over rust -inhibiting phosphated base coating. 2. Exterior Color: Manufacturer's standard. 2.03 SEPARATELY MOUNTED MOTOR CONTROL A. Manually Operated Starter, Fractional Horsepower: 1. Rating: 16 amperes continuous at 277 volts maximum. 2. Single-phase, nonreversing, full voltage with overload protection. 3. Toggle operated. 4. Enclosure: As shown. 5. Neon Light: Red. 6. Handle guard/lock-off attachment. B. Manually Operated Starter, Integral Horsepower: 1. Rating: Horsepower rated to maximum of 10 horsepower at 600 volts with overload protection. 2. Single-phase or three-phase, nonreversing, full voltage. 3. Control: Pushbutton. 4. Enclosure: As shown on Drawings. 5. Locking in OFF position. 6. Two spare auxiliary, field -changeable contacts. C. Thermal Motor Overload Protection: 1. Inverse -time -limit characteristic. 2. Heater: Bimetallic overload, adjustable trip, or directly heated melting alloy, ratchet principle type element. 3. Relay Trip: Standard, Class 20. 4. Manual reset. 5. Provide in each ungrounded phase. 6. Mount within starter unit. D. Solid State Motor Overload Protection: 1. Inverse -time -limit characteristic. 2. Phase loss, phase unbalanced and Class II ground fault protection. 3. Current operated electronic circuitry with adjustable trip. 4. Class 10/20/30 relay trip, switch selectable. 5. N.O. auxiliary contact for remote monitoring. 6. Manual reset. LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 262419-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 2.04 399884C.GN1 7. Provide in each ungrounded phase. 8. Mount within starter unit. 9. Communications: None. GROUP MOUNTED MOTOR CONTROL A. General: 1. In accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 18, and UL 845. 2. Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 3. Short Circuit Rating: 42,000 amperes rms symmetrical at 480 volts for a complete assembly. 4. Main and branch circuit breakers, controllers, wire connections, and other devices to be front mounted and accessible, unless otherwise noted. 5. NEMA ICS 18, Part 3. a. Class: I. b. Type: A. C. Wire remote control and signal circuits to separate terminal board compartment in each motor control center lineup. B. Enclosure: 1. Type: As shown on Drawings, and to suit supplier's standards. 2. Enclosures: a. Indoor NEMA 12 gasketed. b. Outdoor NEMA 3R with ventilation as required. 3. Construction: a. Sheet steel reinforced with channel or angle irons. b. Butt sections flush, end-to-end against similar section without bolts, nuts, or cover plates causing interference. C. Removable top cover plates. 4. Section Mounting: Removable formed -steel channel sills and lifting angles 5. Horizontal Wiring Compartments: Accessible from front, full width, top and bottom. 6. Terminal board compartment at 10 percent spare terminals. 7. Unit Compartment: Individual compartments separated by steel barriers for each starter, feeder, or other unit capable of being wired from front without unit removal. 8. Compartment Doors: Separate hinged doors for each starter, feeder, or other unit. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 262419-5 399884C.GN1 9. Door Interlocking: Mechanically interlock starter and feeder doors so doors cannot be opened with unit energized. Provide defeater mechanism to allow intentional access and energizing at any time by qualified individual. 10. External disconnect handles with ON/OFF and trip positions showing, padlockable in OFF position with up to three -lock capability. 11. Cable Entrance: Suitable for top and bottom entry. C. Bus: Horizontal Power Bus: a. Three-phase copper, entire width of control center, rated as shown. b. Construct to allow future extension of additional sections. C. Pressure type solderless lugs for each incoming line cable. d. Isolated from top horizontal wireway. 2. Neutral Bus: None. 3. Ground Bus: a. Copper, bare rated as shown. 4. Bus Bracing: 42,000 amperes rms symmetrical. D. Motor Controller Unit: 1. Provide indicated individual components and control devices including pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, control relays, time delay relays, and elapsed time meters as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 2. Construction: a. Bolt -on combination type. b. Readily interchangeable with starters of similar size. C. Pull -apart unit control wiring terminal boards capable of accepting up to 2#14 AWG wires minimum on drawout units. 3. Starters: a. NEMA ICS 18, standard rating, except none smaller than NEMA ICS, Size 1. b. Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volt, UL labeled for 42,000 amperes at 480 volts short circuit capacity with overload protection. C. Three-phase, nonreversing, unless specified otherwise. d. Disconnect Type: Circuit breaker. e. Combination Full Voltage, Magnetic Starter: 1) Control: HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch, STOP/START pushbutton. 2) Pilot Lights: Red—ON Green—OFF. f. Adjustable Frequency Drive: Drives as specified in Section 44 42 56.18, Ozone Disinfection System. LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 262419-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 262419-7 g. Padlockable operating handle when de -energized with up to three - lock capability. h. Unit door interlocked to prevent opening when disconnect is in closed position. i. Mechanical interlocked to prevent placing disconnect in ON position when unit door is open. j. Minimum Dimensions: 12 inches high by full section width, less vertical wireway. 4. Disconnecting Device: a. As indicated b. Padlockable in OPEN position for up to three locks. 5. Circuit Breaker: a. Meet requirements of UL 489. b. Molded case with manufacturer's recommended trip setting for maximum motor protection. C. Magnetic trip only. d. Tripping indicated by operating -handle position. e. Interrupting capacity required for connection to system with short- circuit capacity indicated. 6. Fused Switch: a. Heavy-duty, motor rated, load -break, quick -make, quick -break type meeting requirements of UL 98 and NEMA KS 1. b. Current -limiting fuses, with rejection clips. 7. Load Detector Relay: a. Manual reset with adjustable differential. b. Manufacturer: 1) Cutler -Hammer. 2) Allen-Bradley. 8. Thermal Motor Overload Protection: a. Inverse -time -limit characteristic. b. Heater: Bimetallic overload, adjustable trip, or directly heated melting alloy, ratchet principle type element. C. Relay Trip: Standard, Class 20. d. Manual reset. e. Provide in each ungrounded phase. f. Mount within starter unit. 9. Solid State Motor Overload Protection: a. Inverse -time -limit characteristic. b. Phase loss, phase unbalance and Class II ground fault protection. C. Current operated electronic circuitry with adjustable trip. d. Class 10/20/30 relay trip, switch selectable. e. One N.O. auxiliary contact for remote monitoring. f. Manual reset. g. Provide in each ungrounded phase. h. Mount within starter unit. i. Communications: None. PW/WBG/399884 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 262419-7 399884C.GN1 10. Motor Thermal Protector Interface: Manual -reset interposing relay for connection to motor -mounted thermal protector system. 11. Ground Fault Protection: Where indicated and as specified in Paragraph Main Protective Device and Feeder Units, except provide instantaneous operation device. E. Control Unit: 1. Disconnecting Device: Pull -apart terminal blocks capable of de -energizing external source control circuits in unit. 2. Control Devices: As indicated and as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 3. Control Wiring: a. Copper, 14 AWG, minimum. b. Permanent sleeve type markers with wire numbers applied to each end of wires. C. Terminate wires using insulated locking fork or ring type crimp terminals. d. Terminate current transformer leads on shorting type terminal blocks. F. Incoming Line Terminal: 1. Construction: As specified in Paragraph, Motor Controller Unit. 2. Incoming Service Feeder: As shown on Drawing. 3. Mechanical type CU -/AL lugs for 75 degrees C cable. G. Main Protective Device and Feeder Unit: 1. Construction: As specified in Paragraph Motor Controller Unit. 2. Incoming Service Feeder: Cable. 3. Molded Case Circuit Breaker: a. In accordance with UL 489. b. Main and feeder protective device. C. Thermal -magnetic trip and interrupting capacity required for connection to system with short circuit capacity indicated. d. Indicate tripping by operating -handle position. e. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NEC 75 degrees C ampacity. 4. Ground Fault Protection: a. Suitable for 480 -volt, three-phase, three -wire, solidly grounded wye system. b. Ground sensors to encircle phase conductors and neutral conductor where used, and connected to ground relays with adjustable pickup settings and time -current characteristics indicated. LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 262419-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Circuit breaker shunt trip and relay operating from fused 120 -volt ac control source within control center. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Cutler -Hammer; 2) General Electric. H. Transformers: As specified in Section 26 22 00, Low -Voltage Transformers. I. Panelboards: As specified in Section 26 24 16, Panelboards. J. Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches, Elapsed Time Meters, Control Relays, Time -Delay Relays, and Reset Timers: As specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. K. Nameplates: 1. Laminated plastic; white, engraved to black core. 2. Provide for each motor control center and each unit. 3. Engrave with inscription shown on single -line diagram. 4. Provide blank nameplates on spaces for future units. 5. Attach with stainless steel panhead screws on face of control center. L. Space Heaters: Thermostatically controlled. Locate in bottom of each vertical section for operation from 120 -volt power source derived internal to MCC. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Testing: 1. Applicable Standards: NEMA ICS 18, UL 845, and NEC Article 430, Part VIII. 2. Perform standard factory inspection and tests in accordance with NEMA requirements to verify components have been designed to Specification, assembled in accordance with applicable standards, and each unit functions in accordance with electrical diagrams. 3. Actual operation shall be performed wherever possible. Otherwise, inspect and perform continuity checks. 4. Verify component devices operated correctly in circuits as shown on diagrams or as called for in Specification. 5. Control Circuits and Devices: a. Energize circuit at rated voltage. b. Operate control devices. C. Perform continuity check. 6. Instruments, Meters, Protective Relays, and Equipment: a. Verify devices functioned by energizing potential to rated values with connection to devices made at outgoing terminal blocks. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL 262419-9 399884C.GN1 b. Verify protective relays operated for functional checks and trips manually initiated to verify functioning of operation for indicator and associated circuits. 7. Perform dielectric tests on primary circuits and equipment, except potential transformers. Tests shall be made phase -to -phase and phase -to - around with 60 -cycle test voltages applied for 1 second at 2,640 volts. 8. Verify equipment passed tests and inspection. 9. Provide standard factory inspection and test checklists, and final certified and signed test report. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install equipment in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, IEEE C2, NECA 402, Submittals, and manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 2. Secure equipment to mounting pads with anchor bolts of sufficient size and number adequate for specified seismic conditions. 3. Install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall. 4. Coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary feeders. 5. Grout mounting channels into floor or mounting pads. 6. Retighten current -carrying bolted connections and enclosure support framing and panels to manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Motor Data: Provide typed, self-adhesive label attached inside each motor starter enclosure door displaying the following information: a. Motor served by tag number and equipment name. b. Nameplate horsepower. C. Motor code letter. d. Full load amperes. e. Service factor. f. Installed overload relay heater catalog number. B. Circuit Breakers: 1. Field adjust trip settings of motor starter magnetic -trip -only circuit breakers. 2. Adjust to approximately 11 times motor rated current. 3. Determine motor rated current from motor nameplate following installation. C. Overload Relay: Select and install overload relay heaters and switch settings after actual nameplate full -load current rating of motor has been determined. END OF SECTION LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 262419-10 JANUARY 12, 2015 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PARTl GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES 399884C.GN1 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. Federal Specifications (FS): a. W -C -596G, General Specification for Connector, Electrical, Power. b. W -S -896F, Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low -Voltage (1,OOOV and less) AC Power Circuits. b. C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low -Voltage (1,OOOV and less) AC Power Circuits. 4. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 1, Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. FB 11, Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors of the Pin and Sleeve Type for Hazardous Locations. C. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. d. WD 6, Wiring Devices — Dimensional Specifications. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 498, Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. b. 508, Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. C. 943, Standard for Safety for Ground -Fault Circuit -Interrupters. d. 1010, Standard for Safety for Receptacle -Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. e. 1436, Standard for Safety for Outlet Circuit Testers and Similar Indicating Devices. f. 1449, Standard for Safety for Surge Protective Devices (SPD). 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer's product data for wiring devices. PW/WBG/399884 WIRING DEVICES JANUARY 12, 2015 262726-1 399884C.GN1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SWITCHES A. Switch, General Purpose: 1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W -S -896F. 2. Totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switch and screw terminal. 3. Rivetless one-piece brass or copper alloy contact arm with silver alloy contact. 4. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads. 5. Rating: 20 amps, 120/277 volts. 6. Automatic grounding clip and integral grounding terminal on mounting strap. 7. Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices where indicated: a. Three-way and four-way. 8. Manufacturers and Products, Industrial Grade: a. Bryant. b. Hubbell. C. Leviton. B. Switch, Motor Rated: 1. Type: Two -pole or three -pole, manual motor starting/disconnect switch without overload protection. 2. UL 508 listed. 3. Totally enclosed snap -action switch. Quick -make, slow -break design with silver alloy contacts. 4. Minimum General Purpose Rating: 30 amperes, 600V ac. 5. Minimum Motor Ratings: a. 2 horsepower for 120V ac, single-phase, two -pole. b. 3 horsepower for 240V ac, single-phase, two -pole. C. 15 horsepower for 480V ac, three-phase, three -pole. 6. Screw-type terminal. 7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Cooper Arrow Hart. b. Hubbell Bryant: HBL78 Series. C. Leviton. WIRING DEVICES PW/WBG/399884 262726-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.02 RECEPTACLES A. Receptacle, General Purpose: 1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W -C -596G. 2. Duplex, two -pole, three -wire grounding type with screw type wire terminals. 3. Impact resistant nylon cover and body, with finder grooves in face, unless otherwise indicated. 4. One-piece mounting strap with integral ground contact (rivetless construction). 5. Contact Arrangement: Contact to be made on two sides of each inserted blade without detent. 6. Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Size: For 2 -inch by 4 -inch outlet box. 8. Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices where indicated: a. Listed weather -resistant per NEC 406.8. 9. Industrial Grade Manufacturers and Products: a. Cooper Arrow Hart. b. Hubbell Bryant. C. Leviton. B. Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: 1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle. 2. Listed Class A to UL 943, tripping at 5 mA. 3. Rectangular smooth face with push -to -test and reset buttons. 4. Listed weather -resistant per NEC 406.8. 5. Feed -through Capability: 20 amps. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Hubbell Bryant. b. Cooper Arrow. C. Leviton. 2.03 DEVICE PLATES A. Sectional type plate not permitted. B. Plastic: 1. Material: Specification grade, 0.10 -inch minimum thickness, noncombustible, thermosetting. 2. Color: To match associated wiring device. 3. Mounting Screw: Oval -head metal, color matched to plate. PW/WBG/399884 WIRING DEVICES JANUARY 12, 2015 262726-3 399884C.GN1 C. Metal: 1. Material: Specification grade, one-piece, 0.040 -inch nominal thickness stainless steel. 2. Finish: ASTM A167, Type 302/304, satin. 3. Mounting Screw: Oval -head, finish matched to plate. D. Cast Metal: 1. Material: Malleable ferrous metal. 2. Screw: Oval -head stainless steel. E. Sheet Steel: 1. Finish: Zinc electroplate. 2. Screws: Oval -head stainless steel. 3. Manufacturers: a. Appleton. b. Crouse -Hinds. F. Engraved: 1. Character Height: 3/16 -inch. 2. Filler: Black. G. Weatherproof: 1. Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 1: a. Gasketed, cast -aluminum, with individual cap over each receptacle opening. b. Mounting Screw and Cap Spring: Stainless steel. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crouse -Hinds; Type WLRD-1. 2) Appleton; Type FSK-WRD. 2. Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 2: a. UL listed for wet location while in use. b. Die cast metal cover. C. Manufacturer and Product: TayMac; Type Multi -Mac. 3. Switch: a. Gasketed, cast -metal or cast -aluminum, incorporating external operator for internal switch. b. Mounting Screw: Stainless steel. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crouse -Hinds; DS -181 or DS -185. 2) Appleton; FSK- 1VTS or FSK- 1VS. WIRING DEVICES PW/WBG/399884 262726-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 H. Raised Sheet Metal: 1/2 -inch high zinc- or cadmium -plated steel designed for one-piece drawn type sheet steel box. I. Sheet Steel: Formed sheet steel or Feraloy designed for installation on cast - metal box. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Ensure device and its box are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device box and do not cut holes for box with router that is guided by riding against outside of box. 2. Keep outlet box free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device box in brick or block wall such that cover plate does not cross a joint, unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated or directed to cross joint, trowel joint flush with face of wall. 4. Install wiring device after wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. Length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. C. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. WIRING DEVICES 262726-5 399884C.GN1 5. Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices. 6. Effective core and equipment grounding. 7. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing. 8. Tank leaks and proper liquid level. 9. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. 10. Verify tap -changer is set at correct ratio for rated voltage under normal operating conditions. 11. Verify proper secondary voltage phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground after energization and prior to loading. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.5 for each: 1) Winding -to -winding. 2) Winding -to -ground. b. Test Duration: 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes. C. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14. d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings. 2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by manufacturer. 3. Sample insulating oil in accordance with ASTM D923 and have laboratory test for: a. Dielectric breakdown voltage in accordance with ASTM D877 or ASTM D1816. b. Acid neutralization number in accordance with ASTM D974. C. Interfacial tension in accordance with ASTM D971. d. Color in accordance with ASTM D 1500. e. Visual condition in accordance with ASTM D1524. f. Specific gravity in accordance with ASTM D 1298. g. Water content, in parts per million, in accordance with ASTM D1533. h. Dielectric fluid test results in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.4. i. Power factor at 25 degrees C and at 100 degrees, in accordance with ASTM D924. j. Maximum power factor, corrected to 20 degrees C, in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. COMMISSIONING OF PW/WBG/399884 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 260800-10 399884C.GN1 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in length. 5. Use torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 6. When conductors larger than 12 AWG are installed on 15 -amp or 20 -amp circuits, splice 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 7. Tighten unused terminal screws on device. 8. Device Plates: a. Do not use oversized or extra deep plate. b. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet box when standard device plate does not fit flush or does not cover rough wall opening. 3.02 SWITCH INSTALLATION A. Switch, General Purpose: 1. Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. 2. Install with switch operation in vertical position. 3. Install single -pole, two-way switch such that toggle is in up position when switch is on. B. Switch, Motor Rated: 1. Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. 2. Install with switch operation in vertical position such that toggle is in up position when ON. 3. Install within sight of motor when used as disconnect switch. C. Occupancy Sensor, Wall Switch: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 RECEPTACLE INSTALLATION A. Duplex Receptacle: 1. Install with grounding slot down, except where horizontal mounting is shown, in which case install with neutral slot down. 2. Ground receptacle to box with grounding wire only. 3. Weatherproof Receptacle: a. Install in cast metal box. b. Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle opening. WIRING DEVICES PW/WBG/399884 262726-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 4. Ground Fault Interrupter: Install feed -through model at locations where ground fault protection is specified for "downstream" conventional receptacles. 5. Special -Purpose Receptacle: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 DEVICE PLATE INSTALLATION A. Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure tight fit to box. B. Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surface without use of mat or similar material. Plaster fillings will not be acceptable. C. Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box, unless plate has no sharp corners or edges. D. Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch. E. Type (Unless Otherwise Shown): 1. Plastic. 2. Surface Mounted, Metal Box: a. General Purpose Areas: Sheet Steel. b. Other Areas: Cast. 3. Surface Mounted, Aluminum Box: a. General Purpose Areas: Stamped. b. Other Areas: Cast. 4. Surface Mounted, Sheet Steel Box: Raised sheet steel. 5. Surface Mounted, Nonmetallic Box: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Receptacle Shown as Weatherproof on Drawings: Weatherproof Type 1. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Use tape labels for identification of individual receptacles in dry indoor locations. 1. Degrease and clean device plate surface to receive tape labels. 2. Use 3/16 -inch Kroy black letters on white background, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Identify panelboard and circuit number from which item is served on face of plate. B. Identify conductors with durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. PW/WBG/399884 WIRING DEVICES JANUARY 12, 2015 262726-7 399884C.GN1 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections, and prepare test reports. B. Test Instrument for 125 -Volt 20 -Amp Receptacle: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. C. Using test plug, verify device and its outlet box are securely mounted. D. Line Voltage Range: 105 volts to 132 volts. E. Percent Voltage Drop under 15 -Amp Load: Less than 6 percent; 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. F. Ground Impedance: 2 ohms, maximum. G. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. H. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES PW/WBG/399884 262726-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 SECTION 40 0515 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES 399884C.GN1 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B31.1, Power Piping. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. International Code Council (ICC): 5. International Building Code (IBC). 6. International Mechanical Code (IMC). 7. Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS): a. SP 58, Pipe Hangers and Supports—Materials, Design and Manufacture. b. SP 127, Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic -Wind -Dynamic Design, Selection, and Application. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Wetted or Submerged: Submerged, less than 1 foot above liquid surface, below top of channel wall, under cover or slab of channel or tank, or in other damp locations. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Catalog information and drawings of piping support system, locating each support, sway brace, seismic brace, hanger, guide, component, and anchor for piping 6 inches and larger. Identify support, hanger, guide, and anchor type by catalog number and Shop Drawing detail number. 2. Calculations for each type of pipe support, attachment and anchor. PW/WBG/399884 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 4005 15 - 1 399884C.GN1 3. Revisions to support systems resulting from changes in related piping system layout or addition of flexible joints. 4. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations. 2. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 0145 33, Special Inspection and Testing. 3. Maintenance information on piping support system. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Piping support systems shall be designed and Shop Drawings prepared and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the state where the Work is to be installed. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General: I. Design, size, and locate piping support systems throughout facility, whether shown or not. 2. Piping Smaller than 30 Inches: Supports are shown only where specific types and locations are required; additional pipe supports may be required. 3. Meet requirements of MSS SP 58 and ASME B31.1 or as modified by this section. B. Pipe Support Systems: 1. Design pipe support systems for gravity and thrust loads imposed by weight of pipes or internal pressures, including insulation and weight of fluid in pipes. 2. Seismic loads in accordance with governing codes. 3. Wind loads in accordance with governing codes. 4. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Rod Size: In accordance MSS SP 58 Table 3 and Table 4. a. Ductile -iron Pipe 8 Inches and Under: Maximum span limited to that for standard weight steel pipe for water service. b. Ductile -iron Pipe 10 Inches and Larger: Maximum span limited to 20 feet. PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/399884 4005 15-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Anchoring Devices: Design, size, and space support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor support, to withstand shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support. D. Vertical Sway Bracing: 10 -foot maximum centers or as shown. E. Existing Support Systems: Use existing supports systems to support new piping only if Contractor can show they are adequate for additional load, or if they are strengthened to support additional load. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. When specified items are not available, fabricate pipe supports of correct material and to general configuration indicated. B. Special support and hanger details may be required for cases where standard catalog supports are not applicable. C. Materials: In accordance with Table 1 and Table 2, attached as Supplements at end of section. 2.02 HANGERS A. Clevis: MSS SP 58, Type l: I. Anvil; Figure 260 for steel pipe and Figure 590 for ductile -iron pipe, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches. 2. Insulated Steel Pipe: Anvil; Figure 260 with insulated saddle system (ISS), sizes 1/2 inch through 16 inches. 3. B -Line; Figure B3100, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches. B. Adjustable Swivel Split -Ring Pipe Clamp: MSS SP 58, Type 6: I. Anvil; Figure 104, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches. 2. B -Line; Figure B3171, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches. C. Steel Yoke Pipe Rolls and Roller Supports: MSS SP 58, Type 41 or Type 43: 1. Anvil; Figure 181 for sizes 2-1/2 inches through 24 inches, and Figure 171 for sizes 1 inch through 30 inches. 2. B -Line; Figure B3110 for sizes 2 inches through 24 inches and Figure B3114 for 30 inches. PW/WBG/399884 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 4005 15-3 399884C.GN1 D. Pipe Rollers and Supports: MSS SP 58, Type 44: 1. Anvil; Figure 175, sizes 2 inches through 30 inches. 2. B -Line; Figure B3120, sizes 2 inches through 24 inches. 2.03 WALL BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES A. Welded Steel Wall Bracket: MSS SP 58, Type 33 (heavy-duty): 1. Anvil; Figure 199, 3,000 -pound rating. 2. B -Line; Figure B3067, 3,000 -pound rating. B. Adjustable "J" hanger MSS SP 58, Type 5: I. Anvil; Figure 67, sizes 1/2 inch through 8 inches. 2. B -Line; Figure B3690, sizes 1/2 inch through 8 inches. C. Offset Pipe Clamp: Anvil; Figure 103, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches. D. Channel Type: I. Unistrut. 2. Anvil; Power -Strut. 3. B -Line; Strut System. 4. Aickinstrut (FRP). 2.04 PIPE SADDLES A. Provide 90 -degree to 120 -degree pipe saddle for pipe 6 inches and larger with baseplates drilled for anchors bolts. 1. In accordance with Standard Detail 4005-515. 2. Sizes 20 inches though 60 inches, Piping Technology & Products, Inc.; Fig. 2000. B. Saddle Supports, Pedestal Type: 1. Minimum standard weight pipe stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange. 2. Nonadjustable Saddle: MSS SP, Type 37 with U -bolt. a. Anvil; Figure 259, sizes 4 inches through 36 inches with Figure 63C base. b. B -Line; Figure B3095, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches with B3088S base. 3. Adjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58, Type 38 without clamp. a. Anvil; Figure 264, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches with Figure 62C base. PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/399884 400515-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 b. B -Line; Figure B3092, sizes 3/4 inch through 36 inches with Figure B3088S base. 2.05 CHANNEL TYPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Channel Size: 12 -gauge, 1 -5/8 -inch wide minimum steel, or 1 -1/2 -inch wide, minimum FRP. B. Members and Connections: Design for loads using one-half of manufacturer's allowable loads. C. Fasteners: Vinyl ester fiber, polyurethane base composite nuts and bolts, or encapsulated steel fasteners. D. Manufacturers and Products: I. B -Line; Strut System. 2. Unistrut. 3. Anvil; Power -Strut. 4. Aickinstrut (FRP System). 5. Enduro-Durostrut (FRP Systems). 2.06 FRP PIPE SUPPORTS SYSTEMS A. General: 1. FRP with UV additive, protective veil, and vinyl ester resins resistance to chemicals listed in Supplement at end of section. 2. Fire Retardant: ASTM E84. 3. Include hangers, rods, attachments, and fasteners. B. Clevis Hangers: 1. Factor of Safety: 3 to 1. 2. Minimum Design Load: 200 pounds. C. Design: 1. Design pipe supports spacing, hanger rod sizing based upon manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Identify and highlight nonFRP fasteners or components in Shop Drawing. PW/WBG/399884 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 4005 15-5 399884C.GN1 D. Manufacturers: L Aickinstrut. 2. Enduro. 3. Century Composite. 2.07 PIPE CLAMPS A. Riser Clamp: MSS SP 58, Type 8. L Anvil; Figure 261, sizes 3/4 inch through 24 inches. 2. B -Line; Figure B3373, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches. 2.08 ELBOW AND FLANGE SUPPORTS A. Elbow with Adjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2 inches through 18 inches, Anvil; Figure 62C base. B. Elbow with Nonadjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2-1/2 inches through 42 inches, Anvil; Figure 63A or Figure 63B base. C. Flange Support with Adjustable Base: Sizes 2 inches through 24 inches, Standon; Model 589. 2.09 INTERMEDIATE PIPE GUIDES A. Type: Hold down pipe guide. 1. Manufacturer and Product: B -Line; Figure B3552, 1-1/2 inches through 30 inches. B. Type: U -bolts with double nuts to provide nominal 1/8 -inch to 1/4 -inch clearance around pipe; MSS SP 58, Type 24. 1. Anvil; Figure 137 and Figure 1375. 2. B -Line; Figure B3188 and Figure B3188NS. 2.10 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES A. Type: Spider. B. Manufacturers and Products: I. Anvil; Figure 255, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. 2. B -Line; Figure B3281 through Figure B3287, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/399884 400515-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.11 PIPE ANCHORS A. Type: Anchor chair with U -bolt strap. B. Manufacturer and Product: B -Line; Figure B3147A or Figure B314713. 2.12 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Solid pipe bracing attachment to pipe clevis with clevis cross brace and angle rod reinforcement. B. Manufacturers: 1. Mason Industries. 2. B -Line. 3. Anvil. 2.13 ACCESSORIES A. Anchor Bolts: 1. Size and Material: Sized by Contractor for required loads, 1/2 -inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 2. Bolt Length (Extension Above Top of Nut): a. Minimum Length: Flush with top of nut preferred. If not flush, shall be no more than one thread recessed below top of nut. b. Maximum Length: No more than a full nut depth above top of nut. B. Dielectric Barriers: 1. Plastic coated hangers, isolation cushion, or tape. 2. Manufacturer and Products: a. B -Line; B 1999 Vibra Cushion. b. B -Line; Iso Pipe, Isolation Tape. C. Insulation Shields: 1. Type: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, MSS SP 58, Type 40. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Anvil; Figure 167, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. b. B -Line; Figure B3151, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. PW/WBG/399884 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 4005 15-7 399884C.GN1 D. Welding Insulation Saddles: 1. Type: MSS SP 58, Type 39. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Anvil; Figure Series 160, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches. b. B -Line; Figure Series B3160, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches. E. Plastic Pipe Support Channel: 1. Type: Continuous support for plastic pipe and to increase support spacing. 2. Manufacturer and Product: B -Line; Figure Series B3106V, sizes 1/2 inch through 6 inches with Figure B3106 Vee bottom hanger. F. Hanger Rods, Clevises, Nuts, Sockets, and Turnbuckles: In accordance with MSS SP 58. G. Attachments: 1. I -Beam Clamp: Concentric loading type, MSS SP 58, Type 21, Type 28, Type 29, or Type 30, which engage both sides of flange. 2. Concrete Insert: MSS SP 58, Type 18, continuous channel insert with load rating not less than that of hanger rod it supports. 3. Welded Beam Attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22. a. Anvil; Figure 66. b. B -Line; Figure B3083. 4. U -Channel Concrete Inserts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. 5. Concrete Attachment Plates: a. Anvil; Figure 47, Figure 49, or Figure 52. b. B -Line; Figure B3084, Figure B3085, or Figure B3086. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install support systems in accordance with MSS SP 58, unless shown otherwise. 2. Install pipe hanger rods plumb, within 4 degrees of vertical during shut down, start up or operations. 3. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by equipment. 4. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, and appurtenances independently of connected piping. PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/399884 400515-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 5. Support no pipe from pipe above it. 6. Support pipe at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible joints and couplings, and where shown. 7. Do not use adhesive anchors for attachment of supports to ceiling or walls. 8. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or bridge crane runs. 9. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing and to reduce movement after startup. 10. Install lateral supports for seismic loads at changes in direction. 11. Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion. 12. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are completed. B. Standard Pipe Supports: 1. Horizontal Suspended Piping: a. Single Pipes: Clevis hangers or adjustable swivel split -ring. b. Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger system. 2. Horizontal Piping Supported from Walls: a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets, or attached to wall, or to wall mounted framing with anchors. b. Stacked Piping: Wall mounted framing system and "J" hangers acceptable for pipe smaller than 3 -inch. C. Pipe clamp that resists axial movement of pipe through support is not acceptable. Use pipe rollers supported from wall bracket. 3. Horizontal Piping Supported from Floors: a. Saddle Supports: 1) Pedestal Type, elbow and flange. 2) Provide minimum 1 -1/2 -inch grout beneath baseplate. b. Floor Mounted Channel Supports: 1) Use for pipe smaller than 3 -inch running along floors and in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated using pedestal pipe supports. 2) Attach channel framing to floors with baseplate on minimum 1-1 /2 -inch nonshrink grout and with anchor bolts. 3) Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps. C. Concrete Cradles: Use for pipe larger than 3 inches along floor and in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated using stanchion type. 4. Insulated Pipe: a. Pipe hanger and support shall be on outside of insulation. Do not enclose within insulation. PW/WBG/399884 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 4005 15-9 399884C.GN1 C. b. Provide precut 120 -degree sections of rigid insulation (minimum length same as shield), shields and oversized hangers or insulated saddle system (ISS). C. Wall -mounted pipe clips not acceptable for insulated piping. 5. Vertical Pipe: Support with wall bracket and elbow support, or riser clamp on floor penetration. Standard Attachments: 1. New Concrete Ceilings: Concrete inserts, concrete attachment plates, or concrete anchors as limited below: a. Single point attachment to ceiling allowed only for 3/4 -inch rod and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe). b. Where there is vibration or bending considerations, do not connect a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size. 1) These lines include air operated diagram pumps and other lines, if any, as identified below. 2. Existing Concrete Ceilings: Channel type support with minimum of two anchor points, concrete attachment plates or concrete anchors as limited below: a. Single point attachment to ceiling is allowed only for 3/4 -inch rod and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe). b. Where there is vibration or bending considerations do not connect a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size. 1) These lines include air operated diagram pumps and other lines, if any, as identified below. 3. Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments. 4. Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members not less than 2-1/2 inches thick. 5. Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with concrete anchors. 6. Concrete Beams: Concrete inserts, or if inserts are not used attach to vertical surface similar to concrete wall. Do not drill into beam bottom. D. Saddles for Steel or Concrete Pipe: Provide 90 -degree to120-degree pipe saddle for pipe sizes 6 inches and larger when installed on top of steel or concrete beam or structure, pipe rack, trapeze, or where similar concentrated point supports would be encountered. E. Intermediate and Pipe Alignment Guides: Provide pipe alignment guides, or pipe supports that provide same function, at expansion joints and loops. PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS PW/WBG/399884 400515-10 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2. Guide pipe on each side of expansion joint or loop at 4 pipe and 14 pipe diameters from each joint or loop. 3. Install intermediate guides on metal framing support systems not carrying pipe anchor or alignment guide. F. Accessories: 1. Insulation Shield: Install on insulated piping with oversize rollers and supports. 2. Welding Insulation Saddle: Install on insulated steel pipe with oversize rollers and supports. 3. Dielectric Barrier: a. Provide between painted or galvanized carbon steel members and copper or stainless steel pipe or between stainless steel supports and nonstainless steel ferrous metal piping. b. Install rubber wrap between submerged metal pipe and oversized clamps. 3.02 FIELD FINISHING A. Paint atmospheric exposed surfaces hot -dip galvanized steel components as specified in Section 09 90 04, Painting. 3.03 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this specification: 1. 2. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Table 1: Nonchemical Areas. Table 2: Chemical Areas. END OF SECTION PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS 400515-11 399884C.GN1 Table 1 Nonchemical Areas Exposure Conditions Support Material Office Areas Galvanized steel or precoated steel, plastic coated hangers for uninsulated copper or stainless steel piping Shops and Warehouse Areas Galvanized steel or precoated steel, plastic coated hangers for uninsulated copper or stainless steel piping Pipe Galleries Galvanized steel or precoated steel, plastic coated hangers for uninsulated copper or stainless steel piping Headworks Stainless steel or FRP Process Areas: High Humidity or Hydrogen Stainless steel or FRP sulfide Process Areas: Wetted or Submerged Stainless steel or FRP Notes: 1. Precoated steel to be fusion bonded epoxy or vinyl copolymer (Plastisol). 2. Stainless steel to be Type 304. 3. Galvanized steel to be per ASTM A653/A653M, Class G90, or hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M. 4. Do not use galvanized steel or aluminum where lime dust can accumulate on these surfaces. PW/WBG/399884 NONCHEMICAL AREAS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 05 15 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 PW/WBG/399884 CHEMICAL AREAS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 05 15 SUPPLEMENT - 1 Table 2 Chemical Areas Exposure Conditions Support for Direct Exposure Support for Remote Exposure Alum FRP Precoated steel Aqua Ammonia Stainless steel Precoated steel Coagulants FRP Precoated steel or galvanized steel Ferric Chloride FRP Precoated steel Ferric Sulfate FRP Precoated steel H drofluorosilic Acid FRP Precoated steel Lime Stainless steel, FRP, recoated steel Stainless steel, FRP, precoated steel Methanol Galvanized steel Galvanized steel Ox en Stainless steel Stainless steel Ozone Stainless steel Stainless steel Polymers FRP Precoated steel Potassium Permanganate Precoated steel Precoated steel Powdered Activated Carbon Precoated steel Precoated steel Sodium Carbonate Stainless steel Precoated steel Sodium Hydroxide Stainless steel Precoated steel Sodium Hypochlorite FRP Precoated steel Sulfuric Acid Stainless steel Precoated steel Notes: 1. Direct exposure includes entire area within containment area; area within 20 feet horizontal and 10 feet vertical of chemical generators, chemical pumps or chemical mixing stations; or as specified. 2. Remote exposure is area beyond area defined as direct exposure, but within designated building. 3. Precoated steel to be fusion bonded epoxy or vinyl copolymer (Plastisol). 4. Stainless steel to be Type 304. 5. Galvanized steel to be per ASTM A653/A653M, Class G90, or hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M. 6. Do not use galvanized steel or aluminum where lime dust can accumulate on these surfaces. PW/WBG/399884 CHEMICAL AREAS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 05 15 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 27 00 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PARTl GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section and any supplemental Data Sheets: 1. Air Force: A -A-58092, Tape, Anti -seize, Polytetrafluorethylene. 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): HB -17, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 3. American Petroleum Institute (API): SPEC 5L, Specification for Line Pipe. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators. b. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). C. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, and 250. d. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300. e. B 16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. f. B 16.9, Factory -Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. g. B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket -Welding and Threaded. h. B 16.15, Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 i. B16.21, Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. j. B 16.22, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. k. B 16.24, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500. 1. B 16.25, Buttwelding Ends. in. B 16.42, Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 150 and 300. n. B31.1, Power Piping. o. B31.3, Process Piping. p. B31.9, Building Services Piping. q. 1336.10M, Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): SNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice for Personal Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL 402700-1 399884C.GN1 6. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C 104/A21.4, Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings. b. C 105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems. C. C 110/A21.10, Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings. d. C 111 /A21.11, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. e. C 115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. f. C 151 /A21.51, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. g. C153/A21.53, Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings. h. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm). i. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 7. American Welding Society (AWS): a. Brazing Handbook. b. A5.8M/A5.8, Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. C. D 1.1 /D 1.1 M, Structural Welding Code - Steel. d. QC I, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors. 8. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A47/A47M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. b. A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. C. A105/A105M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. d. A106/A106M, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High -Temperature Service. e. A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. f. A135/A135M, Standard Specification for Electric -Resistance - Welder Steel Pipe. g. A139/A139M, Standard Specification for Electro -Fusion (Arc)– Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 Inches and Over). h. Al53/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. i. A181/A181M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General -Purpose Piping. j. AI82/AI82M, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High -Temperature Service. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 k. A183, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts. 1. Al93/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. in. A194/AI94M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. n. AI97/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. o. A216/A216M, Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High -Temperature Service. p. A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. q. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. r. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. S. A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. t. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. U. A312/A312M, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. V. A320/A320M, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low -Temperature Service. W. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure -Containing Parts. X. A395/A395M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure -Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. y. A403/A403M, Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings. Z. A409/A409M, Standard Specification for Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High -Temperature Service. aa. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. bb. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. cc. A587, Standard Specification for Electric -Resistance -Welded Low -Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical Industry. dd. A743/A743M, Standard Specification for Castings, Iron - Chromium, Iron -Chromium -Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application. ee. A744/A744M, Standard Specification for Castings, Iron - Chromium -Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service. ff. A774/A774M, Standard Specification for As -Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures. PW/WBG/399884 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL JANUARY 12, 2015 402700-3 399884C.GN1 gg. A778, Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products. hh. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. ii. B43, Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes. jj. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. kk. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 11. B75/B75M, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. mm. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. nn. B98/1398M, Standard Specification for Copper -Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar and Shapes. oo. B462, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N06030, UNS N06022, UNS N06035, UNS N06200, UNS N06059, UNS N10362, UNS N06686, UNS N08020, UNS N08024, UNS N08026, UNS N08367, UNS N10276, UNS N10665, UNS N10675, UNS N10629, UNS N08031, UNS N06045, UNS N06025, and UNS R20033 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for Corrosive High -Temperature Service. pp. B464, Standard Specification for Welded UNS N08020 Alloy Pipe. qq. B474, Standard Specification for Electric Fusion Welded Nickel and Nickel Alloy Pipe. rr. C582, Standard Specification for Contact -Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion -Resistant Equipment. ss. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -Tension. tt. D413, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property -Adhesion to Flexible Substrate. uu. D543, Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents. w. D1248, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable. ww. D1330, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets. xx. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. yy. D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. ZZ. D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. PROCESS PIPING -GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 aaa. D2310, Standard Classification for Machine -Made "Fiberglass" (Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Thermosetting -Resin) Pipe. bbb. D2464, Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ccc. D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. ddd. D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. eee. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. fff. D2837, Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Products. ggg. D2996, Standard Specification for Filament -Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Thermosetting -Resin) Pipe. hhh. D3222, Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials. iii. D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials. jjj. D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. kkk. D4894, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion Materials. Ill. D4895, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Resin Produced from Dispersion. mmm. F423, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Plastic -Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe, Fittings, and Flanges. min. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 000. F437, Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. ppp. F439, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. qqq. F441/17441M, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. rrr. F493, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. sss. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. ttt. F656, Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 9. FM Global (FM). 10. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS): SP -43, Wrought and Fabricated Butt -Welding Fittings for Low -Pressure, Corrosion Resistant Applications. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL 402700-5 399884C.GN1 11. NSF International (NSF): a. ANSI 61: Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. ANSI 372: Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LI 1, Industrial Laminating Thermosetting Products. 13. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Submerged or Wetted: Zone below elevation of: a. Top face of channel walls and cover slabs. b. Liquid surface or within 2 feet above top of liquid surface. C. Top of tank wall or under tank cover. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Where pipe diameter, thickness, pressure class, pressure rating, or thrust restraint is not shown or specified, design piping system in accordance with the following: 1. Process Piping: ASME B31.3, normal fluid service unless otherwise specified. 2. Buried Piping: H20 -S16 traffic load with 1.5 impact factor, AASHTO HB -17, as applicable. 3. Thrust Restraints: a. Design for test pressure shown in Piping Schedule. b. Allowable Soil Pressure: 1,000 pounds per square foot. C. Low Pressure Pipelines: 1) When bearing surface of the fitting against soil provides an area equal to or greater than area required for thrust restraint, concrete thrust blocks will not be required. 2) Determine bearing area for fittings without thrust blocks by projected area of 70 percent of internal diameter multiplied by chord length for fitting centerline curve. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Shop Fabricated Piping: a. Detailed pipe fabrication or spool drawings showing special fittings and bends, dimensions, coatings, and other pertinent information. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 b. Layout drawing showing location of each pipe section and each special length; number or otherwise designate laying sequence on each piece. 2. Pipe Wall Thickness: Identify wall thickness and rational method or standard applied to determine wall thickness for each size of each different service including exposed, submerged, buried, and concrete - encased installations for Contractor -designed piping. 3. Hydraulic Thrust Restraint for Restrained Joints: Details including materials, sizes, assembly ratings, and pipe attachment methods. 4. Thrust Blocks: Concrete quantity, bearing area on pipe, and fitting joint locations. 5. Dissimilar Buried Pipe Joints: Joint types and assembly drawings. 6. Pipe Corrosion Protection: Product data. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance: a. Pipe and fittings. b. Welding electrodes and filler materials. C. Factory applied resins and coatings. 2. Qualifications: a. Nondestructive Testing Personnel: SNT-TC-IA Level II certification and qualifications. b. AWS QC Certified Welding Inspector: Submit evidence of current certification prior to commencement of welding activities. C. Welders: 1) Continuity log for welders and welding operators. 2) Welder qualification test records conducted by Contractor or manufacturer. 3. Welding Procedures: Qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX for weld type(s) and base metal(s). 4. Nondestructive inspection and testing procedures. 5. Test logs. 6. Pipe coating applicator certification. 7. Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as required by Section 0145 33, Special Inspection and Testing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Independent Inspection and Testing Agency: a. Ten years' experience in field of welding and welded pipe and fittings' testing required for this Project. b. Calibrated instruments and equipment, and documented standard procedures for performing specified testing. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL 402700-7 399884C.GN1 C. Certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1 A for testing procedures required for this Project. d. Testing Agency: Personnel performing tests shall be NDT Level II certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-IA. e. Verification Welding Inspector: AWS QC Certified. 2. Welding Procedures: In accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX (Forms QW -482 and QW -483) or AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex N Forms). 3. Welder and Welding Operator Qualifications: In accordance ASME BPVC SEC IX (Form QW -484) or AWS D1.1/D1.1M (Annex N Forms). a. Qualified by accepted inspection and testing agency before starting work in accordance with Section IX, Article III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. b. Qualified to perform groove welds in Positions 2G and 5G for each welding process and pipe material specified. C. Qualification tests may be waived by Engineer based on evidence of prior qualification. d. Retesting: Upon Engineer's written request, retest qualified welder(s). 4. Contractor's CWI: Certified in accordance with AWS QC I, and having prior experience with specified welding codes. Alternate welding inspector qualifications require approval by Engineer. B. Quality Assurance: Provide services of independent inspection and testing agency for welding operations. 1. Note, the presence of Owner's Special Inspector or Verification CWI does not relieve Contractor from performing own quality control, including 100 percent visual inspection of welds. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with: 1. Flanges: Securely attach metal, hardboard, or wood protectors over entire gasket surface. 2. Threaded or Socket Welding Ends: Fit with metal, wood, or plastic plugs or caps. 3. Linings and Coatings: Prevent excessive drying. 4. Cold Weather Storage: Locate products to prevent coating from freezing to ground. 5. Handling: Use heavy canvas or nylon slings to lift pipe and fittings. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 2.02 PIPING A. As specified on Piping Data Sheet(s) located at the end of this section as Supplement. B. Diameters Shown: 1. Standardized Products: Nominal size. 2. Fabricated Steel Piping (Except Cement -Lined): Outside diameter, ASME B36.10M. 3. Cement -Lined Steel Pipe: Lining inside diameter. 2.03 JOINTS A. Flanged Joints: 1. Flat -faced, carbon steel, or alloy flanges when mating with flat -faced cast or ductile iron flanges. 2. Higher pressure rated flanges as required to mate with equipment when equipment flange is of higher pressure rating than required for piping. B. Threaded Joints: NPT taper pipe threads in accordance with ASME B 1.20.1. C. Mechanical Joint Anchor Gland Follower: 1. Ductile iron anchor type, wedge action, with break -off tightening bolts. 2. Thrust rated to 250 psi minimum. 3. Rated operating deflection not less than: a. 3 degrees for sizes through 12 inches. b. 2 degrees for sizes 14 inches through 16 inches. C. 1.5 degrees for sizes 18 inches through 24 inches. d. 1 degree for sizes 30 inches through 48 inches. 4. UL and FM approved. 2.04 GASKET LUBRICANT A. Lubricant shall be supplied by pipe manufacturer and no substitute or "or -equal" will be allowed. 2.05 PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION A. Coatings: See Section 09 90 04, Painting, for details of coating requirements. PW/WBG/399884 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL JANUARY 12, 2015 402700-9 399884C.GN1 B. Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Unions: 1. Materials: a. In accordance with applicable piping material specified in Pipe Data Sheet. Complete assembly shall have ASME B31.9 working pressure rating equal to or higher than that of joint and pipeline. b. Galvanically compatible with piping. C. Resistant for intended exposure, operating temperatures, and products in pipeline. 2. Union Type, 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Screwed or solder joint. b. O-ring sealed with molded and bonded insulation to body. 3. Flange Type, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: a. Flanged, complete with bolt insulators, dielectric gasket, bolts, and nuts. b. Bolt insulating sleeves shall be provided full length between insulating washers. C. Ensure fit -up of components of insulated flange assembly to provide a complete functioning installation. d. AWWA C207 steel flanges may be drilled oversize up to 1/8 -inch to accommodate insulating sleeves. e. No less than minimum thread engagement in accordance with specified bolting standards will be permitted to accommodate thicknesses of required washers, flanges, and gasket. 4. Flange Insulating Kits: a. Gaskets: Full -face, Type E with elastomeric sealing element. Sealing element shall be retained in a groove within retainer portion of gasket. b. Insulating Sleeves: Full-length fiberglass reinforced epoxy (NEMA LI -1, G-10 grade). C. Insulating Washers: Fiberglass -reinforced epoxy (NEMA LI - 1, G-10 grade). d. Steel Washers: Hardened steel, ASTM F436, 1/8 inch thick. 1) Flange Diameters 36 Inches or Less: Provide two washers per bolt. 2) Flange Diameters Larger Than 36 Inches: Provide four washers per bolt. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Dielectric Flanges and Unions: 1) PSI, Houston, TX. 2) Advance Products and Systems, Lafayette, LA. b. Insulating Couplings: 1) Dresser; STAB -39. 2) Baker Coupling Company, Inc.; Series 216. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-10 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.06 THRUST BLOCKS A. Concrete: As specified in Division 3, Concrete. 2.07 THRUST TIES A. Steel Pipe: Joint harness as specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Mark each pipe length on outside with the following: 1. Size or diameter and class. 2. Manufacturer's identification and pipe serial number. 3. Location number on laying drawing. 4. Date of manufacture. B. Code markings according to approved Shop Drawings. C. Shop fabricate flanged pipe in shop, not in field, and delivered to Site with flanges in place and properly faced. Threaded flanges shall be individually fitted and machine tightened on matching threaded pipe by manufacturer. 2.09 FINISHES A. Factory prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Pipe Data Sheet(s) and Piping Schedule. 2.10 PIPE LABELS A. As specified in Section 10 14 00, Signage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify size, material, joint types, elevation, horizontal location, and pipe service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new equipment. B. Inspect size and location of structure penetrations to verify adequacy of wall pipes, sleeves, and other openings. C. Welding Electrodes: Verify proper grade and type, free of moisture and dampness, and coating is undamaged. PW/WBG/399884 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL JANUARY 12, 2015 402700-11 399884C.GN1 3.02 PREPARATION A. See Piping Schedule and Section 09 90 04, Painting, for additional requirements. B. Notify Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to field fabrication of pipe or fittings. C. Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside. D. Damaged Coatings and Linings: Repair using original coating and lining materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 WELDING A. Perform in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ASME B31.3 for Pressure Piping, as may be specified on Piping Data Sheets, and if recommended by piping or fitting manufacturer. B. Weld Identification: Keep paper record of which welder welded each joint. C. Pipe End Preparation: 1. Machine Shaping: Preferred. 2. Oxygen or Arc Cutting: Smooth to touch, true, and slag removal by chipping or grinding. 3. Beveled Ends for Butt Welding: ASME B16.25. D. Surfaces: 1. Clean and free of paint, oil, rust, scale, slag, or other material detrimental to welding. 2. Clean stainless steel joints with stainless steel wire brushes or stainless steel wool prior to welding. 3. Thoroughly clean each layer of deposited weld metal, including final pass, prior to deposition of each additional layer of weld metal with a power -driven wire brush. E. Alignment and Spacing: 1. Align ends to be joined within existing commercial tolerances on diameters, wall thicknesses, and out -of -roundness. 2. Root Opening of Joint: As stated in qualified welding procedure. 3. Minimum Spacing of Circumferential Butt Welds: Minimum four times pipe wall thickness or 1 inch, whichever is greater. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-12 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 F. Climatic Conditions: 1. Do not perform welding if there is impingement of any rain, snow, sleet, or wind exceeding 5 mph on the weld area, or if ambient temperature is below 32 degrees F. 2. Stainless Steel and Alloy Piping: If ambient is less than 32 degrees F, local preheating to a temperature warm to the hand is required. G. Tack Welds: Performed by qualified welder using same procedure as for completed weld, made with electrode similar or equivalent to electrode to be used for first weld pass, and not defective. Remove those not meeting requirements prior to commencing welding procedures. H. Surface Defects: Chip or grind out those affecting soundness of weld. Weld Passes: As required in welding procedure. J. Weld Quality: Meet requirements of governing welding codes. Shall be free of cracks, incomplete penetration, weld undercutting, excessive weld reinforcement, porosity slag inclusions, and other defects in excess of limits shown in applicable piping code. 3.04 INSTALLATION—GENERAL A. Join pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Remove foreign objects prior to assembly and installation. C. Flanged Joints: 1. Install perpendicular to pipe centerline. 2. Bolt Holes: Straddle vertical centerlines, aligned with connecting equipment flanges or as shown. 3. Use torque -limiting wrenches to ensure uniform bearing and proper bolt tightness. 4. Plastic Flanges: Install annular ring filler gasket at joints of raised -face flange. 5. Grooved Joint Flange Adapters: Include stainless steel washer plates as required for mating to serrated faces and lined valves and equipment. 6. Raised -Face Flanges: Use flat -face flange when joining with flat -faced ductile or cast iron flange. 7. Verify compatibility of mating flange to adapter flange gasket prior to selecting grooved adapter flanging. 8. Flange fillers are to be avoided, but if necessary, may be used to make up for small angles up to 6 degrees and for filling gaps up to 2 inches between flanges. Stacked flange fillers shall not be used. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL 40 27 00- 13 399884C.GN1 9. Threaded flanged joints shall be shop fabricated and delivered to Site with flanges in-place and properly faced. 10. Manufacturer: Same as pipe manufacturer. D. Threaded and Coupled Joints: 1. Conform to ASME B 1.20.1. 2. Produce sufficient thread length to ensure full engagement when screwed home in fittings. 3. Countersink pipe ends, ream and clean chips and burrs after threading. 4. Make connections with not more than three threads exposed. 5. Lubricate male threads only with thread lubricant or tape as specified on Piping Data Sheets. E. Pipe Connections at Concrete Structures: As specified in Article Piping Flexibility Provisions in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties. F. PVC and CPVC Piping: 1. Provide Schedule 80 threaded nipple where necessary to connect to threaded valve or fitting. 2. Use strap wrench for tightening threaded plastic joints. Do not overtighten fittings. 3. Do not thread Schedule 40 pipe. G. Ductile Iron Piping: 1. Cutting Pipe: Cut pipe with milling type cutter, rolling pipe cutter, or abrasive blade cutter. Do not flame cut. 2. Dressing Cut Ends: a. General: As required for the type of joint to be made. b. Rubber Gasketed Joints: Remove sharp edges or projections. C. Push -On Joints: Bevel, as recommended by pipe manufacturer. d. Flexible Couplings, Flanged Coupling Adapters, and Grooved End Pipe Couplings: As recommended by the coupling or adapter manufacturer. 3.05 INSTALLATION—EXPOSED PIPING A. Piping Runs: 1. Parallel to building or column lines and perpendicular to floor, unless shown otherwise. 2. Piping upstream and downstream of flow measuring devices shall provide straight lengths as required for accurate flow measurement. B. Supports: As specified in Section 40 05 15, Piping Support Systems. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-14 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Group piping wherever practical at common elevations; install to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space and other work. D. Unions or Flanges: Provide at each piping connection to equipment or instrumentation on equipment side of each block valve to facilitate installation and removal. E. Install piping so that no load or movement in excess of that stipulated by equipment manufacturer will be imposed upon equipment connection; install to allow for contraction and expansion without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Piping clearance, unless otherwise shown: 1. Over Walkway and Stairs: Minimum of 7 feet 6 inches, measured from walking surface or stair tread to lowest extremity of piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems. 2. Between Equipment or Equipment Piping and Adjacent Piping: Minimum 3 feet, measured from equipment extremity and extremity of piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems. 3. From Adjacent Work: Minimum 1 inch from nearest extremity of completed piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems. 4. Do not route piping in front of or to interfere with access ways, ladders, stairs, platforms, walkways, openings, doors, or windows. 5. Headroom in front of openings, doors, and windows shall not be less than the top of the opening. 6. Do not install piping containing liquids or liquid vapors in transformer vaults or electrical equipment rooms. 7. Do not route piping over, around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical equipment including controls, panels, switches, terminals, boxes, or other similar electrical work. 3.06 INSTALLATION—BURIED PIPE A. Joints: 1. Dissimilar Buried Pipes: a. Provide flexible mechanical compression joints for pressure pipe. b. Provide concrete closure collar for gravity and low pressure (maximum 10 psi) piping or as shown. 2. Concrete Encased or Embedded Pipe: Do not encase joints in concrete, unless specifically shown. PW/WBG/399884 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL JANUARY 12, 2015 402700-15 399884C.GN1 B. Placement: 1. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed. 2. Pipe Base and Pipe Zone: As specified in Section 3123 23.15, Trench Backfill. 3. Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or damage to pipe. 4. Measure for grade at pipe invert, not at top of pipe. 5. Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual inspection and testing of entire flange, valve, or connection. 6. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement. 7. Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement operations are not in progress and at close of day's work. 8. Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying. 9. Deflect pipe at joints for pipelines laid on a curve using unsymmetrical closure of spigot into bell. If joint deflection of standard pipe lengths will not accommodate horizontal or vertical curves in alignment, provide: a. Shorter pipe lengths. b. Special mitered joints. C. Standard or special fabricated bends. 10. After joint has been made, check pipe alignment and grade. 11. Place sufficient pipe zone material to secure pipe from movement before next joint is installed. 12. Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling. C. Tolerances: Pipe Cover: Minimum 2 feet, unless otherwise shown. 3.07 PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION A. Ductile Iron Pipe: 1. Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 04, Painting, and as shown in Piping Schedule. 2. Submerged or Embedded: Coat with coal -tar epoxy as specified in Section 09 90 04, Painting. If in potable water service, use NSF/ANSI 61 approved epoxy. B. Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Unions: 1. Applications: a. Dissimilar metal piping connections. b. Cathodically protected piping penetration to buildings and watertight structures. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-16 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Submerged to unsubmerged metallic piping connections. d. Where required for electrically insulated connection. 2. Pipe Installation: a. Insulating joints connecting immersed piping to nonimmersed piping shall be installed above maximum water surface elevation. b. Submerged carbon steel, ductile iron, or galvanized piping in reinforced concrete shall be isolated from the concrete reinforcement steel. C. Align and install insulating joints as shown on the Drawings and according to manufacturer's recommendations. Bolt lubricants that contain graphite or other metallic or electrically conductive components that can interfere with the insulating capabilities of the completed flange shall not be used. 3.08 THRUST RESTRAINT A. Location: 1. Buried Piping: Where shown and where required to restrain force developed at pipeline tees, plugs, caps, bends, and other locations where unbalanced forces exist because of hydrostatic testing and normal operating pressure. 2. Exposed Piping: At all joints in piping. B. Thrust Ties: 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: Attach with socket clamps anchored against grooved joint coupling or flange. 2. Flanged Coupling Adapters: For exposed installations, install manufacturer's anchor studs through coupling sleeve or use dismantling joints. 3.09 SLAB, FLOOR, WALL, AND ROOF PENETRATIONS A. Application and Installation: As specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties. 3.10 BRANCH CONNECTIONS A. Do not install branch connections smaller than 1/2 -inch nominal pipe size, including instrument connections, unless shown otherwise. B. When line of lower pressure connects to a line of higher pressure, requirements of Piping Data Sheet for higher pressure rating prevails up to and including first block valve in the line carrying the lower pressure, unless otherwise shown. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL 40 27 00- 17 399884C.GN1 C. Threaded Pipe Tap Connections: 1. Ductile Iron Piping: Connect only with service saddle or at tapping boss of a fitting, valve body, or equipment casting. 2. Welded Steel or Alloy Piping: Connect only with welded threadolet or half -coupling as specified on Piping Data Sheet. 3. Limitations: Threaded taps in pipe barrel are unacceptable. 3.11 VENTS AND DRAINS A. Vents and drains at high and low points in piping required for completed system may or may not be shown. Install vents on high points and drains on low points of pipelines only where shown. 3.12 INSULATION A. See Section 40 42 13, Process Piping Insulation. 3.13 FIELD FINISHING A. Notify Engineer at least 3 days prior to start of surface preparation or coating application work. B. As specified in Section 09 90 04, Painting. 3.14 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. As specified in Section 10 14 00, Signage. B. Pipe Labels: 1. Locate at connections to equipment, valves, or branching fittings at wall boundaries. 2. At intervals not to exceed 18 feet with at least one label in each exposed horizontal and vertical run of pipe. 3. Install only after painting in completed. 4. Install according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure Leakage Testing: As specified in Section 40 80 01, Process Piping Leakage Testing. B. Minimum Duties of Welding Inspector: 1. Job material verification and storage. 2. Qualification of welders. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-18 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. Certify conformance with approved welding procedures. 4. Maintenance of records and preparation of reports in a timely manner. 5. Notification to Engineer of unsatisfactory weld performance within 24 hours of weld test failure. C. Required Weld Examinations: 1. Perform examinations in accordance with Piping Code ASME B31.3. 2. Perform examinations for every pipe thickness and for each welding procedure, progressively, for piping covered by this section. 3. Examine at least one of each type and position of weld made by each welder or welding operator. 4. For each weld found to be defective under the acceptance standards or limitations on imperfections contained in the applicable Piping Code, examine two additional welds made by the same welder that produced the defective weld. Such additional examinations are in addition to the minimum required above. Examine, progressively, two additional welds for each tracer examination found to be unsatisfactory. 3.16 CLEANING A. Following assembly and testing, and prior to final acceptance, flush pipelines, except as stated below, with water at 2.5 fps minimum flushing velocity until foreign matter is removed. B. Blow clean of loose debris plant process air, and instrument air lines with compressed air at 4,000 fpm; do not flush with water. C. If impractical to flush large diameter pipe at 2.5 fps or blow at 4,000 fpm velocity, clean in-place from inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush or blow line at lower velocity. D. Insert cone strainers in flushing connections to attached equipment and leave in-place until cleaning is complete. E. Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by removing spools and valves from piping. 3.17 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this Specification: 1. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Piping Schedule. PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL 40 27 00-19 399884C.GN1 Data Sheets. Number Title 40 27 00.01 Cement -Mortar -Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fitt in s 40 27 00.09 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings—Special Service 40 27 00.10 Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Pipe and Fittings END OF SECTION PROCESS PIPING—GENERAL PW/WBG/399884 402700-20 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 PIPING SCHEDULE LEGEND SERVICE CWR Cooling Water Return CWS Cooling Water Supply LS Liquid Supply 02 Oxygen Gas 03 Ozone Gas OG Ozone Off -Gas OS Ozone Solution RD Roof Drain SD Storm Drain SS Sanitary Sewer V Vents W1 Water -Potable EXPOSURE ALL All BUR Buried EXP Exposed SUB Submerged ENC Concrete Encased CLDI Cement -Lined Ductile Iron CMP Corrugated Metal Pipe COP Copper CPVC Chlorinated PVC PW/WBG/399884 PIPING SCHEDULE LEGEND JANUARY 12, 2015 40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 DI Ductile Iron FRPX Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe Type (X = 1 to 3) GLDI Glass -Lined Ductile Iron GSP Galvanized Steel Pipe HDPE High -Density Polyethylene PCCP Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe PSTL PVDF-Lined Steel PVC Polyvinyl Chloride PVDF Polyvinylidene Fluoride RCP Reinforced Concrete Pipe RSTL Rubber -Lined Steel SST Stainless Steel STL Steel VC Vitrified Clay Pipe WS Fabricated Welded Steel JOINT TYPE FL Flanged GR Grooved HU Hub and spigot PRJ Proprietary Restrained RM Restrained Mechanical S Screwed W Welded (including solvent and fusion) PIPING SCHEDULE LEGEND PW/WBG/399884 40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 PRESSURE TEST G Gravity Service: Test pressure is not shown on gravity services. Test to highest liquid level that pipe can be subject to. H Hydrostatic In Service P Pneumatic PC Test per Uniform Plumbing Code NA Not Applicable PW/WBG/399884 PIPING SCHEDULE LEGEND JANUARY 12, 2015 40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3 Piping Schedule Test Pressure and Type (psig-x), x = Type Size(s) Piping Specification Joint Lining/ indicated in Service Legend In. Exposure Material Section Type Coatin 2 Legend Oxygen 02 1/2" and 1 1/4" EXP SST 40 27 00.09 W None 150-P Gas Ozone 03 1 1/4" EXP/BUR SST 40 27 00.09 W None 50-P Gas Cooling CWS 1 1/4" EXP SST 40 27 00.09 W None 100-H Water supply Cooling CWR 1 1/4" EXP SST 40 27 00.09 W None 100-H Water Return Liquid LS 8" SUB/EXP DI 40 27 00.01 FL CLDI 100-H supply Ozone OS 6" SUB/EXP SST 40 27 00.09 FL None 25-H Solution Ozone OG 6" EXP SST 40 27 00.09 FL None 10-P Off -Gas 1">" Greater Than "<" Less Than "<_" Less Than or Equal To Greater Than or Equal To "All" All Sizes 2 CoatinR system number asspecified in Section 09 90 04, Painting, and asspecified in Article Pipe Corrosion Protection. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 40 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 27 00.01 CEMENT -MORTAR -LINED DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Item Description General Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61 acceptance. Pipe manufacturer shall submit certification that source manufacturing facility has been producing ductile iron pipe of the specified diameters, dimensions, and standards for a period of not less than 10 years. Testing of pipe required by AWWA A21.51 shall be conducted in testing and laboratory facilities located in the USA and operating under USA laws and regulations. Pipe shall be handled during manufacture and shipped without nesting (without insertion of one pipe inside another). Pipe Exposed Pipe Using Flange Joints: AWWA CI 15/A21.15, thickness Class 53 minimum, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Lining Cement -mortar: AWWA CI04/A21.4. Fittings Lined and coated same as pipe. Flange: AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile iron, faced and drilled, Class 125 flat face. Gray cast iron will not be allowed. Joints Flange: Class 125 flat face, ductile iron, threaded conforming to AWWA Cl 15/A21.15. Gray cast iron will not be allowed. Branch connections 3 inches and smaller, shall be made with service saddles asspecified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties. Bolting Class 125 Flat -Faced Flange: ASTM A307, Grade A carbon steel hex head bolts, ASTM A563, Grade A carbon steel hex head nuts and ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress. Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and Submerged and Wetted Installations: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B 8 hex head bolts; ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M hex nuts and ASTM F436/17436M Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 CEMENT -MORTAR LINED DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 1 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 27 00.01 CEMENT -MORTAR -LINED DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Item Description Gaskets General: Gaskets in contact with potable water shall be NSF 61 certified. Flanged, Water, Sewage and Hot Air Services: 1/8 -inch -thick, homogeneous black rubber (EPDM), hardness 60 (Shore A), rated to 275 degrees F, conforming to ASME B16.21 and ASTM D2000 4CA 415 A25 B35 C32 EA14 F19. Full face for Class 125 flat -faced flanges, flat -ring type for Class 250 raised -face flanges. Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering entire inside face with gasket cemented to blind flange. Gasket pressure rating to equal or exceed the system hydrostatic test pressure. Joint Lubricant Manufacturer's standard. END OF SECTION CEMENT -MORTAR LINED PW/WBG/399884 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 2 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 27 00.09 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS—SPECIAL SERVICE Item Size Description Pipe All ASTM A312/A312M Type 316 seamless annealed, pickled and passivated. Use Type 316L for welded joints. 2" & smaller Schedule 40S. 2-1/2" thru 8" Schedule 10S. 8" & larger Schedule 5S. Pipe Joints 3/4" & smaller Flanged at equipment as required or shown. 1" & 1-1/2" Flanged at equipment as required or shown. 2" & larger Butt -welded or flanged at valves and equipment as required or shown. All welding shall be by the Tungsten Inert Gas TIGprocess. Pipe Fittings 3/4" & smaller Threaded Forged: ASTM A182/A182M, Grade F316, 3,000 -pound WOG. 1" and 1-1/2" Socket Weld Forged: ASTM AI82/A182M, Grade F316L, 2,000 -pound WOG. 2" & larger Butt Welded: ASTM A403/A403M, Grade WP316L conforming to ASME B 16.9 and MSS SP 43, annealed, pickled and passivated; fitting wall thickness to match adjoining pipe; long radius elbows unless shown otherwise. All welding shall be by the Tungsten Inert Gas TIGprocess. Pipe Branch 3/4" & smaller Tee or reducing tee in conformance with fittings Connections above. 2" & smaller 1 -1/2 -Inch and Smaller Branch: Forged sockolet or half coupling, 2,000 -pound WOG ASTM A182/AI82M, Grade F316L. PW/WBG/399884 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND JANUARY 12, 2015 FITTINGS—SPECIAL SERVICE 40 27 00.09 DATA SHEET - 1 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 27 00.09 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS—SPECIAL SERVICE Item Size Description 2-1/2" & larger Butt -Welded Tee or Reducing Tee: In accordance with fittings above forged weldolet, 2,000 -pound WOG ASTM Al82/AI82M, Grade F316L, same inside diameter as branch pipe. All welding shall be by the Tungsten Inert Gas TIGprocess. Flanges All Forged: ASTM AI82/A182M Rev C Grade F316L, ASME B 16.5 Class 150 or Class 300, slip-on or welding neck, 1/16 -inch raised face. Weld neck bore to match pipe internal diameter. Use weld neck flanges when abutting butt -weld fittings. Weld slip-on flanges inside and outside. All welding shall be by the Tungsten Inert Gas TIGprocess. Unions 3/4" & smaller Threaded Forged: ASTM AI82/AI82M, Grade F316, 2,000 -pound or 3,000 -pound WOG, integral ground seats, AAR design meeting requirements of ASME B16.11, bore to match pipe. 1" & 1-1/2" Socket Weld Forged: ASTM A182/A182M Rev C Grade F316L, 2,000 -pound or 3,000 -pound WOG, integral ground seats, AAR design meeting requirements of ASME B 16.11, bore to match pipe. All welding shall be by the Tungsten Inert Gas TIG rocess. STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND PW/WBG/399884 FITTINGS—SPECIAL SERVICE JANUARY 12, 2015 40 27 00.09 DATA SHEET - 2 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 27 00.09 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS—SPECIAL SERVICE Item Size Description Bolting All General Conditions: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A193/A193M, Grade B8M hex head bolts, ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex head nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress. Cryogenic Service to minus 325 degrees F: Type 304 stainless steel bolts, ASTM A320/A320M Grade B8 with copper - silicon hex head nuts, ASTM B98/B98M Grade A and ASTM F436/17436M Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress. When mating flange on valve or equipment is cast iron and gasket is flat ring, provide ASTM A307 Grade B hex head bolts, ASTM A563 Grade A heavy hex nuts and ASTM F436/17436M hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress. Gaskets All Flanges 1/16 -inch -thick virgin Teflon or inorganic filled Teflon flat ring type for raised face flanges and full face type for flat face flanges. All gasket materials shall be compatible with service conditions and fluid being conveyed; Garlock or Durlon or Flexitallic. Thread Lubricant 2" & smaller General Service: 100 percent virgin PTFE Teflon tape Oxygen and Ozone Services: Green Teflon tape, Air Force A -A-58092, AA Thread Seal Tape, Inc. END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND JANUARY 12, 2015 FITTINGS—SPECIAL SERVICE 40 27 00.09 DATA SHEET - 3 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 27 00.10 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS Item Size Description General All Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61 acceptance. Pipe All Schedule 80 PVC: Type I, Grade I or Class 12454-B conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785. Pipe shall be manufactured with titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection. Threaded Nipples: Schedule 80 PVC. Fittings All Schedule to Match Pipe Above: ASTM D2466 and ASTM D2467 for socket weld type and Schedule 80 ASTM D2464 for threaded type. Fittings shall be manufactured with titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection. Joints All Solvent socket weld except where connection to threaded valves and equipment may require future disassembly. Flanges All One-piece, molded hub type PVC flat face flange in accordance with Fittings above, ASME B16.1, Class 125 drilling Bolting All Flat Face Mating Flange and In Corrosive Areas: ASTM A193/A193M, Type 316 stainless steel Grade 138M hex head bolts, ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex head nuts and ASTM F436 Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress. With Raised Face Mating Flange: Carbon steel ASTM A307 Grade B square head bolts, ASTM A563 Grade A heavy hex head nuts and ASTM F436 hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress. PW/WBG/399884 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC) JANUARY 12, 2015 PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 1 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 27 00.10 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS Item Size Description Gaskets All Flat Face Mating Flange: Full faced 1/8 -inch -thick ethylene propylene (EPR) rubber. Raised Face Mating Flange: Flat ring 1/8 -inch ethylene propylene (EPR) rubber, with filler gasket between OD of raised face and flange OD to protect the flan e from bolting moment. Solvent Cement All Socket type joints shall be made employing solvent cement that meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D2564 and primer that meets or exceeds requirements of ASTM F656, chemically resistant to the fluid service, and as recommended by pipe and fitting manufacturer Solvent cement and primer shall be listed b NSF 61 for contact with potable water. Thread Lubricant All Teflon Tape. END OF SECTION POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC) PW/WBG/399884 PIPE AND FITTINGS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 2 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 27 02 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Gas Association (AGA): 3, Orifice Metering of Natural Gas and Other Related Hydrocarbon Fluids. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z21.15, Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and Hose End Valves. 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. b. B 16.44, Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Above Ground Piping Systems up to 5 psi. 4. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE): 1011, Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. C111/A21.11, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. b. C500, Metal -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. C. C504, Rubber -Seated Butterfly Valves, 3 In. (75 mm) Through 72 In. (1,800 mm). d. C508, Swing -Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 -In. Through 24 -In. (50 -mm Through 600 -mm) NPS. e. C509, Resilient -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. f. C510, Double Check Valve Backflow Prevention Assembly. g. C511, Reduced -Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly. h. C512, Air -Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service. i. C515, Reduced -Wall, Resilient -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. j. C541, Hydraulic and Pneumatic Cylinder and Vane -Type Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates. k. C542, Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates. 1. C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. M. C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints. n. C800, Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. PW/WBG/399884 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS JANUARY 12, 2015 402702-1 399884C.GN1 6. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. b. A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure -Containing Parts. C. A380, Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. d. A564/A564M, Standard Specification for Hot -Rolled and Cold - Finished Age -Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. e. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. f. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. g. 1398/1398M, Standard Specification for Copper -Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes. h. B 127, Standard Specification for Nickel -Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip. i. B1 39/13139, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod, Bar and Shapes. j. B 164, Standard Specification for Nickel -Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire. k. B 194, Standard Specification for Copper -Beryllium Alloy Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. 1. B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. M. D429, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property -Adhesion to Rigid Substrates. n. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 7. Canadian Standards Association, Inc. (CSA): 9. 1, Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and Hose End Valves. 8. Chlorine Institute (CI): Pamphlet 6, Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine. 9. FM Global (FM). 10. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). 11. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO). 12. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS): a. SP -80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves. b. SP -81, Stainless Steel, Bonnetless, Flanged Knife Gate Valves. C. SP -85, Gray Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. d. SP -88, Diaphragm Valves. e. SP -110, Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/399884 402702-2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 14. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 15. USC Foundation for Cross -Connection Control and Hydraulic Research. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Shop Drawings: a. Product data sheets for each make and model. Indicate valve Type Number, applicable Tag Number, and facility name/number or service where used. b. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. C. Sizing calculations for open-close/throttle and modulating valves. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for: a. Electric actuators; full compliance with AWWA C542. b. Butterfly valves; full compliance with AWWA C504. 2. Tests and inspection data. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Valves to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem, floor stand, operating nut, chain, wrench, and accessories to allow a complete operation from the intended operating level. B. Valve to be suitable for intended service. Renewable parts not to be of a lower quality than specified. C. Valve same size as adjoining pipe, unless otherwise called out on Drawings or in Supplements. D. Valve ends to suit adjacent piping. E. Resilient seated valves shall have no leakage (drip -tight) in either direction at valve rated design pressure. All other valves shall have no leakage (drip -tight) in either direction at valve rated design pressure, unless otherwise allowed for in this section or in stated valve standard. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS 402702-3 399884C.GN1 F. Size operators and actuators to operate valve for full range of pressures and velocities. G. Valve to open by turning counterclockwise, unless otherwise specified. H. Factory mount operator, actuator, and accessories. 1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Bronze and brass valve components and accessories that have surfaces in contact with water to be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent aluminum. 1. Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations: B61, B62, B98/1398M (Alloy UNS No. C65100, C65500, or C66100), B139/B139M (Alloy UNS No. C51000), B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B 164, B 194, and B 127. 2. Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze. B. Stainless steel materials for ozone or oxygen service shall be pickled and passivated and suitable for intended service. 2.03 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: 1. Interior coatings for valves and hydrants shall be in accordance with AWWA C550, unless otherwise specified. 2. Exterior coating for valves and hydrants shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 04, Painting. 3. Material in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF/ANSI 61. 4. Exposed safety isolation valves and lockout valves with handles, handwheels, or chain wheels shall be "safety yellow." B. Where epoxy lining and coating are specified, factory finishing shall be as follows: 1. In accordance with AWWA C550. 2. Either two-part liquid material or heat -activated (fusion) material except only heat -activated material if specified as "fusion" or "fusion bonded" epoxy. 3. Minimum 7 -mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve operating tolerances. PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/399884 402702-4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.04 VALVES A. Ball Valves: 1. Type V340 Ball Valves for Oxygen, Ozone, Off -Gas, and Cooling Water Service: a. ANSI Class 150 -pound flanged style, ASTM A276 GR 316 or ASTM A351/A351M GR CFBM stainless steel body and end piece, full port ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel ball, reinforced PTFE seats, stainless steel stem, stainless steel lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 1,500 -pound WOG, 150 psi SWP. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Conbraco Apollo, 86A-200 Series. 2) CFF, SS3 Series. 3) Or Engineer approved equal. 2. Type V350 Ball Valves for Air High Pressure Service: a. Three-piece, ASTM A276 GR 316 or ASTM A351/A351M GR CFBM stainless steel body and end pieces, full port Type 316 stainless steel ball, threaded ends, reinforced PTFE seats, body seal and stem packing, stainless steel stem, stainless steel level operator with vinyl grip, rated 1,000 -pound WOG, 150 psi SWP. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Nibco; T -595 -S6 -R -66 -LL. 2) Conbraco Apollo; 86-500 Series. B. Plug Valves: 1. Type V405 Eccentric Plug Valve 4 Inches and larger: a. Nonlubricated type rated 275 psig CWP, drip -tight shutoff with pressure from either direction, Type 316 stainless steel ASTM A743, grade CF -8M body, exposed service flanged ends per ASME B 16.1 or grooved ends in accordance with AWWA C606 for rigid joints, buried service mechanical joint ends, unless otherwise shown. b. Plug Type 316 stainless steel with round or rectangular port of no less than 80 percent of connecting pipe area and coated with Buna-N, seats welded nickel, stem bearings lubricated stainless steel, stem seal multiple V -rings, or U -cups with O -rings of nitrile rubber, grit seals on both upper and lower bearings. C. Operators: 1) Totally enclosed, geared, manual operator with handwheel, 2 -inch nut or chain wheel. Size operator for 1.5 times maximum operating shutoff pressure differential for direct and reverse pressure, whichever is higher. For buried service, provide completely sealed operator filled with heavy lubricant and 2 -inch nut. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS 402702-5 399884C.GN1 C. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Pratt; Ballcentric. 2) DeZurik; Style PEC. 3) Milliken; Millcentric Series 600. Butterfly Valves: General: a. In full compliance with AWWA C504 and following requirements: 1) Suitable for throttling operations and infrequent operation after periods of inactivity. 2) Elastomer seats which are bonded or vulcanized to the body shall have adhesive integrity of bond between seat and body assured by testing, with minimum 75 -pound pull in accordance with ASTM D429, Method B. 3) Bubble -tight with rated pressure applied from either side. Test valves with pressure applied in both directions. 4) No travel stops for disc on interior of body. 5) Self-adjusting V -type or O-ring shaft seals. 6) Isolate metal -to -metal thrust bearing surfaces from flowstream. 7) Provide traveling nut or worm gear actuator with handwheel. Valve actuators to meet the requirements of AWWA C504. 8) Buried service operators shall withstand 450 foot-pounds of input torque at fully open and fully closed positions. 9) Provide linings and coatings per AWWA, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein. b. Non-AWWA butterfly valves to meet the following actuator requirements: 1) For above ground installations, provide handle and notch plate for valves 6 inches and smaller and heavy-duty, totally enclosed gearbox type operators with handwheel, position indicator and travel stops for valves 8 inches and larger, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein. 2. Type V514 High Performance Butterfly Valve for Oxygen, Ozone, Off -Gas, and Closed Loop Cooling Water, 2 Inches to 36 Inches: a. ASME B 16.1 Class 150 wafer style, high performance type, Type 316 stainless steel body, Type 316 stainless steel single or double offset disc, Type 316 stainless steel shaft and taper pins, PTFE seat, PTFE stem packing, stainless steel with PTFE thrust washer. PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/399884 402702-6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Tyco/Keystone; K -Lok Series. 2) DeZurik; BHP Series. 3) Flowseal. 4) Or Engineer approved equal. D. Check and Flap Valves: 1. Type V600 Ball Cone Check Valve 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Stainless steel body and retainer ASTM A351, CFBM with RPTFE reinforced Teflon seal. Spring-loaded, center guided, rated 400 psig CWP, non -shock; opening pressure %2 psig. Must be suitable for use with oxygen and ozone gas. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Apollo; 62 Series (model CVS). 2. Type V608 Swing Check Valve 2 Inches to 24 Inches: a. AWWA C508, 125 -pound flanged ends, cast-iron body, bronze body seat, bronze mounted cast-iron clapper with bronze seat, stainless steel hinge shaft. b. Valves, 2 inches through 12 inches rated 175 -pound WWP and 14 inches through 24 inches rated 150 -pound WWP. Valves to be fitted with adjustable outside lever and weight. Increasing -pattern body valve may be used where increased outlet piping size is shown. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) M&H Valve; Style 59,159, or 259. 2) Mueller Co.; No. A-2600 Series. 3) APCO; Series 6000/6100. E. Self -Regulated Automatic Valves: 1. Type V776 Pressure Relief Valves for Oxygen and Ozone Service: a. Pressure setting and capacity as determined by system supplier. b. Type 316 stainless steel, threaded cap, full nozzle design, threaded side outlet for piped discharge, Teflon seals. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Kunkle; Model 917. 2) Or Engineer approved equal. 2. Type V778 Pressure Relief Valves for Cooling Water Service: a. Pressure setting and capacity as determined by system supplier. b. Threaded cap, full nozzle design, threaded side outlet for piped discharge. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Kunkle, Model 927. 2) Or Engineer approved equal. PW/WBG/399884 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS JANUARY 12, 2015 402702-7 399884C.GN1 3. Type V784 Pressure/Vacuum Relief Valves for Off -Gas Piping: a. A PVRV shall be mounted in the off -gas piping from pass 2 and pass 3 of the chlorine contact basin and from the off -gas piping from the outlet of the two ozone saturation vessels. b. PVRVs shall be set to open at a vacuum set point of 4 inches water column and sized to prevent the vacuum in the headspace from exceeding 6 inches of water column with zero gas flow and the off -gas blower operating at its maximum capacity; the valve shall also be set to open at a pressure set point of 4 inches of water column and sized to prevent the pressure from exceeding 6 inches of water column with the maximum ozone gas flow and the off - gas blower off-line. C. Type 316 stainless steel valve body and seat. d. Teflon diaphragm. e. Flanged connection for mounting to tee in off -gas piping. f. Vented directly to the atmosphere. g. Manufacturers: 1) Shand & Jurs, Model 94020. 2) Varec, Model 2010. 4. Type V786 Pressure/Vacuum Relief Valves for Chlorine Contactor Roof: a. A single PVRV shall be flange mounted to a wall pipe in the roof of the chlorine contact basin to serve the main portion of the contact basin headspace volume. b. The PVRV shall be sized to open at a pressure or vacuum set point of 6 inches of water column (pressure or vacuum) and sized to prevent the pressure or vacuum from exceeding 15 inches of water column (pressure or vacuum). C. Type 316 stainless steel valve body and seat. d. Teflon diaphragm. e. Flanged connection for mounting to flanged wall pipe installed in contractor's top slab. f. Vented directly to the atmosphere. 5. Type V788 Pressure Control Valves for Oxygen and Ozone Service. a. ANSI class 150 -pound valves with flanged ends, Type 316 stainless steel body, heat treated nickel -plated or hard chromium -plated type 316 stainless steel ball, reinforced PTFE flow -ring seal, reinforced PTFE with stainless steel bearings, and PTFE V -ring packing. Valve to have 300:1 rangeability and equal percentage characteristic. b. All valves shall be leak free at startup. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Fisher Controls. 2) Or Engineer approved equal. PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/399884 402702-8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.05 OPERATORS AND ACTUATORS A. Manual Operators: 1. General: a. For AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed requirements of applicable valve standard. Provide gear reduction operator when force exceeds requirements. b. For non-AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed applicable industry standard or 80 pounds, whichever is less, under operating condition, including initial breakaway. Provide gear reduction operator when force exceeds requirements. C. Operator self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device. d. Position indicator on quarter -turn valves. e. Worm and gear operators one-piece design, worm -gears of gear bronze material. Worm of hardened alloy steel with thread ground and polished. Traveling nut type operator's threaded steel reach rod with internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut. 2. Exposed Operator: a. Galvanized and painted handwheel. b. Cranks on gear type operator. C. Valve handles to take a padlock, and wheels a chain and padlock. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Tagging: 1 -1/2 -inch diameter heavy brass or stainless steel tag attached with No. 16 solid brass or stainless steel jack chain for each valve. B. Extension Bonnet for Valve Operator: Complete with enclosed stem, extension, support brackets, and accessories for valve and operator. Manufacturers and Products: a. Pratt. b. DeZurik. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Flange Ends: 1. Flanged valve bolt holes shall straddle vertical centerline of pipe. 2. Clean flanged faces, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten nuts progressively and uniformly. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS 402702-9 399884C.GN1 B. Screwed Ends: 1. Clean threads by wire brushing or swabbing. 2. Apply joint compound. C. PVC and CPVC Valves: Install using solvents approved for valve service conditions. D. Valve Installation and Orientation: 1. General: a. Install valves so handles operate from fully open to fully closed without encountering obstructions. b. Install valves in location for easy access for routine operation and maintenance. C. Install valves per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Gate, Globe, and Ball Valves: a. Install operating stem vertical when valve is installed in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above finished floor, unless otherwise shown. b. Install operating stem horizontal in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations greater than 4 feet 6 inches above finish floor, unless otherwise shown. 3. Eccentric Plug Valves: a. Unless otherwise restricted or shown on Drawings, install valve as follows: 1) Liquids with suspended solids service with horizontal flow: Install valve with stem in horizontal position with plug up when valve is open. Install valve with seat end upstream (flow to produce unseating pressure). 2) Liquids with suspended solids service with vertical flow: Install valve with seat in highest portion of valve (seat up). 3) Clean Liquids and Gas Service: Install valve with seat end downstream of higher pressure when valve is closed (higher pressure forces plug into seat). 4. Butterfly Valves: a. Unless otherwise restricted or shown on Drawings, install valve a minimum of 8 diameters downstream of a horizontal elbow or branch tee with shaft in horizontal position. b. For vertical elbow or branch tee immediately upstream of valve, install valve with shaft in vertical position. C. For horizontal elbow or branch tee immediately upstream of valve, install valve with shaft in horizontal position. d. When installed immediately downstream of swing check, install valve with shaft perpendicular to swing check shaft. e. For free inlet or discharge into basins and tanks, install valve with shaft in vertical position. PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/399884 402702-10 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 5. Check Valves: a. Install valve in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and provide required distance from immediate upstream fitting. b. Install valve in vertical flow (up) piping only for gas services. C. Install swing check valve with shaft in horizontal position. d. Install double disc swing check valve to be perpendicular to flow pattern when discs are open. 6. Solenoid Valves: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install line size ball valve and union upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line flow switch, or other in-line electrical device, excluding magnetic flowmeters, for isolation during maintenance. F. Locate valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance. 3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTION A. Valve may be either tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step. B. Test that valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions. Test that two-way valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions from both directions. C. Inspect air and vacuum valves as pipe is being filled to verify venting and seating is fully functional. D. Count and record number of turns to open and close valve; account for discrepancies with manufacturer's data. E. Set, verify, and record set pressures for relief and regulating valves. F. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing. Set opening and closing speeds, limit switches, as required or recommended by Engineer. G. Test hydrostatic relief valve seating; record leakage. Adjust and retest to maximum leakage of 0.1 gpm per foot of seat periphery. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 1 person -day for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 1 person -day for functional testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. PW/WBG/399884 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS JANUARY 12, 2015 402702-11 399884C.GN1 B. See Section 0143 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. END OF SECTION PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS PW/WBG/399884 402702-12 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 90 01 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy -Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High - Temperature Service. b. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. C. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. d. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal. e. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 2. International Society of Automation (ISA): a. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification (NRC ADOPTED). b. PR12.6, Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous (Classified) Locations. C. S5.4, Standard Instrument Loop Diagrams. d. S20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. e. 550.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial Process Instruments. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. 4. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). 5. NSF International (NSF): a. NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. b. NSF/ANSI 372, Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. 6. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): 508A, Standard for Safety, Industrial Control Panels. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-1 399884C.GN1 1.02 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: 1. Engineering, furnishing, installing, calibrating, adjusting, testing, documenting, starting up, and Owner training for complete Process Instrumentation and Control (PIC) for plant. 2. Major parts are: a. Ozone System Installation: 1) Install process instrumentation provided by Owner, including primary elements, transmitters, control devices, and control panels, for the following process areas: a) Oxygen Concentrators b) Ozone Generation Racks c) Ozone Dissolution and Injection System 2) Install Ethernet network connections between Owner provided network equipment, including the Master Control Panel, Remote I/O panel, VFDs, and Local Control Panels as shown in the Drawings. 3) Provide and install terminal junction box (TJB) for ambient ozone monitoring and control. a) TJB hardwired logic requirements are defined in Section 44 42 56.18, Ozone Disinfection System, Supplement 1 — Additional Functional Requirements 4) Provide process equipment where and as indicated on the Drawings. a) Refer to Supplement A, I&C Components, in this section for additional instrument requirements. B. Detailed Design: PIC as shown and specified includes functional and performance requirements and component specifications. Complete detailed PIC design. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations: 1. FP: Field Panel 2. LCP: Local Control Panel. 3. MCC: Motor Control Center. 4. PAT: Performance Acceptance Test. 5. PIC: Process Instrumentation and Control. 6. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. 7. RIO: Remote Input/Output 8. TJ B: Terminal Junction Box INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409001-2 399884C.GN1 B. Rising/Falling: Terms used to define actions of discrete devices about their setpoints. 1. Rising: Contacts close when an increasing process variable rises through setpoint. 2. Falling: Contacts close when a decreasing process variable falls through setpoint. C. Signal Types: 1. Analog Signals, Current Type: a. 4 mA to 20 mA do signals conforming to ISA 550.1. b. Unless otherwise indicated for specific PIC Subsystem components, use the following ISA 50.1 options: 1) Transmitter Type: Number 2, two -wire. 2) Transmitter Load Resistance Capacity: Class L. 3) Fully isolated transmitters and receivers. 2. Analog Signals, Voltage Type: 1 to 5 volts do within panels where a common high precision dropping resistor is used. 3. Discrete signals, two -state logic signals using do or 120V ac sources as indicated. 4. Pulse Frequency Signals: a. Direct current pulses whose repetition rate is linearly proportional to process variable. b. Pulses generated by contact closures or solid state switches as indicated. C. Power source less than 30V dc. 5. Special Signals: Other types of signals used to transmit analog and digital information between field elements, transmitters, receivers, controllers, and digital devices. D. Instrument Tag Numbers: As shown on Drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 General: a. Shop Drawings, full -scaled details, wiring diagrams, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature. b. Identify proposed items and options. Identify installed spares and other provisions for future work (for example, reserved panel space; unused components, wiring, and terminals). INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-3 399884C.GN1 C. Legends and Abbreviation Lists: Complete definition of symbols and abbreviations used on this Project (for example, engineering units, flow streams, instruments, structures, and other process items used in nameplates, legends, and data sheets). 2. Bill of Materials: List of required equipment. a. I&C Components: By component identification code. b. Other Equipment: By equipment type. C. Data Included: 1) Equipment tag number. 2) Description. 3) Manufacturer, complete model number, and all options not defined by model number. 4) Quantity supplied. 5) Component identification code where applicable. 3. Catalog Cuts: I&C Components, Electrical Devices, and Mechanical Devices: a. Catalog information, mark to identify proposed items and options. b. Descriptive literature. C. External power and signal connections. d. Scaled drawings showing exterior dimensions and locations of electrical and mechanical interfaces. 4. Component Data Sheets: Data sheets for I&C components. a. Format and Level of Detail: In accordance with ISA -520. b. Include component type identification code and tag number on data sheet. C. Specific features and configuration data for each component: 1) Location or service. 2) Manufacturer and complete model number. 3) Size and scale range. 4) Setpoints. 5) Materials of construction. 6) Options included. d. Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer's local office, representative, distributor, or service facility. 5. Sizing and Selection Calculations: a. Primary Elements: Complete calculations plus process data used. Example, for flow elements, minimum and maximum values, permanent head loss, and assumptions made. b. Controlling, Computing and Function Generating Modules: Actual scaling factors with units and how they were computed. 6. Panel Construction Drawings: a. Scale Drawings: Show dimensions and location of panel mounted devices, doors, louvers, and subpanels, internal and external. b. Panel Legend: List front of panel devices by tag numbers, nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and annunciator inscriptions. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409001-4 399884C.GN1 C. Bill of Materials: List devices mounted within panel that are not listed in panel legend. Include tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number. d. Construction Details: NEMA rating, materials, material thickness, structural stiffeners and brackets, lifting lugs, mounting brackets and tabs, door hinges and latches, and welding and other connection callouts and details. e. Construction Notes: Finishes, wire color schemes, wire ratings, wire and terminal block, numbering and labeling scheme. 7. Panel Control Diagrams: For discrete control and power circuits. a. Diagram Type: Ladder Diagrams. Include devices, related to discrete functions, that are mounted in or on the panel and that require electrical connections. Show unique rung numbers on left side of each rung. b. Item Identification: Identify each item with attributes listed. 1) Wires: Wire number and color. Cable number if part of multiconductor cable. 2) Terminals: Location (enclosure number, terminal junction box number, or MCC number), terminal strip number, and terminal block number. 3) Discrete Components: a) Tag number, terminal numbers, and location ("FIELD", enclosure number, or MCC number). b) Switching action (open or close on rising or falling process variable), setpoint value and units, and process variable description (for example, Sump Level High). 4) Relay Coils: a) Tag number and its function. b) On right side of run where coil is located, list contact location by ladder number and sheet number. Underline normally closed contacts. 5) Relay Contacts: Coil tag number, function, and coil location (ladder rung number and sheet number). C. Show each circuit individually. No "typical" diagrams or "typical" wire lists will be permitted. d. Ground wires, surge protectors, and connections. e. Circuit Names: Show names corresponding to Circuit and Raceway Schedule for circuits entering and leaving a panel. Refer to Division 26, Electrical. 8. Panel Wiring Diagrams: Show point-to-point and terminal -to -terminal wiring within panel. 9. Panel Plumbing Diagrams: For each panel containing piping and tubing. Show type and size for: Pipes and Tubes: Thickness, pressure rating, and materials. a. Components: Valves, regulators, and filters. PW/WBG/399884 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-5 399884C.GN1 b. Connections to panel mounted devices. C. Panel interface connections. 10. Loop Diagrams: Individual wiring diagram for each analog or pulse frequency loop. a. Conform to the minimum requirements of ISA 55.4. b. Under Paragraph 5.3 of ISA 55.4, include the information listed under subparagraphs 2 and 6. C. Drawing Size: Individual 11 -inch by 17 -inch sheet for each loop. d. Divide each loop diagram into areas for panel face, back -of -panel, and field. C. Show: 1) Terminal numbers, location of do power supply, and location of common dropping resistors. 2) Switching contacts in analog loops and output contacts of analog devices. Reference specific control diagrams where functions of these contacts are shown. 3) Tabular summary on each diagram: a) Transmitting Instruments: Output capability. b) Receiving Instruments: Input impedance. c) Loop Wiring Impedance: Estimate based on wire sizes and lengths shown. d) Total loop impedance. e) Reserve output capacity. 4) Circuit and raceway schedule names. 11. Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams: a. Diagrams, device designations, and symbols in accordance with NEMA ICS 1. b. Diagrams shall bear electrical Subcontractor's signature attesting diagrams have been coordinated with Division 26, Electrical. C. Show: 1) Electrical connections between equipment, consoles, panels, terminal junction boxes, and field mounted components. 2) Component and panel terminal board identification numbers, and external wire and cable numbers. 3) Circuit names matching Circuit and Raceway Schedule. 4) Intermediate terminations between field elements and panels (for example, to terminal junction boxes and pull boxes). 5) Pull boxes. 12. Installation Details: Include modifications or further details required to adequately define installation of I&C components. 13. List of spares, expendables, test equipment and tools. 14. Additional Equipment Recommended: List of, and descriptive literature for, additional spares, expendables, test equipment and tools recommended. Include unit prices and total costs as specified in Section 0129 00, Payment Procedures. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409001-6 399884C.GN1 B. Informational Submittals: For PIC equipment, provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation and readiness for operation. 1. Owner Training Plan. Reference Section 0143 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 2. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: In accordance with Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data, unless otherwise specified in this section. a. Content and Format: 1) Complete sets O&M manuals. 2) Sufficient detail to allow operation, removal, installation, adjustment, calibration, maintenance and purchasing replacements for each PIC component. 3) Final versions of Legend and Abbreviation Lists. 4) Manual format in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Include: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 1) Process and Instrumentation Diagrams: One reproducible copy of revised P&ID to reflect as -built PIC design. 2) Refer to paragraph Shop Drawings for the following items: a) Bill of Materials. b) Catalog Cuts. c) Component Data Sheets. d) Panel Control Diagrams. e) Panel Wiring Diagrams, one reproducible copy. f) Panel Plumbing Diagrams, one reproducible copy. g) Loop Diagrams, one reproducible copy. h) Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams, one reproducible copy. i) Application Software Documentation. 3) Device O&M manuals for components, electrical devices, and mechanical devices include: a) Operations procedures. b) Installation requirements and procedures. c) Maintenance requirements and procedures. d) Troubleshooting procedures. e) Calibration procedures. f) Internal schematic and wiring diagrams. g) Component Calibration Sheets from field quality control calibrations. 4) List of spares, expendables, test equipment and tools provided. 5) List of additional spares, expendables, test equipment and tools recommended. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-7 399884C.GN1 3. Performance Acceptance Tests (PAT) Submittals: a. Preliminary Test Procedures: Outlines of proposed tests, forms, and checklists. b. Final Test Procedures: Proposed test procedures, forms, and checklists. C. Test Documentation: Copy of signed off test procedures when tests are completed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calibration Instruments: Each instrument used for calibrating PIC equipment shall bear the seal of a reputable laboratory certifying that instrument has been calibrated within the previous 12 months to a standard endorsed by the NIST. B. Coordination Meetings: 1. In accordance with Section 0131 13, Project Coordination. 2. Location: Plant Site. 3. Attended by: Engineer, Owner, and Contractor. 4. Minimum of four are required. Specific dates will be established in Progress Schedule. 5. First Meeting: Within 36 days after Notice to Proceed. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide Site and warehouse storage facilities for PIC equipment. B. Prior to shipment, include corrosive -inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping containers, and related equipment as recommended by the capsule manufacturer. C. Prior to installation, store items in dry indoor locations. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions. D. Cover panels and other elements that are exposed to dusty construction environments. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Standard Environmental Requirements: Unless otherwise noted, design equipment for continuous operation in these environments: 1. Freestanding Panel and Consoles: a. Inside, Air Conditioned: NEMA 1. b. Inside: NEMA 12. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409001-8 399884C.GN1 2. Smaller Panels and Assemblies (that are not Freestanding): a. Inside, Air Conditioned: NEMA 12. b. All Other Locations: NEMA 3R. 3. Field Elements: Outside. B. Environmental Design Requirements: Following defines the types of environments referred to in the above. 1. Inside, Air Conditioned: a. Temperature: 1) Normal: 60 to 80 degrees F. 2) With Up to 4 -Hour HVAC System Interruptions: 40 to 105 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 1) Normal: 10 percent (winter) to 70 percent (summer). 2) With Up to 4 -Hour HVAC System Interruption: 10 to 100 percent. C. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous. 2. Inside: a. Temperature: 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent noncondensing. C. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous. 3. Inside, Corrosive: a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent noncondensing. C. Corrosive Environment: Chlorine gas. d. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous. 4. Outside: a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent noncondensing, rain, freezing rain. C. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous. 5. Outside, Corrosive: a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent noncondensing, rain. C. Corrosive Environment: Chlorine gas. d. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Activity Completion: The following is a list of key activities and their completion criteria: 1. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and approved. 2. Quality Control Submittals: Reviewed and accepted. PW/WBG/399884 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-9 399884C.GN1 3. Hardware Delivery: Hardware delivered to Site and inventoried by Contractor. 4. PAT: Completed and required test documentation accepted. B. PIC Substantial Completion: When Engineer issues Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1. Prerequisites: a. All PIC Submittals have been completed. b. PIC has successfully completed PAT. C. Owner training plan is on schedule. d. All spares, expendables, and test equipment have been delivered to Owner. C. PIC Acceptance: When Engineer issues a written notice of Final Payment and Acceptance. 1. Prerequisites: a. Certificate of Substantial Completion issued for PIC. b. Punch -list items completed. C. Final revisions to O&M manuals accepted. d. Maintenance service agreements for PIC accepted by Owner. D. Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times: Do not start the following key Project activities until the prerequisite activities and lead times listed below have been completed and satisfied: Activity Prerequisites and Lead Times Submittal reviews by Engineer acceptance of Submittal Engineer breakdown and schedule. Hardware purchasing, Associated Shop Drawing Submittals fabrication, and assembly completed. Shipment Completion of PIC Shop Drawing Submittals and preliminary O&M manuals. Owner Training Owner training plan completed PAT Startup, Owner training, and PAT procedures completed; notice 4 weeks prior to start. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409001-10 399884C.GN1 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. PIC functions as shown on Drawings and as required for each loop. Furnish equipment items as required. Furnish all materials, equipment, and software, necessary to effect required system and loop performance. B. First Named Manufacturer: PIC design is based on first named manufacturers of equipment and materials. 1. If an item is proposed from other than first named manufacturer, obtain approval from Engineer for such changes in accordance with Article Submittals. 2. If using proposed item requires other changes, provide work and equipment to implement these changes. Changes that may be required include, but are not limited to: different installation, wiring, raceway, enclosures, connections, isolators, intrinsically safe barriers, software, and accessories. C. Like Equipment Items: 1. Use products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services. 2. Implement all same or similar functions in same or similar manner. For example, control logic, sequence controls, and display layouts. D. Components and Materials in Contact with Water for Human Consumption: Comply with the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other applicable federal, state, and local requirements. Provide certification by manufacturer or an accredited certification organization recognized by the Authority Having Jurisdiction that components and materials comply with the maximum lead content standard in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 and NSF/ANSI 372. 1. Use or reuse of components and materials without a traceable certification is prohibited. E. Subheadings for Each Loop: 1. Functions: Clarifies functional performance of loop. a. Components: Lists major components for each loop. Information listed include: Tag numbers. b. Component Identification Codes: Alphanumeric codes of required components. Refer to Component Specification referenced in Paragraph, Supplements. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-11 399884C.GN1 C. Component Names and Options: Required to tailor general Component Specifications to specific application. For example, special materials, mounting, size, unit range, scale, setpoints, and controller options. 2.02 I&C COMPONENTS A. Components for Each Loop: Major components for each loop are listed in Instrument List referenced in Article Supplements. Furnish all equipment that is necessary to achieve required loop performance. B. Component Specifications: Generalized specifications for each type of component are located in Article Supplements. 2.03 NAMEPLATES AND TAGS A. Panel Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on the enclosure face. 1. Location and Inscription: As shown. 2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached to panel with stainless steel screws. 3. Letters: 1/2 -inch white on black background, unless otherwise noted. B. Component Nameplates—Panel Face: Component identification located on panel face under or near component. 1. Location and Inscription: As shown. 2. Materials: Laminated plastic attached to panel with stainless steel screws. 3. Letters: 3/16 -inch white on black background, unless otherwise noted. C. Component Nameplates—Back of Panel: Component identification located on or near component inside of enclosure. 1. Inscription: Component tag number. 2. Materials: Adhesive backed, laminated plastic. 3. Letters: 3/16 -inch white on black background, unless otherwise noted. D. Legend Plates for Panel Mounted Pushbuttons, Lights, and Switches. 1. Inscription: Refer to: a. Table under paragraph Standard Pushbutton Colors and Inscriptions. b. Table under paragraph Standard Light Colors and Inscriptions. C. P&IDs in Drawings. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01-12 399884C.GN1 2. Materials: Stainless steel, keyed legend plates. Secured to panel by mounting nut for pushbutton, light, or switch. 3. Letters: Black on gray or white background. E. Service Legends: Component identification nameplate located on face of component. 1. Inscription: As shown. 2. Materials: Adhesive backed, laminated plastic. 3. Letters: 3/16 -inch white on black background, unless otherwise noted. F. Nametags: Component identification for field devices. 1. Inscription: Component tag number. 2. Materials: 16 -gauge, Type 304 stainless steel. 3. Letters: 3/16 -inch imposed. 4. Mounting: Affix to component with 16- or 18 -gauge stainless steel wire or stainless steel screws. 2.04 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. In accordance with Division 26, Electrical. B. I&C and electrical components, terminals, wires, and enclosures: UL recognized or UL listed. C. Wires within Enclosures: 1. ac Circuits: a. Type: 300 -volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current to be carried, but not less than 18 AWG. 2. Analog Signal Circuits: a. Type: 300 -volt stranded copper, twisted shielded pairs. b. Size: 18 AWG, minimum. 3. Other do Circuits. a. Type: 300 -volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current carried, but not less than 18 AWG. 4. Special Signal Circuits: Use manufacturer's standard cables. 5. Wire Identification: Numbered and tagged at each termination. a. Wire Tags: Machine printed, heat shrink. b. Manufacturers: 1) Brady PermaSleeve. 2) Tyco Electronics. PW/WBG/399884 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-13 399884C.GN1 D. Wires entering or leaving enclosures, terminate and identify as follows: 1. Analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks. 2. Special signals, terminated using manufacturer's standard connectors. 3. Identify wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 05, Conductors. E. Terminal Blocks for Enclosures: 1. Quantity: a. Accommodate present and spare indicated needs. b. Wire spare PLC I/O points to terminal blocks. C. One wire per terminal for field wires entering enclosures. d. Maximum of two wires per terminal for 18 -AWG wire for internal enclosure wiring. e. Spare Terminals: 20 percent of all connected terminals, but not less than 10 per terminal block. 2. General: a. Connection Type: Screw compression clamp. b. Compression Clamp: 1) Complies with DIN-VDE 0611. 2) Hardened steel clamp with transversal groves that penetrate wire strands providing a vibration -proof connection. 3) Guides strands of wire into terminal. C. Screws: Hardened steel, captive and self-locking. d. Current Bar: Copper or treated brass. e. Insulation: 1) Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 to plus 110 degree C. 2) Two funneled shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry. f. Mounting: 1) Standard DIN rail. 2) Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without displacing adjacent blocks. 3) End Stops: Minimum of one at each end of rail. g. Wire preparation: Stripping only permitted. h. Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on terminal or rail. i. Marking System: 1) Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block. 2) Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags. 3) Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops. 4) Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers as shown on Panel Control Diagrams and Loop Diagrams. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409001-14 399884C.GN1 PW/WBG/399884 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-15 j. Fuse Marking for Fused Terminal Blocks: Fuse voltage and amperage rating shown on top of terminal block. 3. Terminal Block, General -Purpose: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 30 amp. C. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG. e. Color: Grey body. f. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. g. Test Sockets: One screw test socket 0.079 -inch diameter. h. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.T. 4. Terminal Block, Ground: a. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 12 AWG. b. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. C. Color: Green and yellow body. d. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. e. Grounding: Ground terminal blocks electrically grounded to the mounting rail. f. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.P. 5. Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 10 -amp. C. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 12 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. e. Color: Grey body, orange switch. f. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. g. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SN.T. 6. Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc: a. Rated Voltage: 600V dc. b. Rated Current: 16 -amp. C. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG. e. Color: Grey body. f. Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches. g. Indication: LED diode 24V dc. h. Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum. i. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M10/13T.SFL. 7. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 16 -amp. C. Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG. e. Color: Grey body. PW/WBG/399884 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-15 399884C.GN1 f. Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches. g. Indication: Neon Lamp 110V ac. h. Leakage Current: 1.8 mA, maximum. i. Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum j. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M10/13T.SFL. 8. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac, High Current: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 35 amps. C. Wire Size: 18 AWG to 8 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 8 AWG. e. Color: Grey. f. Fuse: 13/32 inch by 1.5 inches. g. Spacing: 0.95 inch, maximum. h. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type MB10/24.SF. F. Grounding of Enclosures: 1. Furnish isolated copper grounding bus for signal and shield ground connections. 2. Ground bus grounded at a common signal ground point in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. 3. Single Point Ground for Each Analog Loop: a. Locate at do power supply for loop. b. Use to ground wire shields for loop. 4. Ground terminal block rails to ground bus. G. Analog Signal Isolators: Furnish signal isolation for analog signals that are sent from one enclosure to another. Do not wire in series instruments on different panels, cabinets, or enclosures. H. Power Distribution within Panels: 1. Feeder Circuits: a. One or more 120V ac, 60 -Hz feeder circuits as shown on Drawings. b. Make provisions for feeder circuit conduit entry. C. Furnish terminal board for termination of wires. 2. Power Panel: Furnish main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on each individual branch circuit distributed from power panel. a. Locate to provide clear view of and access to breakers when door is open. b. Breaker sizes: Coordinate such that fault in branch circuit will blow only branch breaker but not trip the main breaker. 1) Branch Circuit Breaker: 15 amps at 250V ac. C. Breaker Manufacturers and Products: Refer to Division 26, Electrical. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409001-16 399884C.GN1 3. Circuit Wiring: P&IDs and Control Diagrams on Drawings show function only. Use following rules for actual circuit wiring: a. Devices on Single Circuit: 20, maximum. b. Multiple Units Performing Parallel Operations: To prevent failure of any single branch circuit from shutting down entire operation, do not group all units on same branch circuit. C. Branch Circuit Loading: 12 amperes continuous, maximum. d. Panel Lighting and Service Outlets: Put on separate 15 -amp, 120V ac branch circuit. e. Provide 120V ac plugmold for panel components with line cords. I. Signal Distribution: 1. Within Panels: 4 mA to 20 mA do signals may be distributed as 1 to 5V dc. 2. Outside Panels: Isolated 4 mA to 20 mA do only. 3. All signal wiring twisted in shielded pairs. J. Signal Switching: 1. Use dry circuit type relays or switches. 2. No interruption of 4 mA to 20 mA loops during switching. 3. Switching Transients in Associated Signal Circuit: a. 4 mA to 20 mA do Signals: 0.2 mA, maximum. b. 1 to 5V do Signals: 0.05V, maximum. K. Relays: 1. General: a. Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket. b. Relay Enclosure: Furnish dust cover. C. Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring. d. Socket Mounting: Rail. e. Provide holddown clips. 2. Signal Switching Relay: a. Type: Dry circuit. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: 0 to 5 amps at 28V do or 120V ac. d. Contact Material: Gold or silver. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 0.9 watts (dc), 1.2VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. PW/WBG/399884 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-17 399884C.GN1 h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations. i. Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp. j. Seal Type: Hermetically sealed case. k. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KH/KHA. 3. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching: a. Type: Compact general-purpose plug-in. b. Contact Arrangement: 3 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: l0A at 28V do or 240V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations. i. Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp. j. Push to test button. k. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KUP. 4. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Latching: a. Type: Dual coil mechanical latching relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: 10A at 28V do or 120V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 2.7 watts (dc), 5.3VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 500,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 50,000 operations. i. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KB/KBP. 5. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay: a. Type: Adjustable time delay relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: l0A at 240V ac. 1) Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. d. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. e. Operating Temperature: Minus 10 to 55 degrees C. f. Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay setpoint fall between 20 to 80 percent of range. h. Time Delay Setpoint: As noted or shown. i. Mode of Operation: As noted or shown. j. Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to dust cover. k. Manufacturer and Products: Potter and Brumfield: 1) Series CB for 0.1 second to 100 minute delay time ranges. 2) Series CK for 0.1 to 120 second delay time ranges. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409001-18 399884C.GN1 L. Power Supplies: 1. Furnish to power instruments requiring external do power, including two -wire transmitters and do relays. 2. Convert 120V ac, 60 -Hz power to do power of appropriate voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances. 3. Provide output over voltage and over current protective devices to: a. Protect instruments from damage due to power supply failure. b. Protect power supply from damage due to external failure. 4. Enclosures: NEMA 1 in accordance with NEMA 250. 5. Mount such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other components. 6. Fuses: For each do supply line to each individual two -wire transmitter. a. Type: Indicating. b. Mount so fuses can be easily seen and replaced. M. Internal Panel Lights for Freestanding Panels: 1. Type: Switched 100 -watt incandescent back -of -panel lights. 2. Quantity: One light for every 4 feet of panel width. 3. Mounting: Inside and in the top of back -of -panel area. 4. Protective metal shield for lights. N. Service Outlets for Freestanding Panels: 1. Type: Three -wire, 120 -volt, 15 -ampere, GFCI duplex receptacles. 2. Quantity: a. For panels 4 feet wide and smaller: One. b. For panels wider than 4 feet: One for every 4 feet of panel width, two minimum per panel. 3. Mounting: Evenly spaced along back -of -panel area. O. Internal Panel Lights and Service Outlets for Smaller Panels: 1. Internal Panel Light: Switched 100 -watt incandescent light. Tag Function Inscri tions Color 00 ON Black OFF Black OC OPEN Black CLOSE Black OCA OPEN Black CLOSE Black AUTO PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-19 399884C.GN1 0 LON 2. OOA ON Black ON OFF Black OFF AUTO Green MA MANUAL Black CLOSED AUTO Black SS START Black FAIL STOP Black RESET RESET Black EMERGENCY EMERGENCY Red STOP STOP Yellow Service Outlet: Breaker protected 120 -volt, 15 -amp, GFCI duplex receptacle: Standard Pushbutton Colors and Inscriptions: Use following color code and inscriptions for pushbuttons, unless otherwise noted. a. Lettering Color: 1) Black on white and yellow buttons. 2) White on black, red, and green buttons. Standard Light Colors and Inscriptions: Use following color code and inscriptions for service legends and lens colors for indicating lights, unless otherwise noted. Tag Function Inscri tions Color ON ON Red OFF OFF Green OPEN OPEN Red CLOSED CLOSED Green LOW LOW Green FAIL FAIL Amber HIGH HIGH Red AUTO AUTO White MANUAL MANUAL Yellow LOCAL LOCAL White REMOTE REMOTE Yellow Lettering Color: a. Black on white and amber lenses. b. White on red and green lenses. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01 -20 II• 2.07 399884C.GN1 SPARE PARTS Description Percent of Each Type and Size Used No Less Than Annunciator light bulbs 20 10 Annunciator window module 10 5 do power upplies 20 2 Fuses 20 5 Indicating light bulb 20 10 Relays 20 3 Terminal Blocks 10 10 Hand Switches L 10 5 EXPENDABLES Item Corrosion -inhibiting vapor capsules FABRICATION A. General: Quantity Manufacturer's recommended 2 -year supply 1. Panels with external dimensions and instruments arrangement as shown on Drawings. 2. Panel Construction and Interior Wiring: In accordance with the National Electrical Code, state and local codes, NEMA, ANSI, UL, and ICECA. 3. Fabricate panels, install instruments, wire, and plumb, at the PIC factory. 4. Electrical Work: In accordance with Division 26, Electrical. B. Factory Assembly: Assemble panels at the manufacturer's factory. No fabrication other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage shall be done on panels at Site. C. UL Listing Mark for Enclosures: Mark stating "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" per UL 508A. D. Wiring Within PIC Panels: 1. Restrain by plastic ties or ducts or metal raceways. 2. Hinge Wiring: Secure at each end so that bending or twisting will be around longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with sleeve. PW/WBG/399884 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 90 01-21 399884C.GN1 3. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. 4. Abrasion protection for wire bundles which pass through holes or across edges of sheet metal. 5. Connections to Screw Type Terminals: a. Locking -fork -tongue or ring -tongue lugs. b. Use manufacturer's recommended tool with required sized anvil to make crimp lug terminations. C. Wires terminated in a crimp lug, maximum of one. d. Lugs installed on a screw terminal, maximum of two. 6. Connections to Compression Clamp Type Terminals: a. Strip, prepare, and install wires in accordance with terminal manufacturer's recommendations. b. Wires installed in a compression screw and clamp, maximum of one for field wires entering enclosure, otherwise maximum of two. 7. Splicing and tapping of wires, allowed only at device terminals or terminal blocks. 8. Terminate 24V do and analog signal circuits on separate terminal block from ac circuit terminal blocks. 9. Separate analog and do circuits by at least 6 inches from ac power and control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device terminations. 10. Arrange wiring to allow access for testing, removal, and maintenance of circuits and components. 11. Plastic Wire Ducts Fill: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendation. E. Temperature Control: Freestanding Panels: a. Nonventilated Panels: Size to adequately dissipate heat from equipment mounted inside panel or on panel. b. Ventilated Panels: 1) Furnish with louvers and forced ventilation as required to prevent temperature buildup from equipment mounted inside panel or on panel. 2) For panels with backs against wall, furnish louvers on top and bottom of panel sides. 3) For panels without backs against wall, furnish louvers on top and bottom of panel back. 4) Louver Construction: Stamped sheet metal. 5) Ventilation Fans: a) Furnish where required to provide adequate cooling. b) Create positive internal pressure within panel. c) Fan Motor Power: 120V ac, 60 -Hz, thermostatically controlled. 6) Air Filters: Washable aluminum, Hoffinan Series A -FLT. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409001-22 399884C.GN1 2. Refrigerated System: Furnish where heat dissipation cannot be adequately accomplished with natural convection or forced ventilation. Smaller Panels (that are not freestanding): Size to adequately dissipate heat from equipment mounted inside panel or in panel face. 3. Space Heaters: Thermostatically controlled to maintain internal panel temperatures above dew point. F. Freestanding Panel Construction: 1. Materials: Sheet steel, unless otherwise shown on Drawings with minimum thickness of 10 -gauge, unless otherwise noted. 2. Panel Fronts: a. Fabricated from a single piece of sheet steel, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. b. No seams or bolt heads visible when viewed from front. C. Panel Cutouts: Smoothly finished with rounded edges. d. Stiffeners: Steel angle or plate stiffeners or both on back of panel face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or operation. 3. Internal Framework: a. Structural steel for instrument support and panel bracing. b. Permit panel lifting without racking or distortion. 4. Lifting rings to allow simple, safe rigging and lifting of panel during installation. 5. Adjacent Panels: Securely bolted together so front faces are parallel. 6. Doors: Full height, fully gasketed access doors where shown on Drawings. a. Latches: Three-point, Southco Type 44. b. Handles: "D" ring, foldable type. C. Hinges: Full length, continuous, piano type, steel hinges with stainless steel pins. d. Rear Access Doors: Extend no further than 24 inches beyond panel when opened to 90 -degree position. e. Front and Side Access Doors: As shown on Drawings. G. Nonfreestanding Panel Construction: 1. Based on environmental design requirements required and referenced in Article Environmental Requirements, provide the following: a. For panels listed as inside, air conditioned: 1) Enclosure Type: NEMA 12 in accordance with NEMA 250. 2) Materials: Steel. b. For all other panels: 1) Enclosure Type: NEMA 4X in accordance with NEMA 250. 2) Materials: Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Metal Thickness: 14 -gauge, minimum. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-23 399884C.GN1 In 3. Doors: a. Rubber-gasketed with continuous hinge. b. Stainless steel lockable quick -release clamps. 4. Manufacturers: a. Hoffinan Engineering Co. b. Rittal. Factory Finishing: 1. Enclosures: a. Stainless Steel and Aluminum: Not painted. b. Nonmetallic Panels: Not painted. C. Steel Panels: 1) Sand panel and remove mill scale, rust, grease, and oil. 2) Fill imperfections and sand smooth. 3) Paint panel interior and exterior with one coat of epoxy coating metal primer, two finish coats of two -component type epoxy enamel. 4) Sand surfaces lightly between coats. 5) Dry Film Thickness: 3 mils, minimum. 6) Color: TBD. 2. Manufacturer's standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment with light gray color. 2.08 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Corrosion -Inhibiting Vapor Capsule Manufacturers: 1. Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC. 2. Hoffmann Engineering Co; Model A -HCI. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Scope: Inspect and test entire PIC to ensure it is ready for shipment, installation, and operation. B. Location: Manufacturer's factory or Engineer approved staging Site. C. Test: Exercise and test all functions. D. Temporary PLC software configuring to allow PLC testing. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01 -24 399884C.GN1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. For equipment not provided by PIC, but that directly interfaces with the PIC, verify the following conditions: 1. Proper installation. 2. Calibration and adjustment of positioners and I/P transducers. 3. Correct control action. 4. Switch settings and dead bands. 5. Opening and closing speeds and travel stops. 6. Input and output signals. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Material and Equipment Installation: Retain a copy of manufacturers' instructions at Site, available for review at all times. B. Electrical Wiring: As specified in Division 26, Electrical. C. Mechanical Systems: 1. Drawings for PIC Mechanical Systems are diagrammatic and not intended to specifically define element locations or piping and tubing run lengths. Base materials and installations on field measurements. 2. Copper and Stainless Steel Tubing Support: Continuously supported by an aluminum tubing raceway system. 3. Plastic Tubing Supports: Except as shown on Drawings, provide continuous support in conduits or by aluminum tubing raceway system. 4. Install tubing conduit for plastic tubing and tubing raceways parallel with, or at right angles to, structural members of buildings. Make vertical runs straight and plumb. 5. Tubing and Conduit Bends: a. Tool -formed without flattening, and all of same radius. b. Bend Radius: Equal to or larger than conduit and tubing manufacturer's recommended minimum bend radius. C. Slope instrument connection tubing in accordance with installation details. d. Do not run liquid filled instrument tubing immediately over or within a 3 -foot plan view clearance of electrical panels, motor starters, or mechanical mounting panel without additional protection. Where tubing must be located in these zones, shield electrical device to prevent water access to electrical equipment. e. Straighten coiled tubing by unrolling on flat surface. Do not pull to straighten. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-25 399884C.GN1 f. Cut tubing square with sharp tubing cutter. Deburr cuts and remove chips. Do not gouge or scratch surface of tubing. g. Blow debris from inside of tubing. h. Make up and install fittings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Verify makeup of tube fittings with manufacturer's inspection gauge. i. Use lubricating compound or TFE tape on stainless steel threads to prevent seizing or galling. j. Run tubing to allow, for example, clear access to doors, controls, and control panels; and to allow for easy removal of equipment. k. Provide separate support for components in tubing runs. 1. Supply expansion loops and use adapters at pipe, valve, or component connections for proper orientation of fitting. in. Keep tubing and conduit runs at least 12 inches from hot pipes. n. Locate and install tubing raceways in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Locate tubing to prevent spillage, overflow, or dirt from above. o. Securely attach tubing raceways to building structural members. 6. Enclosure Lifting Rings: Remove rings following installation and plug holes. D. Removal or Relocation of Materials and Equipment: 1. Remove from Site materials that were part of the existing facility but are no longer used, unless otherwise directed by Engineer to deliver to Owner. 2. Repair affected surfaces to conform to type, quality, and finish of surrounding surface. 3.03 FIELD FINISHING A. Refer to Section 09 90 04, Painting. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Startup and Testing Team: 1. Thoroughly inspect installation, termination, and adjustment for components and systems. 2. Complete onsite tests. 3. Complete onsite training. 4. Provide startup assistance. B. Operational Readiness Inspections and Calibrations: Prior to startup, inspect and test to ensure that entire PIC is ready for operation. 1. Loop/Component Inspections and Calibrations: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01 -26 399884C.GN1 a. Check PIC for proper installation, calibration, and adjustment on a loop -by -loop and component -by -component basis. b. Prepare component calibration sheet for each active component (except simple hand switches, lights, gauges, and similar items). 1) Project name. 2) Loop number. 3) Component tag number. 4) Component code number. 5) Manufacturer for elements. 6) Model number/serial number. 7) Summary of functional requirements, for example: a) Indicators and recorders, scale and chart ranges. b) Transmitters/converters, input and output ranges. c) Computing elements' function. d) Controllers, action (direct/reverse) and control modes (PID). e) Switching elements, unit range, differential (fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual). 8) Calibrations, for example: a) Analog Devices: Actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. b) Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset points. c) Controllers: Mode settings (PID). 9) Space for comments. C. These inspections and calibrations will be spot checked by Engineer. 2. Leak Test: In accordance with Section 40 80 01, Process Piping Leakage Testing. C. Performance Acceptance Tests (PAT): These are the activities that Section 0191 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup, refers to as Performance Testing. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 General: a. Test all PIC elements to demonstrate that PIC satisfies all requirements. b. Test Format: Cause and effect. 1) Person conducting test initiates an input (cause). 2) Specific test requirement is satisfied if correct result (effect) occurs. C. Procedures, Forms, and Checklists: 1) Conduct tests in accordance with, and documented on, Engineer accepted procedures, forms, and checklists. 2) Describe each test item to be performed. 3) Have space after each test item description for sign off by appropriate party after satisfactory completion. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-27 399884C.GN1 d. Required Test Documentation: Test procedures, forms, and checklists. All signed by Engineer and Contractor. e. Conducting Tests: 1) Provide special testing materials, equipment, and software. 2) Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. 3) If it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. 4) Define simulation techniques in test procedures. f. Coordinate PIC testing with Owner and affected Subcontractors. 1) Excessive Test Witnessing: Refer to Supplementary Conditions. 2. Test Requirements: a. Once facility has been started up and is operating, perform a witnessed PAT on complete PIC to demonstrate that it is operating as required. Demonstrate each required function on a paragraph -by -paragraph and loop -by -loop basis. b. Perform local and manual tests for each loop before proceeding to remote and automatic modes. C. Where possible, verify test results using visual confirmation of process equipment and actual process variable. Unless otherwise directed, exercise and observe devices supplied by others, as needed to verify correct signals to and from such devices and to confirm overall system functionality. Test verification by means of disconnecting wires or measuring signal levels is acceptable only where direct operation of plant equipment is not possible. d. Make updated versions of documentation required for PAT available to Engineer at Site, both before and during tests. e. Make one copy of O&M manuals available to Engineer at the Site both before and during testing. f. Refer to referenced examples of PAT procedures and forms in Article Supplements. 3.05 TRAINING A. General: 1. Provide an integrated training program to meet specific needs of Owner's personnel. 2. Include training sessions, classroom and field, for managers, engineers, operators, and maintenance personnel. 3. Provide instruction on two working shift(s) as needed to accommodate the Owner's personnel schedule. 4. Owner reserves the right to make and reuse video tapes of training sessions. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01 -28 399884C.GN1 B. Operations and Maintenance Training: 1. Include a review of O&M manuals and survey of spares, expendables, and test equipment. 2. Use equipment similar to that provided or currently owned by Owner. 3. Provide training suitable for instrument technicians with at least a 2 -year associate engineering or technical degree, or equivalent education and experience in electronics or instrumentation. C. Operations Training: 1. Training Session Duration: One 8 -hour instructor days. 2. Number of Training Sessions: Two. 3. Location: Site. 4. Content: Conduct training on loop -by -loop basis. a. Loop Functions: Understanding of loop functions, including interlocks for each loop. b. Loop Operation: For example, adjusting process variable setpoints, AUTO/MANUAL control transfer, AUTO and MANUAL control, annunciator acknowledgement and resetting. C. Interfaces with other control systems. D. Maintenance Training: 1. Training Session Duration: Five 8 -hour instructor days. 2. Number of Training Sessions: Two. 3. Location: Project Site. 4. Content: Provide training for each type of component and function provided. a. Loop Functions: Understanding details of each loop and how they function. b. Component calibration. C. Adjustments: For example, controller tuning constants, current switch trip points, and similar items. d. Troubleshooting and diagnosis for components. e. Replacing lamps, chart paper, fuses. f. Component removal and replacement. g. Periodic maintenance. 3.06 CLEANING/ADJUSTING A. Repair affected surfaces to conform to type, quality, and finish of surrounding surface. B. Cleaning: PW/WBG/399884 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL JANUARY 12, 2015 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 409001-29 399884C.GN1 1. Prior to closing system using tubing, clear tubing of interior moisture and debris. 2. Upon completion of Work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from interior and exterior of equipment. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect enclosures and other equipment containing electrical, instrumentation and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion through the use of corrosion -inhibiting vapor capsules. B. Periodically replace capsules in accordance with capsule manufacturer's recommendations. Replace capsules just prior to Final Payment and Acceptance. 3.08 SUPPLEMENTS A. Supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are part of this Specification. 1. I&C Components. 2. Instrument Calibration Sheet: Provides detailed information on each instrument (except simple hand switches, lights, and similar items). 3. I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet: Each sheet shows detailed information for installation, adjustment, and calibration of a given valve. 4. Performance Acceptance Test Sheet: Describes the PAT for a given loop. The format is mostly free form. a. Lists the requirements of the loop. b. Briefly describes the test. C. Cites expected results. d. Provides space for check off by witness. END OF SECTION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01-30 399884C.GN1 I&C COMPONENTS A. F 16 Flow Element, Rotameter: 1. General: a. Function: Indicate flow rate with integrated flow control valve. b. Type: Variable area; float and tapered tube. 2. Service Conditions: a. Process Fluid: Air, unless otherwise noted. b. Temperature Range: 1) Maximum Process Temperature: a) Liquids: 54 degrees C b) Gases: 38 degrees C 2) Ambient Temperature: 1 to 52 degrees C b. Maximum Operating Pressure 1) Liquids: 125 psig 2) Gases: 100 psig 3. Performance: a. Flowrate Range: As Noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent of maximum flow, uncalibrated, over 10:1 turndown. C. Repeatability: 0.5 percent of full scale. 4. Features: a. Nominal Length: 10 inches. b. Internal Components Material: Type 316 stainless steel. C. O -Ring Material: Buna-N. d. Tube: Borosilicate glass. e. Polycarbonate operator protection shield. f. Mounting: In line, unless otherwise noted. g. Scales: Direct -reading external metal scale, unless otherwise noted. h. Pressure Drop Design: Standard, unless otherwise noted. i. Conforms to ISA RP 16.6. 5. Size and Process Connections: a. Connection Size: As noted. b. Tube Size: As noted. C. Connection Material: 316L stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. d. Connection Type: Threaded NPT, unless otherwise noted. e. Connection Orientation: Vertical, unless otherwise noted. 6. Signal Interface: None, unless otherwise noted. 7. Manufacturers and Products: a. King Instrument Company; 7530 Series. b. Or approved equal. PW/WBG/399884 I&C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 B. P4 Pressure Gauge: 1. General: a. Function: Local pressure indication. b. Type: Bourdon tube element. 2. Performance: a. Scale Range: As noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of full scale. 3. Features: a. Dial: 4 -1/2 -inch diameter. b. Case Material: Black thermoplastic, unless otherwise noted. C. Materials of Wetted Parts (including element, socket/process connection, throttling device (if specified) and secondary components): 1) Stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. d. Pointer: Adjustable by removing ring and window. e. Window: Glass or acrylic, unless otherwise noted. f. Threaded reinforced polypropylene front ring. g. Case Type: Solid front with blow-out back. 4. Process Connection: a. Mounting: Lower stem, unless otherwise noted. b. Size: 1/2 -inch MNPT, unless otherwise noted. 5. Accessories: a. Throttling Device: Required, unless otherwise noted. 1) Type suitable for the intended service. 2) Install in gauge socket bore. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Ashcroft; Duragauge Model 1259/Model, 1279/Model, 1279 PLUS! b. Ametek U.S. Gauge; Solfrunt Model 19XX/I981Advantatge. C. WIKA, Type 2XX.34. d. Or approved equal. C. P6 Pressure Seal, Diaphragm 1. General: a. Function: Isolate sensing element from process fluid. b. Type: 1) Diaphragm. 2) Fluid filled between diaphragm and sensing element. 2. Service: a. Pressure: Same as associated sensor. b. Temperature Range: If noted. 3. Performance: a. Pressure: 1) For threaded process connections, at least 2,500 psig at 100 degrees F. 2) Halocarbon Fill, unless otherwise noted. I&C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 b. Temperature: 1) Dependent upon fill fluid. a) Glycerin (food grade): Zero to 400 degrees F. b) Silicone: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 600 degrees F. C) Silicone (food grade): Zero to 375 degrees F. d) Halocarbon: Minus 70 degrees F to 300 degrees F. 4. Features: a. Materials: 1) Lower Housing: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 2) Diaphragm Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 3) Top Housing: Steel, unless otherwise noted. b. Diaphragm: Welded to upper housing, unless otherwise noted. C. Filling screw in upper housing. d. Fill Fluid: 1) As noted. 2) Or approved equal. 3) Factory assembled and filled. e. Flushing Connection: 1/4 -inch NPT in lower housing. f. Diaphragm Seal Displacement: 0.1 cubic inch, nominal. 5. Connections: a. Instrument: 1/2 -inch female NPT, unless otherwise noted or shown. b. Process: 1/2 -inch female NPT, unless otherwise noted or shown. 6. Manufacturers: a. Ashcroft; Type 201. b. Ametek; Mansfield and Green Division; Type SG. C. WIKA; Type L990.10. d. Or approved equal. D. P111 Pressure Differential Indicator: 1. General: a. Function: Pressure differential indication. 2. Performance: a. Range: 1) As noted. 2) Available Ranges: a) 3, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 100, 160, 200, 300 psid. b) 30, 60, 100, 200 inches water column. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.6 percent of full scale. C. Static Pressure Rating: 580 psi unless otherwise noted. PW/WBG/399884 I&C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT - 3 399884C.GN1 3. Features: a. Case: 1) Stainless steel. 2) Weatherproof/hermetically sealed, unless otherwise noted. b. Dial Size: 4 inches, unless otherwise noted. C. Pointer: 1) Black painted aluminum. 2) External adjust feature (to 25 percent of range). d. Window: Shatterproof glass. e. Diaphragm Material: 1) Type 316 stainless steel for ranges 15 psi and above. 2) Cobalt alloy for ranges 10 psi and below. f. Diaphragm Fill Fluid: None, unless otherwise noted (available are glycerin or silicon fill). g. 3 -way manifold. h. Housing: Type 316 stainless steel with Viton O-ring. 4. Process Connection: a. 1/2-NPTF, unless otherwise noted. b. Lower connection. 5. Mounting: a. Pipe, unless otherwise noted. 6. Manufacturer and Product: Ashcroft, Type 5503 Differential Pressure Gauge, or approved equal. END OF SUPPLEMENT I&C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT - 4 JANUARY 12, 2015 CH2MHILL INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION SHEET Rev.06.05.92 COMPONENT MANUFACTURER Code: Name: Number: Name: Model: Name: Serial #: FUNCTIONS RANGE VALUE UNITS COMPUTING FUNCTIONS? Y / N CONTROL? Y / N Action? direct / reverse Modes? P / I / D Indicate? Y / N Record? Y / N Chart: Describe: Scale: SWITCH? Y / N Unit Range: Differential: Reset? automatic / man, Transmit/ Convert? Y / N Input: Output: ANALOG CALIBRATIONS DISCRETE CALIBRATI REQUIRED AS CALIBRATED REQUIRED Input Indicated Output Increasing Input Decreas ng Input Indicated Output Indicated Output Number Trip Point Reset Pt. Tri note risingor falling) note r 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E7� CONTROL MODE SETTINGS: P: I: D: # NOTES: Componer. for Startu B: Date: Ta No.: PW/WBG/399884 INSTM JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 CH2M HILL INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION SHEET EXAMPLE - A NA L YZERITRA NSMITTER COMPONENT MANUFACTURER Code: A7 Name: Leeds & NorthrupNumber: WDC30715.B2 Name: pHElement & Analyzer/Transmitter Model: 12429-3-2-1-7 Name: UOSA AWT PHAti Serial #: 11553322 FUNCTIONS RANGE VALUE UNITS COMPUTING FUNCTIONS? N CONTROL? N Action? direct / reverse Modes? P / I / D Indicate? Y Record? N Chart: Describe: Scale: 1-14 pHunits SWITCH? N Unit Range: Differential: Reset? automatic / man Transmit/ Convert? Y I Input: 1-14 PHunits Ou ut. 4-20 mA do ANALOG CALIBRATIONS DISCRETE CALIBRATIONS REQUIRED AS CALIBRATED REQUIRED AS CAI Input Indicated Output Increasing Input Decreasing Input Indicated Output Indicated Output Number Trip Point I Reset Pt. Trip Point note risingor falling) note rising o: 1.0 1.0 4.0 1.0 4.0 1.0 3.9 1. N.A. N.A. 2.3 2.3 5.6 2.2 5.5 2.3 5.6 2. 7.5 7.5 12.0 7.5 11.9 7.5 12.0 3. 12.7 12.7 18.4 12.7 18.3 12.6 18.3 4. 14.0 14.0 20.0 14.0 20.0 14.0 20.0 5. 6. CONTROL MODE SETTINGS: P: N.A. I: D: JL7. # NOTES: Componer. 1. Need to recheck low pH calibration solutions. -Startup By: J.D. Se Date: Jun-( Ta No.: A INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 90 Ol SUPPLEMENT - 2 399884C.GN1 CH2MHILL I&C VALVE ADJUSTMENT SHEET Rev.06.05.92 PARTS Project Name: Project Number: Body Type: Mfr: Size: Model: Line Connection: Serial #: Operator Type: Mfr: Action: Model: Travel: Serial #: Positioner Input Signal: Mfr: Action: Model: Cam: Serial #: Pilot Solenoid Action: Mfr: Rating: Model: Serial #: UP Input: Mfr: Converter Output: Model: Action: Serial #: Position Switch Settings: Mfr: Contacts: Model: Serial #: Power Supply Type: Air Set Mfr: Potential: Model: Serial #: ADJUSTMENTS Initial Date VERIFICATION Initial Date Air Set Valve Action Positioner Installation Position Switches Wire Connection I/P Converter Tube Connection Actual Speed REMARKS: Valve Ready for Startup B: Date: Tag No.: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 CH2M HILL I&C VALVE ADJUSTMENT SHEET Rev.06.05.92 EXAMPLE PARTS Project Name: SFO SEWPCP Project Number: SF010145.G2 Body Type: Vee -Ball Mfr: Fisher Controls Size: 4 -inch Model: 1049763-2 Line Connection: 159 # ANSI Flanges Serial #: 1003220 Operator Type: Pneumatic Diaphragm Mfr: Fisher Controls Action: Linear - Modulated Model: 4060D Travel: 3 -inch Serial #: 2007330 Positioner Input Signal: 3-15 psi Mfr: Fisher Controls Action: Direct - air to open Model: 20472T Cam: Equal percentage Serial #: 102010 Pilot Solenoid Action: Mfr: Rating: None Model: Serial #: I/P Converter Input: 4-20 mA do Mfr: Taylor Output: 3-15 psi Model: 10-T-576-3 Action: Direct Serial #: 1057-330 Position Switch Settings: Closed/ Open 5 deg, rising Mfr: National Switch Contacts: Close / Close Model: 1049-67-3 Serial #: 156 &157 Power Supply Type: Pneumatic Air Set Mfr: Air Products Potential: 40 psi Model: 3210D Serial #: 1107063 ADJUSTMENTS Initial Date VERIFICATION Initial Date Air Set JDS Jun -06-92 Valve Action JDS Jun -03-92 Positioner JDS Jun -06-92 Installation JDS Jun -03-92 Position Switches JDS Jun -06-92 Wire Connection JDS Jun -04-92 I/P Converter JDS Jun -07-92 Tube Connection JDS Jun -04-92 Actual Speed JDS Jun -07-92 REMARKS: Valve was initially installed backwards. Valve Ready for Startup Observed to be correctly installed May -25-92 BY: J.D. Sewell Date: Jun -07-92 11 Tag No.: FCV-10-2-1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT - 2 399884C.GN1 CH2MHILL PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET Rev.06.05.92 Project Name: I Project No.: Demonstration Test(s): For each functional requirement of the loop: (a) List and number the requirement. (b) Briefly describe the demonstration test. c Cite the results that will verify the required performance. d Provides ace for si noff. Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Loop Accepted By Owner Loop Status Report By: Instrument Calibration Sheet Date: I&C Valve Calibration Sheet Performance Acceptance Test By Date Performed Witnessed Loop No.: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT - 3 399884C.GN1 CH2MHILL PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET Rev.06.05.92 EXAMPLE Project Name: SFO SEWPCPPlant Expansion I Project No.: SF012345.C1 tration Test(s): For each functional requirement of the loop: and number the requirement. (b) Briefly describe the demonstration test. Ethe results that will verify the required performance. d Provides ace for si noff. 1. MEASURE EFFL UENT FLOW La With no ow, water level over weir should be zero and FIT indicator should read zero. Jun -20-92 BDG 2. FLOW INDICA TION AND TRANSMISSION TO LP & CCS With ow, water level and FIT indicator should be related by expression MGD = 429*H** 2/3 H = height in inches o water over weir). Vary Hand observe that ollowin . 2.a Reading o FIT indicator. Jun -6-92 BDG 2.b Reading is transmitted to FI on LP -521-1. Jun -6-92 BDG 2.c Reading is transmitted and displayed to CCS. Jun -6-92 BDG H(measured) 0 5 10 15 Q(computed) 0 47.96 135.7 251.7 FIT indicator 0 48.1 137 253 LI on LP -521-1 0 48.2 138 254 dis la by CCS 0 48.1 136.2 252.4 Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Loop Accepted By Owner Loop Status Report J.D. Sewell May -18-92 By: J.D. Smith Instrument Calibration Sheet J.D. Sewell May -18-92 Date: Jun -6-92 I&C Valve Calibration Sheet I N.A. Performance Acceptance Test By Date Performed J. Blow MPSDC Co. Jun -6-92 Witnessed B.deGlanville Jun -6-92 LLoop No.. 30-12 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PW/WBG/399884 FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 90 01 SUPPLEMENT - 4 399884C.GN1 SECTION 40 99 90 OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): C62.41, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low - Voltage AC Power Circuits. 2. International Society of Automation (ISA): 550.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Process Instruments. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. C. ICS 2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 508A, Standards for Safety, Industrial Control Panels. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Assemble panels and install instruments, plumbing, and wiring in equipment manufacturer's factories. B. Test panels and panel assemblies for proper operation prior to shipment from equipment manufacturer's factory. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Bill of material, catalog information, descriptive literature, wiring diagrams, and Shop Drawings for components of control system. 2. Catalog information on electrical devices furnished with system. 3. Shop Drawings, catalog material, and dimensional layout drawings for control panels and enclosures. 4. Panel elementary diagrams of prewired panels. Include in diagrams control devices and auxiliary devices, for example, relays, alarms, fuses, lights, fans, and heaters. 5. Plumbing diagrams of preplumbed panels and interconnecting plumbing diagrams. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS 409990-1 399884C.GN1 6. Interconnection wiring diagrams that include numbered terminal designations showing external interfaces. 7. Calculations for heat dissipation and power requirements. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Programmable Controller Submittals: a. Complete set of user manuals. b. Fully documented ladder logic listings. C. Function listing for function blocks not fully documented by ladder logic listings. d. Cross-reference listing. 2. Manufacturer's list of proposed spares, expendables, and test equipment. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 0143 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prior to shipment, include corrosive -inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping containers and related equipment as recommended by capsule manufacturer. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment: 1. Selector Switch, Pushbutton, and Indicating Light: 20 percent, one minimum, of each type used. 2. Light Bulb: 100 percent, 2 minimum, of each type used. 3. Fuse: 100 percent, 5 minimum, of each type used. 4. Surge Suppressors: 20 percent, one minimum, of each type used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS A. Analog Signals: 1. 4 to 20 mA dc, in accordance with compatibility requirements of ISA 550.1. 2. Unless otherwise specified or shown, use Type 2, two -wire circuits. 3. Transmitters: Load resistance capability conforming to Class L. 4. Fully isolate input and output signals of transmitters and receivers. OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE PW/WBG/399884 CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409990-2 399884C.GN1 B. Pulse Frequency Signals: do pulses whose repetition rate is linearly proportional to process variable over 10:1 range. Generate pulses by contact closures or solid-state switches. 1. Power source: Less than 30V dc. C. Discrete Signals: 1. Two -state logic signals. 2. Utilize 120V ac sources for control and alarm signals. 3. Alarm signals shall be normally open, close to alarm isolated contacts rated for 5 -ampere at 120V ac and 2 -ampere at 30V dc. 2.02 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Corrosion -Inhibiting Vapor Capsule Manufacturers: 1. Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC. 2. Hoffmann Engineering; Model A -HCI. 2.03 CONTROL PANEL A. Panel Construction and Interior Wiring: In accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), UL 508, state and local codes, and applicable sections of NEMA, ANSI, and ICECA. B. Conform to NEMA ratings as specified in individual equipment sections. C. Minimum Metal Thickness: 14 -gauge. D. NEMA 250, Type 3R Panels: Type 316 stainless steel construction unless otherwise specified. E. Doors: 1. Three-point latching mechanisms in accordance with NEMA 250 Type 1 and 12 panels with doors higher than 18 inches. 2. For other doors, stainless steel quick release clamps. F. Cutouts shall be cut, punched, or drilled and finished smoothly with rounded edges. G. Access: Front, suitable for installation with back and sides adjacent to or in contact with other surfaces, unless otherwise specified. PW/WBG/399884 OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE JANUARY 12, 2015 CONTROL SYSTEMS 409990-3 399884C.GN1 H. Temperature Control: 1. Design panels to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted on or in the panel. 2. Furnish cooling fans with air filters or A/C if required to dissipate heat. 3. For panels outdoors or in unheated areas, furnish thermostatically controlled heaters to maintain temperature above 40 degrees F. I. Push -to -Test Circuitry: For each push -to -test indicating light, provide a fused push -to -test circuit. J. Lighting: Minimum of one hand switch controlled internal 100 -watt light for panels 12 cubic feet and larger. K. Minimum of one 120 -volt GFCI duplex receptacle for panels 12 cubic feet and larger. L. Finish: 1. Metallic External Surfaces (Excluding Aluminum and Stainless Steel): Manufacturer's standard gray unless otherwise specified. 2. Internal Surfaces: White enamel. M. Panel Manufacturers: 1. Hoffinan. 2. H.F. Cox. N. Breather and Drains: Furnish with NEMA 250, Type 3R panels. 1. Manufacturer and Product: Cooper Crouse -Hinds; ECD Type 3R Drain and Breather; Drain Model ECD 1-N4D, Breather Model ECD 1-N4B. 2.04 CONTROL PANEL ELECTRICAL A. UL Listing Mark for Enclosures: Mark stating "Listed Enclosed Industrial Control Panel" per UL 508A. B. I&C and electrical components, terminals, wires, and enclosures UL recognized or UL listed. C. Control Panels without Motor Starters: 1. Furnish main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on each individual branch circuit distributed from power panel. 2. Locate to provide clear view of and access to breakers when door is open. Group on single subpanel. Provide typed directory. OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE PW/WBG/399884 CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409990-4 399884C.GN1 Circuit Breakers: a. Coordinate for fault in branch circuit trips, branch breaker, and not main breaker. b. Branch Circuit Breakers: 15 amps at 250V ac. C. Breaker Manufacturers and Products: 1) Heineman Electric Co.; Series AM. 2) Airpax/North American Philips Controls Corp.; Series 205. D. Control Panels with Three -Phase Power Supplies and Motor Starters: 1. Interlock main circuit breaker with panel door. a. Mount logic controls, branch circuit breakers, overload reset switches, and other control circuit devices. b. Mount operator controls and indications on front access door. 2. Circuit Breakers: a. In accordance with NEMA AB 1. b. 18,000 -ampere RMS symmetrical rating, minimum at 480 volts, unless otherwise specified. C. Breakers, except Motor Branch Breakers: Molded case thermal magnetic. d. 65,000 -ampere RMS symmetrical rating, minimum at 480 volts, unless otherwise specified in package system equipment Specification sections. e. Tripping: Indicate with operator handle position. 3. Magnetic Motor Starters: a. Full voltage, NEMA ICS 2, Class A, Size O minimum. b. Include three -pole bimetallic or eutectic alloy thermal overload relays sized for each motor. C. Manual reset type with reset button mounted on panel door. 4. Motor Control: 120V ac (except intrinsically safe circuits where applicable). a. Power Control Transformer: 1) Sufficient capacity to serve connected load, including 200VA for duplex outlet plus 100VA (minimum). 2) Limit voltage variation to 15 percent during contact pickup. 3) Fuse one side of secondary winding and ground the other. 4) Furnish primary winding fuses in ungrounded conductors. 5. Power Monitoring Relay: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 a. Protect three-phase equipment from single phasing, phase imbalance, or phase reversal. b. Separate, isolated contact outputs to stop motors and activate alarm light during abnormal conditions. C. Transient Voltage Protection: 10,000 volts. d. Manufacturer and Product: Furnas; Class 47. OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS 409990-5 399884C.GN1 6. Power Distribution Blocks: Furnish. to parallel feed tap on branch circuit protective devices. Do not "leap frog" power conductors. 7. Terminations for Power Conductors: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. E. Wiring: 1. ac Circuits: a. Type: 600 -volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: For current to be carried, but not less than 14 AWG. 2. Analog Signal Circuits: a. Type: 300 -volt, Type 2 stranded copper, twisted shielded pairs. b. Size: 18 AWG, minimum. 3. Other do Circuits. a. Type: 600 -volt, Type MTW stranded copper. b. Size: 18 AWG, minimum. 4. Separate analog and other do circuits by at least 6 inches from ac power and control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device terminations. 5. Enclose wiring in sheet metal raceways or plastic wiring ducts. 6. Wire Identification: Numbered and tagged at each termination. a. Wire Tags: Machine printed, heat shrink. b. Manufacturers: 1) Brady PermaSleeve. 2) Tyco Electronics. F. Wiring Interface: 1. For analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks. 2. For special signals, terminate power (240 volts or greater) at manufacturer's standard connectors. 3. For panel, terminate at equipment on/with which it is mounted. G. Terminal Blocks: 1. Quantity: a. For external connections. b. Wire spare or unused panel mounted elements to their panels' terminal blocks. C. Spare Terminals: 20 percent of connected terminals, but not less than 10. 2. General: Group to keep 120V ac circuits separate from 24V do circuits. a. Connection Type: Screw connection clamp. b. Compression Clamp: 1) Hardened steel clamp with transversal grooves penetrating wire strands providing a vibration -proof connection. OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE PW/WBG/399884 CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2) Guides strands of wire into terminal. C. Screws: Hardened steel, captive, and self-locking. d. Current Bar: Copper or treated brass. e. Insulation: 1) Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 to plus 110 degrees C. 2) Two funnel shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry. f. Mounting: 1) Rail. 2) Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without displacing adjacent blocks. 3) End Stops: One at each end of rail, minimum. g. Wire Preparation: Stripping only. h. Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on terminal or rail. i. Marking System: 1) Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block. 2) Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags. 3) Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops. 4) Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers as shown. 3. Terminal Block, 120 -Volt Power: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 30 amp. C. Wire Size: 22 through 10 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG. e. Color: Gray body. f. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. g. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6. 4. Terminal Block, Ground: a. Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG. b. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. C. Color: Green and yellow body. d. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. e. Grounding: Ground terminal blocks electrically grounded to the mounting rail. f. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.P. 5. Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch: a. Use: Provide one for each discrete input and output field interface wire. b. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. C. Rated Current: 10 amp. d. Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG. e. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. f. Color: Gray body, orange switch. g. Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum. h. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SN. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS 409990-7 399884C.GN1 6. Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc: a. Rated Voltage: 600V dc. b. Rated Current: 6.3 amp. C. Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG. d. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. e. Color: Gray body. f. Fuse: 5 by 20 GMA fuses. g. Fuse Marking: Fuse amperage rating shown on top of terminal block. h. Indication: LED diode 24V dc. i. Leakage Current: 5.2 mA, maximum. j. Spacing: 0.32 inch, maximum. k. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SFD. 7. Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac: a. Rated Voltage: 600V ac. b. Rated Current: 6.3 amp. C. Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG d. Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG. e. Color: Gray body. f. Fuse: 5 by 20 GMA fuses. g. Fuse Marking: Fuse amperage rating shown on top of terminal block. h. Indication: Neon lamp 1 IOV ac. i. Leakage Current: 1.8 mA, maximum. j. Spacing: 0.32 inch, maximum k. Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SFL. H. Grounding: Internal copper grounding bus for ground connections on panels, consoles, racks, and cabinets. I. Relays: 1. General: a. Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket. b. Relay Enclosure: Provide dust cover. C. Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring. d. Socket Mounting: Rail. e. Furnish holddown clips. 2. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching: a. Type: Compact general purpose plug-in. b. Contact Arrangement: 3 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: IOA at 28V do or 240V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations. OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE PW/WBG/399884 CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409990-8 399884C.GN1 h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations. i. Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp. j. Push -to -test button. k. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KUP. 3. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Latching: a. Type: Dual coil mechanical latching relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: l0A at 28V do or 120V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As noted or shown. f. Coil Power: 2.7 watts (dc), 5.3VA (ac). g. Expected Mechanical Life: 500,000 operations. h. Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 50,000 operations. i. Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KB/KBP. 4. Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay: a. Type: Adjustable time delay relay. b. Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts. C. Contact Rating: 1 O at 240V ac. d. Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy. e. Coil Voltage: As specified or shown. f. Operating Temperature: Minus 10 to 55 degrees C. g. Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent. h. Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay setpoint fall between 20 to 80 percent or range. i. Time Delay Setpoint: As specified or shown. j. Mode of Operation: As specified or shown. k. Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to dust cover. 1. Manufacturer and Products: Potter and Brumfield. 1) Series CB for 0.1 -second to 100 -minute delay time ranges. 2) Series CK for 0.1- to 120 -second delay time ranges. Intrinsic Safety Barriers: 1. Intrinsically Safe Relays: Monitor discrete signals that originate in hazardous area and are used in a safe area. a. Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000. 2. Intrinsically Safe Barriers: Interface analog signals as they pass from hazardous area to safe area. a. Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000. K. Analog Signal Isolators: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Furnish signal isolation for analog signals that are sent from one enclosure to another. OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS 409990-9 399884C.GN1 2. Do not wire in series instruments on different panels, cabinets, or enclosures. L. Power Supplies: 1. Furnish as required to power instruments requiring external do power, including two -wire transmitters and do relays. Provide dual power supplies with diode auctioneered outputs. 2. Convert 120V ac, 60 -Hz power to do power of appropriate voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances. 3. Provide output over voltage and over current protective devices to: a. Protect instruments from damage due to power supply failure. b. Protect power supply from damage due to external failure. 4. Enclosures: NEMA 1. 5. Mount such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other components. M. Programmable Controllers: 1. Solid state units capable of performing same function as conventional relays, timers, counters, drum sequencers, arithmetic, and other special functions necessary to perform required control functions. 2. Minimum of 64 internal control relays, 16 timer/counters, and four, 16 stop drum sequencers. Furnish minimum of 256 words of nonvolatile memory. 3. Minimum of 12 discrete inputs and 8 discrete outputs, optical isolations rated at 2,500 -volt rms. Discrete inputs shall be 120V ac. Discrete outputs shall be rated for 2 amps at 120V ac. Each input and output shall have an LED ON/OFF status indicator. 4. Minimum of 25 percent excess capacity for inputs, outputs, internal coils, registers, and other necessary functions. 5. Capable of operating in a hostile industrial environment (for example, heat, electrical transients, RFI, and vibration) without fans, air conditioning, or electrical filtering. Units operate from 0 to 60 degrees C and up to 95 percent humidity, noncondensing. 6. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley. N. Front -of -Panel Devices in Conjunction with NEMA 250, Type 1 and 12 Panels: Potentiometer Units: a. Three -terminal, oiltight construction, resolution of 1 percent and linearity of plus or minus 5 percent. b. Single -hole, panel mounting accommodating panel thicknesses between 1/8 and 1/4 inch. OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE PW/WBG/399884 CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409990-10 399884C.GN1 C. Include legend plates with service markings. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Allen-Bradley; Model 800T. 2) Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Model 10250T. 2. Indicating Lights: a. Heavy-duty, push -to -test type, oiltight, industrial type with integral transformer for 120V ac applications. b. Screwed on prismatic glass lenses in colors noted and factory engraved legend plates for service legend. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type 10250T. 2) General Electric; CR2940U. 3. Pushbutton, Momentary: a. Heavy-duty, oiltight, industrial type with full guard and momentary contacts rated for 10 amperes continuous at 120V ac. b. Standard size legend plates with black field and white markings for service legend. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Square D; Class 9001, Type K. 2) Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type T. 3) General Electric; Type CR -2940. 4. Selector Switch: a. Heavy-duty, oiltight, industrial type with contacts rated for 120V ac service at 10 amperes continuous. b. Standard size, black field, legend plates with white markings, for service legend. C. Operators: Black knob type. d. Single -hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from 1/ 16 inch to 1/4 inch. e. Manufacturers and Products for Units with up to Four Selection Positions: 1) Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type T. 2) Square D; Type K. f. Manufacturers and Products for Units with up to 12 Selection Positions: 1) Rundel-Idec; Standard Cam Switch. 2) Electroswitch; 31. O. Front -of -Panel Devices Used in Conjunction with NEMA 250, Type 3R Panels: 1. Potentiometer, Watertight: a. Three -terminal, heavy-duty NEMA 250, Type 3R watertight construction, resolution of 1 percent and linearity of plus or minus 5 percent. PW/WBG/399884 OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE JANUARY 12, 2015 CONTROL SYSTEMS 409990-11 399884C.GN1 b. Single -hole, panel mounting accommodating panel thicknesses between 1/8 and 1/4 inch. C. Include engraved legend plates with service markings. d. Manufacturer and Product: Allen-Bradley; Bulletin 800H. 2. Indicating Lights, Watertight: a. Heavy-duty, push -to -test type, NEMA 250, Type 3R watertight, industrial type with integral transformer for 120V ac applications and corrosion -resistant service. b. Screwed on prismatic lenses and factory engraved legend plates for service legend. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Square D; Type SK. 2) Allen-Bradley; Type 800H. 3. Pushbutton, Momentary, Watertight: a. Heavy-duty, NEMA 250, Type 3R watertight, industrial type with momentary contacts rated for 120V ac service at 10 amperes continuous and corrosion -resistant service. b. Standard size, black field, legend plates with white markings for service legend. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Square D; Type SK. 2) Allen-Bradley; Type 800H. 4. Selector Switch, Watertight: a. Heavy-duty, NEMA 250, Type 3R watertight, industrial type with contacts rated for 120V ac service at 10 amperes continuous and corrosion -resistant service. b. Standard size, black field, legend plates with white markings, for service legend. C. Operators: Black knob type. d. Single -hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from 1/16 to 1/4 inch. e. Manufacturer and Products: 1) Square D; Class 9001, Type SK. 2) Allen-Bradley; Type 800H. 2.05 INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBERS A. A shorthand tag notation is used. For example: AI -LL -NN -ZZ [BB] Notation Explanation Al ISA designator for Analysis Indicator LL Unit Process Number OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE PW/WBG/399884 CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409990-12 399884C.GN1 NN Loop number (Optional) ZZ Unit Number [BB] Same notation shown at 2 o'clock position on ISA circle symbol on Process and Instrument Diagram 2.06 NAMEPLATES, NAMETAGS, AND SERVICE LEGENDS A. Nametags: Permanently mounted bearing entire ISA tag number. 1. Panel Mounted: Plastic, mounted to instrument behind panel face. 2. Field Mounted: Engraved Type 316 stainless steel, 22 -gauge minimum thickness, attached with stainless steel. to L Service Legends (Integrally Mounted with Instrument) and Nameplates: 1. Engraved, rigid, laminated plastic type with adhesive back. Furnish service legends and nameplates to adequately describe functions of panel face mounted instruments. 2. Color: White with black letters. 3. Letter Height: 3/16 inch. 4. For each panel, face mounted laminated nameplate inscribed with the panel name and tag number. Color shall be white with black letters 1/2 -inch high. Standard Light Colors and Inscriptions: Unless otherwise specified in individual equipment specifications, use the following color code and inscriptions: Tag Inseri tions Color ON ON Red OFF OFF Green OPEN OPEN Red CLOSED CLOSED Green LOW LOW Amber FAIL FAIL Amber HIGH HIGH Amber AUTO AUTO White MANUAL MANUAL Yellow PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS 409990-13 399884C.GN1 2.07 Tag Inscription(s) Color LOCAL LOCAL White REMOTE REMOTE Yellow FORWARD FORWARD Red REVERSE REVERSE Blue 1. Lettering: Black on white and amber lenses; white on red and green lenses. 2. Standard Pushbutton Colors and Inscriptions: a. Use following unless otherwise noted in Instrument List: Tag Function Inscri tions Color 00 ON Black OFF Black OC OPEN Black CLOSE Black OCA OPEN Black CLOSE Black AUTO Black OOA ON Black OFF Black AUTO Black MA MANUAL Black AUTO Black SS START Black STOP Black RESET RESET Black EMERGENCY EMERGENCY Red STOP STOP b. Lettering Color: 1) Black on white and yellow buttons. 2) White on black, red, and green buttons. ELECTRICAL SURGE AND TRANSIENT PROTECTION A. Equip control panels with surge -arresting devices to protect equipment from damage as a result of electrical transients induced in interconnecting lines from lightning discharges and nearby electrical devices. OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE PW/WBG/399884 CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409990-14 399884C.GN1 B. Suppressor Locations: 1. At point of connection between an equipment item, including ac powered transmitters, and power supply conductor (direct -wired equipment). 2. On analog pairs at each end when the pair travels outside of building. 3. In other locations where equipment sensitivity to surges and transients requires additional protection beyond that inherent to design of equipment. C. Suppressor Design: 1. Construction: First -stage, high-energy metal oxide varistor and second - stage, bipolar silicon avalanche device separated by series impedance; includes grounding wire, stud, or terminal. 2. Response: 5 nanoseconds maximum. 3. Recovery: Automatic. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees C to plus 85 degrees C. 5. Enclosure Mounted: Encapsulated inflame retardant epoxy. D. Suppressors on 120V ac Power Supply Connections: 1. Occurrences: Tested and rated for a minimum of 50 occurrences of IEEE C62.41 Category B test waveform. 2. First -Stage Clamping Voltage: 350 volts or less. 3. Second -Stage Clamping Voltage: 210 volts or less. E. Suppressors on Analog Signal Lines: 1. Test Waveform: Linear 8 -microsecond rise in current from 0 amps to a peak current value followed by an exponential decay of current reaching one-half the peak value in 20 microseconds. 2. Surge Rating: Tested and rated for 50 occurrences of 2,000 -amp peak test waveform. a. do Clamping Voltage: 20 percent to 40 percent above operating voltage for circuit. b. do Clamping Voltage Tolerance: Plus or minus 10 percent. C. Maximum Loop Resistance: 18 ohms per conductor. F. Manufacturers and Products: 1. EDCO or Critec; products listed below are based on EDCO. 2. Type DSS, for Discrete Inputs and Outputs: a. 120V ac discrete I/O, High density: 1) Weidmuller, SD150X. 2) Phoenix Contact. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS 40 99 90- 15 399884C.GNI G b. 24V do discrete I/O, High density. 1) Weidmuller, SD32X. 2) Phoenix Contact. 3. Type SS 1, for 120V ac Lines in panels: EDCO HSP -121. 4. Type SSI, for 120V ac power distribution from Racks: EDCO/ISLATROL RM- 115-1ORM. 5. Type SS2, for Analog Signals Lines: EDCO PC -642 series. 6. Type SS3, Field Mounted at Two -Wire Instruments, encapsulated in stainless steel pipe nipples: EDCO SS64 series. 7. Type SS4, Field Mounted at Four -Wire Instruments, with 120V ac protection and analog suppressor on signal lines, all in enclosure,. a. Enclosure: 1) NEMA 4X. 2) Maximum Size: 12 inches by 12 inches by 8 inches deep. b. Power Surge Suppressor: EDCO HSP -121. C. Analog Surge Suppressor: EDCO PC -642 series d. Manufacturer and Product: EDCO; SLAC series. 8. Type SSS, for CAT 5 and 6 lines in panels: EDCO CAT5-5POE series. 9. Type SS5, for CAT 5 and 6 lines in Racks: a. Dimensions: 1U, suitable for installation in 19 -inch rack. b. Locate connection point between patch panel and switch. C. Number of signal lines protected: Sixteen. d. EDCO RM-CAT6-16R. 10. Type SS6, Field Mounted for Instruments with Power and Ethernet Connections: With 120Vac suppressor and CAT6 suppressor all in a custom enclosure: a. Enclosure: NEMA 4X polycarbonate with window and quick release latches. 1) Nominal Size: 12 inches by 12 inches by 8 inches deep. 2) May be co -located in enclosure with media converters if applicable. b. Power Surge Suppressor: EDCO HSP -121. C. CAT 6 Surge Suppressor: EDCO CAT6-5POE series. Grounding: 1. Coordinate surge suppressor grounding in field panels and field instrumentation with suppressor manufacturer's requirements. 2. Provide control panels with an integral copper grounding bus for connection of suppressors and other required instrumentation. OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE PW/WBG/399884 CONTROL SYSTEMS JANUARY 12, 2015 409990-16 EIW-0'Lfl PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL POWER AND SIGNAL WIRING A. Restrain control and signal wiring in control panels by plastic ties or ducts. Secure hinge wiring at each end so bending or twisting will occur around the longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with a sleeve. B. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. Install abrasion protection for wire bundles passing through holes or across edges of sheet metal. C. Use manufacturer's recommended tool with sized anvil for crimp terminations. No more than one wire may be terminated in a single crimp lug. No more than two lugs may be installed on a single screw terminal. D. Do not splice or tap wiring except at device terminals or terminal blocks. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect enclosures and other equipment containing electrical, instrumentation and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion through the use of corrosion -inhibiting vapor capsules. B. During Work, periodically replace capsules in accordance with capsule manufacturer's recommendations. Replace capsules at Substantial Completion. 3.03 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplement listed below, following "END OF SECTION," is part of this Specification. 1. I&C Components. END OF SECTION PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OWNER FURNISHED PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS 409990-17 399884C.GN1 SUPPLEMENT: I&C COMPONENTS A. F4 Flow Element and Transmitter, Electromagnetic: 1. General: a. Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit the flow of a conductive process liquid in a full pipe. b. Type: 1) Electromagnetic flowmeter, with operation based on Faraday's Law, utilizing the pulsed do type coil excitation principle with high impedance electrodes. 2) Full bore meter with magnetic field traversing entire flow -tube cross section. 3) Unacceptable are insert magmeters or multiple single point probes inserted into a spool piece. C. Parts: Flow element, transmitter, interconnecting cables, and mounting hardware. Other parts as noted. 2. Service: a. Stream Fluid: 1) Water, unless otherwise noted. 2) Suitable for liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 micros/cm and for demineralized water with a minimum conductivity of 20 microS/cm. b. Flow Stream Descriptions: If and as described below. 3. Operating Temperature: a. Element: 1) Ambient: Minus 5 to 140 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise noted. 2) Process: Minus 5 to 140 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise noted. b. Transmitter: 1) Ambient: Minus 5 to 140 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise noted. 2) Storage: 15 to 120 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise noted. 4. Performance: a. Flow Range: As noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate for all flows resulting from pipe velocities of 2 to 30 feet per second. C. Turndown Ratio: Minimum of 10 to 1 when flow velocity at minimum flow is at least 1 foot per second. 5. Features: a. Zero stability feature to eliminate the need to stop flow to check zero alignment. b. No obstructions to flow. C. Very low pressure loss. PW/WBG/399884 I & C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 99 90 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 d. Measures bi-directional flow. 6. Process Connection: a. Meter Size (diameter inches): As noted. b. Connection Type: 150 -pound ANSI raised -face flanges; AWWA C207, Table 2 Class D; or wafer style depending on meter size, unless otherwise noted. C. Flange Material: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted. 7. Power (Transmitter): 120V ac, 60 -Hz, unless otherwise noted. 8. Element: a. Meter Tube Material: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. b. Liner Material: 1) Teflon, unless otherwise noted. 2) For potable water service, must have appropriate approvals. C. Liner Protectors: Covers (or grounding rings) on each end to protect liner during shipment. d. Electrode Type: Flush or bullet nose as recommended by the manufacturer for the noted stream fluid. e. Electrode Material: Type 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy C, unless otherwise noted. f. Grounding Ring: 1) Required, unless otherwise noted. 2) Quantity: Two, unless otherwise noted. 3) Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. g. Enclosure: NEMA 4Xunless otherwise noted. h. Submergence: 1) Temporary: If noted. 2) Continuous (up to 10 feet depth), NEMA 6P/IP68: If noted. i. Direct Buried (3 to 10 feet): If noted. j. Hazardous Area Certification: 1) Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D: If noted. 2) Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, and FM approved: If noted. 3) Class 1, Division 1, Groups C, D, and FM approved: If noted. 9. Transmitter: a. Mounting: Surface (wall), unless otherwise noted. b. Display: Required, unless otherwise noted. 1) Digital LCD display, indicating flow rate and total. 2) Bi-directional Flow Display: Required, unless otherwise noted. a) Forward and reverse flow rate. b) Forward, reverse and net totalization. I & C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 99 90 SUPPLMENT - 2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Parameter Adjustments: By keypad or non -intrusive means. d. Enclosure: NEMA 4Xunless otherwise noted. e. Minimum threshold velocity: 0.3 m/s, unless otherwise noted. f. Empty Pipe Detection: 1) If noted. 2) Drives display and outputs to zero when empty pipe detected. 10. Signal Interface (at Transmitter): a. Analog Output: 1) Isolated 4 mA to 20 mA do for load impedance from 0 ohm to at least 500 ohms minimum for 24V do supply. 2) Supports Superimposed Digital HART protocol: If noted. b. Discrete Outputs: If noted. 1) Two discrete outputs, typical, rated for up to 30 volts, typical. 2) Programmable as noted for the following typical parameters: Totalizer pulse, high/low flow rates, percent of range, empty pipe zero, fault conditions, forward/reverse, etc. C. Discrete Input: If noted. 1) Contact closure, configured as noted for the following typical parameters: reset totalizer, change range, hold output constant, drive output to zero, and low flow cutoff, etc. d. Other: As noted. 11. Cables: a. Types: As recommended by manufacturer. b. Lengths: As required to accommodate device locations. 12. Built-in Diagnostic System: a. Features: 1) Field programmable electronics. 2) Self -diagnostics with troubleshooting codes. 3) Ability to program electronics with full scale flow, engineering units, meter size, zero flow cutoff, desired signal damping, totalizer unit digit value, etc. 4) Initial flow tube calibration and subsequent calibration checks. 13. Factory Calibration: a. Calibrated in an ISO 9001 and NIST certified factory. b. Factory flow calibration system must be certified by volume or weight certified calibration devices. C. Factory flow calibration system shall be able to maintain calibration flow rate for at least 5 minutes for repeatability point checks. PW/WBG/399884 I & C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 99 90 SUPPLEMENT - 3 399884C.GN1 14. Factory Ready for Future In situ Verifications: If noted. a. Original meter parameter values available from vendor by request. 15. Accessories: a. In situ Verification System: If noted. 1) Quantity: One complete system provided for the Project. 2) Verifies quantitatively that the meter and signal converter's present condition is the same as originally manufactured. 3) Physical access to the flow -tube not required. 4) Meet standards established by the National Testing Laboratory. 5) Tests and stores over 50 -meter parameters related to primary coils, electrodes, interconnecting cable and signal converter. 6) Verification standard shall be plus or minus 1 percent of wet calibration for meters produced using the calibration verification service, or plus or minus 2 percent for standard meters. 7) Windows-based software. b. Primary Simulation System: If noted. 1) Quantity: One complete system provided for the Project. 2) Verifies proper operation of the signal converter by simulating the flow meter's output signal. a) Generates pulsed do excitation signal with a reference voltage of 70 mV. b) Generated signal ranges from 0 to 99 percent (0 to 32.8 feet per second) with a resolution of 0.1 percent. C) Switch selectable for forward, reverse and zero flow rate. 3) Verifies various input and output signals. 16. Manufacturers: a. Endress & Hauser, Inc. Flow Measuring System, Promag 50/53W (size: 1 to 78 inches). b. Yokogawa, Admag Model AXF. C. Or approved equal. B. F51 Flow Element and Transmitter, Thermal Mass Flow: 1. General: a. Function: Directly measure, indicate, and transmit mass flow of gas in pipe. I & C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 99 90 SUPPLMENT - 4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 b. Type: Single Point Insertion type, thermal dispersion detection probe using platinum resistance temperature detectors (RTD). C. Parts: Elements, transmitter, and interconnecting cable. 2. Performance: a. Process Gas: Oxygen. d. Range for Air at 70 Degrees F and 14.7 psia: As noted. e. Calibrated Span: Plus or minus 0.75 percent of reading, plus or minus 0.5 percent full scale. f. Accuracy: 1) Flow: Plus or minus one percent of full scale. g. Repeatability: 1) Flow: Plus or minus 0.2 percent of reading. h. Temperature, Operating: 1) Flow Element: Minus 0 degrees C to 50 degrees C, unless otherwise noted. 2) Transmitter Housing: 0 degree F to plus 150 degrees F. i. Pressure, Operating, Flow Element: 1) Mid -flow: 7 psia minimum required. 2) High-flow: 3.5 psia minimum required. 17. Flow Element: a. Features: 1) Insertion Length: As noted or manufacturer's recommendation. 2) Wetted Surfaces Materials: 316 Stainless Steel. b. Process Connection: 1) Line Size: As noted or shown. 2) Connection Type: 0.75 -inch Male NPT stainless steel compression fitting, unless otherwise noted. 3) Connection Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. C. Sensor Enclosure: 1) Type: Aluminum, NEMA 4X, rated for Classes 1 and 2, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D, E, F, G, and Eexd IIC; unless otherwise noted. 18. Transmitter: a. Features: 2 -inch by 2 -inch LCD, keypad programmable. b. Nonvolatile memory. C. Signal Interface: 1) Outputs: a) Analog: Linear 4 mA to 20 mA for maximum 500 ohm load, unless otherwise noted. b) Discrete: (1) RS -232 Interface. (2) RS -485 interface optional. d. Power: 1) Selectable: 115V ac, 230V ac, 24V dc. PW/WBG/399884 I & C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 99 90 SUPPLEMENT - 5 399884C.GN1 e. Electrical Connection: 0.5 -inch NPT. f. Transmitter Enclosure: 1) Type: Fiberglass NEMA 4X, unless otherwise noted. 2) Mounting: Remote from sensor. g. Single factory calibration, unless otherwise noted. 19. Cables: a. Length: As required. b. Cable Jacket: PVC rated for 220 degrees F, unless otherwise noted. 20. Manufacturer and Product: Sierra Instruments, SmartTrak 100 or approved equal. C. M30 Horn: 1. General: a. Function: Audible alarm. Produces sound by electro -mechanical vibration of a diaphragm. b. Suitable for installation in hazardous areas. 2. Performance: a. Temperature, Operating: Minus 65 degrees F to 150 degrees F. b. Sound Output Level: 100 dB nominal at 10 feet (110 dB at 1 meter). 3. Features: a. Dimensions: 7.63 inches in height, 6.5 inches in diameter and depth, for horn and enclosure. b. Body: Die-cast zinc. C. Coating: Red powder coat paint. d. Diaphragm: Stainless steel. e. Projector: None, unless otherwise noted. f. Listings: UL, cUL listed, FM, CSA approved. g. Classification Rating: Class 1, Division 1, Groups C & D; Class 2, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; Class 3 4. Enclosure: a. Type: Cast aluminum with IP66, NEMA 4X housing. b. Mounting: Surface mount. C. Conduit tap size: 3/4 -inch 5. Power:24VDC. 6. Manufacturer: Federal Signal Corp.; Model FHEX or approved equal. D. M31 Beacon: 1. General: a. Function: Visual alarm. b. Suitable for installation in hazardous areas. C. Type: Rotating reflector or flashing bulb. d. Parts: Light and spare bulbs. I & C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 99 90 SUPPLMENT - 6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2. Performance: a. Temperature, Operating: Minus 35 degrees F to 190 degrees F. b. Flash Rate: Nominally 90 per minute. 3. Features: a. Dome: Polycarbonate. b. Dome Color: Amber, unless otherwise noted. C. Lamp Life: 10,000 hours. d. Lamp: Incandescent/25 watts. 4. Enclosure: a. Type: IP66 (NEMA 4X). b. Mounting: 1/2 -inch pipe, unless otherwise noted. C. Listing: UL listed, CSA certified. d. Classification Rating: Class 1, Division 1, Groups C & D; Class 2, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; Class 3 5. Power: 24VDC, 4 -wire. 6. Spare Bulbs: Provide two for each light. 7. Manufacturers: Federal Signal; Model 154XST or approved equal. E. P3 Pressure Differential Transmitter: 1. General: a. Function: 1) Measure differential pressure. 2) Transmit signal proportional to either differential pressure or square root of differential pressure, as applicable. b. Type: 1) Electronic variable capacitance or silicon strain gauge. 2) Two -wire transmitter; "smart electronics". C. Parts: Transmitter and accessories. 2. Performance: a. Range: As noted. 1) Select transmitter's factory upper range limit (URL) such that upper boundary of noted range is as close as possible to 80 percent of factory URL, but does not exceed it. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.10 percent of span, unless otherwise noted. C. Ambient Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F, with integral meter. d. Process Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F. e. Humidity: 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. f. Hazardous Location Certifications: If and as noted. 3. Features: a. Linear or square -root output, user -configurable. b. Factory preconfigure for square root output if transmitter tagged as "FT" or "FIT". PW/WBG/399884 I & C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 99 90 SUPPLEMENT - 7 399884C.GN1 F. P4 Pressure Gauge: 1. General: a. Function: Local pressure indication. b. Type: Bourdon tube element. I & C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 99 90 SUPPLMENT - 8 JANUARY 12, 2015 C. Adjustable damping. d. LCD indicator, unless otherwise noted. 1) Display in either percent or engineering units, field configurable. e. Wetted Metallic Parts: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 1) Includes drain/vent valves; process flanges and adapters, and process isolating diaphragm. f. Wetted O -Rings: Glass -filled TFE, graphite -filled PTFE, or Viton, unless otherwise noted. g. Bolts and Nuts (if required): Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. h. Fill Fluid: Silicone, unless otherwise noted. 4. Process Connections: a. Line Size: 1/2 inch. b. Connection Type: FNPT. C. Direct/remote Diaphragm Seal: If and as noted. 5. Signal Interface: a. 4 mA to 20 mA do output with digital signal based on HART protocol, unless otherwise noted below. 1) Nominal Maximum Loop Resistance with External 24V do Power Supply: 550 ohms. b. FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol: If noted. C. Profibus: If noted. 6. Enclosure: a. Type: NEMA 4X. b. Materials: Coated aluminum, unless otherwise noted. C. Mounting bracket, unless otherwise noted. 1) Bracket and Accessories: Stainless steel; suitable for mounting transmitter to panel or 2 -inch pipe. 7. Accessories: a. Three-valve manifold, unless otherwise noted. 1) Includes one equalization and two isolation valves. 2) Type 316 stainless steel. 8. Manufacturers and Products: a. Rosemount; Model 3051 CD. b. Foxboro; Model IDP 10. C. SMAR; LD30XD Series. d. Or approved equal. P4 Pressure Gauge: 1. General: a. Function: Local pressure indication. b. Type: Bourdon tube element. I & C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 99 90 SUPPLMENT - 8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2. Performance: a. Scale Range: As noted. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of full scale. 3. Features: a. Dial: 4 -1/2 -inch diameter. b. Case Material: Black thermoplastic, unless otherwise noted. C. Materials of Wetted Parts (including element, socket/process connection, throttling device (if specified) and secondary components): 1) Stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. d. Pointer: Adjustable by removing ring and window. e. Window: Glass or acrylic, unless otherwise noted. f. Threaded reinforced polypropylene front ring. g. Case Type: Solid front with blow-out back. 4. Process Connection: a. Mounting: Lower stem, unless otherwise noted. b. Size: 1/2 -inch MNPT, unless otherwise noted. 5. Accessories: a. Throttling Device: Required, unless otherwise noted. 1) Type suitable for the intended service. 2) Install in gauge socket bore. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Ashcroft; Duragauge Model 1259/Model, 1279/Model, 1279 PLUS! b. Ametek U.S. Gauge; Solfrunt Model 19XX/1981Advantatge. C. WIKA, Type 2XX.34. d. Or approved equal. G. P6 Pressure Seal, Diaphragm: 1. General: a. Function: Isolate sensing element from process fluid. b. Type: 1) Diaphragm. 2) Fluid filled between diaphragm and sensing element. 2. Service: a. Pressure: Same as associated sensor. b. Temperature Range: If noted. 3. Performance: a. Pressure: 1) For threaded process connections, at least 2,500 psig at 100 degrees F. 2) Halocarbon Fill, unless otherwise noted. b. Temperature: 1) Dependent upon fill fluid. a) Glycerin (food grade): Zero to 400 degrees F. PW/WBG/399884 I & C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 99 90 SUPPLEMENT - 9 399884C.GN1 b) Silicone: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 600 degrees F. c) Silicone (food grade): Zero to 375 degrees F. d) Halocarbon: Minus 70 degrees F to 300 degrees F. 4. Features: a. Materials: 1) Lower Housing: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 2) Diaphragm Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 3) Top Housing: Steel, unless otherwise noted. b. Diaphragm: Welded to upper housing, unless otherwise noted. C. Filling screw in upper housing. d. Fill Fluid: 1) As noted. 2) Or approved equal. 3) Factory assembled and filled. e. Flushing Connection: 1/4 -inch NPT in lower housing. f. Diaphragm Seal Displacement: 0.1 cubic inch, nominal. 5. Connections: a. Instrument: 1/2 -inch female NPT, unless otherwise noted or shown. b. Process: 1/2 -inch female NPT, unless otherwise noted or shown. 6. Manufacturers: a. Ashcroft; Type 201. b. Ametek; Mansfield and Green Division; Type SG. C. WIKA; Type L990.10. d. Or approved equal. H. P9 Pressure Transmitter: 1. General: a. Function: Measure pressure and transmit signal proportional to pressure. b. Type: 1) Electronic variable capacitance or silicon strain gauge. 2) Two -wire transmitter; "smart electronics". C. Parts: Transmitter and accessories. 2. Performance: a. Range: As noted. 1) Select transmitter's factory upper range limit (URL) such that upper boundary of noted range is as close as possible to 80 percent of factory URL, but does not exceed it. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.075 percent of span, unless otherwise noted. C. Ambient Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F, with integral meter. I & C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 99 90 SUPPLMENT - 10 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 1. General: a. Function: Measure temperature of process fluid and transmit analog signal proportional to temperature. b. Type: RTD. C. Parts: Element, thermowell, and transmitter. PW/WBG/399884 I & C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 99 90 SUPPLEMENT - 11 d. Process Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F. e. Humidity: 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. f. Hazardous Location Certifications: If and as noted. 3. Features: a. Type: Gauge pressure, unless otherwise noted. b. Adjustable damping. C. LCD indicator, unless otherwise noted. 1) Display in either percent or engineering units, field configurable. d. Wetted Metallic Parts: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 1) Includes drain/vent valves; process flanges and adapters, and process isolating diaphragm. e. Wetted O -Rings: Glass filled TFE, graphite filled PTFE, or Viton, unless otherwise noted. f. Bolts and Nuts (if required): Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. g. Fill Fluid: Silicone, unless otherwise noted. 4. Process Connections: a. Line Size: 1/2 inch. b. Connection Type: FNPT. C. Direct/remote Diaphragm Seal: If and as noted. 5. Signal Interface: a. 4mA to 20 mA do output b. FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol: If noted. C. Profibus: If noted. 6. Enclosure: a. Type: NEMA 4X. b. Materials: Coated aluminum, unless otherwise noted. C. Mounting bracket, unless otherwise noted. 1) Bracket and Accessories: Stainless steel; suitable for mounting transmitter to panel or 2 -inch pipe. 7. Accessories: a. Two -valve (isolate and vent) Stainless Steel Manifold: If noted. 8. Manufacturers and Products: a. Gauge Pressure Units: Yokogawa, EJA 530A. b. Or approved equal. I. T3 Temperature Element and Transmitter, Resistance: 1. General: a. Function: Measure temperature of process fluid and transmit analog signal proportional to temperature. b. Type: RTD. C. Parts: Element, thermowell, and transmitter. PW/WBG/399884 I & C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 99 90 SUPPLEMENT - 11 399884C.GN1 2. Service: a. Process Fluid: As noted. b. Process Temperature Range: As noted. 3. Element: a. Type: 1) Single element, unless otherwise noted. 2) Three -wire, RTD. 3) Platinum, 100 ohm nominal at 0 degree C. b. Performance: 1) Sensor Accuracy for 900 degrees F and Below: Plus or minus 0.5 degree F or plus or minus 0.25 percent of reading, whichever is larger. C. Features: 1) Dimensions (bare element): 1/4 -inch diameter. 2) Length to accommodate thermowell insertion and extension length. 3) Spring-loaded element when thermowell is used. 4) Sheath: a) Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. b) Process Operating Temperature Range: Minus 320 degrees F to 900 degrees F, unless otherwise noted. 5) Terminal Connection Head: a) General purpose, NEMA 4 weatherproof, unless otherwise noted. b) Maximum Ambient Temperature: 220 degrees F, unless otherwise noted. 6) Thermowell Connection: Union coupler, stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 7) Sensitive Length: 1.6 -inch minimum, measured from closed end. 4. Thermowell: a. Features: 1) Inside Diameter: Sized to match thermocouple. 2) Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted. 3) Insertion Length: As noted. 4) Extension Length: 3 inches, unless otherwise noted. b. Process Connection: 1 -inch NPT connection, unless otherwise noted. C. Well Type: Threaded straight, unless otherwise noted. 5. Transmitter: a. Ambient Operation Conditions: 1) Temperature: Minus 20 degrees F to 158 degrees F, with display. 2) Relative Humidity: 0 to 100 percent, noncondensing. b. Type: Two -wire, powered by remote power supply. I & C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 99 90 SUPPLMENT - 12 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Performance: 1) Digital Accuracy: Greater of plus or minus 0.09 degree F or plus or minus 0.01 percent of span. 2) Response Time: 1.2 second 90 percent response time for 80 percent input step, with minimum damping. d. Electrical Safety: Standard unless otherwise noted. e. Features: 1) Indicator: Three -line LCD, unless otherwise noted. 2) Automatic reference junction compensation. 3) Failsafe Mode: a) User configurable ON, unless otherwise noted. b) Downscale, unless otherwise noted. 4) Electric Damping: 1.2 seconds. f. Signal Interface: 4 mA to 20 mA dc. g. Power: 24V do external power supply. h. Enclosure: 1) Materials: Epoxy -coated, low -copper aluminum, unless otherwise noted. 2) Type: NEMA 4X. 3) Mounting: Wall, pipe stand, or integral to thermowell, as noted. a) For pipe stand, provide stainless steel mounting set, unless otherwise noted. b) For integral thermowell mount, provide explosion - proof connection. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Invensys/Foxboro; RTT20 Series Transmitter with PR Series RTD and T -Series Thermowell. b. Rosemount; 78 Series Platinum RTD with Thermowell and Model 644H Transmitter. C. Or approved equal. J. Y81 Industrial Network Layer 2 Switch, Ethernet, DIN Rail: 1. General: a. Full compliance with IEEE 802.3. b. Supports Ethernet/Fast Ethernet 10/100BASE-TX and l 00BASE-FX. C. Layer 2 software. d. Provide network switching for up to 8 Ethernet ports within a single chassis. e. Network Topology: Ring or star. f. Redundancy: Real -Time -Ring or Rapid Spanning Tree. PW/WBG/399884 I & C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 99 90 SUPPLEMENT - 13 399884C.GN1 2. Ports: a. 10/100BASE-TX: 1) Up to 12 SFP. b. 100BASE-FX: Up to 12 multimode or singlemode FC/SFP. C. 10/100/1000BASE-TX: 2 ports. d. 1000BASE-LX: Up to 4 multimode or singlemode FC/SFP. 3. Management: Serial interface, web interface, SNMP vl, v2, with SNMPv3 for security. 4. Diagnostics: a. LEDs (Power, Link Status, Data, Fault, redundancy manager, ring -port, LED test). b. Log File. C. RMON (statistics, history alarms, events). d. Port mirroring. e. Topology discover 802.1 ab. 5. Configuration: Command Line Interface (CLI), TELNET, BootP, DHCP Option 82, HIDiscovery, Auto configuration adapter (ACA21-USB). 6. Security: a. Port security (MAC based and IP based). b. SNMP V3 authentication & encryption. 7. Other Services: a. QoS 4 queues, port prioritization (IEEE 802.1D/p), VLAN (802.1 Q). b. Multicast (IGMP Snooping/Queier). C. Broadcast limiter. d. Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x SNTP). 8. Redundancy: a. Real -Time -Ring or Rapid Spanning Tree. (ring structure). b. RSTP. C. Redundant net -/ring coupling. d. Dual Homing. e. Redundant 24 -volt power supply. 9. Physical Characteristics: a. DIN -rail mountable. b. Operating Temperature: -10 degrees C to 60 degrees C. C. Input Power: Redundant, 24V dc, 3-15 W. d. Protection Class: IP20. 10. IEC 60068-2-27 Shock: 15g, 11 ms duration, 18 shocks. 11. IEC 60068-2-6 Vibration: a. 1 mm, 2 to 13.2 -Hz, 90 minutes. b. 0.7g, 13.2 to 100 -Hz, 90 minutes. C. 3.5 mm, 3 to 9 -Hz, 10 cycles, 1 octave/minute. d. Ig, 9 to 150 -Hz, 10 cycles, 1 octave/minute. I & C COMPONENTS PW/WBG/399884 40 99 90 SUPPLMENT - 14 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 12. Approvals: UL 508. 13. Manufacturer and Product: a. Y81 C: Sixnet EL212F. b. Or approved equal. END OF SUPPLEMENT PW/WBG/399884 I & C COMPONENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 40 99 90 SUPPLEMENT - 15 SECTION 44 42 56.04 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES 399884C.GN1 A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 1. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): a. 9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. b. 11, Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, and 150. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot - Wrought, Special Quality. 4. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS): a. 11.6, Submersible Pump Test. b. 14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code. b. 497, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas. 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall conform to ratings and nomenclature of Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly. 2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction, including cable seal details. PW\WBG\399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 44 42 56.04 - 1 399884C.GN1 3. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at guarantee point. 4. For variable speed motors, provide variable speed curves for every 50 rpm over the operational range. 5. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. 6. Motor data, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 20 00, Low -Voltage AC Induction Motors. 7. Adjustable frequency drive data, in accordance with the requirements of Section 44 42 56.18, Ozone Disinfection System. 8. Factory -finish system. 9. L-10 bearing life calculations per ABMA. 10. If required, wiring for motor protection module. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 2. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 3. Factory and Field Performance Test Reports. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, that factory finish system meets requirements specified herein. 5. Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of year and 5 years. Include list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information. 6. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 0178 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 8. Manufacturer's Equipment Installation Reports, in accordance with Section 0191 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. 1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish for this set of pumps: 1. One set mechanical seals. 2. One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\WBG\399884 44 42 56.04 - 2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Submersible, vertical shaft, centrifugal nonclog type, for pumping wastewater. B. Designed for continuous operation under submerged or partially submerged conditions, and intermittent operation when totally dry without damage to pump or motor. C. Where adjustable speed drives are required, furnish a coordinated operating system complete with pump, drive, and speed controller. D. Pumps furnished under this section to be provided by a single manufacturer. 2.02 SUPPLEMENTS A. Specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Equipment consists of pump complete with motor, control system, guide rail, anchoring brackets, base elbow, power cable, and pump lifting cable and control panel and level switches. B. Characteristics: 1. Motor and rotating parts shall be removable from motor end of pump. 2. Mating surfaces to be watertight and fitted with nitrile O -rings. 3. Pumps fitted with dynamically balanced nonclog impellers designed to pass course solids and stringy materials. C. Lifting Arrangement: 1. Stainless steel chain, 2 feet minimum, and one "grip -eye." 2. Attach chain permanently to pump and access platform with stainless steel wire rope. 3. "Grip -eye" capable of being threaded over and engaging links of stainless steel chain so pump and motor may be lifted with "grip -eye" and independent hoist. PW\WBG\399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 44 42 56.04 - 3 399884C.GN1 D. Sliding Guide Bracket: 1. Integral part of pump unit. 2. Pump unit to be guided by no less than two stainless steel guide bars to permit raising and lowering of pump. The bars shall be of adequate length to extend from the lower guide holder on the pump discharge connection to the upper guide bracket at walkway level. Guide bars shall be 2 -inch or 3 -inch, Schedule 40, Type 304 stainless steel pipe, as recommended by the pump manufacturer. Guide brackets, including intermediate guide brackets, shall be hot -dip galvanized steel or Type 304 stainless steel. Guide bars and brackets shall be provided by the Contractor. E. Motor nameplate horsepower not to be exceeded at head -capacity point on pump curve. F. Pump motor and sensor cables shall be suitable for submersible pump application and cable sizing shall conform to NFPA 70 specifications for pump motors. Cables shall be of sufficient length to reach junction boxes without strain or splicing. G. Motor Protection Module: If required, provide pump with a motor protection module for remote mounting. Contract Drawings are based on first named submersible pump manufacturer and motor protection module. If pump and motor protection module other than first named manufacturer is provided, provide revised wiring for the motor protection module. H. Cable Entry System: 1. Junction chamber and motor separated by stator lead sealing gland or terminal board that prevents foreign material entering through pump top. 2. Utilize cable with factory -installed sealing gland with nonshrink epoxy seal system. 3. O-ring compression seal between sealing gland and cable entry point shall also be acceptable. 2.04 CONTROL PANEL A. NEMA 3R enclosure, for outdoor duty. B. Free standing, post mounted. C. Features: 1. Main circuit breaker disconnect interlocked with panel door. 2. Combination circuit breaker type, NEMA rated motor starters. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\WBG\399884 44 42 56.04 - 4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. Fused control power transformer, 120V ac. 4. Alternator and pump lead -lag controls. 5. ON/OFF/AUTO switches. 6. Running lights. 7. Normally closed, dry, 5 amps at 120V ac contacts for remote indication of: a. Low level alarm. b. Pump failure (temperature or moisture alarm). 8. Terminal strip for interfacing with external wiring. 9. High temperature indication. 10. Moisture alarm indication. 11. Alarm (high temperature, moisture, or low level) beacon located on top of panel. 12. Lightning protection. 13. Intrinsically safe relays as required for UL validation. 14. Alarm silence button. 15. Document pocket located inside panel with pump and panel operation and maintenance manual, and separate laminated pump curve. 16. 110 -volt, duplex GFI outlet, weather -protected, and accessible from outside of panel. 17. Run hour meter. 18. 100 watts minimum, condensation heater with thermostat. 19. UL listing mark. D. Prewired and factory tested. E. Mount control switches, indicating lights, and switches on hinged front panel. F. Single Feed: 480 volts, three-phase. G. This panel also includes PLC hardware for additional requirements. See Section 44 42 56.18, Ozone Disinfection System. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Equipment Identification Plate: 16 -gauge stainless steel with 1/4 -inch die - stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible location. B. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Coat in accordance with Section 09 90 04, Painting. 2.06 FACTORY FINISHING A. Prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 04, Painting. PW\WBG\399884 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.04 - 5 399884C.GN1 2.07 PART 3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Control Panel: 1. Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function. 2. Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all control panels actually furnished. 3. Additional testing requirements as specified in Section 44 42 56.18, Ozone Disinfection System. B. Submersible Motor Functional Test: In accordance with HIS 11.6. EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Mount the discharge elbow to the floor of the wetwell floor with stainless steel bolts. C. Connect piping without imposing strain to flanges. D. No portion of pump shall bear directly on floor of sump. 3.02 FIELD FINISHING A. Equipment as specified in Section 09 90 04, Painting. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Functional Test: Conduct on each pump. 1. Test for continuous 3 -hour period. B. Pump Test: 1. General: a. Conduct on each pump provided. b. Conduct in accordance with HIS 11.6. 2. Routine Production Tests: a. Check impeller, motor rating and electrical connections for compliance to specification. b. Test motor and cable insulation for moisture content and insulation defects. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\WBG\399884 44 42 56.04 - 6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. Prior to submergence, run pump dry to establish correct rotation and mechanical integrity. d. Conduct abbreviated three-point operational performance test. e. After operational performance test, perform insulation test again. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by Owner, for minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: 1. 1 person -day for installation assistance and inspection. 2. 1 person -day for functional and performance testing and completion of Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 3. 1/2 person -day for prestartup classroom or Site training. B. See Section 0191 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup. 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are part of this Specification. 1 PW\WBG\399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 Data Sheets: Pump and Motor. END OF SECTION SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 44 42 56.04 - 7 399884C.GN1 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.04 - Tag Numbers: P-08-54-01 P-08-54-02 P-08-54-03 Pump Name: Liquid Supply Pumps Manufacturer and Model Number: SERVICE CONDITIONS (1) KSB (2) K 100-401/354XG-S Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): Filter Effluent. Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 68 Max 95 Min 40 Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1.0 Viscosity Range: 1.08E-5 ft2/s pH: 6-9 Abrasive (Y/N) N Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N Minimum diameter solid pump can pass (inches) 2 Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 19.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 1,100 Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 121 Min. Rated Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 72.3% Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): Constant (Y/N): 1750 rpm Adjustable (Y/N): Y DESIGN AND MATERIALS Pump Type: Heavy -Duty Nonclog (Y/N) Y Other: Volute Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Pump Casing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Motor Housing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Wear Rings Case (Y/N): Y Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Wear Ring Impeller (Y/N): N Material: PW\WBG\399884 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.04 SUPPLEMENT - 1 399884C.GN1 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.04 - Tag Numbers: P-08-54-01 P-08-54-02 P-08-54-03 Pump Name: Liquid Supply Pumps Elastomers: Nitrile Rubber Fasteners: Stainless Steel Impeller: Type: Double -Shrouded Non -Clog (Y/N): Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Shaft Material: Stainless Steel ASTM A276 Base Elbow: Cast Iron ASTM A48 Double Mechanical Seal (Y/N): DRIVE MOTOR Horsepower: 46.3 Voltage: 480 Phase:3 Enclosure: Other: Bearing Life (Hrs): Synchronous Speed (rpm): Adjustable Speed Drive Range: _1050 min to 1750 max, See Section 26 20 00 Low Voltage AC Induction Motors Other Features: Moisture Detection Switches (Y/N): Thermal Protection Embedded in Windings (Y/N): REMARKS: SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS PW\WBG\399884 44 42 56.04 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JANUARY 12, 2015 SECTION 44 42 56.18 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 399884C.GN1 A. Scope: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide an ozone disinfection system installed complete and fully functional as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The ozone disinfection equipment as specified herein shall be an integrated system of component equipment furnished by the Owner (from the System Supplier) and equipment furnished by the Contractor. The System Supplier shall arrange for the shipment and delivery to the jobsite of all components specified herein that comprise the ozone disinfection system and provide services as called for herein. C. The ozone disinfection system shall be comprised of oxygen concentration, ozone generation, chillers, ozone dissolution and injection equipment and ozone destruct units along with appurtenant equipment, instrumentation and controls necessary to enable the system to satisfactorily and reliably function to meet the design intent. Furnish all control panels and field instruments as shown on P&ID Drawings, and specified in Sections 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Control for Process System, and 40 99 90, Owner -Furnished Package Control Systems. All electrical requirements are shown on the electrical Drawings. D. The overall dimensions of the components and sub -assemblies comprising the ozone disinfection system shall permit its installation in the space provided where shown on the Drawings including all appurtenances specified herein. E. The ozone disinfection system shall be designed to disinfect wastewater that has received secondary treatment and tertiary (sand) filtration. F. The ozone disinfection system installed by the Contractor shall effectively and reliably disinfect plant effluent flows in compliance with applicable regulatory requirements prior to discharge to State waters. G. Coordination: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all of the following: a. Installation of ozone disinfection system equipment and materials furnished by the Owner, including instrumentation and control equipment. PW/WBG/399884 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.18 - 1 399884C.GN1 b. Supply and installation of buried and exposed piping and valves as specified and as shown on the Drawings. C. Cutting, welding, fitting and finishing field fabricated piping. d. Supply and installation of flange gaskets and bolts for piping components. e. Supply and installation of pipe supports. f. Supply and installation of equipment and materials not provided by the Owner but required for the ozone disinfection system to properly function. g. Supply and installation of insulation and freeze protection for tanks and piping where shown on the Drawings and as required by the ozone disinfection system equipment. h. Provide all labor, materials, supplies and utilities as required for startup, adjustment and performance testing with the exception of lab facilities, analytical work and chemicals which will be furnished by the Owner. i. Provide all lubricants and other supplies required for equipment startup and adjustment. j. Provide and install anchor bolts and mounting hardware for equipment and piping. k. Provide and install all piping required to connect to and interconnect between the equipment furnished by the Owner. 1. Provide all piping, pipe reducers and fittings from the liquid supply pumps to the equipment furnished by the Owner, including pump guide bars and brackets and supports for pump removal. In. Provide all grating, floor plate, handrailing, and platforms as shown and as required to meet applicable safety requirements. n. Provide a portable hoist and winch constructed of series 300 stainless steel for the retrieval and removal of liquid supply pumps that serve the ozone dissolution and injection system. o. Supply and install all motor control centers, motor starters, panels and transformers as required to enable the ozone disinfection system to function as part of the work under Division 26, Electrical, and shown on the electrical Drawings. p. Supply and/or installation of all necessary equipment and services not listed herein, but required to enable the ozone disinfection system to function in a satisfactory manner. q. Provide and install all conduit and wiring to the instrumentation specified herein, and shown on the electrical Drawings. r. Provide power supply to the liquid supply pumps via the variable frequency drive units, part of MCP -08 supplied by the Owner S. Provide and install power to the master control panel described herein. 2. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation and timing of all interface and tie-in points such as piping and electrical tie-ins with the plant staff in advance of the installation. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. If the ozone disinfection system equipment requires an arrangement that differs from that shown on the Drawings or as specified, the Contractor shall submit for review all necessary changes and special features of the equipment that are being proposed. Such changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all required modifications to the ozone disinfection system so that units and interconnections are compatible. Such modifications shall be made subject to the approval of the Engineer, and at no additional cost to the Owner. Equipment shall be designed and provided in accordance with the Specifications herein. 5. The System Supplier shall prepare shop drawings, system installation drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, anchorage templates and instructions, interconnecting diagrams, P&IDs and other data required for a complete and fully integrated system as shown on the Drawings and described herein for approval, to assist Contractor. H. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Division 3, Concrete. 2. Division 5, Metal Fabrications. 3. Division 5, Metal Railings. 4. Division 9, Painting. 5. Division 40, All Sections Related to Piping and Valves, Instrumentation and Controls. 6. Division 26, Electrical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with all Federal, State and local ordinances, as well as applicable codes, standards, regulations and/or regulatory agency requirements including the listing below: 1. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA). 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 6. American Welding Society (AWS). 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 8. National Electric Code (NEC). 9. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 11. Underwriter's Laboratory (UL). 12. Instrument Society of America (ISA). PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-3 399884C.GN1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements. B. Submittal binders for equipment and materials comprising the ozone disinfection system shall be clearly marked and tabbed to coincide with the outline of specifications provided herein. C. For any modification of the ozone disinfection system (based on the details herein and on the Drawings) that is proposed, the System Supplier shall submit a certificate that is signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer, licensed in the State of Arkansas, indicating that the proposed revision will: 1. Be equivalent to the specified item(s). 2. Function in compliance with the specified requirements of the ozone disinfection system. D. Submit for approval complete, detailed shop drawings and descriptions of the proposed ozone disinfection equipment and materials, including but not limited to the following: General: a. Submit complete general arrangement drawings of each component and sub -assembly, including equipment platform or skid and piping connections showing dimensions provided by the System Supplier using a scale not less than 1/4 -inch equals 1 foot. b. Submit a letter stating that the equipment and materials to be provided meets or exceeds the process requirements and design conditions of these Specifications. C. Submit installation drawings showing key details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. d. Submit descriptive literature, technical data and catalog cut sheets of the proposed equipment. e. Submit data on the characteristics, features and performance of each ozone disinfection system component and sub -assembly. f. Submit electrical connection and wiring diagrams and schematics identifying and describing all items required for operation of the system. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 g. Submit detailed data on the liquid supply pumps, including name of manufacturer, type and model, number of pumps to be furnished, variable frequency drive data and manufacturer, design operating point and rotation speed, size of pump discharge, type and ratings of bearings, net weight of pump, overall pump dimensions, performance curves showing capacity, head, NPSH requirements, efficiency, motor horsepower requirements, including voltage, phase, current and power factor, shaft diameter, type of pump seal, anchor bolt layout and data on painting system. Submit harmonic distortion calculations as specified to show that estimated current and voltage distortion at the specified point meets the specified limits. h. Submit detailed data on the ozone dissolution saturation vessel, including name of manufacturer, number of vessels to be furnished, materials of construction, dimensions, capacity, pressure rating, certifications, flanged nozzle sizes and locations, net weight of vessel when empty and fully charged with fluid and gas. i. Submit details of the ozone generators, including name of manufacturer, type and model, number of ozone generators to be furnished, materials of construction, type of enclosure, number, location and size of pipe connections, ozone output and output control, total number, type and description of ozone production cells, water coolant flow required for necessary heat transfer, power requirements, including voltage, phase, current and power factor, overall dimensions, net weight of equipment, anchor bolt locations, instrumentation provided and their respective range, PLC and user interface, overall performance data and the coating system. For each ozone generator panel, submit harmonic distortion calculations as specified to show that the estimated current and voltage distortion at the specified point meets the specified limits. j. Submit details of the chillers, including manufacturer and model, number of units to be furnished, refrigerant, overall dimensions and unit weight, number, location and size of pipe connections, evaporator information, condenser information, integrated pump information, overall performance, including cooling capacity, power requirements for compressor, fan and pump, accessories provided with each unit, field wiring diagram, electrical schematic, anchor bolt location, and details of coating system. PW/WBG/399884 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.18 - 5 399884C.GN1 k. Submit details of the oxygen concentrators (generators) and oxygen buffer tank, including manufacturer and model, overall dimensions, number of units to be furnished, unit weight, type of enclosure and materials of construction, details of the reversible blower, including inlet and exhaust flange size, motor size, details of the resin type and chamber, details of the gas compressor, size of tank and type of controls, oxygen production rate, oxygen purity, output pressure, operating temperature, power requirement for the blower and compressor, materials of construction, sizes and location of inlet and outlet pipe connections, net weight, overall dimensions, details of anchorage and data on coating system. 1. Submit details of the ozone destruct units, including manufacturer, model, materials of construction, capacity, efficiency, inlet and outlet connections, temperature requirements, maximum ozone concentration and pressure drop, heater and blower details, electrical requirements and control information. M. Submit details of all motors furnished, including name of manufacturer, type and model, type of bearings and lubrication, horsepower rating, power factor, NEMA designation, temperature rating, rotating speed, net weight, efficiency at full load and rated conditions, full load current, locked rotor current, shaft diameter, overall dimensions. All motors shall comply with the requirements of Division 26, Electrical. n. Submit details of each and every instrument being furnished as part of the ozone disinfection system, including name of manufacturer, sensing range, accuracy, process connections and electrical requirements. Refer to Specification Sections 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Control for Process System, and 40 99 90, Owner -Furnished Package Control Systems. o. Submit details of each valve type being furnished as part of the ozone disinfection system, including manufacturer, valve type, materials of construction, size, connections, function and type of operator, p. Submit electrical schematics, panel layouts, wiring diagrams and product data sheets for all electrical equipment supplied. q. Submit certification and qualifications of pipe welders, including experience and certification using TIG process. E. Master Control Panel (MCP), Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) Field Panel and Programming: MCP and PLCs will be furnished by the Owner (from the System Supplier) and installed as a part of the work under Division 26, Electrical. Furnish control panels MCP -08 and FP -08-01 as shown and specified. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 6 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2. Programming Coordination: a. All programming of the PLCs shall be performed by the equipment manufacturer's programmers under the direction of the System Supplier to ensure a fully functional, integrated and properly operating system. 1) Provide all data needed by the ozone disinfection system (i.e. operator input, run status, etc.). 2) Provide all data output from the ozone disinfection system (i.e. alarm, system running, etc.). 3) Provide operator interface (OI) screen requirements needed to monitor and control the ozone disinfection system from the plant control system. 4) System integration of the ozone disinfection control system with plant SCADA system is not included in the Project. However the Submittal on PLC shall include SCADA data exchange table as specified. At a minimum, supply all data from the ozone process local control panels and field I/O as accessible data to the plant SCADA system. 5) Provide functional descriptions of the ozone disinfection equipment operations to enable programming of PLCs. F. Miscellaneous Skid Mounted Field Panels: These field panels will be furnished by the Owner and installed on the skid by the System Supplier as shown on P&IDs. The Contractor shall install skids in field and implement all interconnecting raceways, cables, field termination and testing. G. Process Instrumentation: Submittals for ozone residual meters and ambient ozone monitors and other instrumentation shall be in accordance with the requirements contained in herein, contained in Section 40 99 90, Owner -Furnished Package Control Systems, and shown on P&ID Drawings. H. Operation and Maintenance: 1. Provide detailed operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals for each component and sub -assembly of the ozone disinfection system. 2. Provide the following additional information: a. Detailed parts lists. b. Repair instructions. C. Spare parts and maintenance materials. d. Electrical and wiring diagrams. C. Mechanical diagrams. f. Troubleshooting data. g. Results of performance demonstration data (include as a supplement to O&M Manual). PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-7 399884C.GN1 3. The O&M manuals shall be prepared specifically for this project and shall include all required catalog cut sheets, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, diagrams, schematics and all other information needed to clearly instruct O&M personnel in the operation and maintenance of the ozone disinfection system specified herein. Generic information such as marketing information, etc. will not be acceptable. 4. Provide the names, addresses, phone numbers and e-mail addresses of each equipment manufacturer and the nearest location where spare parts can be obtained. I. Training: 1. A trained representative from the System Supplier with thorough knowledge and understanding of the ozone disinfection system operation and maintenance shall be provided to instruct plant staff on proper operation and maintenance of the ozone disinfection system. Comply with Section 0143 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. 2. Provide a minimum two week notice to the Owner prior to the time training will be provided. J. Record Drawings: Comply with the General Conditions and Section 0177 00, Closeout Procedures. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All equipment and spare parts shall be clearly marked as to content and shipped to the jobsite by the System Supplier. A representative of the Owner shall acknowledge in writing, on a form prepared by the System Supplier, that all spare parts specified herein have been received from the System Supplier. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, unloading and properly storing the equipment in accordance with the System Supplier's instructions. C. The Contractor and Owner shall inspect all deliveries and prepare a receiving report noting any and all evidence of damage in transit. Equipment that is damaged or does not meet the requirements of the approved Shop Drawings shall be returned immediately for replacement. D. Each skid, box or package shall be properly marked to show its content. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not required to be painted such as flange faces shall be properly protected to prevent rust, corrosion and damage. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 8 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 F. Stainless steel items and equipment shall not be stored in contact with ferrous materials. G. Owner shall make reasonable effort to facilitate storage of equipment but will not be responsible for damage to stored or staged equipment and materials once received by the Contractor. 1.05 WARRANTY A. An extended warranty for no less than 24 months shall be provided by the System Supplier for each component of the ozone disinfection system as specified herein. B. The System Supplier shall warrant that the ozone disinfection system shall meet and comply with the performance criteria as stated herein for no less than 24 months of continuous operation beginning with the date of beneficial use of the ozone disinfection system (established in writing by Owner) or three (3) months following the date when all components of the ozone disinfection system arrive at the jobsite (acknowledged in writing by Owner), whichever occurs first. C. The System Supplier shall provide all labor and materials to correct any mechanical or electrical problem, equipment defect or process malfunction during the warranty period provided that warranty matters do not relate to or result from misuse of equipment or improper maintenance of equipment. 1.06 ON-SITE SUPPORT A. The System Supplier shall provide a qualified and technically competent and responsible person familiar with the ozone disinfection system as described herein for installation, mechanical/electrical startup of the equipment, performance demonstration testing and training of plant staff. 1.07 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Treatment Site: El. 1170. B. Ambient temperature range: -20 to 104 degrees F. C. Plant effluent temperature range: 40 to 80 degrees F. D. The ozone disinfection system shall operate continuously to treat and disinfect tertiary (sand) filtered secondary plant effluent produced from an activated sludge system that accomplishes full nitrification. PW/WBG/399884 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.18 - 9 399884C.GN1 E. The plant effluent to be treated by the ozone disinfection system has the following average quality: 1. Total Suspended Solids: < 5 mg/L. 2. Carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand: < 5 mg/L. 3. Ammonia Nitrogen: < 0.5 mg/L. 4. Total Phosphorus: < 1.0 mg/L. F. Items and equipment that shall be suitable for outdoor operation where shown at the Contact Basin include the skid -mounted ozone dissolution and injection system, ozone destruct unit and related instrumentation. Contractor shall provide the following: 1. Appurtenant piping, valves and electrical and instrumentation conduit and wiring associated with the above equipment. 2. Equipment enclosures to protect the instrumentation. 3. Weather and freeze protection required for equipment installed outside building enclosures. G. Items and equipment that shall be suitable for outdoor service where shown at the Chlorination Building include the air-cooled chillers. Contractor shall provide the following: 1. Appurtenant piping, valves and electrical and instrumentation conduit and wiring associated with the above equipment. 2. Equipment enclosures to protect the instrumentation. 3. Weather and freeze protection required for equipment installed outside building enclosures. 1.08 DESCRIPTION OF OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM A. The ozone disinfection system shall be an integrated assemblage of components and sub -systems that are intended to function in a coordinated and sequential manner to produce and deliver ozone to disinfect the plant effluent and thereby comply with prevailing regulatory requirements as follows: 1. Production of a concentrated oxygen gas stream from an ambient air source. Ambient air which contains approximately 21 percent oxygen by volume will be concentrated in oxygen generators located in the Chlorination Building where shown on the Drawings. The oxygen generators shall use vacuum swing absorption (VSA) technology to concentrate the oxygen in the gas to an approximate range of 90 to 96 percent oxygen by volume. The oxygen -rich gas flow shall then be compressed before it exits the oxygen generator via exposed piping to the oxygen buffer tank which shall control the flow and pressure of oxygen to the ozone generators. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 10 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2. The ozone generators, also located in the Chlorination Building where shown on the Drawings, shall accept the pressurized oxygen -rich gas flow stream from the oxygen buffer tank and direct the gas through a high voltage electrical field which converts a fraction of the oxygen to ozone gas. Ozone shall be produced in ozone production cells within the ozone generators as a 10 percent by weight ozone gas mixture. The reaction will generate heat and require water coolant flow to transfer heat and thereby control the temperature of the process. Self-contained, air-cooled, scroll -type chillers installed where shown on the Drawings shall use vapor -compression technology to remove heat from the coolant water that exits the ozone generators. The chilled water flow is then returned to the ozone generator to repeat the process. Each chiller shall consist of a refrigerant compressor, an evaporative condenser, condenser fans and pump and shall use a mixture of City water and glycol in a closed loop system. 3. The pressurized ozone gas shall be conveyed via exposed and underground piping where shown on the Drawings from the ozone generators to the saturation vessel included as part of the ozone dissolution and injection system. The ozone dissolution and injection system shall be located at the Contact Basin where shown on the Drawings. The pressurized ozone will contact a liquid sidestream inside the saturation vessel at a pressure of approximately 25 psig. The sidestream shall be furnished by liquid supply pumps that pump a fraction of the total flow from Contact Basin Pass 1 to the saturation vessel. 4. A nominal 585 pounds per 24-hour day shall be generated and dissolved into the liquid sidestream flow. This sidestream of ozonated water shall discharge from the saturation vessel and be re -introduced to and mix with the plant effluent within the Contact Basin at the location shown on the Drawings to disinfect the plant effluent. Ozone destruct units will be provided and installed where shown on the Drawings to remove and treat headspace gas from the Contact Basin. B. The dissolved ozone shall disinfect the plant effluent within the Contact Basin in compliance with regulatory criteria as contained in the plant's NPDES permit and shall perform equal to or better than the existing ultraviolet light (UV) disinfection system with respect to compliance with NPDES permit criteria. C. The dissolved ozone shall increase the dissolved oxygen concentration in the plant effluent as the ozone decomposes in water. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 4442 56.18 -11 399884C.GN1 D. The Master Control Panel (MCP -08) and field control panel (FP -08-01) installed at locations shown on the Drawings shall monitor and reliably control all components of the ozone disinfection system. The Master and Field Control Panels shall be provided to the Owner by the System Supplier and be installed and powered by the Contractor as a part of the work under Division 26, Electrical. 1.09 PROCESS REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Criteria: 1. The ozone disinfection system shall be designed to operate continuously with minimal operator attention, to automatically treat and disinfect effluent flows up to the maximum daily plant effluent flow as specified herein. 2. The ozone disinfection system shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria: a. Provide and deliver a nominal capacity of 585 pounds per 24-hour day of 10 percent ozone (weight basis) to the point(s) of application shown on the Drawings. b. Provide a minimum 10:1 turndown capability in ozone delivery rate (based upon the nominal capacity) to the point(s) of application shown on the Drawings. C. Maintain a minimum residual ozone dose at all times to disinfect the plant effluent in compliance with the regulatory disinfection requirements. d. Comply with the following regulatory disinfection requirements as follows at the plant effluent sample location: 1) Monthly Geometric Mean: 200 colony -forming units/ 100 mL (fecal coliform bacteria). 2) 7 -Day Geometric Mean: 400 colony -forming units/100 mL (fecal coliform bacteria). B. Plant Effluent Flows: 1. Minimum Daily Flow: 2.2 mgd. 2. Design average: 12.6 mgd. 3. Maximum daily flow: 28.8 mgd. PART 2 EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL A. All equipment shall be of best construction with components designed for reliable, continuous operation. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 12 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 B. System Supplier: 1. The ozone disinfection system purchased from the System Supplier and furnished by the Owner shall be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings. All costs for any engineering and/or electrical modification other than that to furnish and install the ozone disinfection system as shown on the Drawings and specified herein shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and must be accounted for with all substitutions approved by the Owner to be acceptable. Engineering and electrical modifications shall include but not be limited to structural and building modifications, mechanical and electrical re -design and all related engineering work inclusive of as -built drawing preparation. 2. The Ozone Disinfection System Supplier (System Supplier) is BlueinGreen, LLC of Fayetteville, AR. C. The equipment covered by these specifications shall describe key components and equipment but may not describe all details of the ozone disinfection system. Related appurtenances and accessory devices, not specified herein but necessary for satisfactory ozone disinfection system performance, shall be provided by the Contractor. D. The equipment furnished shall be field -proven process equipment as manufactured by entities having satisfactory experience in the production of such equipment. E. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with best practices and methods and shall operate satisfactorily and reliably when installed where shown on the Drawings. F. All components shall be robust and so designed and proportioned as to have liberal strength and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the work to be performed. Ample room shall be provided for access to equipment in accordance with applicable code requirements so that inspection, repair and adjustment is not hindered. G. Motors with a nameplate rating of 1 horsepower and larger shall be premium efficiency type motors. In all cases, motors shall be suitable for the indicated starting method and have a minimum service factor of 1.15. H. The nameplate rating for any motor shall not be exceeded, nor shall the design service factor be reduced when its respective piece of equipment is operating at any point on its characteristic curve. I. The location, size, and type of all piping shall be as shown on the Drawings. All ozone disinfection system piping except as noted otherwise shall be Type 316L, Schedule 40 stainless steel complying with Section 40 27 00.09, Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings—Special Service. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-13 399884C.GN1 J. All motor driven components shall be designed and constructed so that the maximum noise level measured at 3 feet from the installed equipment drives and motors shall not exceed 85 dBA. K. Field assembly bolts, anchor bolts, nuts, washers, pins and any other threaded or unthreaded fastener shall be 300 Series stainless steel. Submerged anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. L. All anchor bolts shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements contained in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrication. The System Supplier shall provide anchor bolt templates and size all anchor bolts for the equipment specified herein. M. All parts, assemblies and sub -assemblies that are exposed to corrosive atmospheres shall be made from corrosion resistant materials or covered with protective coatings where approved by the Engineer. N. Welded joints shall be sealed tight with full penetration continuous welds, free of cracks, overlaps and cold laps. Contractor shall submit TIG welding qualifications of each welder to be utilized. O. Items fabricated from stainless steel shall be thoroughly cleaned, de -greased and pickled following fabrication. Pickling shall produce a modest etch and shall remove all embedded ferrous materials and heat tinting. P. All painting and associated surface preparation shall comply with Division 9, Finishes requirements. Q. All piping shall comply with Division 40, Process Integration requirements. R. All valves shall comply with Section 42 27 02, Process Valves and Operators. S. Installation of control panels and instrumentation provided by the Owner from the System Supplier shall be in compliance with Division 26, Electrical. T. Installation of all electrical power, control wiring and conduit to the ozone disinfection system equipment including wire, cable, junction boxes, fittings and conduit shall be in compliance with Division 26, Electrical. U. Interconnection of the ozone system sub -assemblies including wire, cable, junction boxes, fittings and conduit shall be in compliance with Division 26, Electrical. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 14 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 2.02 OXYGEN GENERATORS A. The Contractor shall install Oxygen Generators and all appurtenant work, complete and operable, including enclosures, all necessary controls, valves, piping, gages, switches, regulators, strainers, tanks, safety devices, fittings, and adaptors as required to enable safe and reliable operation. B. Each Oxygen Generator shall utilize vacuum swing adsorption technology and be furnished as a skid mounted package that includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Reversible blower module. 2. Adsorption vessel. 3. Adsorption media (separate nitrogen from oxygen gas). 4. Oil -free oxygen compressor. 5. Integrated circuit board (ICB) for control. a. ICB shall interface with Master Control Panel OIU b. Hard wired signal interface shall utilize a 10 wire conductor to Field Control Panel Remote I/O module. 6. Associated stainless steel piping and valves and other non -corrosive materials. 7. Electrical termination block. C. Controls/Indicators: Each Oxygen Generator shall include but not be limited to the following functions and measurements: 1. Logic controls with remote monitoring and diagnostics. 2. Remote start/stop control inputs. 3. Emergency stop. 4. Low oxygen purity alarm. 5. Low pressure alarm. 6. Fault override. 7. Process Pressure. D. Equipment Requirements: 1. Total Units: 3. 2. Location: Where shown on Drawings. 3. Oxygen Production Rate (minimum): 2,100 lb/day (each unit). 4. Oxygen Discharge Rate (minimum): 500 liters/min. 5. Oxygen Purity: 93 percent plus or minus 3 percent (by volume). 6. Gas Output Pressure Range: 0-100 psig. 7. Operating Temperature: 0 to 120 degrees F. 8. Power: 480VAC/60Hz/3-phase. 9. Metal ductwork (blower intake and exhaust). 10. Oxygen calibration port. PW/WBG/399884 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.18 - 15 399884C.GN1 11. Painting: a. Factory Painting: Factory painting shall include a corrosion resistant coating system for ferrous materials that is compatible with Division 9 requirements. b. Field Painting: Equipment that does not receive a factory finish shall be painted as specified in Division 9, Finishes requirements. Factory painted items requiring touching up in the field shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material and shall undergo surface preparation and be primed and top coated with the manufacturer's factory finish. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. DOCS 500 Series by Pacific Consolidated Industries (PCI). 2. Or approved equal. 2.03 OXYGEN BUFFER TANK A. The Contractor shall install the Oxygen Buffer Tank and appurtenant work, complete and operable. B. Total installed units: 1 (where shown on Drawings). C. Size: As determined by System Supplier and as furnished by the Owner and as approved by Engineer. D. Materials of Construction: Stainless steel welded construction. E. Connections: As shown on Drawings and anchored to concrete equipment pad. 2.04 OZONE GENERATORS A. The Contractor shall install Ozone Generators and appurtenant work, complete and operable, including enclosures, all necessary controls, ozone production cells, valves, piping, gages, switches, regulators, safety devices, fittings, adaptors and step-down transformers as required to enable safe and reliable operation. B. Each Ozone Generator shall be compatible with the vacuum swing adsorption technology of the Oxygen Generator and be energy efficient, consuming no more than 5.1 KWH per pound of 10 percent ozone (weight basis) produced. C. Each Ozone Generator shall utilize pulse density modulation technology to provide precise control of ozone output. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 16 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 D. Each Ozone Generator shall be furnished as a skid mounted system within a UL -approved sealed and internally cooled NEMA 12 enclosure that includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Ozone production cells (quadblocks). 2. Oxygen inlet piping connection. 3. Water coolant inlet piping connection. 4. Water coolant outlet piping connection. 5. Ozone outlet piping connection. 6. PLC with touchscreen interface and ethernet access, for communication with master PLC, as shown on the block diagram (incoming power: 480V, 3 ph, 60 Hz). 7. Step-down electrical transformer. 8. Associated Type 304L stainless steel piping and valves. 9. Electrical termination block. E. Controls/Indicators: Each Ozone Generator shall include but not be limited to the following functions and measurements: 1. Logic controls with remote monitoring and diagnostics. 2. Automatic shut-off & start function. 3. Emergency stop. 4. Oxygen flow rate. 5. Oxygen pressure. 6. Oxygen concentration. 7. Water temperature. 8. Ozone pressure. 9. Ozone concentration. 10. Ozone output control. 11. Provide capability for taking an individual ozone generating cell (quadblock) that is malfunctioning out of service for repair/replacement. F. Equipment Requirements: 1. Total Units: 2. 2. Location: Where shown on Drawings. 3. Oxygen Feed Rate: 1,110 liters/min (minimum). 4. Oxygen Feed Purity: Minimum 90 percent oxygen (weight basis). 5. Ozone Production Cells (quadblocks): As determined by manufacturer for specified ozone production rate. 6. Ozone Production Rate: 300 lb/day (each unit). 7. Ozone Purity: 10 percent (by weight). 8. Gas Output Pressure Range: 20-30 psig. 9. Water Coolant Inlet Temperature: 50-65 degrees F. 10. Water Coolant Flow: less than 40 gpm (per enclosure). 11. Piping Connections: Type 316 stainless steel. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-17 399884C.GN1 12. Power: 240VAC/60Hz/3-phase. 13. Furnish a 480V DELTA/240V Wye Transformer to convert the incoming feeder voltage to match the input voltage of the ozone generator as shown on the one -line diagram. KVA rating shall be selected to meet the power requirement of the ozone generator, but not less than the rating shown on the Drawing. 14. Painting: a. Factory Painting: Factory painting shall include a corrosion resistant coating system for ferrous materials that is compatible with Division 9, Finishes requirements. b. Field Painting: Equipment that does not receive a factory finish shall be painted as specified in Division 9, Finishes requirements. Factory painted items requiring touching up in the field shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material and shall undergo surface preparation and be primed and top coated with the manufacturer's factory finish. G. Electrical Design Requirements for Ozone Generators: 1. Electrical power input requirements are noted in Paragraph F.12 above as shown on electrical one -line diagram. 2. The basic electrical components shall include a diode bridge converter to convert incoming AC power to a fixed do voltage, a PWM Inverter to convert the do voltage to a variable frequency pulse width modulated output and a step up transformer to generate high voltage variable frequency pulse output to be used to convert oxygen to ozone. The ozone concentration is varied by modulating the frequency of the output pulses. 3. The converter design shall be based on a 12 pulse diode bridge rectifier. 6 pulse diode bridge converters are acceptable as long as harmonic distortion limits specified herein are met. 4. Current and voltage harmonic distortion at the primary side of the input transformer T3 (T4 for ozone generator #2) shown on the One -Line Drawing. E-2 shall be calculated and submitted for review. Assume, available short circuit current at the primary of each transformer to be 14,500 amps. Using the full load current at the primary of each transformer calculate the short circuit ratio. The individual and total current harmonic distortion limits expressed as percent of full load current at the primary of T3 (or T4) shall not exceed the limits specified in the fourth row of Table 10.3, of IEEE Standard 519-1992. The total voltage harmonic distortion at these points shall not exceed 5 percent. Should the harmonic distortion for each ozone generator exceed the limits specified herein provide an appropriately rated harmonic filter or higher pulse converter to meet the specified harmonic distortion limits. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 18 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 5. A post installation harmonic test shall be conducted by the system supplier to show that the measured current and voltage harmonic distortion is in line with the calculated values part of the submittal. H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Zenith Series by Pinnacle Ozone Solutions, LLC. 2. Or approved equal. 2.05 AIR-COOLED CHILLERS A. The Contractor shall install Air -Cooled Chillers and appurtenant work, complete and operable, including enclosures, all necessary controls, hydronic system, condenser fans, pumps, compressors, evaporators, evaporator fluid, refrigerant, expansion valves, piping, strainers, gages, flow switches, regulators, safety devices, fittings, and adaptors as required to enable safe and reliable operation. B. Each Air -Cooled Chiller shall be mounted on a single piece chassis, be microprocessor controlled and be suitable for outdoor installation, utilizing scroll compressors and low sound producing fans. C. Each unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 550/590, latest edition, and be ASHRAE 90.1 compliant. D. Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code, UL latest edition, and ASME applicable codes. E. Each unit furnished shall be full -load run tested at the factory. F. Unit Cabinet: 1. Frame shall be constructed of rigid galvanized steel. 2. Exterior panels shall be galvanized steel with a baked enamel powder coat finish prior to shipment to the jobsite. 3. Contained within the unit cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge and all specified special features required prior to field start-up. G. Fans: 1. Condenser fans shall be direct -driven, 9 -blade airfoil cross-section, reinforced polymer construction, shrouded -axial type, and shall be statically and dynamically balanced with inherent corrosion resistance. 2. Fans shall produce no more than 85b dB sound levels from 3 feet away when in operation. 3. Air shall be discharged vertically upward. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 44 42 56.18 - 19 399884C.GN1 4. Fans shall be protected by corrosion -resistant steel wire safety guards. 5. Fan Motors: a. Condenser fans shall be direct -drive type. b. All condenser fan motors shall be totally enclosed 3-phase type with permanently lubricated ball bearings, Class F insulation and internal, automatic reset thermal overload protection. C. Shafts shall have inherent corrosion resistance. d. Fan blades shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Compressor/Compressor Assemblies: 1. Fully hermetic, direct -drive, scroll type compressors. 2. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings and shall have either internal line break thermal and current overload protection or external current overload modules with compressor temperature sensors. 3. Compressors shall be mounted on rubber in shear vibration isolators. 4. Each compressor shall be equipped with crankcase heaters to minimize oil dilution. Coolers: 1. Each cooler shall be rated for a refrigerant working -side pressure of 565 psig and shall be factory -tested for a maximum water -side pressure of 300 psig. 2. Each cooler shall be single -pass, ANSI type 316 stainless steel, brazed plate construction. 3. Shell shall be insulated with 3/4 -inch closed -cell, polyvinyl -chloride foam with a maximum K factor of 0.28. 4. Each cooler shall have a minimum of one independent refrigerant circuit. 5. Each cooler shall have a factory -installed heater, to protect cooler from ambient temperature down to —20 degrees F. 6. Unit shall be provided with a factory -installed flow switch. 7. All pipe connections shall use standard Victaulic-type fittings. 8. Coolant fluid inlet line shall have a brass -body 40 mesh strainer upstream of the cooler. J. Condensers: 1. Condenser coils shall be air-cooled using heat exchangers. 2. Coils shall consist of a two -pass arrangement. Coil construction shall consist of aluminum alloys for fins, tubes, and manifolds in combination with a corrosion -resistant coating. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 20 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. Tubes shall be cleaned and fully sealed. 4. Assembled condenser coils shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 656 psig prior to shipment to the jobsite. K. Refrigeration Components: Refrigerant circuit components shall include filter drier, moisture indicating sight glass, electronic expansion device, discharge and liquid service valves and a complete operating charge of both refrigerant and compressor oil. L. Controls, Safeties, and Diagnostics: 1. Unit controls shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Microprocessor or a PLC with non-volatile memory. Battery backup system shall not be accepted. b. Separate terminal block for power and controls. C. Control transformer to serve all controllers, relays, and control components. d. ON/OFF control switch. e. Replaceable solid-state controllers. f. Pressure sensors for measurement of suction and discharge pressure at each circuit. g. Thermistors shall be installed to measure the entering and leaving fluid temperatures of the cooler, outdoor ambient temperature, and suction temperature. h. Seven-day time schedule. i. Chilled water pump start/stop control and primary/standby sequencing to ensure equal pump run time. j. Timed maintenance scheduling to signal maintenance activities for pumps, condenser coil cleanings, strainer maintenance and user -defined maintenance activities. k. Provide a small operator interface unit on each chiller for local monitoring and control functions. 1. Low ambient temperature protection to energize cooler and system heaters. 2. Diagnostics shall include but not be limited to the following: a. The control panel shall include, as standard, a scrolling marquee display capable of indicating the safety lockout condition by displaying an explanation code. b. Information included for display shall include as a minimum the following: 1) Compressor lockout. 2) Loss of charge. 3) Low fluid flow. 4) Cooler freeze protection. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-21 399884C.GN1 5) Cooler set point. 6) Chilled water reset parameters. 7) Thermistor and transducer malfunction. 8) Entering and leaving -fluid temperature. 9) Compressor suction temperature. 10) Evaporator and condenser pressure. 11) System refrigerant temperatures. 12) Chiller run hours. 13) Compressor run hours. 14) Compressor number of starts. 15) Low superheat. 16) Time of day: C. The control system shall allow software upgrade without the need for new hardware modules. 3. Safeties shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and all necessary components in conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the following protections: 1) Loss of refrigerant charge. 2) Reverse rotation. 3) Low chilled fluid temperature. 4) Thermal overload. 5) High pressure. 6) Electrical overload. b. Factory pump motors shall have external overcurrent protection. 4. Hard Wired Signal Interface: The chiller system shall receive RUN commands from RIO -08-01 part of remote field panel FP -08-01. M. Chilled Water Circuit: 1. Chilled water circuit shall be rated for 300 psig. Pumps shall be rated for 150 psig working pressure. 2. Solid-state flow monitor with integral relay shall be factory installed and wired. 3. Brass body strainer with 40 mesh screen and ball type blow down. 4. Hydronic package shall be furnished in each unit as follows: a. Field pipe connections shall be copper Victaulic type. b. Pumps shall be single stage design, capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. 1) Pump casing shall be of class 30 cast iron. 2) The impeller shall be of cast bronze, closed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by locking cap screw. 3) The hydronic package shall be provided with a flush line connection to ensure lubrication at the seal face and allow for positive venting of the seal chamber. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 22 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 4) The pump case shall have gage taps on the suction and discharge nozzles and include drain ports. 5) Motors shall totally enclosed 3-phase type with grease lubricated ball bearings. 6) Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards. 7) Pump motors shall be VFD compatible. C. Fluid expansion tank shall be factory installed within the chiller cabinet and be insulated, pre -charged and rated for a maximum working pressure of 150 psig. d. Water pressure taps (2) shall be factory installed across the cooler and rated for 150 psig. e. Balancing valve shall be factory installed to set flow gage ports and be rated for 300 psig. f. Hydronic assembly shall have factory -supplied electric freeze protection to —20 degrees F when heaters are used. g. Piping shall be Type -L seamless copper tubing. N. Chilled Water Storage Tank: 1. Fluid storage tank shall be rated for a maximum of 150 psig. 2. Shall provide a minimum 4 gallon per ton fluid storage capacity. 3. Shall fit under the chiller to minimize system footprint requirements. Tanks fitted outside of the chiller footprint shall not be acceptable. 4. Tank shall be constructed using a cold rolled carbon steel shell. 5. Tank shall be insulated with 3/4 -inch closed -cell, polyvinyl -chloride foam with a maximum K factor of 0.28. 6. Tank shall be baffled to prevent temperature stratification. 7. Tank shall have Victaulic pipe connections. 8. Tank shall have vent and drain plugs accessible from outside tank enclosure. 9. Internal heaters shall provide freeze protection to —20 degrees F. O. Electrical Requirements: 1. Unit/module primary electrical power supply shall enter the unit at a single electrical box. 2. Unit shall operate on 3-phase power at the voltage shown on the Drawings. 3. Control points shall be accessed through the terminal block. 4. Unit shall be shipped with factory control and power wiring installed. 5. All power and interconnecting wiring as shown on Electrical Drawings. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-23 399884C.GN1 P. Equipment Requirements: 1. Total Units: 2. 2. Location: Where shown on Drawings. 3. Nominal Cooling Capacity: 24 tons minimum (each unit). 4. Condenser Fans: 2 total (each unit). 5. Condenser Fan Airflow: 19,400 cfm (each unit). 6. Operating Temperature: -20 to 120 degrees F. 7. Power: 480VAC/60Hz/3-phase. 8. Painting: a. Factory Painting: Factory painting shall include a corrosion resistant coating system that is compatible with Division 9, Finishes requirements b. Field Painting: Equipment that does not receive a factory finish shall be painted as specified in Division 9, Finishes requirements. Factory painted items requiring touching up in the field shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material and shall undergo surface preparation and be primed and top coated with the manufacturer's factory finish. Q. Manufacturers: 1. AquaSnap Chiller, Series 30RA by Carrier. 2. Or approved equal. 2.06 OZONE DISSOLUTION AND INJECTION ASSEMBLIES A. The Contractor shall install Ozone Dissolution and Injection Assemblies and appurtenant work, complete and operable, including enclosures, all necessary controls, liquid supply pumps, saturation vessels, mixing system for ozonated water injection, motor operated and manual valves, flow control devices, piping, gages, level sensing, switches, regulators, safety devices, fittings, and adaptors as required to enable safe, successful and reliable operation. B. Each Ozone Dissolution and Injection Assembly shall be located and mounted outdoors where shown and shall be capable of reliable operation at ambient temperatures ranging from -20 to 104 degrees F. C. Each component of the Ozone Dissolution and Injection Assemblies shall be designed for the service conditions stated herein and shall be capable of transferring and mixing a supersaturated ozone solution into the plant effluent as a method of disinfection. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 24 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 D. Each Ozone Dissolution and Injection Assembly shall be designed to deliver the specified minimum pounds of ozone per day at a nominal system pressure of 25 psig. E. Each Ozone Dissolution and Injection Assembly shall be compatible with the Ozone Generator, including its ozone gas output, quality and pressure. F. Each Ozone Dissolution and Injection Assembly unit shall be mounted on singular or multiple skid frames. All skid mounted piping shall be Type 304L welded stainless steel. Isolation valves and check valves shall be provided on the skid mounted assembly for the liquid supply pumps unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. All piping, valves, fittings, gauges, meters, and accessories shall be made of materials that are compatible with ozone and plant effluent. G. A skid mounted junction box shall be provided for common termination of all electronic components and sensors. The junction box shall be NEMA 3R powder coated and be factory mounted using Type 304 stainless steel struts and fasteners to the skid(s). H. Ozone Dissolution and Injection System Requirements: 1. Total Installed Units: 2. 2. Ozone Transfer Capacity: 3001b/day minimum (each unit). 3. Hydraulic Capacity: 1,100 gpm (each unit). 4. Saturation Vessels: a. Total Installed: 2 units. b. Nominal Capacity: 775 gal. c. Type: 304L stainless steel (welded). d. Rating: ASME rated for 50 psig. e. Tank Nozzles (minimum): Size as shown on Drawings or where not shown, size to be provided by System Supplier. 1) (1) Liquid supply inlet. 2) (1) Ozone gas inlet. 3) (1) Oxygen off -gas. 4) Ozonated liquid outlet: 1. 5) Tank drain: 1. 6) Manway access: 1. 7) Differential pressure level indication: 2. 8) Pressure gauge: 1. 9) Pressure relief 1. f. Liquid Supply Pumps: 1) Total Installed Units: 3. 2) Manufacturer: a) KSB b) Or approved equal. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 44 42 56.18 - 25 399884C.GN1 3) Type: Submersible Centrifugal (2 duty + 1 standby). 4) Nominal Capacity (each): 1,100 GPM @ 52 psig. 5) Mounting: Type 304 stainless steel pipe rails installed where shown on the Drawings. 6) Motors: NEMA Design B inverter duty type motors with Class F insulation equipped with variable frequency drives provided as part of field mounted panel MCP -08 as shown on Drawing E-02 and block diagram I-4. 7) Power: 480VAC/60Hz/3-phase. I. Instrumentation: 1. Differential Pressure Transmitter: 2 total (1 per saturation vessel). 2. Liquid Supply Flow Meter: 2 total (1 per saturation vessel). 3. Pump Pressure Indicator Gauge: 3 total (1 per pump). J. Controls: 1. The Ozone Dissolution and Injection Assemblies shall be provided with sufficient instrumentation and controls such that the entire system, including all components, can be monitored and controlled locally by the operator at the Master Control Panel., MCP -08 as shown on the block diagram I-4. 2. The Ozone Dissolution and Injection Assembly shall be capable of manual operation or automatic control at the Master Control Panel based on: a. Operator input of desired ozone residual at the monitoring location(s) shown on the Drawings using a 4-20mA signal from an ozone residual analyzer. b. Operator input of the desired ozone dosage in mg/L based on effluent flow meter. C. Operator input of pounds of ozone per day applied using a 4-20mA plant effluent flow signal for mass calculations. 3. The Master Control Panel enclosure shall be NEMA 3R powder coated and be constructed following UL standards. 4. The control panel shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Lockable Power Disconnect. b. Run and Fail indicating Lights. C. Common Alarm Light. d. System Stop and Start Push Button. e. Reset Button. f. Alarm Test Button. g. Remote access via ethernet (switch shall be provided). OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 26 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 5. The Master Control Panel shall provide for manual and automatic control of the Ozone Dissolution and Injection System and integrate with the oxygen concentration and ozone generation unit controls. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. CompactLogix by Allen-Bradley. b. Or approved equal. 7. Alarms and Warnings: a. Alarms and warnings shall be active in both the automatic and manual mode of operation. b. Alarms resulting in equipment shutdown shall be identified for any condition that may cause damage to the equipment. C. When any control loop or device failure activates an alarm, it shall be displayed on an alarm screen and indicate the shutdown on the control panel. K. Ozone Main Control Panel MCP -08: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 The ozone main panel shall include three variable frequency drive (VFD) controllers for powering each of the three variable speed liquid supply pumps. Each VFD shall meet following requirements: a. Input circuit breaker for each drive as shown on the one -line diagram E-2. b. A 12 pulse diode bridge converter for conversion of incoming 480V, 3 ph, 60 Hz power to a constant DC voltage. Six pulse diode bridge converters in conjunction with harmonic filters are acceptable as long as the harmonic distortion limits specified herein are met. C. A pulse width modulated (PWM) type inverter that converts the DC voltage to a variable frequency three phase AC output to power the pump motor. d. The rating of each VFD shall be not less than 1.15 times the full load nameplate rating of the driven motor. e. Each drive shall include appropriately rated line reactor and output filter. f. Current and voltage harmonic distortion at the input side of the panel MCP -08 shall be calculated and submitted for review. Assume available short circuit current at the input of MCP -08 to be 12,600 amps. Assuming two of the three drives running at full load, calculate the short circuit ratio. The individual and total current harmonic distortion units expressed as percent of demand current shall not exceed the limits specified in the third row of Table 10.3 of IEEE Standard 519-1992. The total voltage harmonic distortion at the panel FP -08-01 shall not exceed 5 percent. Should the current and voltage harmonic distortion exceed the specified limits, furnish appropriately rated harmonic filter or higher pulse converters to bring the harmonic distortion within specified limits. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-27 399884C.GN1 g. A post installation harmonic test shall be conducted by the system supplier to show that the measured current and voltage harmonic distortion is in line with the calculated values in the submittal. h. Each drive shall include a built in ethernet port to allow data exchange with the PLC within MCP -081 as shown on the block diagram. The data link shall allow control and monitoring of the drive from the ozone system remote panel FP -08-01 and from MCP -08. 2. The PLC within main control panel (MCP -08) will include the following ethernet data links in addition to the VFDs as shown on the block diagram: a. Fiber optic ethernet link with the ozone system remote I/O base located in remote panel FP -08-01. 3. The following processes and analyzers shall be hard wired to the PLC I/O modules: a. Residual ozone analyzer #1. b. Residual ozone analyzer #2. C. Ozone dissolution and injection system #1. d. Ozone dissolution and injection system #2. 4. Signals related to the off gas ozone destruct units shall be hard wired to the PLC I/O modules. 5. Provide adequately rated control power transformer for 120V ac control power needed for all control devices. Provide 24V do power supply with adequate VA rating to loop power all instruments as shown on the P&ID Drawings. 6. The control panel design and construction shall meet all requirements specified in Specification Section 40 99 90, Owner -Furnished Package Control Systems. L. Additional Requirements for Ozone Master Control Panel MCP -08: The MCP -08 shall provide control and monitoring of the entire ozone disinfection system. The control panel shall include the following major features: a. A PLC system including power supply, CPU, ethernet card, and I/O modules as required to meet the functional requirements shown on the block diagram and P&ID Drawings. The PLC shall be programmed to effectively control and monitor the entire ozone disinfection system that includes but not limited to following subsystems: 1) The two ozone generators. 2) Three oxygen concentrators. 3) Two chillers. 4) Two ozone dissolution and injection systems. 5) Three liquid supply variable speed pumps. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 28 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 6) Miscellaneous analyzers and instruments as shown on the Drawings. 7) Two off gas ozone destruct units. b. The panel shall include an ethernet switch to allow ethernet communication with the PLC part of the field panel FP -08-01 and the other subsystems as shown on the block diagram. The ethernet link with FP -08-01 shall be via fiber optic cable whereas all other links shall be CAT -5E cable. Panel shall include a door mounted operator interface panel linked to the PLC via the ethernet switch. C. Provide 24 do power supply of adequate rating to loop power all field mounted analyzers and instruments as shown on the P&ID Drawings and block diagram. d. Provide a control power transformer to meet all 120V control power requirements. e. The control panel design and construction shall meet all requirements specified in Specification Section 40 99 90, Owner -Furnished Package Control Systems. f. In future the PLC in this panel will be interfaced with the plant SCADA system via an ethernet data link. With that requirement, provide a data exchange table (DET) that lists all tag numbers, READ/WRITE bits and words and their addresses within the PLC logic to be part of future plant SCADA interface. This data exchange table shall be tested during factory test and performance acceptance test. A documented verification of the DET shall be provided. For detailed requirements on this and other ethernet data exchange tables (DETs) see the supplement #2 at the end of this Specification section. This supplement provides examples of data exchange tables. M. Remote I/O Panel FP -08-01: 1. Provide a remote I/O panel for easy interfacing with following subsystems as shown on the block diagram 1-4: a. Ozone generators #1 and #2 (via ethernet link). b. Oxygen concentrators #1, #2, and #3 ethernet link to OIU only. Hard wired signals to remote I/O. C. Chillers #1 and #2 (hard wired to RIO -08-01). d. Ambient ozone monitors (hard wired to RIO -08-01). 2. Provide an operator interface (OIU) to be able to monitor and control the entire ozone system from this location. A fiber-optic ethernet link shall be provided to communicate with MCP -08. N. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. 2. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 HyDOZ 600 by BlueinGreen LLC. Or approved equal. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 44 42 56.18 - 29 399884C.GN1 2.07 OZONE DESTRUCT UNITS A. The Contractor shall install Ozone Destruct Units and appurtenant work, complete and operable. B. Ozone off gas destruction shall be thermal destruct units with heat recuperation suitable for moist ozone in oxygen service installed where shown on the Drawings. C. The units shall be capable of destroying off gas in the headspace of the Contact Basin. D. The ozone destruction units shall consist of an electric resistance heater, reaction chamber, centrifugal blower, control system and be insulated. E. An external demist reactor for high moisture offgas will be included and installed with each installed ozone destruct unit at the locations shown on the Drawings. F. Ducts carrying ozone laden off gas shall be sloped to a low point drain valve located upstream of the ozone destruct system. G. The ozone destruct unit shall reduce the ozone concentration from the off gas flow to less than 0.10 ppm by volume of ozone up to and including the maximum off gas flow rate. H. Ozone destruction equipment shall meet the following requirements: 1. Maximum off gas relative humidity: 100 percent. 2. Maximum reaction chamber: 400 degrees C. 3. Maximum ozone concentration to destruct unit: 1 percent (by weight). 4. Capacity: 45 scfin off gas. 5. Materials: a. Skid: Galvanized steel (Coating shall comply with Division 9). b. Blower: Galvanized steel (Coating shall comply with Division 9). C. VOD: Type 316 stainless steel. d. Insulation: Mineral wool. 6. Power: 480VAC/60Hz/3-phase. 7. Remote control indications and alarm contact outputs (to be hard wired to the PLC I/O modules in MCP -08 as shown): a. Unit running. b. Unit ON/OFF. C. Current overload alarm. d. High temperature alarm. e. Low temperature alann. 8. Enclosure: NEMA 3R. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 30 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 I. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. VOD Series RB by Ozonia. 2. Or approved equal. 2.08 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION A. Process instrumentation for the ozone disinfection system shall comply with Division 40, Process Integration requirements. The Owner shall provide the following minimum ozone disinfection process instrumentation from the System Supplier (All other instrumentation not specifically listed here but either shown on the P&I Drawings or required for satisfactory operation of the ozone system shall be provided by the Contractor.): 1. Dissolved Ozone in Water Analyzer and Transmitter: a. Provide two (2) dissolved ozone analyzers where shown on the Drawings to measure: 1) Dissolved ozone concentration along the flow path within Pass 3 of the Contact Basin. 2) Dissolved ozone concentration near the ozone injection point within Pass 2 of the Contact Basin. b. Each dissolved ozone analyzer shall accurately measure the concentration of ozone in water using a sensor that shall generate a current that is linearly proportional to the concentration of ozone in water. C. An ozone -permeable membrane shall isolate the sensor from the water and insure that the measurement is free from interferences. d. Operating Range: 0 to 60 degrees C (electronics). e. Accuracy: + 0.01 ppm. f. Repeatability: + 0.01 ppm. g. Zero Drift: < 0.01 ppm per month. h. Display: LED -Backlit with 4 -digit, 0.75 -inch numeric LCD. i. Analog Outputs: (2) 4-20 mA outputs capable of driving a 500 ohm load. j. Analyzer shall be provided with (3) SPDT (alarm) contacts rated for 6A @ 250V ac, 5A @ 24V dc. k. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4. 1. Required Power: 1) Analyzer: Loop powered from the panel 24V do power supply. M. Sensor: 1) Membrane covered polarographic type (submersible sensor type). 2) Wetted materials shall be PVC and titanium. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-31 399884C.GN1 3) Sensor Cable (25 feet minimum): Shielded, waterproof, continuous and unspliced between the sensor and the termination junction box. Provide waterproof terminations on cable ends. 4) Sensor response time shall be no less than 90 percent within 60 seconds. 5) Sample Temperature Range: 0 to 50 degrees C. 6) Measurement Range: 0 to 2.0 ppm dissolved ozone. 7) Temperature Compensation: Built-in automatic temperature compensation with display. 8) Provide 4-20 mA outputs for temperature and ozone concentration. n. Accessories: 1) Universal NEMA 4X stainless steel junction box. 2) Mounting bracket kit for submersible sensor, including Type 304 stainless steel U -bolts. o. Manufacturer/Model: 1) Model Q46H/64 by Analytical Technology Inc. (ATI). 2) Or approved equal. 2. Ambient Ozone Monitor and Transmitter: a. Provide ambient ozone monitors where shown on the Drawings to measure: 1) Ambient ozone concentration in the Chlorination Building. b. Each ambient ozone monitor shall consist of an electrochemical cell housed in an enclosure that continuously monitors the ozone concentration in ambient air. C. Operating functions, including calibration, alarm setup, alarm reset, data view shall be available using sealed front panel switches on the face of the enclosure. d. Ozone Range: 0 to 5 ppm (maximum range). e. Accuracy: + 10 percent of value measured. f. Repeatability: + 1 percent. g. Zero Drift: < 2 percent of full scale per month. h. Display: LCD graphical display type. i. Analog Outputs: Loop powered 4-20 mA capable of driving an 800 ohm load at 24VDC. j. Analyzer shall be provided with (3) SPDT (alarm) contacts rated for 5A @ 230VAC. k. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X stainless steel. 1. Operating Temperature Range: -22 to 140 degrees F. M. Required Power: Loop power from the panel 24V do power supply. n. Provide serial interface for digital communication. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 32 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 o. Manufacturer/Model: 1) Series F 12 Gas Transmitter by Analytical Technology Inc. (ATI). 2) Or approved equal. 2.09 HIGH OZONE CONCENTRATION AND SHUTDOWN CONTROL A. Supplement #1 in 44 42 56, Sup 1 specifies functional requirements of the high ozone concentration alarm and shutdown system to be furnished, installed, wired and tested as specified. As part of this system the Contractor shall design and supply the terminal junction box (TJB-08-01) complete with specified control logic. Ozone analyzers shall be supplied by the Owner from the System Supplier and installed by the Contractor. All interconnecting control and power wiring shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 2.10 VALVES AND OPERATORS A. Valves that are supplied by the Owner from the System Supplier shall comply with 40 27 02 Process Valves and Operators. The following valves shall be provided by the Owner (refer to the Drawings for location and installation): 1. Type V340 Ball Valves for Oxygen, Ozone, Off -Gas, and Cooling Water Service: a. ANSI Class 150 -pound flanged style, ASTM A276 GR 316 or ASTM A351/A351M GR CFBM stainless steel body and end piece, full port ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel ball, reinforced PTFE seats, stainless steel stem, stainless steel lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 1,500 -pound WOG, 150 psi SWP. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Conbraco Apollo, 86A-200 Series. 2) CFF, SS3 Series. 3) Or Engineer approved equal. 2. Type V405 Eccentric Plug Valve 4 Inches and larger: a. Non -lubricated type rated 275 psig CWP, drip -tight shutoff with pressure from either direction, Type 316 stainless steel ASTM A743, grade CF -8M body, exposed service flanged ends per ASME B 16.1 or grooved ends in accordance with AWWA C606 for rigid joints, buried service mechanical joint ends, unless otherwise shown. b. Plug Type 316 stainless steel with round or rectangular port of no less than 80 percent of connecting pipe area and coated with Buna-N, seats welded nickel, stem bearings lubricated stainless steel, stem seal multiple V -rings, or U -cups with O -rings of nitrile rubber, grit seals on both upper and lower bearings. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-33 399884C.GN1 C. Operators: 1) Totally enclosed, geared, manual operator with handwheel, 2 -inch nut or chain wheel. Size operator for 1.5 times maximum operating shutoff pressure differential for direct and reverse pressure, whichever is higher. For buried service, provide completely sealed operator filled with heavy lubricant and 2 -inch nut. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Pratt; Ballcentric. 2) DeZurik; Style PEC. 3) Milliken; Millcentric Series 600. 3. Type V608 Swing Check Valve 2 Inches to 24 Inches: a. AWWA C508, 125 -pound flanged ends, cast-iron body, bronze body seat, bronze mounted cast-iron clapper with bronze seat, stainless steel hinge shaft. b. Valves, 2 inches through 12 inches rated 175 -pound WWP and 14 inches through 24 inches rated 150 -pound WWP. Valves to be fitted with adjustable outside lever and weight. Increasing -pattern body valve may be used where increased outlet piping size is shown. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) M&H Valve; Style 59, 159, or 259. 2) Mueller Co.; No. A-2600 Series. 3) APCO; Series 6000/6100. 4. Type V788 Pressure Control Valves for Oxygen and Ozone Service. a. ANSI class 150 -pound valves with flanged ends, Type 316 stainless steel body, heat treated nickel -plated or hard chromium -plated type 316 stainless steel ball, reinforced PTFE flow -ring seal, reinforced PTFE with stainless steel bearings, and PTFE V -ring packing. Valve to have 300:1 rangeability and equal percentage characteristic. b. All valves shall be leak free at startup. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Fisher Controls. 2) Or Engineer approved equal. 2.11 SPARE PARTS A. Spare parts shall comply with Division 1, General Requirements. The Contractor shall provide maintenance materials such as lubricants to maintain all mechanical equipment for 1 year. B. Electrical spare parts shall comply with the requirements of Division 26, Electrical, and Specification Section 40 99 90, Owner -Furnished Package Control Systems. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 34 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 C. The following ozone disinfection system spare parts and materials shall be provided from the System Supplier to the Owner: 1. Oxygen Generator (PCI, DOCS 500): a. Four (4) F-3 filter elements. b. Two (2) F-4 filter elements. C. Four (4) F-1 filter elements. d. One (1) C-1 grease cartridge. e. One (1) quart multipurpose (MTR-1) grease. f. One (1) gallon synthetic oil lube. g. One (1) C-1 seal kit. h. Provide any special tools necessary to maintain equipment. 2. Ozone Generator (Pinnacle, Summit Series 20x): a. O -rings. b. Internal manifold blind -caps. C. Fuses (one of each kind and type for each unit). d. Two (2) UV lamps for ozone concentration meter. 3. Air -Cooled Chiller (Carrier, Aqua -Snap Series 30RA). a. Provide manufacturer's standard spare parts list. 4. Ozone Dissolution and Injection System (Blue in Green, HyDOZ-800): a. Gas inlet solenoid valve, 1 -inch ASCO 2 -way, normally closed. b. Saturation vessel pressure relief solenoid valve, 1 -inch ASCO 2 -way, normally open. C. Saturation vessel differential level pressure transmitter. d. Saturation vessel pressure gage transmitter. 5. Ozone Destruct Units (Ozonia, VOD Series RB): Provide manufacturer's standard spare parts list. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Equipment and materials furnished under this section shall be installed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Shop Drawings, specifications, engineering data and instructions and recommendations of the System Supplier, unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer. B. All items necessary for a complete and functional ozone disinfection system shall be installed. Installation procedures shall be as recommended by the System Supplier and as required herein. C. Each skid assembly shall be installed on a reinforced concrete base as shown on the Drawings and be aligned and plumbed into place prior to final anchorage. D. Special care shall be taken to maintain alignment of all pumping unit components. No stresses shall be transmitted to the pump flanges. PW/WBG/399884 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.18 - 35 399884C.GN1 E. Installation of the ozone disinfection system equipment furnished under this Section shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the System Supplier's instructions and drawings. All other equipment and materials furnished under other sections shall be installed in accordance with the requirements contained in those sections. F. The contractor shall complete all electrical power and control connections under Division 26, Electrical prior to startup activities. 3.02 SYSTEM SUPPLIER INSTALLATION AND FIELD SERVICES A. Refer to and comply with the following sections in addition to the requirements below: 1. Section 0143 33, Manufacturer's Field Services. 2. Section 0143 34, Special Services. 3. Section 01 64 00, Owner -Furnished Products. B. The System Supplier shall provide the services of an experienced, competent and authorized field representative to visit the jobsite to inspect, check, adjust if necessary and approve the equipment installation and startup. C. The field representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation and shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until all deficiencies and malfunctions are corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory to the Owner and Engineer. Installation and field services shall be provided as required with the minimum levels specified below: 1. One (1) person day for installation supervision services. The System Supplier's field representative shall attend pre -installation, post -installation meetings as required by the Contractor or the Owner, for the purpose of coordinating the ozone disinfection system installation. Additional services necessary to correct defective installation, materials or equipment shall be at the Contractor's expense. 2. Two (2) person days for mechanical/electrical startup and testing services. The System Supplier's field representative shall coordinate and operate the ozone disinfection system mechanical startup testing as specified with one trip to the jobsite. Additional services and travel expenses necessary to resolve startup problems or correct defective installation, materials or equipment shall be at the Contractor's expense. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 36 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 3. One (1) person day for process optimization and performance demonstration testing services for each of the following equipment: oxygen generator, ozone generator and ozone dissolution and injection equipment. The System Supplier's field representative shall coordinate and operate the ozone disinfection system for process optimization and performance demonstration testing as specified. Additional services necessary to resolve process optimization or performance demonstration problems or correct defective installation, materials or equipment shall be paid by the Contractor. 4. Two (2) person days for operation and maintenance training that complies with Section 0143 33 requirements shall be provided. The System Supplier's field representative shall instruct the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel on proper system operation and maintenance procedures and troubleshooting. Classroom and "hands on" field training shall be provided at times and dates acceptable to the Owner. 5. One (1) person day for programming coordination and troubleshooting for each of the following equipment: ozone generator and ozone dissolution and injection equipment. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL - TESTING A. A competent, authorized field representative of the System Supplier who is familiar with operation of the equipment and who has prior experience in conducting field tests shall operate the ozone disinfection equipment, perform all startup adjustments and testing of ozone disinfection system, conduct each test except where noted otherwise herein, analyze all data and certify the system's performance during mechanical startup testing and process optimization and performance demonstration testing. B. All support facilities, systems and equipment that will operate in conjunction with the ozone disinfection system shall be fully operational prior to testing the ozone disinfection system as described herein. C. The Owner shall operate all support facilities, systems and equipment and shall coordinate their operation with the Contractor and System Supplier's field representative. The Contractor shall assist the System Supplier's field representative as required. D. At least two months prior to mechanical/electrical startup testing, the Contractor and System Supplier shall prepare and submit a testing schedule and detailed written test procedures for mechanical startup testing and process optimization and performance demonstration testing. The procedures shall include forms for data collection, a description of all data to be collected, sample collection points and analyses required. PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-37 399884C.GN1 E. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a two week notice of intent to conduct the mechanical/electrical startup testing and process optimization and performance demonstration testing. Testing shall be conducted at a time that is acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination between the Owner, the System Supplier and the Engineer. F. General Requirements - Testing: 1. Two phases of testing shall be performed: 1) mechanical/electrical startup testing and 2) process optimization and performance demonstration testing. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, lubricants, spare parts, testing equipment and other supplies needed for mechanical startup and process optimization and performance demonstration testing. 2. Mechanical/Electrical Startup Testing: a. After the Ozone Disinfection System equipment is completely installed and the System Supplier's field representative has checked the installation and found it to be acceptable, mechanical startup testing shall be initiated. The purpose of this test is to identify and correct any mechanical or electrical deficiency or malfunction that would compromise the process optimization and performance demonstration activities that follow. b. Water used for mechanical startup testing shall be plant effluent that has received secondary treatment and tertiary (sand) filtration. C. The System Supplier's field representative shall conduct the following mechanical/electrical startup tests: 1) Normal startup and shutdown operating sequences for each piece of equipment and sub -assembly comprising the ozone disinfection system; emergency stop programming shall be verified. 2) Each piece of system equipment shall be subjected to complete start and stop cycles. 3) The Ozone Disinfection System shall be tested with the following equipment in simultaneous service: a) Two (2) Oxygen Generators. b) One (1) Oxygen Buffer Tank. c) One (1) Ozone Generator. d) One (1) Chiller. e) One (1) Ozone Dissolution and Injection Unit. f) One (1) Ozone Destruct Unit. g) This test shall be repeated until each piece of equipment (including units on standby) has been run for a minimum of 8 continuous hours without mechanical or electrical malfunction or overloading. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 38 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 4) The Ozone Disinfection System shall be tested again with the following in simultaneous service: a) Three (3) Oxygen Generators. b) Oxygen Buffer Tank. c) Two (2) Ozone Generators. d) Two (2) Chillers. e) Two (2) Ozone Dissolution and Injection Units. f) One (1) Ozone Destruct Unit. g) This test shall be repeated with all Ozone Disinfection System equipment operating until each piece of equipment has been run for a minimum of 8 continuous hours without mechanical or electrical malfunction or overloading. 5) The System Supplier's field rep shall check and record the following minimum information during the mechanical/electrical startup testing: a) Beginning at the start of each test, all installed ozone disinfection system instrumentation shall be observed for operability with readings recorded on an hourly basis. b) The ozone disinfection system instrumentation and control systems shall be checked for satisfactory local and remote operation. Detailed testing requirements for instrumentation and control are specified in Section 40 90 01, Instrumentation and Controls for Process Systems which included Operational Readiness Tests (ORTs) and Performance Acceptance Tests (PATS). Follow all testing procedures. c) All other information that is required for mechanical/electrical startup testing by the System Supplier's field rep shall be obtained, checked and recorded. d) Following satisfactory completion of the ozone disinfection system mechanical/electrical startup testing, the process optimization and performance demonstration testing shall be initiated. d. When the installation of high ozone concentration alarm and shutdown system is completed, test the system by simulating high ozone concentration (forcing contact closure at the analyzers) and show that system works as specified in supplement #l. PW/WBG/399884 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.18 - 39 399884C.GN1 3. Process Optimization and Performance Demonstration Testing: a. Testing shall be performed to demonstrate that the ozone disinfection system meets the performance requirements stated herein. The process optimization and performance demonstration tests shall be conducted for a 28 consecutive day period. All process flow meters and instruments related to the ozone disinfection system shall be properly calibrated prior to testing. The following shall be demonstrated as a minimum during a range of plant effluent flows that vary between 2.2 mgd and 28.8 mgd during the test period: 1) Provide and verify the delivery of a nominal capacity of 585 pounds per 24-hour day of 10 percent ozone (weight basis) to the point(s) of application. 2) Provide and verify the delivery of a minimum 10:1 turndown capability in ozone delivery rate (based upon the nominal capacity) to the point(s) of application. 3) Monitor and record the residual ozone concentration at two (2) locations in the Chlorine Contact Basin downstream of the point of application at four (4) hour intervals. 4) Comply with the following regulatory disinfection requirements as determined by daily grab samples taken at the same time each day at the plant effluent weir: a) Monthly Geometric Mean: 200 colony -forming units/100 mL (fecal coliform bacteria). b) 7 -Day Geometric Mean: 400 colony -forming units/ 100 mL (fecal coliform bacteria) 5) Measure the following: a) Log -removal of fecal coliform bacteria versus ozone dose applied. b) Log -removal of fecal coliform bacteria versus ozone residual. c) Decay rate of ozone following application. 6) The Owner shall perform the following activities as part of the process optimization and performance demonstration tests: a) Plant effluent and sidestream flow rates shall be recorded daily during all testing. b) At the start of testing and during the entire test period, all ozone disinfection system instrument readings shall be observed and recorded every four hours. c) The ozone disinfection system instrumentation and control systems shall be checked for satisfactory local and remote operation conformance with the Specifications. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 40 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 d) All other information that is required for testing by the System Supplier's field rep shall be obtained, checked and recorded. 7) The Owner shall collect samples taken at the plant effluent weir on a daily basis and shall have each sample tested for the following parameters: a) Total suspended solids (TSS); 24-hour composite sample. b) Carbonaceous biochemical oxygen demand; 24-hour composite sample (cBOD5). c) Ammonia nitrogen; 24-hour composite sample d) Total phosphorus (TP); 24-hour composite sample e) Wastewater temperature (Degrees F); grab sample f) Wastewater pH; grab sample g) Fecal coliform bacteria (filter effluent upstream of ozone dosage point and at plant effluent weir); grab samples h) Escherichia coliform bacteria; grab sample 8) The Owner shall forward all data collected to the System Supplier's rep and the Engineer. 4. Test Reports: a. The System Supplier shall submit to the Owner three (3) copies of a written report within 30 days after completion of the mechanical/electrical and performance demonstration tests, presenting the results and conclusions of the testing. b. The information collected shall be used as a basis for determining the conformance with performance criteria and acceptability of the ozone disinfection system. C. The report shall include all data collected during the tests, including a certified letter that states that all equipment components comprising the ozone disinfection system have met specified design, performance and capacity requirements and have been: PW/WBG/399884 JANUARY 12, 2015 1) Properly installed. 2) In accurate alignment. 3) Are free from undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 4) Successfully operated under typical (i.e. average flow conditions) and full load (i.e. peak flow) conditions. 5) Performance tested properly. 6) Compliance with design intent. OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 444256.18-41 399884C.GN1 3.04 7) Include the following in the test reports: a) Graphs of log -removal of fecal coliform bacteria versus ozone dose. b) Graphs of log -removal of fecal coliform bacteria versus ozone residual. c) Graphs of ozone decay. 5. In the event that the ozone disinfection system does not meet the requirements of the specifications during the testing, the System Supplier shall be permitted to make adjustments as deemed necessary and as acceptable to the Owner. Following adjustments, the 28 consecutive day test shall be repeated at no additional cost to the Owner. 6. Any cost associated with modifying equipment, replacing equipment, furnishing additional equipment or subsequent re -testing shall be at the System Supplier's expense. 7. In the event that the ozone disinfection system does not achieve the specified disinfection performance following re -testing, the ozone disinfection system may be subject to rejection, removal and replacement. 8. The Owner may waive re -testing for any reason that is beneficial to the Owner. SUPPLEMENTS A. The requirements contained in the Supplements listed below following "End of Section," are the responsibility of the Contractor and are part of this Specification. 1. Supplement 1 - Additional Functional Requirements. 2. Supplement 2 - Data Exchange Tables. END OF SECTION OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 - 42 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 SUPPLEMENT 1 OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM — ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS AMBIENT OZONE DETECTION — SIGNAL REQUIREMENTS The concentration of ozone in the ambient air will be measured by the instruments AE/AIT- 08-01 and AE/AIT-08-02. Each instrument will supply three signals to the control interface at TJB-08-01 and FP -08-01 as described below: 1. 4-20mA analog signal (AIT -08-01, AIT -08-02) — Ozone Concentration: The analog output provided by the detection instrument will be routed to TJB-08-01 and relayed to PLC -08-01 from the TJB. 2. Alarm Contact 1 (AAH-08-01, AAH-08-02) — High Ozone Concentration Alarm: The detection instrument will provide an alarm contact that energizes once a high ozone concentration is detected. The high concentration alarm setpoint will be set at 0.1 ppm on the instrument. The signal will be routed to TJB-08-01 and relayed to PLC - 08 -01 from the TJB. The contact will de -energize once the concentration has dropped below the high alarm setpoint. 3. Alarm Contact 2 (AAHH-08-01, AAHH-08-02) — High -High Ozone Concentration Alarm: The detection instrument will provide an alarm contact that energizes once a high -high ozone concentration is detected. The high -high concentration alarm setpoint will be set at 0.3 ppm on the instrument. The signal will be routed to TJB- 08-01 and relayed to RIO -08-01 from the TJB. The contact will de -energize once the concentration has dropped below the high -high alarm setpoint. 4. Terminal Junction Box (TJB) will be hardwired so that all chlorine building alarm beacons and alarm horns (AAH-08-OX, X=1-6) activate simultaneously if one of the following conditions are met: a. ASH -08-01 or ASH -08-02 is in the alarm state. b. ASHH-08-01 or ASHH-08-02 is in the alarm state. c. RIO -08-01 output "High Ozone Concentration" is energized (additional requirements described below). PW/WBG/399884 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.18 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 1 399884C.GN1 AMBIENT OZONE DETECTION — PLC CONTROL The remote I/O (RIO) will receive inputs from each detection instrument and relay the signals to the PLC via Ethernet. The PLC will convert the signal to appropriate engineering units. The high concentration alarm setpoint will be set at 0.1 ppm, and the high -high concentration alarm setpoint will be set at 0.3 ppm in the PLC logic, with operator -adjustable time delays and deadbands on each alarm. For control purposes, if the two instrument readings are unequal, then the higher value will be used. Additionally, provide operator - adjustable time delays for each alarm latch from the detection instruments. Issue a "High Ozone Concentration" PLC output to TJB-08-01 if the ozone concentration value is greater than or equal to 0.1 ppm. Begin a "Master Shutdown" sequence if the ozone concentration value is greater than or equal to 0.3 ppm. The PLC will issue a "High Ozone Concentration" output to TJB-08-01 to request ventilation if any of the following conditions are met: The ozone concentration value is greater than or equal to 0.1 ppm and the programmed delay timer has expired. 2. ASH -08-01 or ASH -08-02 is in the alarm state. 3. ASHH-08-01 or ASHH-08-02 is in the alarm state. Additionally, the PLC will issue a "Master Shutdown" sequence if any of the following conditions are met: 1. The ozone concentration value is greater than or equal to 0.3 ppm and the programmed delay timer has expired. 2. ASHH-08-01 or ASHH-08-02 is in the alarm state. Functional requirements of the Master Shutdown sequence are described later in this section. BACKUP VENTILATION CONTROL The backup exhaust fan, EF -2, will only run if one of the following conditions are met: 2. High Ozone Concentration: a. ASH -08-01 or ASH -08-02 is in the alarm state. ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 2 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GN1 b. ASHH-08-01 or ASHH-08-02 is in the alarm state. c. RIO -08-01 output "High Ozone Concentration" is energized. 3. Thermostat temperature switch is energized. The logic described above will be hardwired in TJB-08-01. For additional ventilation requirements, refer to [INSERT HVAC SECTION HERE] OZONE SYSTEM — MASTER SHUTDOWN The master shutdown sequence is intended to shut down ozone generation equipment if the ambient air ozone concentration exceeds the defined safety limits. The PLC will issue a "Master Shutdown" signal to the ozone generation PLCs 08-52-01 and 08-52-02 via Ethernet as shown on the Data Exchange Table. Each ozone generation system PLC will perform the following actions if a "Master Shutdown" signal is received. 1. Close all control valves. 2. De -energize all digital outputs. 3. Zero all analog control signals to process equipment. 4. Maintain all analog outputs issued for monitoring purposes. After the ozone generation equipment has shutdown, the PLC will de -energize the "Run Permissive" digital output routed to oxygen concentrator panels LCP-08-51-01, LCP-08-51- 02, and LCP-08-51-03. Each oxygen concentration control unit will perform the following actions if the "Run Permissive" signal is received. 1. Shut down inlet compressor. 2. Close all control valves. PW/WBG/399884 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS JANUARY 12, 2015 44 42 56.18 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 3 399884C.GN1 3. De -energize all digital outputs. 4. Zero all analog control signals to process equipment. 5. Maintain all analog outputs issued for monitoring purposes. PLC -08-01 will log each Master Shutdown sequence triggered and will relay the alarm to the SCADA system as shown on the Data Exchange Table. Remain in the Master Shutdown state until the reset sequence described below is complete. OZONE SYSTEM — RESET SEQUENCE AFTER MASTER SHUTDOWN After a Master Shutdown is triggered, the ozone generation process will not resume until the alarm state is inactive and the operator has pressed the reset button. The reset button HS -08- 01 will be provided on the panel face of the TJB. The reset button will be hardwired to perform the following actions, depending on the alarm state of the ozone monitoring system: If any alarm relay in the TJB is active, pushing the reset button will silence the alarm horns only. 2. If no alarm state is present, pushing the reset button will silence the alarm horns and turn off the indicating lights. Additionally, the reset button will issue a "Restart Permissive" signal to the PLC in order to startup the ozone equipment affected by the Master Shutdown sequence. The PLC will log each "Restart Permissive" entry and relay the signal to the plant SCADA system. END OF ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS PW/WBG/399884 44 42 56.18 SUPPLEMENT 1 - 4 JANUARY 12, 2015 399884C.GNl SUPPLEMENT 2 OZONE SYSTEM DATA EXCHANGE TABLES TABLE 1 - PLC-08-01/RIO-08-01 ETHERNET DATA EXCHANGE TABLE Equipment Ta Description Data Type Read/Write Comments LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Solenoid Valve I Open Boot Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Solenoid Valve 2 Open Boot Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Solenoid Valve 3 Open Boot Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Ozone Destruct Unit Running Boot Read Ozone Generator I Ozone Destruct Unit Low Temperature LCP-08-52-01 Alarm Boot Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Ozone Destruct Unit Failure Boot Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 System Fault Boot Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Solenoid Valve 4 Open Boot Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Solenoid Valve 5 Open Boot Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Solenoid Valve 6 Open Boot Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Ozone Destruct Unit Running Boot Read Ozone Generator 2 Ozone Destruct Unit Low Temperature LCP-08-52-02 Alarm Boot Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Ozone Destruct Unit Failure Boot Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 System Fault Boot Read VFD-08-54-01 Liquid Supply Pump 1 Power On Status Boot Read VFD-08-54-01 Liquid Supply Pump I Run Status Boot Read VFD-08-54-01 Liquid Supply Pump 1 Fault Boot Read VFD-08-54-02 Liquid Supply Pump 2 Power On Status Boot Read VFD-08-54-02 Liquid Supply Pump 2 Run Status Boot Read VFD-08-54-02 Liquid Supply Pump 2 Fault Boot Read VFD-08-54-03 Liquid Supply Pump 3 Power On Status Boot Read VFD-08-54-03 Liquid Supply Pump 3 Run Status Boot Read VFD-08-54-03 Liquid Supply Pump 3 Fault Boot Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Master Start Sequence Boot Write LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator I Master Shutdown Sequence Boot Write LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Master Start Sequence Boot Write LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Master Shutdown Sequence Boot Write VFD-08-54-01 Liquid Supply Pump 1 Run Command Boot Write VFD-08-54-02 Liquid Supply Pump 2 Run Command Boot Write VFD-08-54-03 Liquid Supply Pump 3 Run Command Boot Write LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator I Chilled Water Supply Pressure Real Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Chilled Water Return Pressure Real Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator I Chilled Water Temperature Real Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator I Oxygen Concentration Real Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Oxygen Pressure Real Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Ozone Pressure Real Read LCP-08-52-01 Ozone Generator 1 Ozone Concentration Real Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Chilled Water Supply Pressure Real Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Chilled Water Return Pressure Real Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Chilled Water Temperature Real Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Oxygen Concentration Real Read LCP-18-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Oxygen Pressure Real Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Ozone Pressure Real Read LCP-08-52-02 Ozone Generator 2 Ozone Concentration Real Read VFD-08-54-01 Liquid Supply Pump I Speed Feedback Real Read VFD-08-54-02 Liquid Supply Pump 2 Speed Feedback Real Read VFD-08-54-03 Liquid Supply Pump 3 Speed Feedback Real Read VFD-08-54-01 Liquid Supply Pump 1 Speed Setpoint Real Write VFD-08-54-02 Liquid Supply Pump 2 Speed Setpoint Real Write VFD-08-54-03 Liquid Supply Pump 3 Speed Setpoint Real Write PW/WBG/399884 1/12/2015 PLC-08-01/RIO-08-01 ETHERNET DATA EXCHANGE TABLE 44 42 56.18 SUPPLEMENT 2 399884C.GNI Notes: l.) The data addresses listed are for reference purposes and do not necessarily reflect the actual tag addresses selected for programming completion. Ozone System Supplier will provide a final set of database addresses for the Owner SCADA system to interface with the Master Control Panel PLC. 2.) The "Read/Write" designation refers to the action of the Master Control Panel PLC in Table 1 and the action of the SCADA system in Table 2. For example, if an address is marked 'Read" in Table 2, then the SCADA system will read the value from the MCP PLC database. 3.) The above data tables outline the minimum requirements of the Ethernet data exchange network. Provide additional data as required to ensure complete functionality of the ozone system. PW/WBG/399884 PLC-08-01/RIO-08-01 ETHERNET DATA EXCHANGE TABLE 1/12/2015 44 42 56.18 SUPPLEMENT 2 DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY) EXHIBIT 4 lvv,��wI I'r� r Myi N ARKANSAS NTS NOLAND OZONE DISINFEG I FAYETTEVI LLE SEPTEMBI BID S N VICINITY MAP O NTS Park CC =� mi Fn -. Y sa r, ttz nrEira �.. t� 4 DonW. lieyrzoldaald nos 350 �t Razorback Stadium Qt -= a Fayetteville W i irs st c t;;r 169 N VICINITY MAP O NTS $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI 1 ( 2 I 3 INDEX OF DRAWINGS PARAMETER SHEET NO. DWG NO. DESCRIPTION PLANT DESIGN PLANT MAXIMI GENERAL DISINFECTION 1 2 G-1 G-2 COVERSHEET INDEX TO DRAWINGS NPDESDISINFI 3 G-3 ABBREVIATIONS 4 G-4 GENERAL AND CIVIL LEGEND AND NOTES OZONE PRODL 5 G-5 STRUCTURAL NOTES NO. 1 6 G-6 STRUCTURAL NOTES NO.2 7 G-7 STRUCTURAL NOTES NO. 3 MASS 8 9 G-8 G-9 MECHANICAL LEGEND AND NOTES HVAC LEGEND AND NOTES VOLUME 10 11 G-10 G-11 ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES SHEET NO. 1 ELECTRICAL LEGEND AND NOTES SHEET NO. 2 OZONE C( 12 13 G-12 G-13 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL LEGEND SHEET NO. 1 NSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL LEGEND SHEET NO. 2 OXYGEN PROC CIVIL MASS 14 C-1 SITE PLAN VOLUME OZONE DOSAG 15 C-2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN STRUCTURAL @ DESIW 16 8-1 CHLORINATION BUILDING - FLOOR PLAN @ MAXIMI 17 18 S-2 S-3 CHLORINATION BUILDING - SECTIONS AND DETAILS CONTACT BASIN - DEMOLITION PLAN OZONE DISSOL 19 20 S-4 S-5 CONTACT BASIN - LOWER PLAN AND DETAILS CONTACT BASIN - SECTION AND DETAILS NUMBER( 21 22 S-6 S-7 CONTACT BASIN - PARTIAL TOP PLAN AND SECTION DOOR AND WALL DETAILS RATED FL 23 24 S-8 S-9 STANDARD DETAILS STANDARD DETAILS DESIGN S PROCESS/MECHANICAL SATURATI 25 M-1 DISINFECTION PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM PUMP PRI 26 M-2 OXYGEN/OZONE PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM .TARGET C 27 28 M-3 M4 CHLORINATION BUILDING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PLAN CHLORINATION BUILDING SECTIONS OZONE DESTR 29 30 M-5 M-6 CONTACT BASIN LOWER PLAN CONTACT BASIN UPPER PLAN NUMBER( 31 32 M-7 M-8 CONTACT BASIN SECTIONS CONTACT BASIN DETAILS RATED CF 33 34 M-9 M-10 STANDARD DETAILS SIGNAGE DETAILS OZONE GENER HEATING & VENTILATING NUMBER( 35 H-1 CHLORINATION BUILDING - HVAC PLAN RATED Ot 36 37 H-2 H-3 CHLORINATION BUILDING - HVAC DETAILS AND SCHEDULES CHLORINATION BUILDING - HVAC SCHEDULES TOTAL QU - - - - COOLANT ELECTRICAL AIR-COOLED C 38 39 E-1 E-2 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE DIAGRAM NUMBER( 40 41 E-3 E4 ELECTRICAL CHLORINATION BUILDING POWER PLAN ELECTRICAL CHLORINATION BUILDING LIGHTING PLAN CAPACM 42 43 E-5 E-6 ELECTRICAL CONTACT BASIN UPPER PLAN ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES CONDEN: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL TOTAL AIF OXYGEN CONC 44 1-1 P&ID- OXYGENCONCENTRATION 45 1-2 P&ID- OZONEGENERATION .NUMBER( 46 1-3 P&ID - OZONE DISSOLUTION AND INJECTION - - 47 1-4 CONTROL SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM RATED O) 48 49 1-5 1-6 STANDARD DETAILS STANDARD DETAILS OXYGEN( 50 1-7 STANDARD DETAILS OXYGENS NUM DIME CAP. $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI A AMMETER, AMPERES CT CERAMIC TILE G, GND GROUND M&BH AS ANCHOR BOLT CT CURRENTTRANSFORMER GA GAUGE MA ABDN ABANDON CTR CENTER GAL GALLON MAS AC ALTERNATING CURRENT CTR'D CENTERED GALV GALVANIZED MATL AC ASPHALTIC CEMENT CTSK COUNTERSUNK GB GRAB BAR MAX ACI AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE CU CUBIC GC GROOVED COUPLING MB ACST ACOUSTICAL CU FT CUBIC FOOT GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER MC ACU AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSING UNIT CU IN CUBIC INCH GFR GOUND FAULT RELAY MC AD AREA DRAIN CU YD CUBIC YARD GL GLASS MCC ADD ADDITIONAL CUH COPPER TUBING, HARD DRAWN GPD GALLONS PER DAY MECH AFD ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE CV CHECK VALVE GPH GALLONS PER HOUR MET AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR CWR CABINET DOOR MOUNTED GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE MFD AG ACOUSTICAL GLASS WASTE RECEPTACLE GRTG GRATING MFR AGGR AGGREGATE GSP GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE MGD AHR ANCHOR D DRAIN GV GATE VALVE MH AISC AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF D PENNY NAIL SIZE GVL GRAVEL MIN STEEL CONSTRUCTION DAS DATA ACQUISTION SYSTEM GWB GYPSUM WALL BOARD MIR AL (ALUM) ALUMINUM DBA DEFORMED BAR ANCHOR GYP GYPSUM MISC ALKY ALKALINITY DBL DOUBLE MJ ALTN, (ALT) ALTERNATE DC DIRECT CURRENT H HORN OR HOWLER MLO AM AUTO -MANUAL DEG DEGREE HAS HEADED ANCHOR STUD MMP ANDZ ANODIZE DET DETAIL HB HOSE BIB M.O. APPROX APPROXIMATE OF DOUGLAS FIR HC HOLLOW CORE MP APVD APPROVED OF DRINKING FOUNTAIN HD HUB DRAIN MPU ARCH ARCHITECTURAL DHEC DEPT OF HEALTH AND HDR HEADER MTD AR ANALOG RELAY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL HDW HARDWARE MTS ARV AIR RELEASE VALVE DDI DROP INLET HESR HYPALON ELASTIC SHEET ROOFING MTS ASU AIR SUPPLY UNIT DI DUCTILE IRON HGL HYDRAULIC GRADE LINE MV ATS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH DIA, Q DIAMETER HGT HEIGHT MWS AUTO AUTOMATIC DIAG DIAGONAL HH HANDHOLE AUX AUXILIARY DIP DUCTILE IRON PIPE HID HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE N AVG AVERAGE DIR DIRECTION HK HOOK N/A AVRV AIR VACUUM RELEASE VALVE DISCH DISCHARGE HM HOLLOW METAL NIC AT DOL DIRECT -ON-LINE HOA HAND -OFF -AUTO N/O DR DRAIN HOR HAND -OFF -REMOTE N, NEL DS DOWNSPOUT HORIZ HORIZONTAL NA B BELL DWG DRAWING HP HORSEPOWER NO (B) BRONZE TINT DWN DOWN H.P., HPT HIGH POINT NGS S B/ BOTTOM OF DELTA HPS HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM NIC SAL BALANCE HR HOSE RACK NO, # BD BUTTERFLY DAMPER E EAST HRDN HARDENER NP BF BLIND FLANGE E EMPTY HSPS HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION NPT BFV BUTTERFLY VALVE EA EACH HV HOSE VALVE NS BL BASELINE EE EMERGENCY EYEWASH HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING AND NTS BFP BACKFLOW PREVENTER EF EACH FACE AIR CONDITIONING BLDG BUILDING EF EXHAUST FAN HW HEADWALL O TO BLK BLOCK EJ EXPANSION JOINT HWL HIGH WATER LEVEL OA BM BEAM EL, ELEV ELEVATION OC BM BENCHMARK ELB ELBOW IC INTERRUPTING CAPACITY OC BOT, (BOTT), B/ BOTTOM EIFS EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM ID INSIDE DIAMETER OCA BRG BEARING ELC ELECTRICAL LOAD CENTER IE INVERT ELEVATION OCR BSP BLACK STEEL PIPE ELEC ELECTRIC, ELECTRICAL IF INSIDE FACE OD BV BALL VALVE ENGR ENGINEER IG INSULATING GLASS OH BVc BEGINNING OF VERTICAL CIRCUIT EOG EDGE OF GUTTER IN INCH OL EDP EDGE OF PAVEMENT INCAND INCANDESCENT 00 EP EDGE OF PAVING INJS INJECTIONS ODA C CONDUIT EP EXPLOSION PROOF INST INSTANTANEOUS OOR "C DEGREE CELSIUS EQ EQUAL INSTM INSTRUMENT, INSTRUMENTATION OP C -C CENTER TO CENTER EQ SP EQUALLY SPACED INSUL INSULATION OPER CAB CABINET EQPT, (EQUIP) EQUIPMENT INVT INVERT OPNG CAR CARPET ETM ELAPSED TIME METER IRRIG IRRIGATION OSc CS CATCH BASIN EVC END OF VERTICAL CURVE ITG INSULATED TEMPERED GLASS OSD CB CIRCUIT BREAKER EW EACH WAY IU INTAKE UNIT OZ CC CONTROL CABLE EXH EXHAUST IW IRRIGATION WELL CCP CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL EXP EXPANSION P CCS CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM EXP EXPOSED J, JB JUNCTION BOX PAV CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE EXP AS EXPANSION ANCHOR BOLT JAN JANITOR PB CHAN,C CHANNEL (BEAM) EXPJT EXPANSION JOINT JOT JUNCTION PC CHDPE CORRUGATED HIGH DENSITY EXST, (EXIST) EXISTING JT JOINT PC POLYETHYLENE PIPE EXT EXTERIOR PE CHEM CHEMICAL K KEY INTERLOCK PED CHKRD CHECKERED "F DEGREE FAHRENHEIT KIP THOUSAND POUNDS PEP CI CAST IRON F, FU FUSE KIT KITCHEN PH CIP CAST IRON PIPE FAI FRESH AIR INLET KSK KITCHEN SINK PI CIPS CAST IRON SOIL PIPE FC FLEXIBLE CONDUIT KV KILOVOLTS PJF CJ CONSTRUCTION JOINT FCA FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTER KVA KILOVOLT AMPERES PL CJB CHEMICAL JUNCTION BOX FCL2 FREE CHLORINE RESIDUAL KVAR KILOVOLT AMPERES REACTIVE PL CKT CIRCUIT FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT PLAS CL CENTERLINE FCTY FACTORY KW KILOWATT PLC CLDI CEMENT LINED DUCTILE IRON PIPE FD FLOOR DRAIN PLC -X CLG CEILING FON FOUNDATION L ANGLE, LENGTH CLO CLOSET FOR FEEDER LA LIGHTNING ARRESTER PLYWI CLR CLEAR FEXT FIRE EXTINGUISHER LAB LABORATORY PNL CL2 CHLORINE FF FINISHED FLOOR LAM LAMINATE PP CMP CORRUGATED METAL PIPE FG FINISH GRADE LAT LATITUDE PPL CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT FH FIRE HYDRANT LAV LAVATORY PRCSI CO CLEANOUT FIG FIGURE LB POUND PREFF COL COLUMN FL FLOW LINE LB/CU FT POUNDS PER CUBIC FOOT PRES CONC CONCRETE FLG FLANGE LC LIGHTING CONTACTOR PRI CONDTN CONDITIONED FL (FLR) FLOOR LF LINEAR FEET PRM CONN CONNECTION FLEX FLEXIBLE LG LONG PROJ CONST CONSTRUCT FLH FLATHEAD LH LEFT HAND PROP CONT CONTINUOUS, CONTINUATION FLTR FILTER LHR LEFT HAND REVERSE PS CONTR CONTRACTOR FLUOR FLUORESCENT L.L., LL LIQUID LEVEL PSF COORD COORDINATE FNSH FINISH LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL PSI CP CENTER PIVOT FOC FIBER OPTIC CABLE LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL PSIG CP -X CONTROL PANEL NO. X FP FIELD PANEL - LNTL LINTEL PT CPLG COUPLING FPS FEET PER SECOND LONG LONGITUDINAL PT CPRSR COMPRESSOR FP -W -X FIELD PANEL NO. WX LOS LOCK -OUT STOP PUSHBUTTON PT CPT CONTROL POWER TRANFORMER FR FORWARD REVERSE LP LIGHT POLE PTAC CPVC CHLORINATED PVC FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC L.P., LPT LOW POINT PTD OR CONTROL RELAY FS FAR SIDE LR LATCHING RELAY PV CRS COLD ROLLED STEEL FSHS FOLDING SHOWER SEAT LR LOCAL -REMOTE PVC CRS PVC COATED RIGID STEEL FT FOOT OR FEET LR LONG RADIUS PVI CS CUP SINK FTG FOOTING LSHH LEVEL SWITCH HIGH -HIGH PVMT CSATC CERAMIC SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL FU FIXTURE UNIT LTG LIGHTS OR LIGHTING PVRV TILE CEILING FVNR FULL VOLTAGE NON -REVERSING LWL LOW WATER LEVEL PVT FVR FULL VOLTAGE REVERSING LYRS LAYERS FWD FORWARD OT $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl SECTION / DETAIL DESIGNATIONS 2 DETAIL SCALE ON DRAWING WHERE SECTION SECTION (LETTER) OR OR DETAIL IS TAKEN: DETAIL (NUMERAL) EXISTING DESIGNATION DRAWING NUMBERS) DRAWING NUMBER WHERE TAKEN SPOT ELEVATION 1 WHERE SHOWN CONTOUR LINE 100-A-1 01OA1 DRAWING NUMBER ---" - -- (REPLACED WITH A LINE DRAINAGE WAY OR DITCH IF TAKEN AND SHOWN ce OR ca ON SAME SHEET) B SECTION SCALE ON DRAWING WHERE SECTION 100-S-3001 IS SHOWN: Q OR Q MANHOLE DRAWING NUMBERS) ®E ELECTRICAL MANHOLE WHERE TAKEN ELECTRIC HANDHOLE 2 DETAIL SCALE ON DRAWING WHERE DETAIL IS SHOWN: 200-M-10B10A EXISTING THIS CONTRACT DRAWING NUMBERS) WHERE TAKEN DRAWING TITLE SCALE ON DRAWING WHERE ONLY A TITLE IS REQUIRED WITH NO REFERENCE (eg: ELEVATIONS) SECTION CALLOUT WHERE B SECTION IS ON THE SAME _ SHEET AND CUT EXTENDS TO A FIXED LIMIT A& jok B B SECTION CALLOUT WHERE Nh SECTION IS ON ANOTHER 450-S-1002 450-S-1002 SHEET AND CUT EXTENDS �-.1 %—. THROUGHOUT ENTIRE SHEET OGRID LINE INDICATOR OKEYNOTE NUMBER Qt REVISION / ADDENDA NUMBER N O NORTH ARROW; CAN MODIFIED TO INCLUDE MAGNETIC NORTH ALONG WITH PROJECT NORTH DESIGN DETAIL DESIGNATION DESIGN DETAIL DESIGNATION 1234 56 (NUMERAL) SHOWN ON DESIGN DETAIL DRAWING(S) NOTES 1. ALL DESIGN DETAILS ARE TYPICAL AND MUST BE USED IF DESIGN DETAIL DESIGNATION IS NOT SHOWN 2. THE TERM STANDARD DETAIL, OR A FORM OF IT, IS SYNONYMOUS WITH DESIGN DETAIL. THE DESIGN DETAILS REPRESENT THE CHARACTER AND NATURE OF THE WORK REQUIRED THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT. ALL ASSOCIATED WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DESIGN DETAILS SHOWN WHETHER THE DETAILS ARE SPECIFICALLY REFERENCED OR NOT. $PWURL pw:uprogectwise.cnzm.com:cnzmniLL_VVMuivocumencsiaeao°vaspace; aspace;rMTM I f MVI CIVIL LEGEND EXISTING THIS CONTRACT ® 158.5 SPOT ELEVATION / 156 ✓ CONTOUR LINE 3:1 EMBANKMENT AND SLOPE ---" - -- --- - .... - - DRAINAGE WAY OR DITCH .. ce OR ca CATCH BASIN OR INLET ® TRENCH DRAIN AAA OR i SIGN ... Q OR Q MANHOLE ®E ELECTRICAL MANHOLE ® H ELECTRIC HANDHOLE POST OR GUARD POST GUY ANCHOR FIRE HYDRANT UTILITY POLE LIGHT POLE o BM BENCH MARK Q SURVEY CONTROL POINT OR POINT OF INTERSECTION / BRUSH/TREE LINE TREE PROPERTY LINE -- - --- --- -- — — — — — — — CENTER LINE, BUILDING, ROAD, ETC. — — — — -- STAGING OR WORK AREA LIMITS N 1000.00 STRUCTURE, BUILDING OR FACILITY E 1000.00 LOCATION POINT -COORDINATES ® B-1 BORING LOCATION AND NUMBER TP -2 TEST PIT LOCATION AND NUMBER Q P-3 PIEZOMETER LOCATION AND NO. Xx )OOOOOOOE OR"" -mac OR DEMOLITION OR y OR STRUCTURE, BUILDING OR FACILITY ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT r:. r GRAVEL SURFACING CONCRETE PAVEMENT CURB CURB AND GUTTER SINGLE SWING GATE DOUBLE SWING GATE --- --- x x SLIDING GATE GUARD RAIL - r -- ---- X X CHAIN LINK FENCE - ---- ARCHITECTURAL FENCE WIRE FENCE CULVERT $PWURL pw:uprogectwise.cnzm.com:cnzmniLL_VVMuivocumencsiaeao°vaspace; aspace;rMTM I f MVI 1 1 2 DESIGN CRITERIA 1. APPLICABLE CODE: 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC), AS AMENDED BY THE STATE OF ARKANSAS AND ALL OTHER APPLICABLE LOCAL AGENCIES. #3 2. REFER TO THE DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL AND SPECIFIC STRUCTURE LOADINGS AND REQUIREMENTS. 3. ROOF LOADS: GROUND SNOW LOAD, Pg = 5 PSF LIVE LOAD = 20 PSF DEFLECTION CRITERIA FOR ROOF FRAMING MEMBERS: TOTALLOAD U180 LIVE LOAD U240 FLOOR PLATES AND GRATING 0360 WHERE L IS THE MEMBER'S SPAN LENGTH 2'-0" 2'• 4. FLOOR LIVE LOADS: EMBEDMENT LENGTH PROCESS AREAS / CHLORINE BUILDING 250 PSF CORRIDORS, EXITS, STAIRS 100 PSF WALKWAYS AND ELEVATED PLATFORMS 50 PSF 5. WIND LOAD: 2'-4" 3' ASCE7 METHOD 2 BASIC WIND SPEED (3 -SECOND GUST) = 120 MPH EXPOSURE =C INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT = 10.55 (UON) OCCUPANCY CATEGORY =11 I = 1.15 6. SOIL DESIGN PARAMETERS: A. NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURES; SPREAD FOOTING, SLAB ON GRADE ON STRUCTURAL FILL = 3,000 PSF 7. FROST DEPTH: = 20 INCHES GENERAL INFORMATION 1. FOR ABBREVIATIONS NOT LISTED, SEE ASME Y14.38 "ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS: PUBLICATION AS DISTRIBUTED BY THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME). 2. DESIGN DETAILS ARE INTENDED TO BE TYPICAL AND SHALL APPLY TO SIMILAR SITUATIONS OCCURRING THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT, WHETHER OR NOT THEY ARE INDIVIDUALLY CALLED OUT. 3. DETAILING AND DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURES SHOWN ARE BASED ON AS -BUILT DESIGN DRAWINGS, AND DO NOT NECESSARILY REPRESENT THE AS -CONSTRUCTED CONDITIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS AND DETAILING OF THE EXISTING STRUCTURES PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF ADJACENT FRAMING OR CONNECTIONS OR SUPPORTS THAT ARE AFFECTED BY THE EXISTING STRUCTURE. 4. VERIFY FINAL OPENING DIMENSIONS IN WALLS, SLABS, AND DECKS WITH OTHER DISCIPLINE DRAWINGS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OF THESE ELEMENTS. 5. FOR NUMBER, TYPE, SIZE, ARRANGEMENT, AND/OR LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT PADS SEE OTHER DISCIPLINE DRAWINGS. COORDINATE WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER PRIOR TO PLACING SLABS, WALLS AND FOUNDATIONS. COORDINATE PIPING OPENINGS WITH OTHER DISCIPLINE DRAWINGS. 6. STRUCTURAL MEMBERS SHALL NOT BE CUT OR MODIFIED FOR PIPES, DUCTS, ETC, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DETAILED OR APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE ENGINEER. 7. VISITS TO THE JOB SITE BY THE ENGINEER TO OBSERVE THE CONSTRUCTION DO NOT IN ANY WAY MEAN THAT ENGINEER IS GUARANTOR OF CONSTRUCTOR'S WORK, NOR RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COMPREHENSIVE OR SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, COORDINATION, SUPERVISION, OR SAFETY AT THE JOB SITE. SPECIAL INSPECTION OBSERVATIONS AND TESTING 1. SPECIAL INSPECTION (OWNER FURNISHED) IS REQUIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH IBC SECTIONS 109 AND 1704 AS INDICATED IN THE STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PLAN ON DRAWINGS G-6 & G-7. 2. SPECIFIED TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED. SPECIFIED LABORATORY TEST MIXES SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. 3. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS IS NOT REQUIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH IBC SECTION 1709. FOUNDATIONS 1. EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE SHORED TO PREVENT SUBSIDENCE OR DAMAGE TO ADJACENT EXISTING STRUCTURES, STREETS, UTILITIES, ETC. 3 CONCRETE REI 1. MINIMUM REINFORCING FOR ALL CONCRETE WALLS ANC WALL THICKNESS REINF EACH WAY 6" #4@12" 8" #5@12" 10" #4@12" 12" #5@12" PROVIDE LARGER SIZES AND MORE REINFORCING IN S& THE DETAILS ON THE DRAWINGS OR BY THE SPECIFICAT 2. CLEARANCE FOR REINFORCEMENT BARS, UNLESS SHOV WHEN PLACED ON GROUND: EXPOSED TO OZONE OR OZONATED WATER: TOP SLAB TOP REINFORCEMENT: ALL OTHER CONCRETE SURFACES: 3. 90 DEGREE BENDS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN, SHALL 4. LOCATE SLAB AND BEAM TOP BAR SPLICES AT MIDSPAN 5. REINFORCEMENT BENDS AND LAPS, UNLESS OTHERWISI MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS: CONCRETE DESIGN STRENGTH = 4,000 PSI ** BAR SIZE #3 #4 #5 h LAP SPLICE LENGTH SPACING<6" TOP BAR * 1'-4" 2'-0" T-0" 4'• OTHER BAR 1'4" 1'-7" 2'4" T. SPACINGZ6" TOP BAR * 1'-4" 1'-8" 2'-0" 2'• OTHER BAR 1'-4" 1'-4" 1'-7" V - EMBEDMENT LENGTH SPACING<6" TOP BAR * 1'-0" 1'-7" 2'-4" 3' OTHER BAR V-0" V-3" V-9" 2' SPACING>6" TOP BAR * 1'4" 1'-3" V-7" P- OTHER BAR V-0" 1'-0" V-3" 1'• * I UP BARS SHALL BE Utl-INtU AS ANY MUK14UN I AL I INCHES OF CONCRETE IS CAST IN THE MEMBER BEL HORIZONTAL WALL BARS ARE CONSIDERED TOP BAI ** WHERE 3000 PSI CONCRETE IS USED, INCREASE AB( CONCRE 1. 28 -DAY CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE STRENGTHS: TYPICAL: HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES: CURBS AND SIDEWALKS: CONDUIT ENCASEMENTS: PIPE ENCASEMENTS NOT INTEGRAL WITH FOUNDATIONS: REINFORCING STEEL: 2. TYPICAL: FABRICATION AND PLACEMENT OF REINFORCING STEEL 3. "MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE" AND ACI 301 "SPECIF THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE PLACEMENT OF 4. BOLTS AND INSERTS PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRE NO ALUMINUM CONDUIT OR PRODUCTS CONTAINING ALL 5. CONCRETE SHALL BE EMBEDDED IN THE CONCRETE. CONDUIT SHALL NOT BE PLACED PARALLEL WITH BEAM c 6. INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. STRUCTURAL STEEL AND 1. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWII W -SHAPES MISCELLANEOUS SHAPES INCLUDING ANGLES, CHANNELS, PLATES, ETC. SQUARE OR RECTANGULAR STEEL TUBING STEEL PIPE 2. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECT[ STEEL CONSTRUCTION, CURRENT EDITION, AND CURREI 3. BOLTS SHALL BE HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS CONFORMING' INDICATED OTHERWISE: UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE SLIP CRITICAL ANCHOR BOLTS (AB) STAINLESS STEEL STEEL GALVANIZED STEEL MACHINE BOLTS (MB) 4. ITEMS TO BE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE SHALL BE CLEAN 5. NO HOLES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICALLY DETAILED STEEL MEMBERS. NO CUTTING OR BURNING OF STRUCT APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS GENERALNOTES 1. THE STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PLAN DRAWINGS PROVIDE PROJECT COMPLIANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) CHAPTER 17 FOR SPECIAL INSPECTION, STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION, AND TESTING FOR WIND AND SEISMIC RESISTANCE AS APPLICABLE. THIS INSPECTION IS OWNER FURNISHED. 2. STANDARD SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS, REGARDLESS OF WIND OR SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES, ARE CONTAINED IN TABLE 1. 3. STANDARD TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS ARE CONTAINED IN TABLE 2. 4. FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS, REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 01 45 33, SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING. THESE INCLUDE: A. CONTRACTOR'S REQUIREMENTS TO PROVIDE ACCESS TO THE WORK FOR REQUIRED INSPECTIONS, AND TO PROVIDE NOTICE OF REQUIRED INSPECTIONS. B. DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY USED IN THIS PLAN. SPECIAL INSPECTION 1. SPECIAL INSPECTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH IBC SECTION 1704 TOGETHER WITH LOCAL AND STATE AMENDMENTS. REFER TO THE TABLES CONTAINED ON THESE GENERAL SHEETS FOR PROJECT SPECIFIC INSPECTION TYPES AND FREQUENCIES. 2. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS WILL BE PROVIDED BY A CERTIFIED OR QUALIFIED INSPECTOR AND ASSOCIATED TESTING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN APPROVED ACCREDITED INDEPENDENT AGENCY. THE OWNER SHALL SECURE AND PAY FOR THE SERVICES OF THE AGENCY TO PERFORM ALL SPECIAL INSPECTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE AND PAY FOR THE SERVICES OF AN INDEPENDENT, APPROVED, ACCREDITED THIRD PARTY AGENCY TO PERFORM INSPECTION AND ASSOCIATED TESTS. INSPECTORS FOR EACH SYSTEM AND MATERIAL SHALL BE INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC) CERTIFIED OR OTHERWISE APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL. 3. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL OBSERVE THE INDICATED WORK FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE APPROVED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SUBMIT RECORDS OF INSPECTION. ALL DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF THE CONTRACTOR FOR CORRECTION. 4. SPECIAL INSPECTION AND ASSOCIATED TESTING REPORTS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR, BUILDING OFFICIAL, AND OWNER WITHIN ONE WEEK OF INSPECTION OR WITHIN ONE WEEK OF TEST COMPLETION. INSPECTIONS FOR WHICH REPORTING WILL BE REQUIRED ARE NOTED IN THE TABLES CONTAINED ON THIS PLAN. 5. AT THE CONCLUSION OF CONSTRUCTION, A FINAL REPORT DOCUMENTING REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND CORRECTION OF PREVIOUSLY NOTED DISCREPANCIES WILL BE SUBMITTED. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION 1. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH IBC SECTION1709 IS NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT. $PWURL pw:Hprojectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI 2006 IBC CODE REF SYSTEM REFERENCE S- 1. INSPECTION OF 1704.4, A( REINFORCING STEEL, 1903.1.1907.1, INCLUDING PLACEMENT 19D7.7.1913,4 2. INSPECT BOLTS TO BE 1704.4, INSTALLED IN CONCRETE 1911.5 PRIOR TO AND DURING PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE WHERE ALLOWABLE LOADS HAVE BEEN INCREASED 3. VERIFY USE OF REQUIRED 1704.4, AC DESIGN MIX 1904.2, 1905.2-1905.4, 1913.2, 1913.3 4. AT THE TIME FRESH 1704.4, A: CONCRETE IS PLACED TO 1905.6, 1913.10 A FABRICATE SPECIMENS FOR ACI STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORM SLUMP AND AIR CONTENT TESTS, AND DETERMINE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE CONCRETE 5. INSPECTION OF CONCRETE 1704.4, ACI PLACEMENT FOR PROPER 1905.9, 1905.10, APPLICATION TECHNIQUES 1913.6, 1913.7, 1913.8 6. INSPECTION FOR 1704.4, ACI: MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED 1905.11-1905.13, CURING TEMPERATURE AND 1913.9 TECHNIQUES 7. INSPECT FORMWORK FOR 1906.1 A( SHAPE, LOCATION AND DIMENSIONS OF THE CONCRETE MEMBER BEING FORMED pw:Hprojectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI A 1 I 2 1 3 TABLE 2 TESTING FOR REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTION REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 0145 33 I GFATFCMNICAI_ SECTION 31 23 23, FILL AND CONTRACTORS APPROVED REQUIRED CONTROLLED FILL GRADATION ASTM D422 1704,7 BACKFILL TESTING AGENCY REPORTING TO x SECTION 31 2323, FILL AND CONTRACTOR'S APPROVED DESIGNATED CONTROLLED Fft1 DENSITY ASTM D1556, D2922 2012 IBC CODE BACKFILL TESTING AGENCY DISTRIBUTION MATERIAL TYPE OR SCOPE STANDARD REFERENCE FREQUENCY BY WHOM LIST I GFATFCMNICAI_ CONCRETE SECTION 31 23 23, FILL AND CONTRACTORS APPROVED CONTROLLED FILL GRADATION ASTM D422 1704,7 BACKFILL TESTING AGENCY x x SECTION 31 2323, FILL AND CONTRACTOR'S APPROVED TESTING AGENCY CONTROLLED Fft1 DENSITY ASTM D1556, D2922 1704,7 BACKFILL TESTING AGENCY x ONE SAMPLE PER STRENGTH CONTRACTORS APPROVED CONCRETE ONCE EACH DAY, BUT NOT LESS CONCRETE STRENGTH ASTM C39 1704.4, 1905.6 THAN ONE SAMPLE FOR EACH CONTRACTORS APPROVED x 150 CUBIC YARDS OR 5,000 SFT TESTING AGENCY OF WALLS OR SLABS PLACED ONE SAMPLE PER STRENGTH CONTRACTORS APPROVED CONCRETE SLUMP ASTM C143, C94 1704.4 TEST TESTINGAGENCY x ONE SAMPLE PER STRENGTH CONTRACTOR'S APPROVED CONCRETE AIR CONTENT ASTM C231, C94 1704,4 TEST TESTING AGENCY x ONE SAMPLE PER STRENGTH CONTRACTORS APPROVED CONCRETE TEMPERATURE ASTM C1064 1704,4 TEST TESTING AGENCY x $PWURL pw:Hprojectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI 1 PIPE AND FITTING SYMBOLS DOUBLE LINE SINGLE LINE 2 3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SYMBOLS —1W— EXISTING PIPE —+�- y STRAINER - —+or- ® —Fli4— NEW PIPE j-. FLEXIBLE (ELASTOMER) PIPE CONNECTION ------ -- -+-t++-+- EXISTING PIPE TO BE ABANDONED 4--- THERMOMETER EXISTING PIPE TO BE REMOVED ROTAMETER COOLING WATER SUPPLY -F 77F=�- — CWR— WELDED JOINT --�}---�f- PIG LAUNCHER -- GROOVED END JOINT ------��" SAMPLE FLANGED JOINT — D DRAIN MECHANICAL JOINT CONNECT TO EXISTING BELL & SPIGOT JOINT (LEADED) ACTUATOR SYMBOLS P Z HUB & SPIGOT JOINT ------------���}}}}--------''�� P S (RUBBER GASKET) BALL JOINT ADAPTER SIDE - 4 GROOVED END ADAPTER FLANGE --------��F-���� —iA— FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTER P I P I N —f8— FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTER ��� GATE SYMBOLS WITH THRUST TIES PLAN VIEW 12 T- FLEXIBLE COUPLING SLUICE FLEXIBLE COUPLING WITH ® BUTTERFLY VALV THRUST TIES [;Z�p FLAP MANUA STEEL BELLOWS EXP JOINT �I --�}��-� ELASTOMER BELLOWS EXP JOINT H FABRICATED SLIDE OI ELBOW UP Oi ELBOW DOWN Inl TEE UP lei TEE TEE DOWN -m -3-~I LATERAL UP -+9--I— LATERAL DOWN _p_ CONCENTRIC REDUCER ECCENTRIC REDUCER D— REDUCING BUSHING UNION CAP ANCHOR ELBOW, 90 DEGREE CROSS TEE ELBOW. 45 DEGREE LATERAL 2 3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SYMBOLS VALVI SINGLE -- —+�- y STRAINER - —+or- ® SIGHT GLASS -�4- K -D4- j-. FLEXIBLE (ELASTOMER) PIPE CONNECTION ------ GAUGE WITH COCK -D�- 4--- THERMOMETER Dal - ROTAMETER COOLING WATER SUPPLY — CWR— COOLING WATER RETURN PIG LAUNCHER -- PIPE AND FITTING END PATTERNS CONTR B BELL PE PLAIN END S SPIGOT GE GROOVED END F FLANGE MJ MECHANICAL JOINT PRJ PROPRIETARY RESTRAINED JOINT- EXAMPLE: BUBBLE DESIGNi MJ PE WHERE: $PWURL pwJ/projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI PIG CATCHER PS TYPICAL INSTRUMENT SYMBOL -- 26-1-2 (SEE I&C LEGEND) - —+or- PIPING IDENTIFICATION — 02 — OXYGEN GAS — 03 — OZONE GAS — OG OZONE OFF -GAS — OS OZONE SOLUTION — CWS — COOLING WATER SUPPLY — CWR— COOLING WATER RETURN — LS — LIQUID SUPPLY SA — SAMPLE — D DRAIN CONNECT TO EXISTING ACTUATOR SYMBOLS P Z PNEUMATIC H HYDRAULIC W/POSITIONER P S PNEUMATIC W/SOLENOID T MANUAL ELECTRIC 4 n SOLENOID E Z ELECTRIC Y P I P I N E: GATE SYMBOLS EL VIEW PLAN VIEW 12 T- SLUICE ISI ® BUTTERFLY VALV IJ [;Z�p FLAP MANUA SHEAR W H FABRICATED SLIDE PIPE AND FITTING END PATTERNS CONTR B BELL PE PLAIN END S SPIGOT GE GROOVED END F FLANGE MJ MECHANICAL JOINT PRJ PROPRIETARY RESTRAINED JOINT- EXAMPLE: BUBBLE DESIGNi MJ PE WHERE: $PWURL pwJ/projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI 1 ( 2 _--- 1 3 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SYMBOLS ==I- =:::I'- = = SUPPLY GRILLE OR REGISTER (SG, SR) l 1 ff COMBINATION DISCONNECT AND MOTOR STARTER 3. PROVIDE LINING WHERE SHOWN OR NOTED ON DWGS, AND AS DESCRIBED IN SPECIFICATIONS, 24x16 WEATHER PROOF COMBINATION WP DISCONNECT AND MOTOR STARTER EXHAUST, RETURN, OR TRANSFER GRILLE OR REGISTER (EG, ER, RG, RR, TG, TR) (200) AIR FLOW QUANTITY: 200 SCFM ,y— I� CEILING DIFFUSERS (CD) POINT OF CONNECTION, RENOVATION L CEILING EXHAUST, RETURN AND TRANSFER GRILLES AND REGISTERS (EG, ER, RG, RR, TG, TR) UCF MITERED ELBOW WITH V TURNING VANES ON RADIUS ELBOW FIRE DAMPER FS FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER SMOKE DAMPER 1. RECTANGULAR DUCT 24x16 BALANCING DAMPER MOTORIZED DAMPER M1 BACKDRAFT DAMPER �— DUCT INSPECTION DOOR ID (HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL) J— INCLINED RISE (R) OR DROP (D) ARROW IN DIRECTION OF FLOW 3. FIRST DIMENSION VISIBLE SIDE 45 DEG BRANCH CONNECTION 1. ROUND DUCT WITH BALANCING DAMPER 12X10E 8x8 ECCENTRIC TRANSITION 12x10 6x6 CONCENTRIC TRANSITION FOT TRANSITION, FOT = FLAT ON TOP NET INSIDE, TO INSIDE FACE OF LINER. FOB = FLAT ON BOTTOM ^ ^ FLEX DUCT AND SPIN -IN CONNECTION WITH INTEGRAL BALANCING DAMPER AIR OUT OF OPENING �— AIR INTO OPENING 0 BLAST GATE TRI -CLAMP 3. PROVIDE LINING WHERE SHOWN OR NOTED ON DWGS, AND AS DESCRIBED IN SPECIFICATIONS, 24x16 WEATHER PROOF COMBINATION WP DISCONNECT AND MOTOR STARTER VIBRATION ISOLATOR (200) AIR FLOW QUANTITY: 200 SCFM ,y— PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUG It POINT OF CONNECTION, RENOVATION Q POINT OF REMOVAL, DEMOLITION AD CEILING ACCESS DOOR UCF PROVIDE DOOR UNDERCUT V DOOR GRILLE ON PHOTO NUMBER AND DIRECTION IDENTIFIER FLEXIBLE CONNECTION (FC) FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK (SINGLE LINE) FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK (DOUBLE LINE) 1. RECTANGULAR DUCT 24x16 2. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES 3. FIRST DIMENSION VISIBLE SIDE 1. FLAT -OVAL DUCT 24/16 2. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES 3. FIRST DIMENSION VISIBLE SIDE 1. ROUND DUCT 24 DIA 2. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES 1. INTERNAL INSULATION/SOUND ATTENUATION 2. AS SPECIFIED. DUCT DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE 24x16 NET INSIDE, TO INSIDE FACE OF LINER. 3. PROVIDE LINING WHERE SHOWN OR NOTED ON DWGS, AND AS DESCRIBED IN SPECIFICATIONS, 24x16 1. EXISTING DUCT/EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN 1. DEMOLITION - EXISTING DUCT/EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED \ Q EXISTING EQUIPMENT, RELOCATED INDICATES DUCT MOUNTED CONTROL DEVICE "X" SEE HVAC CONTROL SYMBOLS SUPPLY OR INTAKE DUCT UP i� SUPPLY OR INTAKE DUCT DOWN RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT UP RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT DOWN HVAC CO MCC DIVISI- MS MOTO OM ELECT FZ LOW -L VFD AFD VARIA ® HVAC S SWITC os OCCU YYY MOTO OT a TEMPI OH HUMIE O ENTH/ FS LIQUIE FFJ DUCT —1 ANALC —� DIGIT/ CS CURRI DP DIFFEI D© DEW F Fs­Pl STATR ❑I DUCT FI AREA: FM MOTOI ❑R RELAI FS SOLED FACP DIVISI pT LIQUII SIGN/ FIT LIQUII FCV FLOW TURB ® VENT ©rYLI POSIT V��JJ PRES FSC FAN E eALARI $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ONE LINE DIAGRAMS-1 ONE LINE DIAGRAMS-2 DRAWOUT AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER, LOW VOLTAGE <�i DRAWOUT POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER, MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER, THERMAL MAGNETIC TRIP SHOWN, `�}-- NON DRAWOUT FUSED SWITCH, MEDIUM VOLTAGE 400 3 POLE, UNO ^ CIRCUIT BREAKER, STATIC TRIP UNIT, SENSOR AMP (E- -u�r� H% DRAWOUT FUSED SWITCH AND CONTACTOR, MEDIUM AS AT or AT AF AF TRIP AND FRAME RATINGS SHOWN, 3 POLE, UNO VOLTAGE DRAWOUT FUSED SWITCH AND VACUUM CONTACTOR, CIRCUIT BREAKER, MAGNETIC TRIP ONLY, TRIP MEDIUM VOLTAGE 100/M RATING SHOWN, 3 POLE, UNO <E-o-jj DRAWOUT VACUUM CONTACTOR, MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH CURRENT LIMITING FUSES, ¢ DIUMVGE CABLE STRESSCONE TYPE 4 0�— 400 TRIP AND FUSE RATING INDICATED, 3 POLE, UNO TERMINATION, TOR OR ELBOW ' — FUSED SWITCH, SWITCH AND FUSE CURRENT RATING SWITCH - LOAD BREAK, GROUP OPERATED, 400 225 INDICATED, 3 POLE, UNO MEDIUM VOLTAGE / SWITCH, CURRENT RATING INDICATED, 3 POLE, UNO 100— 7� SWITCH W/ARCING HORNS, MEDIUM VOLTAGE --(:-- FUSE, CURRENT RATING AND QUANTITY INDICATED DISCONNECTING FUSE - SOLID MATERIAL, MEDIUM VOLTAGE —�L MAGNETIC STARTER WITH OVERLOAD, SWITCH - HOOK STICK OPERATED, SINGLE POLE, NEMA SIZE INDICATED, FVNR LINO MEDIUM VOLTAGE FUSE - EXPULSION, HOOK STICK OPERATED, ELECTRONIC STARTER/SPEED CONTROL SINGLE POLE, MEDIUM VOLTAGE RVSS = REDUCED VOLTAGE SOFT STARTER AFD = AC ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE GROUND SWITCH, GANG OPERATED DC = DC ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE RVAT = REDUCED VOLTAGE AUTO TRANSFORMER TYPE RVRT = REDUCED VOLTAGE REACTOR TYPE TERMINAL BLOCK LUG • CABLE OR BUS CONNECTION POINT p DELTA CONNECTION aK KEY INTERLOCK yl WYE GROUNDED CONNECTION, SOLID GROUND - •-- SURGE ARRESTER (GAP TYPE) RorZ WYE NEUTRAL GROUND RESISTOR OR IMPEDANCE CONNECTION —� 10 CAPACITOR - KVAR INDICATED, 3 PHASE _ 86 RELAY OR DEVICE, FUNCTION NUMBER AS INDICATED �� �( 3 Y AC MOTOR, SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION - \� HORSEPOWER INDICATED CURRENT TRANSFORMER, ZERO SEQUENCE, RATIO O GENERATOR, KW/KVA RATING SHOWN 50:5 to) AND QUANTITY INDICATED 500/625 BUSHING CURRENT TRANSFORMER, MULTI-RATIO V�S /� —I I—{ V) ANALOG METER WITH SWITCH - SCALE RANGE SHOWN 800/1200:5 AND QUANTITY INDICATED `_ (3) 0-660000V V = VOLTAGE KW = KILOWATTS MOTOR OPERATOR, BREAKER OR SWITCH A = AMPERAGE KVAR = KILOVARS MO PF = POWER FACTOR EUM ENERGY MONITORING UNIT DPM MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY DIGITAL POWER METER (MULTIFUNCTION) MRP QQ UTILITY REVENUE METER 1 GROUND 15 KVA 480-120/240V 1 PH TRANSFORMER, SIZE, VOLTAGE RATINGS, AND PHASE INDICATED SHIELDED ISOLATION TRANSFORMER �480-120V POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER, VOLTAGE RATING (3l ) AND QUANTITY INDICATED 100:5 �(3) CURRENT TRANSFORMER, RATIO(100:5) AND QUANTITY INDICATED (3) NOTES: 1. THESE ARE STANDARD LEGEND SHEETS. SOME SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS ® CONNECTION POINT TO EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED IN OTHER MAY APPEAR ON THE LEGEND AND NOT ON THE DRAWINGS. DIVISIONS. RACEWAY, CONDUCTOR AND CONNECTION IN THIS DIVISION 2. FOR ADDITIONAL ABBREVIATIONS OF OTHER DIVISIONS (HVAC, MECHANICAL, AND STRUCTURAUARCHITECTURAL) SEE OTHER LEGENDS. TVSS TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR $PWURL pw:upro)ecmwe.0 �ci i i.wi i i.v.nun n i ��_v &space;FAYETTEVI SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION S POWER SYSTEM PLAN-1 POWER SYSTEM PLAN-2 ® CONNECTION POINT TO EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED. 100/40 io, BREAKER, SEPARATELY MOUNTED, CURRENT RACEWAY, CONDUCTOR,TERMINATION AND CONNECTION RATING INDICATED IN THIS DIVISION. (100/40, 100 = FRAME SIZE; 40 = TRIP RATING) 3 POLE MCC-A MAJOR ELECTRICAL COMPONENT OR DEVICE - NAME SYMBOL AS SHOWN. 2 SIZE INDICATED OR IDENTIFYING ® © CONTACTOR, MAGNETIC, NEMA — PANELBOARD - SURFACE MOUNTED ❑L 30 LIGHTING CONTACTOR, CURRENT RATING INDICATED LPXXA PANELBOARD LETTER OR NUMBER m 2 STARTER, MAGNETIC NEMA SIZE INDICATED FACILITY NUMBER XX LP - LOW VOLTAGE PANEL @__ CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE - DUPLEX UNLESS NOTED DP - DISTRIBUTION PANEL 2 OTHERWISE WP-WEATHERPROOF C- CLOCK HANGER TL- TWIST LOCK CRE- CORROSION RESISTANT PANELBOARD - FLUSH MOUNTED GFCI- GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER SUBSCRIPT NUMBER AT RECEPTACLE INDICATES CIRCUIT TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX M MOTOR, SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION � 240V RECEPTACLE CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE- QUADRUPLEX OGENERATOR, VOLTAGE AND SIZE AS INDICATED. MULTI OUTLET ASSEMBLY LPXXA HOME RUN - DESTINATION SHOWN ® DUPLEX CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLE - FLUSH IN FLOOR or -4h','G— EXPOSED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS` ENCE RECEPTACLE, DOTHERW CONVENSINGLE FIACE UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE — — — —or —IhLl— UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS` OR PART OF THE CONDUIT RUN) L20R G (FOR ALL 20 RECEPTACLE, SPECIAL PURPOSE-NEMA CONFIGURATION NOTE: ALL UNMARKED CONDUIT RUNS CONSIST OF TWO NO. 12, ONE NO. 12 GROUND AND AMPERAGE INDICATED CONDUCTORS IN 3/4" CONDUIT. RUNS MARKED WITH CROSSHATCHES INDICATE "G" O THERMOSTAT NUMBER OF NO. 12 CONDUCTORS. CROSSHATCH WITH SUBSCRIPT INDICATE GREEN GROUND WIRE. ^ UTILITY REVENUE METERING FACILITY {fFFG CROSSHATCHES WITH BAR INDICATE NO.10 CONDUCTOR. Ir+ --�I SIZE CONDUIT ACCORDING TO SPECIFICATIONS AND APPLICABLE CODE. ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR CALLOUT, SEE LEGEND. EUH [Al] <11 ELECTRIC AIR CONDITIONER AC (SELF CONTAINED UNIT) CONDUIT DOWN ---�— UTILITY POLE --C CONDUIT UP LIGHTING SYSTEM PLAN CONDUIT, STUBBED AND CAPPED Ot or (1 LUMINAIRE, SEE SCHEDULE CONDUIT TERMINATION AT CABLE TRAY ISL LUMINAIRE, SEE SCHEDULE EX EXISTING CONDUIT/ DUCT BANK l or LUMINAIRE WITH INTERNAL BATTERY BACKUP, SEE SCHEDULE BD BUS DUCT - SEE SPECIFICATIONS --�—� STRIP LUMINAIRE, SEE SCHEDULE CE CONCRETE ENCASED CONDUIT O-r4 or 0-04 LUMINAIRE AND POLE, SEE SCHEDULE DB DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT r1=1 or FV WALL MOUNTED LUMINAIRE, SEE SCHEDULE FO FIBER OPTIC CONDUIT O1 -► FLOOD LIGHTS - AIM IN THE DIRECTION SHOWN CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANK WHERE XXXX IS THE Q Q STANDBY LIGHTING UNIT, SURFACE MOUNTED, DUCT BANK NAME. SEE CIRCUIT AND RACEWAY II SEE SCHEDULE CODING DEFINITION CONCEALED CONDUIT ROUTING AREA XX® or EXIT LIGHTS - FILLED SECTION INDICATES LIGHTED FACE, ARROW INDICATES EGRESS DIRECTIONAL INDICATORS, XX = FIXTURE NUMBER, SEE SCHEDULE CONDUIT ROUTING AREA $a or ® SMALL LETTER SUBSCRIPT AT SWITCH AND LUMINAIRE 2a INDICATES SWITCHING. SUBSCRIPT NUMBER CABLE TRAY AT LUMINAIRE INDICATES CIRCUIT Q TRANSFORMER $3 WALL SWITCH: 2- DOUBLE POLE P- PILOT LIGHT HH UNDERGROUND HANDHOLE 3- THREE WAY K- KEY OPERATED 4- FOUR WAY D- DIMMER WP- WEATHERPROOF CRE- CORROSION RESISTANT QJ JUNCTION EX- EXPLOSION PROOF L- MOMENTARY 3-WAY CS CONTROL STATION, SEE CONTROL DIAGRAMS M- MANUAL STARTER MS- MANUAL STARTER (1-POLE) WITH OVERLOADS FOR CONTROL DEVICE(S) REQUIRED. OS OCCUPANCY SENSOR 30 NONFUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH, CURRENT RATING INDICATED, 3 POLE LC LIGHTING CONTACTOR 60/40 �' FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH, CURRENT RATING INDICATED (60/40, 60=SWITCH RATING /40=FUSE RATING) 3 POLE MD MOTION DETECTOR 2 m' COMBINATION CIRCUIT BREAKER AND NC PHOTOCELL MAGNETIC STARTER, NEMA SIZE INDICATED xv $PWURL pw:nproleciwrse.0 ici i i.wi u...nuvini��_v VI INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION EXAMPLE SYMBOLS ZY EQUIPMENT ABBREVIATION OR ISA CODE CLARIFYING ABBREVIATIONS XX-YY-K\— X YY K\— NUMBER LOOP NUMBER UNIT PROCESS NUMBER DIGITAL SYSTEM INTERFACES GENERAL INSTRUMENT OR FUNCTIONAL SYMBOLS ANALOGINPUT ANALOG OUTPUT pX DISCRETE INPUT vx DISCRETE OUTPUT GENERAL INSTRUMENT OR FUNCTIONAL SYMBOLS 3 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION LETTERS TABLE FIRST -LETTER FIELD MOUNTED \ REAR -OF -PANEL J MOUNTED(OPERATOR READOUT OR PASSIVE FUNCTION INACCESSIBLE) READOUT OR PASSIVE FUNCTIC PANEL MOUNTED ANALYSIS (+) (OPERATOR ALARM ACCESSIBLE) LIGHTS B BURNER, COMBUSTION MCC MOUNTED USER'S CHOICE (*) USER'S CHOICE (*) USER'S CHOICE (` COMPUTER FUNCTION U FUNCTION PLC L_v ® SHARED DISPLAY, I� /I SHARED CONTROL 3 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION LETTERS TABLE TABLE BASED ON THE INTERNATIONAL SOCIETY OF AUTOMATION (ISA) STANDARD. FIRST -LETTER SUCCEEDING -LETTERS (*) WHEN USED, DEFINE THE MEANING HERE FOR THE PROJECT. LETTER PROCESS OR INITIATING VARIABLE MODIFIER READOUT OR PASSIVE FUNCTION READOUT OR PASSIVE FUNCTION READOUT OR PASSIVE FUNCTIC A ANALYSIS (+) ON AND OFF EVENT ALARM LIGHTS B BURNER, COMBUSTION USER'S CHOICE (*) USER'S CHOICE (*) USER'S CHOICE (` C COMPRESSOR ON-OFF HAND SWITC H HYDRAULIC R RESISTANCE S SWITCH CONTROL MAINTAINED CONTAC D DENSITY (S.G.) DIFFERENTIAL T TRANSMITTER DEVICE WILL RESTAF E VOLTAGE ON RETURN OF POWI PRIMARY ELEMENT, SENSOR AFTER POWER FAILU F FLOW RATE RATIO (FRACTION) FY TRANSDUCER (BACK OF MOMENTARY CONTAi G USER'S CHOICE (*) SWITCHES (CONTROI DEVICE WILL NOT RE GLASS, GAUGE VIEWING DEVICE GATE ON RETURN OF POWI H HAND (MANUAL) AFTER POWER FAILU HIGH I CURRENT (ELECTRICAL) INDICATE J POWER SCAN K TIME, TIME SCHEDULE TIME RATE OFCHANGE CONTROL STATION L LEVEL LIGHT (PILOT) LOW M MOTION MOMENTARY MIDDLE, INTERMEDI N TORQUE USER'S CHOICE (') USER'S CHOICE (') USER'S CHOICE (' O USER'S CHOICE (') ORIFICE, RESTRICTION P PRESSURE, VACUUM POINT (TEST) CONNECTION Q QUANTITY INTEGRATE, TOTALIZE R RADIATION RECORD OR PRINT S SPEED, FREQUENCY SAFETY SWITCH T TEMPERATURE TRANSMIT U MULTI VARIABLE MULTI FUNCTION MULTI FUNCTION MULTI FUNCTION V VIBRATION, MECHANICAL ANALYSIS VALVE, DAMPER, LOUVER W WEIGHT, FORCE WELL X UNCLASSIFIED (*) X AXIS UNCLASSIFIED (*) UNCLASSIFIED (*) UNCLASSIFIED (* Y EVENT, STATE OR PRESENCE Y AXIS RELAY, COMPUTE, CONVERT Z POSITION Z AXIS DRIVE, ACTUATOR, UNCLASSIFIED FINAL CONTROLELEMENT TABLE BASED ON THE INTERNATIONAL SOCIETY OF AUTOMATION (ISA) STANDARD. (+) WHEN USED, EXPLANATION IS SHOWN ADJACENT TO INSTRUMENT SYMBOL. SEE ABBREVIATIONS AND LETTER SYMBOL: (*) WHEN USED, DEFINE THE MEANING HERE FOR THE PROJECT. TRANSDUCERS ACCESSORY DEVICES SPECIAL CASES A ANALOG I CURRENT A ALARM \ /00 D DIGITAL P PNEUMATIC C CONTROLLER YL ON AND OFF EVENT LIGHTS E VOLTAGE PF PULSE FREQUENCY I INDICATOR F FREQUENCY PD PULSE DURATION R RECORDER 00 ON-OFF HAND SWITC H HYDRAULIC R RESISTANCE S SWITCH MAINTAINED CONTAC HS SWITCH (CONTROLLE T TRANSMITTER DEVICE WILL RESTAF ON RETURN OF POWI EXAMPLE X UNCLASSIFIED AFTER POWER FAILU I/P EXAMPLE CURRENT TO PNEUMATIC SS STOP -START HAND S' FY TRANSDUCER (BACK OF MOMENTARY CONTAi N-11 FITIN A FLOW LOOP) FIT TRANSMITTER AS AN HS SWITCHES (CONTROI DEVICE WILL NOT RE ACCESSORY TO A FLOW ELEMENT �-� ON RETURN OF POWI T AFTER POWER FAILU $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI 2 PRESSURE RELIEF AND/OR VACUUM RELEASE 4 AIR AND/OR VACUUM RELEASE REGULATED SIDE �j PRESSURE CONTROL T PRESSURE REGULATION �J (CLAY -TYPE) MULTI -PORT VALVE (GATE VALVE SHOWN. FOR OTHER VALVE TYPES, APPROPRIATE VALVE SYMBOL SHOWN.) SEAT PORTS ARE IMPLIED BY INDICATED FLOW PATTERN, ANGLE GATE GATE SYMBOLS O SLUICE [ FABRICATED [ D STOP LOG SLIDE O BUTTERFLY np FLAP SHEAR ACTUATOR SYMBOLS 4 I VALVE POSITIONER T MANUAL IN VALVE SYMBOLS _ II/J�I PROPELLER OR TURBINE METER CYLINDER --�— GATE SINGLE OR DOUBLEO ACTING ACTUATED PINCH —� KNIFE GATE —— NEEDLE P <e> (� DIAPHRAGM, DIFFERENTIAL Iv ELECTRIC MOTOR T PRESSURE BUTTERFLY —N-- SWING CHECK ---DO*— GLOBE ELECTROHYDRAULIC BALL CHECK —ter— BALL NOTE: BACKFLOW XX: FO FAIL OPEN ON LOSS OF PRIMARY POWER FC FAIL CLOSED PREVENTER V FLP FAIL TO LAST POSITION HYDRAULIC) GENERIC —{18CJ— VEE -BALL — ®F— ROTARY PIPE CAP —QD — VORTEX METER — Qom-- PLUG O TELESCOPE D SEAT PORT ECCENTRIC PLUG ZI SAMPLE --�— DIAPHRAGM )-1 ELECTROMAGNETIC �T MUD 2 PRESSURE RELIEF AND/OR VACUUM RELEASE 4 AIR AND/OR VACUUM RELEASE REGULATED SIDE �j PRESSURE CONTROL T PRESSURE REGULATION �J (CLAY -TYPE) MULTI -PORT VALVE (GATE VALVE SHOWN. FOR OTHER VALVE TYPES, APPROPRIATE VALVE SYMBOL SHOWN.) SEAT PORTS ARE IMPLIED BY INDICATED FLOW PATTERN, ANGLE GATE GATE SYMBOLS O SLUICE [ FABRICATED [ D STOP LOG SLIDE O BUTTERFLY np FLAP SHEAR ACTUATOR SYMBOLS 4 PNEUMATIC DIAPHRAGM SPRING -OPPOSED, SINGLE VALVE POSITIONER T MANUAL IN OR DOUBLE ACTING _ II/J�I PROPELLER OR TURBINE METER CYLINDER LEVEL (FLOAT) ®PNEUMATIC SINGLE OR DOUBLEO ACTING ACTUATED HYDRAULIC THERMAL BY ONE INPUT T AIR SUPPLY P <e> (� DIAPHRAGM, DIFFERENTIAL Iv ELECTRIC MOTOR T PRESSURE --���— ORIFICE PLATEI Es T SOLENOID ELECTROHYDRAULIC DENSITY METER —�— FLOW TUBE NOTE: ANNULAR DIAPHRAGM SEAL XX: FO FAIL OPEN ON LOSS OF PRIMARY POWER FC FAIL CLOSED (PNEUMATIC, ELECTRICAL, OR FLP FAIL TO LAST POSITION HYDRAULIC) GENERIC PRIMARY ELEMENTSYMBOLS VENT TO IN PARSHALL FLUME _ II/J�I PROPELLER OR TURBINE METER LS LEVEL (FLOAT) PIG INSERT POINT WEIR PIG CATCH POINT THERMAL FI ROTAMETER OTAMETER AIR SUPPLY P <e> AIR PURGE SET FO FLUSHING CONNECTION OS --���— ORIFICE PLATEI WATER PURGE SET c o LEVEL(BUBBER TUBE) DE \/ DENSITY METER —�— FLOW TUBE f—®—f ANNULAR DIAPHRAGM SEAL SS COMPOSITE SAMPLER OFLAME TRAP CALIBRATION COLUMN GENERIC --�— PITOT-STATIC BLIND FLANGE E-4 PIPE CAP —QD — VORTEX METER LE LEVEL D ULTRASONIC ZI FLOWMETER )-1 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOWMETER 3 MISCELLANEOUS SYMBOLS y V VENT TO ATMOSPHERE YAIR GAP ❑T DRIP TRAP ® PIG INSERT POINT ® PIG CATCH POINT O SELF CONTAINED AIR SUPPLY P <e> AIR PURGE SET FO FLUSHING CONNECTION OS SEAL WATER SET P <8> WATER PURGE SET r\-4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION AERATOR DIAPHRAGM SEAL f—®—f ANNULAR DIAPHRAGM SEAL SS COMPOSITE SAMPLER OFLAME TRAP CALIBRATION COLUMN N T INLINE SILENCER F4 BLIND FLANGE E-4 PIPE CAP STRAINER ® BASKET STRAINER IN FILTER PULSATION DAMPENER EXPANSION -O CHAMBER HEAT EXCHANGER Af- Bh B1 - 7n C $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl D 1 2 3 $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI A 2 ' f> r c �t s u 3 1 1/4" 03 IN EXST CARRIER PIPE, SEE NOTE 2 NOTE 4 A % LIMITS FOR NEW 3EN CONCENTRATORS, VE GENERATING. PMENTAND )CIATED PIPING ps $PWURL pw:Hprojectwise.ch2m.com:CH2M HILL_ WBG/Documents/399884&sp2ce;-&space;FAYETTEVI CHILLER EQUIPMENT PAD (� TYP --------- OXYGEN BUFFER TANK EQUIPMENT PAD, SEE(�TYP EXS P ENETi SEE MECH DWGS OZONE GENERATION EQUIPMENT PAD, SEE0330-056 TYP 15,_5„ MAKE-UP AIF EQUIPMENT SEE 0330-0 c� PIPE PENE — - — - — - — SEE MECH Ilk 90 A 2 T 8" CMU. /PIPE PENETRATIONS SEE MECH DWGS INSTALL Mi - — - — - — WALL W/ 1" C BOARD SHEI ABOVE NEW 8" CMU WALL SEE NOTE 5 8'_11„1 OXYGEN CONCENTRATION IF EQUIPMENT PAD, SEE0330-058 Til` EOF INST LL METAL STUD WALL 1"GYP ELECTRIC BOARD HEATHING EQUIPME ABOVE NEW 4'-0" HIGH 8" CIVILWALi SEE NOTE 5 ---------- — ----- FLOOR PLAN $PWURL pw:/Iprojeetwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space:-&space; FAYETTEVI )TTOM OF x 0 z ZZ H 2 Z w 0 O w O O LL W Om j O O rn 1/2" DIA EXPANSION ANCHORS INTO CONC BEAM OR SLAB W/ MIN 3" EMBEDMENT @ 12" OC INNER DEEP LEG TOP TRACK TO MATCH STUD WIDTH AND GAGE n R-13 MIN BATT INSULATION — $PWURL v 8" 8"x 8" OPENING IN CMU WALL COVERED ON BOTH SIDES W/ 1/4" SST MESH SCREEN TO ALLOW DRAINAGE INTO EXST FLOOR DRAIN 3 ' 'SHEATHING ON BOTH PAF i SIDES OF PARTITION, STl , SEE NOTE 6 i NEWpOr3'E DOO a SECTION S-1 EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM OR SLAB 54 MIL THICK CONTINUOUS TOP -f TRACK UNPUNCHED W/ 2" FLANGES i J � " - 1 i 1 SECTION S-1 EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM OR SLAB 54 MIL THICK CONTINUOUS TOP -f TRACK UNPUNCHED W/ 2" FLANGES i J � " - I I PARTITION WALL METAL STUD 800S162-54 @ 12" OC 5/8" MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD (PAINTED) 1 1/2"xi 1/2" METAL ANGLE, i GALV AND PAINTED, TYP L 1/2" CEMENT BOARD 2"x 2"x 54 MIL BENT i 1 #10 SMS MIN AT EACH PLATE AT EACH I SIDE OF EACH METAL STUD STUD WITH 2#10 SMS FASTENERS MIN TO METAL STUD —� I PARTITION WALL METAL STUD 80OS162-54 @ 12" OC STO QUICK SILVER NEXT CEMENT BOARD STUCCO SYSTEM 1/2" GLASS MAT SHEATHING AIR/WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER ODETAIL CONT SEALANT � 8" CMU CONTINUOUS BOND BEAM WITH 2 #5 CONTINUOUS BOTTOM SLOTTED SLIP TRACK TO MATCH STUD WIDTH • OD ET A I L NTS UNPUI 6" STE IN LIEU OF SCREWS 1/16" < R-13 MIN BATT 2 ROW INSULATION #10 SN TOP & STO QUICK SILVER STAGE NEXTCEMENTBOARD STUCCO SYSTEM 1/2" GLASS MAT SHEATHING AIR/WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER 1/2" DIA EXPANSION ANCHORS INTO BOND BEAM W/ MIN 3 1/2" EMBEDMENT @ 12" OC 1 #10 SMS MIN AT EACH SIDE OF EACH METAL STUD STARTER TRACK WITH WEEP HOLES CONT SEALANT #5 @ 16" ADHESIVE DOWELS EMBED 6" MIN, GROUT ALL CELLS FULL HEIGHT NEW 8" CMU WALL NOTE: CEMENT BOARD STUCCO SYSTEM BASIS OF DESIGN IS "STO QUICK SILVER NEXT" OR APPROVED EQUAL. pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space:FAYETTEVI 1 1 2 1 3 v v SIC EXST HANDRAILS REMOVED AND RE W/ NEW HANDRAIL NEAREST POST, B FROM EDGE OF NL DEMOLITION PI 1/8" = 1 -_0" $PWURL pw://projectMse.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI D 3 N LOWER PLAN 1/8" = V-0" CONTACT BASIN SURFACE REPAIR NOTES: Oj REMOVE ALL LOOSE OR DAMAGED CONCRETE SURFACE TO A SOUND AND SOLID SUBSTRATE BY USING WATER BLST WITH MIN 5000 PSI APPLIED UNIFORMLY TO SURFACE. ROUGHEN ALL INTERIOR WALL, BASE SLAB AND TOP SLAB MIN OF 1/4" AMPLITUDE PLACE WHERE SURFACES SHOWN ON S-5 OSAWCUT LOWER PERIMETER OF REPAIR AREA TO MIN 1/2" DEPTH. FEATHERED EDGE IS NOT PERMITTED. DO NOT CUT REINFORCING STEEL O INSTALL POWER ACTUATED STAINLESS STEEL A4 (316) HEAD PINS 0.158" MINIMUM SHANK DIA x 2 1/8" LONG (HILTI-X-CR P8 UNIVERSAL NAIL) ACROSS WALL AND TOP SLAB SURFACES, TO PROVIDE 2'-0" SPACING EACH WAY O PREPARE REPAIR SURFACES TO "SURFACE SATURATE DRY" CONDITION, WITH NO STANDING WATER. SCRUB SURFACE WITH SIKA REPAIR 224 OR EQUAL, SLURRY ONTO ALL SURFACES OF CONCRETE. SCRUB THE BONDING SLURRY INTO SUBSTRATE BY USING A STIFF -BRISTLE BRUSH TO ENSURE A COMPLETE COVERGE OF ALL SURFACE IRREGULARITIES. APPLY FRESHLY MIXED REPAIR MORTAR WET ONTO DAMP SCRUB COAT O APPLY SURFACE REPAIR MORTAR USING SIKA REPAIR 224 OR EQUAL, APPLIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MFR'S INSTRUCTIONS USE EITHER TROWEL OR SPRAY APPLICATION METHODS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MFR'S RECOMMENDATIONS. APPLY MORTAR TO A MIN TOTAL DEPTH OF Y'. TROWEL SURFACE OF SPRAY APPLIED MORTAR TO PROVIDE A "STEEL TROWEL" FINISH O CURE THE SURFACE REPAIR AS REQUIRED BY APPROVED PRODUCT CONTACT BASIN SURFACE REPAIR $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl 1 A FOR REINF, SEE C S-6 3/4" CHAMFER ALL EXPOSED EDGES, TYP #3 TIES @ 12" iv 3" CLEAR COVER ALL AROUND ROUGHETE SURFAC � EN EXISTING --1'-2" `-EXISTING 8" E BAFFLE WALL MINIMUM 1/4" AMPLITUDE DETAIL S-4 BAFFLE WALL REINF e S-6 U z N #5 @12" o - ' EL 1173.50 #5 @6" U 0 r 4 #5 VERTICALS 3" CLR TYP #3 TIES z g 4 #5 ADHESIVE DOWELS 0330-105 SIM EL VARIES SECTION 2 I 3 3/8" ANCHOR @ 1'-0" OC, TYP 1'-6"x 2'-3"x 3/8" SST PL TO EMBEDDED INSIDE BOTTC 2 -1/8" THK UMMW-PE SLIDE 3/8" ANCHOR BEARING PL BONDED TO SST PL 0'-8"x 2'-3"x 3/8" SST PLTO E BOTTOM SST BEND i _ BOTTOM OF SLAB PL 2'-3"x 1/8" THK i MATCH BOTTOM C 1'- 4 3/8" EXST PRECAST PF 8" GRIND i GRIND TOP OF EXST WALL AS REQ'D TO MATCH BOTTOM SLAB ELEVATIONS DETAIL 3/8" SST ADHESIVE TYPEW EMBEDME EXST CONC WALL S-6 SST ACTUATED FASTENERS SIKADUR COMBIFLEX OR EQUAL 0.145 DIA @ 12" OC, EMBED HYPALON SHEET W/ ACTIVATOR MIN 1 1/4 STAGGERED CONTINU, EACH SIDE OF EXP JOINT, TYP 316 SST S EXST 3/4" PREMOLDED , JOINT FILLER , PREPARE 5 3/4" EXST EXP JOINT WITH MFR'S REPAIR OF, NOTES: SEALANT/F 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL REPAIR DAMAGE TO ANY EXST JOINT SEALANT JOINT FILLER PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF COMBIFLEX AND SST SHEE 2. REPAIR OF THE VERTICAL WALL EXPANSION JOINTS TO BE AS LISTEI A) INTERIOR BAFFLE WALLS - BOTH FACES (SEE DETAIL 5 FOR REI B) EXTERIOR BASIN WALLS - INTERIOR FACE ONLY C) COMMON WALL (BETWEEN NORTH AND SOUTH BASINS) - INTEF 4 DETAIL ,,,_,,-0„ S-4 6 DETAIL E S-6 $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space:FAYEl-TEVI 3/8" ANCHOR @ 1'-0" OC, TYP 0'-8"x 2'-3"x 3/8" SST PLTO E 1/4"TYP EMBEDDED INSIDE BOTTOI 2 -1/8" THK UMMW-PE SLIDE BEARING PL BONDED TO SST PL BOTTOM OF SLAB !' tb MATCH BOTTOM C BOTTOM SST BEND EXST PRECAST W PL 2'-3"x 1/8" THK 8 8" BAFFLE WALL 6 DETAIL E S-6 $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space:FAYEl-TEVI AI 1 1_------ 2 1 3 AS REQ'D L INSTALL NEW HANDRAIL IN PLACE OF THE EXISTING HANDRAIL THAT WAS REMOVED EXST r PRECAST PANEL io LIQUID SUPPLY PIPE PENETRATION SEE MECH, TYP OF 3 -� 16'-0" NEW REMOVABLE AL HANDRAIL, SEE 0552-005 SEE NOTE 3 AS REQ'D EXISTING HANDRAL A VINS NEW HANDRAIL IN PLACE OF THE EXISTING HANDRAIL THAT WAS REMOVED', #4 4'-0" CORNER BAR T&B 0330-001 TYP TYP 3 #6@3" BO 3 #6@3" BOTT 3 #6@3" BOTT 3 #6@3" BOTT, — — — --- — — — — — — — — — — — — --- NORTH _ EXISTING '.. — —. — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PRECAST --- ----- -- —Ir II -- — — --- I PANEL WALL EXP B L II CONTACT JOINT BELOW, TYP _ I I BASIN NOTES 1'-6" s' -s^ 1'-8" T-2" I I I TYP I -J— 0330-001 12" THICK BAFFLE WALL I CONCRETE BELOW DECK SLAB I 6" INJECTOR PIPE I I I I 1 PENETRATION, I I SEE MECH DWGS, I FLOOR HATCH, TYP OF 2 I TYP OF 3 AS REQ'D EXISTING HANDRAL A VINS NEW HANDRAIL IN PLACE OF THE EXISTING HANDRAIL THAT WAS REMOVED', #4 4'-0" CORNER BAR T&B 0330-001 TYP $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL-WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl TYP 3 #6@3" BO 3 #6@3" BOTT 3 #6@3" BOTT 3 #6@3" BOTT, — — — --- — — — — — — — — — — — — --- NORTH _ EXISTING '.. — —. — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PRECAST --- ----- -- —Ir II -- — — --- I PANEL WALL EXP B L II CONTACT JOINT BELOW, TYP _ I I BASIN NOTES s' -s^ 1'-8" T-2" I I I I -J— 12" THICK BAFFLE WALL I CONCRETE BELOW DECK SLAB I 6" INJECTOR PIPE I I I I 1 PENETRATION, I I SEE MECH DWGS, I TYP OF 2 I D 12" INJECTOR SAMPLE 6'4" PROBE PENETRATION, SEE MECH DWGS _ i I Q II PVRV PIPE PENETRATION. I, II �I SEE MECH DWGS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - 6" DEMISTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -R PIPE PENETRATION, SEE MECH DWGS B _. i I 3 -2 6" DEMISTER PIPE PENETRATION, SEE MECH DWGS M j 0 i B N 12" INJECTOR SAMPLE PROBE PENETRATION AS REQ'D NOTE 3 IL A REQ'D SEE MECH DWGS - _ .....__ _. __..... -- -- ------- --------- -- - ---i INSTALL NEW HANDRAIL IN INSTALL NEW HANDRAIL IN INSTALL NEW HANDRAIL IN PLACE OF THE EXISTING PLACE OF THE EXISTING PLACE OF THE EXISTING HANDRAIL THAT WAS REMOVED HANDRAIL THAT WAS REMOVED 0552-006 HANDRAIL THAT WAS REMOVED N PARTIAL TOP PLAN O 3/8" = 1'-0" $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL-WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl INTERIOR N1 I 8"" CMU FRAMEANCHOR EXTERIOR CONT SEALANT (BOTH SIDES) HM DOOR FRAME, GROUT SOLID HM DOOR DOOR JAMB CMU 1 NTS 2 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD, MOISTURF PPq]gTANT (PAINTED. MTL STUE FRAMING INTERIOF FRAME At 3 R-13 MIN BATT INSULATION 1/2" GLASS MATT SHEATHING AIR/WATER RESISTIVE BARRIER 1/2" CEMENT BOARD EXTERIOR STOQUICK SILVER NEXT CEMENT BOARD STUCCO SYSTEM CONT SEALANT (BOTH SIDES) HM DOOR FRAME HM DOOR DOOR JAMB @ MTL FRAMING 2 NTS $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI 1 1 2 1 3 1 - #5 HOOP, DIA OF OPNG +8", IN EA LAYER OF REINF FOR OPNGS LARGER THAN 8" NOTES: 1. PROVIDE MINIMUM LAP, SEE GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES. 2. TYPICAL FOR ALL OPENINGS IN CONCRETE WALLS OF BELOW GRADE AND HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES AND ALL STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SLABS UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON PLANS. 3. DO NOT WELD REINFORCEMENT TO PIPE SLEEVES AND INSERTS. 4. PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 2 "A" BARS AND 2 "B" BARS EACH SIDE OF OPENING (1 EACH FACE), INCLUDING DOWELS AND CORNER BARS, TYPICAL. 5. FOR OPENINGS LARGER THAN 8'-0", REINFORCE SAME AS FOR 8'-0" OPENINGS. 6. SPACE AT 3 BAR DIAMETERS (OR 3" MINIMUM) ON CENTER. LOCATE HALF OF TOTAL AREA ON EACH SIDE OF OPENING. 7. AT OPENINGS WITHIN 12" OF AN INTERSECTING WALL OR SLAB, PROVIDE ONLY THE EXTRA REINFORCEMENT WHICH WILL FIT, AT THE BAR SPACING IN NOTE 6. ANCHOR r__f BOLT SLEEVE EXST 8" SLAB ON GRADE 4 1/2" MIN ALL AROUND ADD 1 -#5x4'-0" DIAG EQUIPMENT BASE AT EA CORNER FOR 3' DIA MIN, a ANCHOR BOLT, EA LAYER OF REINF SEE NOTES AND STEEL REINF ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS ON PLANE CUT BAND "B" PROJECTION SIZE AS SHOWN 2-#4 [j @ TOP OF PAD TOTAL AREA OF BARS Z ADDL #4@6" 0 FOR PA HT > 10" CHAMFER TYP VIII=1 EQUAL BAND "B" BARS BY MFR 3" MIN ALL AROUND CUT, SEE NOTE 6 & 7 ALLAROU CONSTRUCTION JOINT, #5@12" E6 1 1/2" CONC PRIOR TO PLACING PAD MAX OPNG 1 1/2" FLUID p CAST AND PRIOR NON -SHRINK GROUT STEEL REINF TO GROUTING CUT BAND "A" w TOTAL AREA OF SEE NOTE 7 BARS EQUAL BAND "A" BARS CUT, SEE NOTE 6 & 7 SEE NOTE 1 .. 1 - #5 HOOP, DIA OF OPNG +8", IN EA LAYER OF REINF FOR OPNGS LARGER THAN 8" NOTES: 1. PROVIDE MINIMUM LAP, SEE GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES. 2. TYPICAL FOR ALL OPENINGS IN CONCRETE WALLS OF BELOW GRADE AND HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES AND ALL STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SLABS UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON PLANS. 3. DO NOT WELD REINFORCEMENT TO PIPE SLEEVES AND INSERTS. 4. PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 2 "A" BARS AND 2 "B" BARS EACH SIDE OF OPENING (1 EACH FACE), INCLUDING DOWELS AND CORNER BARS, TYPICAL. 5. FOR OPENINGS LARGER THAN 8'-0", REINFORCE SAME AS FOR 8'-0" OPENINGS. 6. SPACE AT 3 BAR DIAMETERS (OR 3" MINIMUM) ON CENTER. LOCATE HALF OF TOTAL AREA ON EACH SIDE OF OPENING. 7. AT OPENINGS WITHIN 12" OF AN INTERSECTING WALL OR SLAB, PROVIDE ONLY THE EXTRA REINFORCEMENT WHICH WILL FIT, AT THE BAR SPACING IN NOTE 6. ANCHOR r__f BOLT SLEEVE EXST 8" SLAB ON GRADE 4 1/2" MIN ALL AROUND EQUIPMENT BASE #4@12" EW r1 3' DIA MIN, a ANCHOR BOLT, 6" MIN, TY SEE NOTES AND NOTED 01 ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS ON PLANE 3/4" CHAMFER, TYP PROJECTION SIZE AS SHOWN 2-#4 [j @ TOP OF PAD 3/4" Z ADDL #4@6" 0 FOR PA HT > 10" CHAMFER TYP VIII=1 #5 ADHESIVE DOWEL BY MFR @ 12" MAX, 4 MIN, EMBED PER 0330-105 THICKENE EDGE OF: ALLAROU CONSTRUCTION JOINT, #5@12" E6 ROUGHEN & CLEAN CONC PRIOR TO PLACING PAD GROUT TYPE F OPENING REINFORCING CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD NTS 0330-001 NTS ANCHOR BOLT, SIZE AS SHOWN OR AS REQD BY MFR TOF PROJECTION PR( AS REQD AS NON -SHRINK GROUT d + 1", MIN INSIDE DIAMETER SLEEVE, SEE NOTE 2 PLATE WASHER, 3' DIA MIN, a SEE NOTE 2—// SE _ J U ANCHOR BOLT, PROJECTION SIZE AS SHOWN AS REQD OR AS REQD BY MFR FILL BLOCKOUT TOP OF REMOVE FORM AT W/ NON -SHRINK CONC TOP BY CUTTING GROUT o;o;•' , "'.o' .' AFTER CONC IS p CAST AND PRIOR O.o TO GROUTING w U -O U- N d+1",MIN DEPTH ANCHOR BOLT AS REQD SLEEVE AS SPECIFIED GROUT NOTES: 1. FOR CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD DETAILS AND NOTES NOT SHOWN SEE 0330-056 MACHINERY ANCHOR BOLT DETAIL 2. MATERIAL TO MATCH BOLT. ANCHOR BOLT DETAILS NTS SEE TYPICAI EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLT DETAII FILL WITH NON-SHRIW GROUT ROUGHEN EDGE, CLEA ALL AROUNL 6d, 4" MIN CORED HOLE IN EXST CONC ANCHOR BOLT RETROFIT 0 3" CLR, ELEVATION ALL AROUND ANCHOR BOLT BLOCKOUT TOP OF EQPT F CONCI PAD HE TOP OF STRUC SLAB C BEAM CONC! OR BE/ 032 $PWURL pw:Hprojectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI $PWURL pw✓/pro]ec[wise.Cnzm.Com:UHZMHILL_Vvauiuocumencsiaaauoaaspace; &space;rHrti itvi a a TOE O BOARD 4 a a z w _' EQUAL SPACES 6'-0"DGE OF @ 6'-0" MAX MAX CONCRETE PLAN C� 3/8" POST, TYP SEALANT POST BEYOND BOND BREAKER TAPE 3/8" BACK-UP ROD LING I ASISPEC FIEDEM I 1'-1 1/2" — pl U Z U �_ �� J_ <T 1'-11/2" -Q 8" CMU WALL CMU BLOCK I I I b a-- +---------�— —� - io r, w STOP TYP HORIZONTAL I M m III REINFORCING AT I I ( JOINT, EXCEPT '1 CONTINUE HORIZONTAL BARS AT ALL ROOF TOE BOARD, FOR TYPE OF AND FLOOR LEVELS TYP AS ANCHORAGE, 6" HIGH x 10" WIDE THRU JOINT SPECIFIED SEE DWGS CONC RAILING CURB PROVIDE TYP VERTICAL ELEVATION WHEN INDICATED ON REINFORCING IN 2 THE PLANS, SEE DETAILS CELLS EACH SIDE OF JOINT PREFABRICATED CONTROL JOINT NOTE: 12" CMU WALL WITH 2 LAYERS OF REINFORCING IS SIMILAR. CMU CONTROL JOINT RAILING - 3 RAIL -ALUMINUM R/ NTS 0422-031 NTS 0552-001 NT: _ 61/4" { I _ 61/4" I I I I I- 8" '7 8„ MIN MIN PLAN PLAN ALUMINUM RAILING POST, ALUMINUM RAILING POST, THE BASE PLATE SHALL FIELD CUT TO FIT THE BASE PLATE SHALL FIELD CUT TO FIT SIT SOLIDLY ON CONCRETE. SIT SOLIDLY ON CONCRETE. THE USE OF SHIMS, WEDGES,BOP MOUNTED POST THE USE OF SHIMS, WEDGES, GROUT, ETC FOR RAILING I POST ALIGNMENT OR ANY BASE AS SPECIFIED GROUT, ETC FOR RAILING i POST ALIGNMENT OR ANY TOP MOUNTED POST OTHER REASON WILL (2) STAINLESS STEEL OTHER REASON WILL BASE AS SPECIFIED NOT BE PERMITTED COUNTER SUNK NOT BE PERMITTED iFLAT HEAD SCREW I I eo 4 - SST CONC 4 - SST CONC I ANCHORS AS '<: I ANCHORS AS •�" •�•b SPECIFIED SPECIFIED aQ ?p ELEVATION ELEVATION TYPE"A" TYPE"B" NOTES: 1. PROVIDE PROTECTION FOR DISSIMILAR METALS AND CONCRETE WITH BITUMINOUS COATING RAILING POST ANCHORAGE TYPE A - ALUMINUM RAILING POST ANCHORAGE TYPE B - ALUMINUM NTS DETAIL 1 OF 2 0552-041A NTS DETAIL 2 OF 2 0552-041B $PWURL pw✓/pro]ec[wise.Cnzm.Com:UHZMHILL_Vvauiuocumencsiaaauoaaspace; &space;rHrti itvi FROM OZONE GENERATORS FROM FILTERED EFFLUENT 03 GAS UV DISINFECTION LIQUID Sl PUMP: (BACK-UP) $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI D 1 1 2 1 3 A. -- -------- --. 1, - EXST CHILLER FENCE AMBIENT OZONE MONITOR 1 1/4" 02 1,1/4 V788 * OXYGEN BUFFER TANK T-08-51-10 I H-9 SIGN MTD ON *VALVED TANK, SEE NOTE 1 1 1/4" 03 -C TO UNIT, TYP VALVED M �44 1 1/4" CWS CONNECTION, TYP / �B WALL MTD OUTSIDE X-1 SIONMA X M-4 P Iftilmor ' D SEENDTE , IC -1. D-4, H-9 11/4 02' CAP 1 1A CAP 1 114 OZONE GENERAT�y (FUTURE) *TRANSFORMER, I 4C* VALVED 1 1/4" CWR CONNECTION, TYP MECHANIC 1/41.=1,-O" $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space;-&space;FAYETTEVl IAND H-10 SIGNS X-1 SIGN, WALL MTD OUTSIDE iOF EQUIPMENT !ROOM, SEE NOTE 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER MOUNTED ON WALL **bXYGEN CONCENTRATORS PACKAGE, TYP OF 3 112" ROTAMETER AND FLOW 01 N OC -OS 52-02 OC -08-02 03 X -1 SIGN CONTROL DEVICE IN VERT, X P WALL MTD, S 4091-254 TYP OF 3 SEE NOTE 1 1/2 02 1/2" 02 Woe vj 40IN Vt:K 1, TYP OF 3 in„ no MECHANIC 1/41.=1,-O" $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space;-&space;FAYETTEVl 1 1/4" 02 FROM OXYGEN $PWURL 2 3 1 1/4" CWS 1 1/4" CW 1 1/4" 03 1 1/4" 02 1 1 1 A . ....... 11/4 02 1 1/4" CWS F 1 1/4" 02 EBL -- --------- - -- __ -- ---- - -- 1 1/4" CWR 1 1 /4L .2 1 1/4" CWS R , r 85.92± CL EL 1186.25± 11/4" CWS/R&11/4" 02/03 1 1/4" 02 103 1 1/4" 03 1 1/4- CWS R CL EL 1185.92± CL EL 1185.50± 1 1/4" CWS 1 1/4" 03 —PIPE SUPPORT, TYP 1 1/4" CWR 1 1/4" 02 02 1/4" 1 (4005-519) 1 1/4" 02 1 1/4" CWR CL EL 1179.09± 1 1/4" V600 "U" 1 1/4" V788 1/2" 02 1/2" ROTAMETER & -53-02 *CHILLER 1 2CtIIER-0088-�53_.j 1/2" V340 FLOW CONTROL VALVE 1 1/4" 03 TYP SEE 4091-254TYPOF 3 PLCS 1 1/4" V600 1/1 V340 **l 1/4" V340 0 1 1/4" V340, NOTE 1 **OZONE GENERATOR **OXYGEN CONCENTRATOR 1 1/4" V600 PACKAGE, TYP PACKAGE, TYP **1 1/4" V340 1 1/4" V34. **l 1 V 1/2" V600 TYP OG -0&52-02 0 EQUIPMENT PAD, TYP 11/4„ LEL F EL 1170.001 1 ± EQUIPMENT PAD, TYP1 1/4 CWS, NOTE 3 *OXYGEN BUFFER TANK 1/4" CWR, NOTE 3 WALL PENETRATIONS, TYP (4027--601)SIM SECTION 3/8"=T-0 ITEMS/EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY THE OWNER AND INSTALLE1 M-3 1 1/4" 02 FROM OXYGEN $PWURL ---- ------- *TRANSFORMER, TYP SECT KXC OZONE GENERATOR PACKAGE, TYP M-3 pw:Hprojeetwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&spaGe;-&space;FAYETTEVI ITEMS/EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY THE OWNER AND PRE-ASSE 1 1/4" CWS 1 1/4" CW 1 1/4 . CWR . 1 1/4"02 1 1/4" 02 1 1 1 A 11/4 02 F 1 1/4" 03 CL EL 1185.50.t 1 1/4- CWS R FROM CHILLER 1 1/4" 02 1 1/4" CWR TO CHILLER 1 1/4" 03 1 1/4" V600 1 1/4" V3�40 0 11/4". 02 **1 1/4" V340 1 1/4" V34. **l 1 V OG -0&52-02 0 EQUIPMENT PAD, TYP ---- ------- *TRANSFORMER, TYP SECT KXC OZONE GENERATOR PACKAGE, TYP M-3 pw:Hprojeetwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&spaGe;-&space;FAYETTEVI A 2 3 *LIQUI 6" SST OZONE INJECTORS LOWER PLAN 1/8"=V-0" $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space,,-&space;FAYETTEVi 1 1 2 1 3 k A M-7 M-7 LIQUID SUPPLY PUMPS',(BELOW) TYP **SATURATION VESSELS D SUBMERSIBLE OZONE M-7 PROBE, SEEg091-162 EG t6"03 '*0 PIPING SUPPORT, SEE NOTE 1 (4005-500 TYP *OZONE RESIDUAL MONITOR PANEL- MTD ON STANCHION SUPPORT, SEE 409 1-383 6" OG FROM C CONTACT BASIN BELOW Sim M-7 6"V514 VALVE 14 VERTICAL, TYP 3"!V514 VALVE, TYP — **OZONE DISSOLUTION AND INJECTION EQUIPMENT, SEE 1 OF EQUIPMENT SKID, 1 1/4" 03 FROM CHLORINATION BLDG, SEE DWG C-2 AND M-4 FOR CONTINUATION, SEE NOTI EXISTING 4'SDOX ----- ------- - - 4— 8" LS UP FROM LIQUID SUPPLY PUMPS BELOW (4027-6 0 TYP J— PROPOSED BOUNDARY OF DISSOLUTION EQUIPMENT SKID PIPING SUPPORT NOTE 1 ( �4005519 "P EXISTING ACCESS ATCH IN ROOF POST AERATIOI IL C .7 4 6" V786 PVR M-8 -,-- - [-'= 77�-' I SUBMERSIBLE OZONE PROBE, SEE 4091-162 EG *OZONE: RESIDUAL MONITOR PANEL MOUNTED ON EXST HANDRAIL, EE 4091-385 kOZONE DESTRUCT UNITS, SEE SOUTH CONTACT BASIN POST AERATIOI N UPPER PLAN 3/16"=1'-0" $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space;-&space;FAYETTEVl I 2 1 3 ** OZONE SATURATION VESSEL, TYP OF 2 6" V784 AT TOP OF DEMISTING UNIT, TYP *DEMISTING **WIRING CABINET, TYP OF 2 UNIT, TYP 6" V786 **VFD ENCLOSURES, TYP 4 "V�5 7-620 kol OG �402� REMOVABLE . . . . . r ", � 3'V514 HANDRAIL, SEE (0552-005)-\ a I FLANGED COUPLING. I- ADAPTER,TYP — 14'-0"t *SSTOZONE GUIDE RAILS INJECTORS TYP 2 EACH PUMP NOTE 2 P ........ Yq ;H 8" LS *LIQUID SUPPLY :H PUMPS, TYP OF 3 . . . ..... . ........ 3 P-08-54-(3) -1 io 2-- a - Icon a -D SECTION (34 &— I1'-7"± M-6 **CONTROL PANELS, TYP PIPE SUPPORT 1 114" 03 (400;7519)TYP EXST PRECAST PANEL **EQUIPMENT 16'-0" FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTER, TYP - GUIDE RAILS, TYP LIQUID SUPPLY PUMPS, TYP — OZONE DESTRUCT UNIT 6- OUTLET, TYP 0 (BY CONTRACTOR) PROVIDE 16 GA SST BIRDSCREEN MESH ON END OF GOOSENE 6" OG ,,,,—**OZONE DESTRUCT UNIT, TYP 4"x 6" CONIC ROCR (BEYOND) CONNECTION TO OUTLET AT OZONE DESTRUCT UNITS ---- / -- ---- - -- - - - - - - I EL 117150 ZOZONE DESTRUCT UNIT 3" INLET L( 4027-622 WATER SURFACE ELEVA **WIRING CABINET, TYP OF 2 1% **OZONE SATURATION VESSEL, TYP OF 2 8" LS SECTION M-6 -r,EXST PRECAST PANEL OZONE INJECTORS EL 1157.65 $PWURL pwJ/projeetwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI ** 8" V PIPING SUPPORT NOTE 3 4005-500 6" OS TO OZONE INJECTORS IN CONI BASIN, SEE NOTE 2 AL ACCESS BASIN, StE NV I t L N 1ENLARGED PLAN O M-6 1-1/4" 03 FROM CHLORINATION BLDG, SEE DWGS C-2 AND M-4 FOR CONTINUATION k*VFD ENCLOSURE, TYP -6" DIA OZONE JRATION SEL, TYP AS PANEL, TYP C, CC CON TOP TO F $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL WBG/Documents/399884&space;-&space;FAYET-rEVi SURFACE RESTORATION AND TRENCH BACKFILL AS INDICATED 4 VERTICAL TRENCH SHOWN, SEE NOTE 1 U MARKING TAPE -� S MIN UNLESS w INDICATED OTHERWISE 6" _F w a a 4" MIN APPURTENANCE PIPING 12" MINIMUM, FOUNDATION STABILIZATION TYPICAL MATERIAL, SEE NOTE 2 NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL SLOPE TRENCH WALLS OR SHORE EXCAVATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION AND SAFETY AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT OSHA REQUIREMENTS. FOUNDATION STABILIZATION MATERIAL SHALL BE INSTALLED ONLY AS 2' APPROVED AND DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS. TYPICAL TRENCH FOR APPURTENANCE PIPING NTS 3123-916 HANGER RODS AS SPECIFIED DOUBLE Nt HANGER RODS, TYP STRUT CHANNEL AND PIPE CLAMPS NOTES: 1. LENGTH VARIES WITH NUMBER OF PIPES TO BE SUPPORTED, AND SPACING BETWEEN PIPES. ITRAPEZE PIPE HANGER I NTS 4005-558 L T 2 1/2" THRU 24" PIPE PRE-ENGINEERED PIPE SUPPORT — SIZE AS REQUIRED BY CALCULATIONS, STANDARD WALL PIPE MINIMUM -- STANDARD PIPE FLANGE MINIMUM 1 1/2" NON -SHRINK GROUT— DIMENSION TABLE PIPE SIZE ,.A., MINIMUM NOMINAL PIPE SIZE SIZE AND NUMBER 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3" 2-1/2" 4" 3" 6" 3" 8„ 3" 10" 3" 12" 3" 14" 4" 16" 4" 20" 6" 24" 6" CONCRETE ANCHORS, NO SIZE AND NUMBER 1 AS REQUIRED BY CALCULATIONS 2. 3. 4. NOTE: SUBMIT FINAL DESIGN AND CALCULATIONS FOR SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE AS SPECIFIED. PIPE SUPPORT SADDLE SUPPORT PEDESTAL TYPE - ADJUSTABLE PI NTS NT: 4005-500 WALL PIPE PENETRATION SEAL PIPE SLEEVE PASSING PIPE MODULAR MECHANICAL SEAL ASSEMBLY WITH SST BOLTS AND NUTS, AS SPECIFIED ,a FL 77, 4027-607 NURL pw:/Iprojectwise.chem.COM:cHZMHILL_Wtsu/Uocuments/saaatl4&space; aspaCe;rAYtI ItVi $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.Com:cHZMHILL_VVtst /UOCUmentsisaassvaspace; &space;rHrc i i wi SIZE AS SCHEDULED SIZE AS SCHEDULED r F e f W CAUTl.qN J 0 J w RED cn 1 YELLOW WHITE co FOR MESSAGE HERE, BLACK W FOR MESSAGE HERE, V5 SEE SIGN SCHEDULE ti BLACK SEE SIGN SCHEDULE ` IN SPECIFICATIONS IN SPECIFICATIONS ` F NOTES: NOTES: 1. TYPICAL MESSAGE IS "EQUIPMENT STARTS AUTOMATICALLY" 1. TYPICAL MESSAGE IS "NO SMOKING' CAUTION SIGN DANGER SIGN H) NTS NT: C-1 D-1 14" WHITE 1 RED 0EXIT----- EXIT SIGN NTS X-1 $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.Com:cHZMHILL_VVtst /UOCUmentsisaassvaspace; &space;rHrc i i wi DI / O O r' B � (C�.i BOLLA REFEF 3 i i r i r ROUTE 220 DL ( I s ( t i. B.O.D ELEVATI ROUTE DUCT F OUTDOOR DU( J�DUCT WITH R-1 Al / r 3 1FLEXIBLE I - r -' CONNECTION � r �{ O ---- 4 W \7 ti �K�'3 ,l I � I EF -1 i f f i 1i �7 POF3 8 ri , r r TYP OF 3 �,I TY. orf i r�r 580 CFM N TYP. OF 3 � 1 3 L r ( riir ri rf I !ir ri r r r-. ri 475 CFM 'rii r rr s j Grr ri ri:j �\ r, r r TYP.OF 2 kirlLUMIIVC 6UILUIIVl7 rlVM%, r -L/ -11V $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl 1 1 2 1 3 EXISTING LOUVER FIELD FABRICA' BRACING AND FAN TO WALL A REQUIRED BACKER ROD SEALANT (ALL OUTSIDE AIR LOUVER SEE ARCH. DRAWINGS AIR FLOW BLANK VER �I AS NECESSARY AROUNDD NEW NEW FAN SHEETMETAL SAFING TIGHT TO DUCT— WOOD NAILER BUILT UP ROOF---% EXHAUST FAN DETAIL NTS H-1 NOTES: CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ACTUAL ROOF TYPE. COMPLY WITH THE NRCA ROOFING STANDARDS. 7EXHAUST FAN BACKDRAFT DAMPER FAN GUARD RECTANGULAR OR ROUND DUCTWORK CAULK ALL AROUND 12" COUNTER FLASHING PREFABRICATED, INSULA' CURB, MOUNT AND SECU ON WOOD NAILER. (BASE BASE FLASHING INSULATIOP CONCRETE — WOOD NAILER -DUCT SUPPORT 0H-1-970-0 OOF PENETRATION DETAIL '4 NTS METAL S . W/GYPSUM SHEATHING LOUVER DETAIL 2 NTS H-1 5 NTS ROOF CAP DETAIL H-1 $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT FAN EXT. MIN. MIN. FAN ELECTRICAL OPENING MAX. NUMBER AREA SERVED CFM SP BHP MOTOR RPM DRIVE TYPE V/HZ/PH SIZE dBA INPUT AIR WEIGHT IN. WG MCA HP IN. WG HP EF -1 CHLORINATION BUILDING 3,000 0.25 0.31 1/2 1083 BELT PROPELLER 208/60/3 22.5X22.5 69 1.11 11/2 0 200 250 68.6 1,000 208/60/3 WALL FAN 15 EF -2 CHLORINATION BUILDING 8,000 0.5 1.34 11/2 1031 BELT PROPELLER 208/60/3 32.5X32.5 79 WALL FAN 1. PREMIUM EFFICIENCY MOTOR. 2. BACKDRAFT DAMPER. 3. RATED FOR 1,300 FT. ABOVE SEA LEVEL AND 120 DEGREES F AIR TEMPERATURE. 4. OSHA FAN GUARD. MAKE-UP AIR UNIT SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT FAN HEATING MAX EXT. MIN. MIN. ENT. MBH GAS LEAVING NUMBER AREASERVED CFM SP BHP MOTOR AIR OUTPUT INPUT AIR WEIGHT V/HZ/PH MCA MOP A IN. WG HP F MBH MBH F LBS MAU-1 CHLORINATION BUILDING 2,700 0.5 1.11 11/2 0 200 250 68.6 1,000 208/60/3 10.8 15 1. BIRD SCREEN ON INTAKE OF UNIT. 2. INDIRECT GAS FIRED. 3. RATED FOR 1,300 FT. ABOVE SEA LEVEL. 4. PROVIDE WITH 30% FILTERS. 5. 4:1 BURNER MODULATION CONTROLLED BY SPACE TEMPERATURE. 6. VENDOR PROVIDED GAS REGULATOR. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY INLET PRESSURE. 7. PREMIUM EFFICIENCY MOTOR. $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVi EXST CHLORINATION BUILDING, SEE E-3 AND E-4 FOR REQUIREMENTS EXISTING UV DISINFECTION FACILITIES $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space:-&space;FAYETTEVl DP2 uv 400A, 480V, 3PH, 4W, 22000 AIC, NEMA1 I ' . I I � ' 150 AF 225 AF 150 AF 100 AT ) 150 AT 90 AT , I '— — -- — -- — -- - — -- — — -- — -- — -' 104 102 ED6 106 225A,3P,NF NEMA1 E. ' ' ED5 100A. 3P, 100A, 3P, NF NEMA3R NEMA 1 T75 KVA103 MA 20-240V,30tNF TE1 , ( ----- ----I T T_ I I I I IL �I I LCP , 1 HF 1 E LCP , , LCP _ J LCP-08-52-02 ' 03 GENERATOR #2 LCP-08-51-03 I ' NOTE 1 , CHR -08-53-02 02 CONCENTRATOR, , CHILLER NO.2 ('#3 ( I I I 30 KVA ' 6OkVANDE----_-- -- NOTE 3----- ' NOTE 3 ' - - � - � I 400 AF 200 AT ui DP3 400A,480V,f I I I )150 AF\ 150 AF 100 AT ) 100 AT EDI 100A, 3P, NF NEMA1 100A) ' I j I LCP i I 30 I LCP-08-51-01 'O2CONCENTRATOR: '#I 60kVA NOTE 3 100A, 3P, NF NEMA1 --T---t 100A) ' I LCP I (LCP-08-51-02 ' O2 CONCENTRATOR, '#2 160kVA NOTE 3 DP4 400A, 480V, 3 PH, 4W, 22000 AIC, NEMA 4 20A ) 20A 125 126 12" 1100A ) 100A ) 100A) VFD VFD VFD HF J FP MCP -08 I 1 1kW 1kW I i 1 VFD-08-54-01 VFD-08-54-02 , ODU-08-55-01 ' , ODU-08-55-01 ' VFD-08-54-03 , OFFGAS DESTRUCT , OFFGAS DESTRUCT _NOTE 2 - — - - I UNOTEO3 1 I UNITNO31 I- ---- -._ I-. - ---_. 1 TJB-08-01 I MSC (TYP) P-08-54-01 P-08-54-02 P-08-54-03 2 PUMPS DUTY, 1 PUMP STAND-BY $PWURL pw:Hprojectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI DP1 - EXISTING GE SPECTRA 600A,480V,3PH,4W,42000AIC ' SGLA36AT0600 SGLA36AT0600 SGLA36AT0600 600 AF 600 AF 600 AF ' 600 AT 600 AT 600 AT ' T1 -EXISTING ' 500 kVA 12.47kV/480Y-277 DELTAIWYE 400 AF 400 AF i 1250 AT AF > 350 AT PROVIDE )%400 300 AT PROVIDE NEW TRIPPROVIDE NEW TRIP PLUGS IN NEW CB PLUGS IN i EXST CB EXST CB FRAME- FRAME — - - - - — - - — - - — - - — _ DP2 uv 400A, 480V, 3PH, 4W, 22000 AIC, NEMA1 I ' . I I � ' 150 AF 225 AF 150 AF 100 AT ) 150 AT 90 AT , I '— — -- — -- — -- - — -- — — -- — -- — -' 104 102 ED6 106 225A,3P,NF NEMA1 E. ' ' ED5 100A. 3P, 100A, 3P, NF NEMA3R NEMA 1 T75 KVA103 MA 20-240V,30tNF TE1 , ( ----- ----I T T_ I I I I IL �I I LCP , 1 HF 1 E LCP , , LCP _ J LCP-08-52-02 ' 03 GENERATOR #2 LCP-08-51-03 I ' NOTE 1 , CHR -08-53-02 02 CONCENTRATOR, , CHILLER NO.2 ('#3 ( I I I 30 KVA ' 6OkVANDE----_-- -- NOTE 3----- ' NOTE 3 ' - - � - � I 400 AF 200 AT ui DP3 400A,480V,f I I I )150 AF\ 150 AF 100 AT ) 100 AT EDI 100A, 3P, NF NEMA1 100A) ' I j I LCP i I 30 I LCP-08-51-01 'O2CONCENTRATOR: '#I 60kVA NOTE 3 100A, 3P, NF NEMA1 --T---t 100A) ' I LCP I (LCP-08-51-02 ' O2 CONCENTRATOR, '#2 160kVA NOTE 3 DP4 400A, 480V, 3 PH, 4W, 22000 AIC, NEMA 4 20A ) 20A 125 126 12" 1100A ) 100A ) 100A) VFD VFD VFD HF J FP MCP -08 I 1 1kW 1kW I i 1 VFD-08-54-01 VFD-08-54-02 , ODU-08-55-01 ' , ODU-08-55-01 ' VFD-08-54-03 , OFFGAS DESTRUCT , OFFGAS DESTRUCT _NOTE 2 - — - - I UNOTEO3 1 I UNITNO31 I- ---- -._ I-. - ---_. 1 TJB-08-01 I MSC (TYP) P-08-54-01 P-08-54-02 P-08-54-03 2 PUMPS DUTY, 1 PUMP STAND-BY $PWURL pw:Hprojectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI Al 2 3 LCP-08-52-01 AIT -08-61 ASH-08;b1OZONE GENERATOR, AAH-08-01 BEACON I AE -08 -Oa NO. 1 LCP 08 51-01 LCP-08-51-02 OXYGEN -F6XYGEN CO CEN T;ZA I TOIn—',-:� z�----Itm ENTPA EF -2 MS2 ---------- ED1 ED2 E04 T-41 T-3 0 POWER PLA 1/4.1=1,-O,, $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&spaGe;-&space;FAYETTEVl � _-___'` X---------X-----�--^ � LIGHTING PLA A 1 1 2 1 3 ROUTE CONDUITS DIRECT BURIAL [BOND TO EXISTING GROUND LOOP @ COPPERCLAD GROUND ROD DP4 ODU-08-55-01-7 ODU-08-55-02 OFFGAS DESTRUCT OFFGAS DESTRUCT ff J)Nf UNIT - N UPPER PLAN 3/8"=1'-0.. _iPWURL pw,.//projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space;-&space;FAYETTEVi PE/PIT-OS-54-05 � O T THE MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN CONDUIT OPENINGS SHALL BE 6" :0 : (3)31/2PVC SLEEVES THROUGH TJB-08-54-01 vi I SLAB FOR PUMP MSC'S SOLUTION TANK 1:: I TJB-08-54-0�1_1"u FV, -08-54-01 FV 06_54-02 FIT -08-54-01 SECURE TO VERTICAL FACE D z 8!;54 ;021 T� P�4 OF NEW 12" CONCRETE SLAB ODU-08-55-01-7 ODU-08-55-02 OFFGAS DESTRUCT OFFGAS DESTRUCT ff J)Nf UNIT - N UPPER PLAN 3/8"=1'-0.. _iPWURL pw,.//projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space;-&space;FAYETTEVi O T THE MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN CONDUIT OPENINGS SHALL BE 6" :0 : (3)31/2PVC SLEEVES THROUGH SLAB FOR PUMP MSC'S #2/0 BARE COPPER GROUND - SECURE TO VERTICAL FACE OF NEW 12" CONCRETE SLAB VFD-08-54-01 VFD-08-54-02 VFD-08-54-03 MCP -08 < 'SOLUTION TANK FV -08-54-03 FV -08-54-04 FIT -08-54-03 PIT -08-54-03 PPT -08-54-03 PIT -08-54-04 FIT -08-54-04 ODU-08-55-01-7 ODU-08-55-02 OFFGAS DESTRUCT OFFGAS DESTRUCT ff J)Nf UNIT - N UPPER PLAN 3/8"=1'-0.. _iPWURL pw,.//projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL—WBG/Documents/399884&space;-&space;FAYETTEVi CALLOUTS FOR CONTROL CABLES [AlI 3/4"C, 1 TYPE 3 [A2I 3/4"C, 2 TYPE 3 [A3I 1 "C, 3 TYPE 3 [A41 1-C, 4 TYPE 3 [A5] 1"C, 5 TYPE 3 [A6I 1 1/4"C, 6 TYPE 3 [CII 1"C, MSC [C2] 3/4"C, 2#14, 1#14G [C4] 3/4"C, 4#14, 1#14G [C6I 3/4"C, 6#14, 1#14G [C8I 3/4"C, 8#14, 1#14G [C10] 3/4"C, 10/C#22 W/G [Ell 3/4"C, CAT 6 208V, 3PH, 4W NOTES: 1. INDICATED LENGTH IS APPROXIMATE AND IS INTENDED FOR USE IN SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT AND VOLTA( DO NOT USE FOR MATERIAL TAKE -OFF PURPOSES. 2. CONDUIT IDENTIFIED AS RMC IS ALUMINUM UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. CONDUIT IDENTIFIED AS LFMC IS LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT. CONTROL DIAGRAM EXHAUST FAN EF -1 208V, 3PPH, 4W I NEUTRAL — — — — — I I HS I I M— — — ON OFF RE I I OXO I I I I I I OL'S0- I I I I I I M I I � I I I I M I I J L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ CONTR EXHAUST FAN E $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYET-rEVi CONDUIT SCHEDULE CONDUIT CONDUIT NUMBER SIZE CONDUIT TYPE LENGTH NOTE CONDUCTORS FROM 100 2 112" RMC 58 3 - 350MCM XHHW Al, 1 - #2 XHHW GND DP1 101 2" RMC 63 2 SETS OF: 3-4/0 XHHW Al, 1 -#1 XHHW GND DP1 102 2" RMC 43 3 # 1 XHHW A], 1 -#6 XHHW Al GND DP2 103 2" RMC AND LFMC 6 3 # 1 XHHW AI, 1 -#6 XHHW Al GND ED4 104 2" RMC 74 3 - 3/0 XHHW Al, 1 -#2 XHHW Al GND DP2 105 106 1 1/4" RMC 75 3 - #2 XHHW AI, 1 -#4 XHHW Al GND DP2 107 1 1/4" LFMC 6 3-#2 XHHW AI, 1 -#4 XHHW AI GND ED5 108 2" RMC 60 3 # 1 XHHW Al, 1 -#6 XHHW Al GND DP3 109 2" RMC AND LFMC 6 3 # 1 XHHW Al, 1 -#6 XHHW Al GND ED1 110 2" RMC 50 3 # 1 XHHW Al, 1 -#6 XHHW Al GND DP3 111 2" RMC AND LFMC 6 3 # 1 XHHW AI, 1 -#6 XHHW Al GND ED2 112 2" RMC 81 3 - 3/0 XHHW AI, 1 -#2 XHHW Al GND DP3 113 114 1 1/4" RMC 83 3 - #2 XHHW Al, 1 - #4 XHHW Al GND DP3 115 1 1/4" LFMC 6 3 -#2 XHHW Al, 1 -#4 XHHW Al GND ED3 116 3/4" RMC 6 2 -#10 THHN Cu, 1 - #8 THHN Cu GND DP3 117 31/2,, RMC AND PVC 188 3 - 500MCM XHHW AI, 1 -#10 XHHW AI GND DPI 118 3/4" RMC 79 2-#10 THHN Cu, 1 -#10 THHN Cu GND MPZ1 119 3/4" RMC 6 2 -#10 THHN Cu, 1 - #10 THHN Cu GND MPZ1 120 3/4" RMC 2 -#12 THHN CU, 1 -#12 THHN Cu GND MPZ1 121 3/4" RMC 4 - #12 THHN Cu, 1 - #12 THHN Cu GND CBLP 121A 3/4" RMC 3-#12 THHN Cu, 1 -#12 THHN Cu GND MS1 122 3/4" RMC 4 - #12 THHN Cu, 1 - #12 THHN Cu GND CBLP 122A 3/4" RMC 3 - #12 THHN Cu, 1 - #12 THHN Cu GND MS2 123 3/4" RMC 3 - #12 THHN Cu, 1 - #12 THHN Cu GND CBLP 124 2 1/2" RMC 3 # 250MCM XHHW Al, 1 -#4 XHHW AI GND DP4 125 3/4" RMC 3-#12 THHN Cu, 1 -#12 THHN Cu GND DP4 126 3/4" RMC 3-#12 THHN Cu, 1 -#12 THHN Cu GND DP4 127 3/4" RMC 3-#12 THHN Cu, 1 -#12 THHN Cu GND DP4 128 3/4" RMC 3-#12 THHN Cu 1 -#12 THHN Cu GND DP4 129 3/4" RMC 2 - #12 THHN CU, 1 -#12 THHN Cu GND MPZ-1 130 2" RMC AND PVC FIBER OPTIC CABLE MCP -0; 131 2" RMC 3 - 310 XHHW Al, 1 -#2 XHHW AI GND ED6 132 2" RMC 3 - 310 XHHW Al, 1 -#2 XHHW Al GND ED7 133 RMC 3 - #2 XHHW Al, 1 -#4 XHHW Al GND TJB-08. 134 RMC 3 - #2 XHHW Al, 1 -#4 XHHW Al GND TJB-08. 135 I RMC 3-#2 XHHW Al, 1 -#4 XHHW Al GND TJB-08. NOTES: 1. INDICATED LENGTH IS APPROXIMATE AND IS INTENDED FOR USE IN SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT AND VOLTA( DO NOT USE FOR MATERIAL TAKE -OFF PURPOSES. 2. CONDUIT IDENTIFIED AS RMC IS ALUMINUM UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. CONDUIT IDENTIFIED AS LFMC IS LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT. CONTROL DIAGRAM EXHAUST FAN EF -1 208V, 3PPH, 4W I NEUTRAL — — — — — I I HS I I M— — — ON OFF RE I I OXO I I I I I I OL'S0- I I I I I I M I I � I I I I M I I J L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ CONTR EXHAUST FAN E $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYET-rEVi A FP -08-01* OZONE REMOTE 1/0 ss1 RIO -08-01 1 1 2 1 3 RUN SYSTEM OXYGEN ALARM PURITY 480- A- — T _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ T _ — _ — - — _ — _ — _ - LCP-08-51-01 ' olu T-08-51-01 S CS COMPRESSOR HXR-08-51-01 CMP -08-51-01 OPEN COMPRESSOR TANKS - - - - - - - - - - - - I PRV-08-51-02 - - - - - BOOSTER PACKAGE I I I HXR-08-51-02 I D- HXR-OS-5t-04 I PI I I 08-51-03 PI -08-51-06 )UTSIDE PI 08 088` 2 kMBIENT OR- — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — / 08 PRV-08 LCP-08-51-03 CMP -08-51-03 HXR-08-51-05 SV -08-51-09 08 ** OXY -------------------------------------------- AMBIENT JR $PWURL pw•l/projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space:FAYETTEVI r-r---D --O O LCP-08-51-02 CMP -08-51-02 HXR-08-51-03 SV -OS -5t-05 0------- T -OS -51-03 D- HXR-OS-5t-04 D - — -- PI -08-51-05 � PI -OS -51-04 T-08-51-04 PRV-OS-51-03 PI -08-51-06 )UTSIDE I PRV-OS-51-04 kMBIENT OR- — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - 480V LCP-08-51-03 CMP -08-51-03 HXR-08-51-05 SV -08-51-09 T-08-51-05 HXR-OS-51-O6 PI -08-51-08 F%�/j�{ PI -08-51-07 T -OS -51-06 PRV-OS-51-05 PI -08-51-09 )UTSIDE i PRV-08-51-06 AMBIENT JR $PWURL pw•l/projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space:FAYETTEVI DI 2 FP -08-01 * RIO -08-01 HIGH 03 HIGH 03 CONCENT- CONCENT- RATION RATION Y 03 Q HI -HI 03 Y CONCENT- y(2) CONCENT- RESTART T RATION ! RATION PERMISSIVE RUN RUN 120V TJ B-08-01 (NOTE 6) RESET HS 0`8 1 FROM OXYGEN PCV -08-52-01 CONCENTRATION (NOTE 7) F480V CWS * CWS CHILLER 480V CWR im H Ia I- — - - — - — - — ' — - — - — - — - V nrq.l h PCV -OS -52A2 LCP-08-52-01 * 240V - —480V T4 (NOTE 4) HXR-OS-52-01 HXR-OS-52-02 PRESSURE TEMPERATURE NOTES: L i 24V 1 I 1 BEACO \ / r+-jL7/11 1 03 03 03 4, 03 1 03 1 03 AAH HORN * AIT ASH ASH AIT ASH ASH 08 -OX, * AAH-OS-OX 08-01 0`8-01 0088-01 08-02 08-02 0`8-02 5,6 PACKAGE SYSTEM SHALL BE i CHILLER X= 1-4X= DRAIN PROVIDED BY THE SYSTEM CHR -OS -53-02 i U U (NOTE 5) LCP-08-53-02 I LCP-08-52-02 T-3 HXR-08-52-03 PE/PIT-08-52-OS TERIT-08- 2. ETHERNET DATA LINK. REFER TO SECTION 03 AE 03 AE (NOTE 4) PLC -08-52-02 HXR-08-52-04 PE/PIT-08-52-06 44 42 56, OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM, FOR ALL SIGNAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS. 0`8-0 * 008-0; 3. AMBIENT OZONE GAS DETECTOR. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWING FOR (NOTE 3) (NOTE 3) FROM OXYGEN PCV -08-52-01 CONCENTRATION (NOTE 7) F480V CWS * CWS CHILLER 480V CWR im H Ia I- — - - — - — - — ' — - — - — - — - V nrq.l h PCV -OS -52A2 LCP-08-52-01 * 240V - —480V T4 (NOTE 4) HXR-OS-52-01 HXR-OS-52-02 PRESSURE TEMPERATURE NOTES: L i 1. ALL EQUIPMENT SHOWN INSIDE OF OZONE GENERATOR i PACKAGE SYSTEM SHALL BE i CHILLER DRAIN PROVIDED BY THE SYSTEM CHR -OS -53-02 i — ' — ' — ' — ' — ' — - — ' — - — - — SUPPLIER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. L4-4-4- LCP-08-53-02 I LCP-08-52-02 T-3 HXR-08-52-03 PE/PIT-08-52-OS TERIT-08- 2. ETHERNET DATA LINK. REFER TO SECTION CHILLER WATER WITH PROPYLENE GLYCOL i (NOTE 4) PLC -08-52-02 HXR-08-52-04 PE/PIT-08-52-06 44 42 56, OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM, FOR ALL SIGNAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS. PCV -OB -52-03 PE/PIT-08-52-07 3. AMBIENT OZONE GAS DETECTOR. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWING FOR INSTALLATION LOCATIONS. INSTRUMENT FURNISHED BY OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER. 4. SUPPLIED BY OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS E-2 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. TRAIN 5. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWING FOR INSTALLATION LOCATIONS. 6. REFER TO SECTION 44 42 56.18, OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM, FOR * INDICATES EQUIPMENT OR INSTRUMENTATION SUPPLIED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS. 7. RUN COMMAND TO BACKUP VENTILATION SYSTEM. REFER TO DIVISION 23, **ITEMS/EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY THE OWNER AND PRE- ASSEMBLED ON A SKID BY THE OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING, FOR RUN COMMAND TIE-IN AND ADDITIONAL CONTROL REQUIREMENTS. $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVi I MCP -08 ss1 Oiu OZONE MASTER CONTROL PANEL PLC -08-01 A TO ENS -08-02 E$ 480V —, FFD -0 (X- 1, —2.3) D NOTE I (3) NOTES: 1. ETHERNET DATA LINK. REFER TO SECTION 4442 56, OZONE DISINFECTION SYSTEM, FOR SIGNAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM, DWG 1-4. 2. FOR FUTURE USE. 3. DISSOLVED OZONE ANAYLYZERS. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR INSTALLATION LOCATIONS. IA 11-2 —>- FROM OZONE GENERATION * - INDICATES ITEM OR EQUIPMENT TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR �K* - INDICATES ITEM OR EQUIPMENT TO BE PROVIDED OWNER AND INSTALLED BY OZONE SYSTEM SUPPLIER FROM CONTACT BASIN PASS #1 2 1 3 r_ JIC SIC P-08-54-01 SIC - _ - _ _ SS3 P1T PI i SS3 08-54-02 t a 1 PIT 10-54-1)E * P-08-54-02 �K i PI PE 08-54-03 L 08 -54 -OE i JK P-08-54-03 �Ic I FIT 2 1 3 r_ - _ - _ T _ i T - _ - _ _ SS3 P1T - - - t 08-54-01 I � � SS4 T T i 1 PE PRV-OS-54-01 i I FIT M 08-54-01 i 08-54-01 i r— i FV 08-6jt rn L SATUI T/ LT -08 M FE 08-54-01 L- — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - — - —- 1— - — - — - �►� FE/FIT-O8-54-03 — - — - FV -08-54-03 — - — - — - — - — - — PRV-08-54-02 PE/PIT-08-54-03 EXISTING COI $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI $PWURL pw://projeetwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl 4 TRANSMITTER 0 O ---FL-O-W---1 INTERNAL 3/8" COMPRESSION I rRANSMITTE MOTORIZED 0 0 O 0 1/2" NPT CONDUIT O HUB FITTING (TYP)GATE O 000 VALVE OOOO FROM FLUID FLOW TO FLUID 0 O O O INLET ELEMENT OUTLET 4.50" e IA" SENSOR z CONCRETE FLOOR N( 2. THERMAL MASS FLOW TRANSMITTER - FLOW THROUGH AMBIENT GAS MONITOR NTS DI NT: NTS 4091-215CS 4091-252CS BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR S N PROCESS "- N E CONNECTION FLOW BYI&C CONTRACTOR ROTATING FLOAT 3/8" SST TUBING, SCALE TYP 'v MOUNT TRANSMITTER/ INDICATOR BELOW ELEMENT CONNECTION --_y/\- FLOW 3 -VALVE EQUALIZATI01N/1 MANIFOLD FLOW CONTROL J KNOB FLOW CONTROL VALVE TO PURGE 3/8" SST DRAIN VALVE Na STATION & TEST TAP AT WHERE LOW POINT 1. REQUIRED NOTES: NOTES: 2. 1. ALL LINES SHALL HAVE A CONTINUOUS SLOPE OF 1/4" PER FOOT MIN (1" PER 1. INSTALL ROTAMETER IN THE VERTICAL DIRECTION. 3• FOOT PREFERRED). PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TRANSMITTER/INDICATOR FOR LEVEL SERVICE ROTAMETER WITH FLOW CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION PF NTS NTS NT: 4091-249 4091-254 $PWURL pw://projectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVl 1/2" SST PIPE 1/2" V -XXX 1/2" TAP, DOUBLE STRAP SADDLE A ------ ---- CEMENT LINE STEEL PIPE, CAST IRON PIPE AND DUCTILE IRON PIPE 2-1/2" 150 LB STEEL ANSI FRP TANK 1" HALF COUPLING FLANGE SAME MATERIAL AS TANK KYNAR LINED _—_—_ —E--_ ___ _ FLANGE W/ — INTEGRAL THERMOWELL 3/16 FRP TANK STEEL TANK FRP TANK CPVC BLIND FLANGE, DRILL & TAP FOR 1" NPT THERMOWELL, TYP THERMOWELL WITH PATI 2" E AN' FLC SLF 1" MALE NPT, TYP FRP TEE, TYP 3/4" SCHED 80 CPVC 3/4" V -XXX PIPE ON CPVC, 3/4" SCHED 80 PVC SOLVENT WELD FRP PIPE PIPE ON PVC REDUCING TEE W/ SOLVENT WELD BY FEMALE NPT BUSHING 2-1/2' MIN SOLVENT WELD TEE SOLVENT WELD BY 1" FLC — — I — — FEMALE NPT BUSHING SLA PROVIDE REDUCERS FOR 1" MALE NPT PVC AND CPVC PIPE LINES SMALLER THAN 2-1/2" TITANIUM THERMOWELL PVC & CPVC PIPE PRESSURE CONNECTION INSTALLATION THERMOWELL INSTALLATION Si NTS NTS NT; 4091-305A 4091-361 1/2" ST PIPE 1/2"V -XXX THE 1" TAP DOUBLE W/ 1" MALE NPT, STRAP SADDLE TYP SCREWED TEE WITH I,I BUSHING SAME Jj,MATESR I I IAL AS PIPE — — —" —" — — —�J I STEEL &SST PIPE 3 1/2" &SMALLER I BLIND FLANGE, DRILL & TAP FOR 1" NPT THERMOWELL 1/2" V -XXX 1/2" SST PIPE 1/2" THREADOLET SAME MATERIAL AS PIPE CEMENT LINED STEEL, CAST IRON AND DUCTILE IRON PIPE io 1"THREADOLET 1"THREADED SAME MATERIAL LATROLET v AS PIPE, TYP 3/16 °y 3/16 3/16 II — — — —� — — — —► — -- ���— — STEEL & SST PIPE 4" & LARGER (J 2-1/2" NPT 3/4" SCHED 3/4" V -XXX 80 CPVC PIPE 1" THREADED ELBOLET TEE, MIN 2-1/2"x1" NPT BUSHING CPVC BLIND FLANGE, ==� — THERMOWEL DRILL & TAP FOR 3/4" a-- _ —_ W/ 1" MALE —� NPT CONNECTION g/16 NPT, TYP NO PROVIDE 1' REDUCERS —� — -- —'FOR LINES I 2. I SMALLER THAN 2-1/2" FRP TEE FRP PIPE STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPE Sl PRESURE CONNECTION INSTALLATION THERMOWELL INSTALLATION C/ NTS NTS NT: 4091-3056 4091-362 yr VVUML pw:Hprojectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL_WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI 1 1 2 1 3 FIELD PANEL TRANSIENT SURGE PROTECTOR PROTECTOR TRANSIENT SURGE (NOTE 1) TWISTED, SHIELDED PAIR; PROTECTOR TWISTED, SHIELDED PAIR; TRANSMITTER TAPE BACK SHIELD (NOTE 2) 250 OHM AT TRANSMITTER END; 24VDC 1/2 W.O. 1% DO NOT GROUND POWER +- RESISTOR GND GND A PROTECTED SIDE PROTECTED SIDE TO PANEL SHIELD BUS, DO NOT DAISY CHAIN NOTES: — - TO GROUND 1. EDCO MODEL SS64-036-2; OR EQUAL. SEE 40 90 01, ELECTRICAL TRANSIENT BUS; DO NOT PROJECTION FOR SPECIFICATION, INSTALL USING DETAIL 4091-4156G DAISY CHAIN ANALOG 2. EDCO MODEL PC -642-036; OR EQUAL. SEE 40 90 01, FOR SPECIFICATION. 2 -WIRE TRANSMITTER OUTPUT FIELD PANEL GND TRANSIENT SURGE PROTECTOR TRANSIENT SURGE TWISTED TWISTED, SHIELDED PAIR; PROTECTOR PAIR (NOTE 1) TAPE BACK SHIELD AT TRANSMITTER END; DO NOT GROUND A (NOTE 2) 0 OHM 25 251/2 W W.O. 1 �� — RESISTOR , L L L PROTECTED TO PANEL SHIELD BUS, SIDE N N N 120VAC DO NOT DAISY CHAIN POWER TO GROUND G G G BUS; DO NOT #10 NOTES: DAISY CHAIN TRANSMITTER — 1. EDCO MODEL SLAC; OR EQUAL. SEE 40 90 01, ELECTRICAL TRANSIENT PROTECTED 4091-420B PROTECTION FOR SPECIFICATION. INSTALL USING DETAIL G SIDE 2. EDCO MODEL PC -642-036; OR EQUAL. SEE 40 90 01, FOR SPECIFICATION. 44VIRE TRANSMITTER TYPICAL OUTDOOR TRANSMITTERS NTS PLC, RTU OR DCU DISCRETE FIELD J� INPUT CONTACT FIELD PANEL TYPICAL DISCRETE INPUT TWISTED PAIR PLC, RTU OR DCU ANALOG INPUT PLC, RTU OR DCU ANALOGINPUT 4091-405AG LOCAL OVERRIDE CONTROL 0 0 R INTERPOSING RELAY TO LOAD POWER PLC, RTU OR DCU 120VAC i — DISCRETI 5A MAX :T__ OUTPUT FIELD I — PANEL TYPICAL DISCRETE OUTPUT 1 F N TRANSIENT SURGE FIELD —PANEL PROTECTOR TRANSIENT SURGE (NOTE 1) TWISTED, SHIELDED PAIR; PROTECTOR TAPE BACK SHIELD (NOTE 2) TWISTED PAIR AT TRANSMITTER END; DO NOT GROUND PLC, RTU + + OR DCU ANALOG OUTPUT GND GND LOAD 71— TO PANEL SHIELD BUS; DO NOT DAISY TO GROUND NOTES: = CHAIN BUS; DO NOT 1. EDCO MODEL SS64-036-2; OR EQUAL. DAISY CHAIN SEE 40 90 01, ELECTRICAL TRANSIENT PROJECTION FOR SPECIFICATION. 2. EDCO MODEL PC -642-036; OR EQUAL. SEE 40 90 01, FOR SPECIFICATION. TYPICAL OUTDOOR ANALOG OUTPUT II NTS N 4091-408G $PWURL pw:Hprojectwise.ch2m.com:CH2MHILL _WBG/Documents/399884&space; &space;FAYETTEVI 1 IF ® RLI Insurance Company KL' P.O. Lindbergh Peoria, I 61615 P.O. Boo x 3967 Peoria, IL 61612 IIIIII IIIIIII II IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIII ,0 Fax: (309) Doc ID: 016028960003 Type: LIE Kind: PERFORMANCE BOND Recorded: 12/23/2014 at 02:06:00 PM Fee Amt: $25.00 Pape 1 of 3 3: Washington County, AR Kyle Sylvester Circuit Clerk SUBCONTRACT LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND Bond No. SSB0429077 BO3200000944 BluelnGreen LLC File—(Legal Title/Name of Subcontractor) 700 W. Research Center Blvd., Fayetteville, AR. 72701 (Address of Subcontractor) as Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and RLI Insurance Company as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Name of Surety) City of Fayetteville. AR. (Legal Title/Name of Contractor) 113 W. Mountain St., Fayetteville, AR. 72701 (Address of Contractor) as Obligee, hereinafter called Obligee, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinbelow defined, in the amount of One Million, Seven Hundred Eighty Thousand, Eight Hundred Twenty Five ------------ Dollars ( $ 1,780,825.00 ), for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement dated 12/19/2014 entered into a subcontract with Obligee for Suoolv ozone disinfection system for City of Fayetteville. AR. Wastewater Treatment Plant. in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by N/A (Full name of Architect) Which subcontract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereafter referred to as the subcontract. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the subcontract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions: 1. A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Principal for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the contract, labor and material being construed to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the subcontract. 2. The above named Principal and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the Obligee that every claimant as herein defined, who has not been paid in full before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such claimant's work or labor was done or performed, or materials were furnished by such claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution thereon. The Obligee shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit. 3. No suitor action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant, (a) After the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which Principal ceased work on said subcontract, it being understood, however, that If any limitation embodied in this bond is prohibited by any law controlling the construction hereof, such limitation shall be deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the minimum period of limitation permitted by such law. (b) Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the county or other political subdivision of the state in which the project, or any part thereof, is situated, or in the United States District Court for the district in which the project, or any part thereof, Is situated, and not elsewhere. 4. The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment of payments made in good faith hereunder. Signed and sealed this 19th day of December A.D., 2014 , IN THE PRESENCE OF: SUBCONTRACT LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND. This bond is issued simultaneously with another bond in favor of the obligee conditioned for the full and faithful performance of the contract. Revised to March, 1960. BluelnGreen LLC incipalby a41�p (Seal) (Seal) by . Dia6 !der+ fq ; Attorney in Fact ••••......• C0018004-50,( RLF RLI Insurance Company 9025 N. Lindbergh Dr. Peoria, IL 61615 P.O. Box 3967 Peoria, IL 61612 Phone: (309)692-1000 Fax: (309)683-1610 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: SUBCONTRACT PERFORMANCE BOND FORM A Bond No. SSB0429077 That, Blueln reen C, Here insert the name or legal title of the Subcontractor at 700 W Research Center Blvd Fayetteville AR 72701 as Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and Here insert the address of the Subcontractor 9025 N. Here insert the address name of the Jurety anti trorporate Illinois as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Fayetteville. AR Here insert the name or legal title of the General Contractor 113 W Mountain St Fayetteville- AR_. 72701 as Obligee, hereinafter Here insert the address of the General Contractor called Obligee, in the amount of One Million Seven Hundred Eighty Thousand Eight Hundred Twenty Five= ------------ Dollars ( R 1 7O,95�), for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement dated 12/19/2014 entered into a subcontract with Obligee for Suuoly ozone disinfection system for City of Favetteville AR Wastewater Treatment Plant in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by N/A Full Name of Architect which subcontract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereafter referred to as the subcontract. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Principal shall promptly and faithfully perform said subcontract, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. Whenever Principal shall be, and be declared by Obligee to be in default under the subcontract, Obligee having performed Obligee's obligations thereunder: (1) Surety may promptly remedy the default subject to the provisions of paragraph 3 herein, or; (2) Obligee after reasonable notice to Surety may, or Surety upon demand of Obligee may arrange for the performance of Principal's obligation under the subcontract subject to the provisions of paragraph 3 herein; (3) The balance of the subcontract price, as defined below, shall be credited against the reasonable cost of completing performance of the subcontract. If completed by the Obligee, and the reasonable cost exceeds the balance of the subcontract price, the Surety shall pay to the Obligee such excess, but in no event shall the aggregate liability of the Surety exceed the amount of this bond. If the Surety arranges completion or remedies the default, that portion of the balance of the subcontract price as may be required to complete the subcontract or remedy the default and to reimburse the Surety for its outlays shall be paid to the Surety at the times and in the manner as said sums would have been payable to the Principal had there been no default under the subcontract. The term "balance of the subcontract price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by the Obligee to the Principal under the subcontract and any amendments thereto, less the amounts heretofore properly paid by Obligee under the subcontract. Any Suit under this bond must be instituted before the expiration of two years from date on which final payment under the subcontract falls due. No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the Obligee named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of the Obligee. Signed and sealed this 19th day of December A.D., 2014 . IN THE PRESENCE OF: Subcontract Performance Bond Form A. Recommended for use where the General Contractor has filed Performance Bond approved by the American Institute of Architects, AIA Form No. 107. Revised June 1, 1955. BlueInGreen LLC Principal by (Seal) .. ee f.f79ltla.. (Seal) by ' 7 (Seal) $' KQ %° 7► 5 Attorney in Fact s.r tai,` t e � d��ir °°°•Oo°0°°•°°°•• ��. e C0024004-50,0 `''111¢ ��,,, a 1041imill"I to raRL10 ChW an RU Company P.O. Box 3967 1 Peoria, IL 61612-3967 Phone: (800)645-2402 1 Fax: (309)689-2036 Know All Men by These Presents: POWER OF ATTORNEY RLI Insurance Company Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company That this Power of Attorney is not valid or in effect unless attached to the bond which it authorizes executed, but may be detached by the approving officer if desired. That this Power of Attorney may be effective and given to either or both of RLI Insurance Company and Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, required for the applicable bond. That RLI Insurance Company, a Illinois corporation, and/or Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, a Washington corporation (as applicable), each authorized and licensed to do business in all states and the District of Columbia do hereby make, constitute and appoint: Cathy Heiliger, Diane Kern, Brigette Burgess, Jeffrey Holmes, Stuart DeSelms, iointly or severally in the City of Tulsa . State of Oklahoma , as Attorney in Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred upon him/her to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver for and on its behalf as Surety, in general, any and all bonds, undertakings, and recognizances in an amount not to exceed Ten Million Dollars ( $10,000,000.00 ) for any single obligation. The acknowledgment and execution of such bond by the said Attorney in Fact shall be as binding upon this Company as if such bond had been executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of this Company. RLI Insurance Company and Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, as applicable, have each further certified that the following is a true and exact copy of the Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each such corporation, and now in force, to -wit: "All bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney or other obligations of the Corporation shall be executed in the corporate name of the Corporation by the President, Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, Treasurer, or any Vice President, or by such other officers as the Board of Directors may authorize. The President, any Vice President, Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, or the Treasurer may appoint Attorneys in Fact or Agents who shall have authority to issue bonds, policies or undertakings in the name of the Corporation. The corporate seal is not necessary for the validity of any bonds, policies, undertakings, Powers of Attorney or other obligations of the Corporation. The signature of any such officer and the corporate seal may be printed by facsimile or other electronic image." IN WITNESS WHEREOF, RLI Insurance Company and/or Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, as applicable, have caused these presents to be executed by its respective Vice President with its corporate seal affixed this 11th day of July, 2014. p\NG AND 5C O,kkpol?4 Z cc __ ° 1979. eSEALo °°°°• ° ° State of Illinois ° ° °° 1 SS °. °.°°" ' County of Peoria JJ �0\, On this 11th day of July 1 2014 before me, a Notary Public, personally appeared Roy C. Die , who being by me duly swom, acknowledged that he signed the above Power of Attorney as the aforesaid officer of the RLI Insurance Company and/or Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of said corporation. RLI Insurance Company Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company Roy C. Die Vice President CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned officer of RLI Insurance Company, a stock corporation of the State of Illinois, and/or Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company, a Washington corporation, do hereby certify that the attached Power of Attorney is in full force and effect and is irrevocable; and furthermore, that the Resolution of the Company as set forth in the Power of Attorney, is now in force. In testimony whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and the seal of the RLI Insurance Company and/or Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company this 19th day of December 2014 RLI Insurance Company M. Bockler Notary Public Contractors Bonding and Insurance Company i"OFFICIAL SEAL" NOTARY Roy C. Die Vice President Puauc F JACQUELINE M. BOCKLER STATE OF ILLINOIS I COMMISSION EXPIRES 01/14718 3574949020212 A0059913 ` sr . rc STATE OF ARKANSAS �9 Department of Finance and Administration a April 23, 2015 Lynn Hyke Construction & Contract Manager 113 W. Mountain Street Fayetteville, Arkansas 72701 Re: Sales/Use Tax — Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant Opinion 20141010S Dear Mr. Hyke: prd. 571 y .314 1J�1 ve-r REVENUE LEGAL COUNSEL Post Office Box 1272, Room 2380 Little Rock, Arkansas 72203-1272 Phone:(501)682-7030 Fax: (501) 682-7599 http://www.dfa.arkansas.gov yCndor 16 503 in The Department has received a request for a supplement to your Opinion No. 20141010 dated November 13, 2014. The request for a supplemental opinion came from Tim Nyander (Utilities Director), who appears to be a fellow employee in your office. As you are aware, Opinion No. 20141010 (Original Opinion) discussed whether certain components of the new Dissolved Ozone Disinfection System in the Noland Wastewater Treatment Plant qualify as pollution control machinery and equipment under Ark. Code Ann. § 26-52-402(a)(3). As you are aware, Arkansas Gross Receipts Tax Rule GR -66(A) requires the following to prove entitlement to the relevant exemption: 1. The machinery and equipment is utilized, either directly or indirectly, by manufacturing or processing plants or facilities, or cities or towns in Arkansas to prevent or reduce air or water pollution or contamination which might otherwise result from the operation of the plant or facility; and 2. The machinery and equipment is required by Arkansas or federal law or regulations to be installed and utilized to control pollution or contamination as evidenced by written documentation from the Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality or the United States Environmental Protection Agency. The Original Opinion discussed several categories or items and concluded as follows with respect to each category: I. Category One: Ozone Generator Chillers and HVAC equipment that cool the pollution control machinery and equipment. It was decided that these items were not utilized in the treatment process, and, consequently, cannot qualify for the exemption under Ark. Code Ann. § 26-52-402(a)(3). II. Category Two: Oxygen Concentrators and Ozone Generators that acquire ozone for injection into wastewater. It was decided that these items were involved in the creation of ozone during the water treatment process for sterilization of the wastewater during the treatment process and qualified for the exemption under Ark. Code Ann. § 26-52-402(a)(3). III. Category Three: Pressurized dissolution tank, submersible pumps, and injection equipment that dissolve ozone in water and mix it in the waste water stream. It was decided that these items were involved in the sterilization of the wastewater during the treatment process and qualified for the exemption under Ark. Code Ann. § 26-52-402(a)(3). IV. Category Four: Associated Piping and Pipe Supports that transport oxygen, raw ozone, ozone solution, and cooling water. It was decided that, while piping connecting exempt pieces of machinery would generally be considered component parts of exempt machinery, the actual function of the pieces of piping was uncertain. Consequently, the piping was not considered to qualify for the exemption at that time. Further, it was decided that pipe supports generally do not qualify as component parts of machinery unless the items qualify as special foundations; no evidence was presented to show the items qualified as special foundations; and, consequently, pipe supports cannot qualify for the exemption under Ark. Code Ann. § 26-52402(a)(3). V. Category Five: Machinery that destroys excess ozone produced in the pollution control process. It was decided that the ozone destruction was not part of the water treatment process and, consequently, could not qualify for the exemption under Ark. Code Ann. § 26-52-402(a)(3) unless it was demonstrated that ozone destruction was required under federal or state environmental laws. VI. Category Six: Machinery that controls and monitors the wastewater treatment process is specifically excluded from the exemption under Arkansas Gross Receipts Tax Rule GR -66(E)(4) and, consequently, it was determined that these items could not qualify for the exemption under Ark. Code Ann. § 26-52- 402(a)(3). At the time of the Original Opinion request, you were only able to produce an opinion from the Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) stating that certain properly constructed ozone systems qualify as water disinfection systems. The Original Opinion noted that Arkansas Gross Receipts Tax Rule GR -66(A)(2) generally requires that any exempt pollution control machinery or equipment must be required by state or federal pollution control laws as evidenced by a written letter from either the ADEQ or federal Environmental Protection Agency. The Original Opinion was issued on the condition that your organization obtain an opinion from ADEQ verifying that all of the exempted machinery and equipment is required by state or federal pollution control laws to be installed and utilized in pollution control at the wastewater treatment plant. You have provided an ADEQ opinion dated March 9, 2015 with your request for a supplemental opinion. The ADEQ opinion states that all of the machinery and equipment listed in your Original Opinion request: directly or indirectly prevents or reduce (sic) air or water pollution or contamination that might otherwise result from the operation of the plant. This letter therefore serves as written documentation on what specific items are necessary for the prevention or reduction of air or water pollution or contamination that might otherwise result from the operation of the plant. Your request for a supplemental opinion asks the Department to revisit its Original Opinion in light of the ADEQ opinion. The ADEQ opinion does not expressly state any particular piece of machinery or equipment is required to be installed and utilized to reduce pollution or contamination under federal or state pollution control laws. The ADEQ opinion limits its conclusory analysis to whether your machinery and equipment is utilized directly or indirectly to prevent or reduce air or water pollution or contamination that might otherwise result from operation of the wastewater treatment plant. The ADEQ then reaches the conclusion that all of your machinery and equipment is utilized directly or indirectly to reduce air or water pollution qualifying that conclusion by explaining that only this office can make a determination regarding the application of the exemption under Ark. Code Ann. § 26-52- 402(a)(3). Such analysis is not relevant to the requirement under Arkansas Gross Receipts Tax Rule GR -66(A)(2). You have still failed to provide a statement from ADEQ that any of your machinery and equipment is required by state or federal law to be installed and utilized to prevent or reduce air or water pollution. Consequently, the Department must continue to qualify its determination that the items listed in Categories Two and Three qualify for the exemption. In your opinion request to ADEQ, you appear to argue that any machinery and equipment necessary to the pollution control process should qualify for the exemption. Please note that the Arkansas Supreme Court expressly rejected your proposed analysis in Southern Steel & Wire Co. v. Wooten, 276 Ark, 37, 631 S.W.2d 835 (1982) (providing that machinery and equipment that is necessary to pollution control but does not itself reduce air and/or water pollution or contamination does not qualify for the pollution control exemption). In Southern Steel, a taxpayer argued that that it had to install PH recorders to monitor its discharge of waste materials and chemicals in order to be in compliance with state pollution laws. The Arkansas Supreme Court held that the PH recorder (though necessary to the pollution control process) did not qualify for the exemption, stating: "The flaw in this argument is that the PH recorder itself does not `prevent or reduce air and/or water pollution or contamination.' Its purpose is merely to inform the appellant of the level of pollutants present in the waste water discharge. Appellant can then take corrective action." Id. at 42, 631 S.W.2d at 838. That analysis was again followed in Aluminum Co. ofAmerica v. Weiss, 329 Ark. 225, 946 S.W.2d 695 (1997). In Aluminum Co. of America, a taxpayer leased heavy equipment to mitigate environmental damage resulting from mining operations that had been conducted for many years. In denying the pollution control machinery and equipment exemption claim, the Arkansas Supreme Court compared its prior rulings in Heath v. Research -Cottrell, Inc., 258 Ark. 813, 529 S.W.2d 336 (1975) and Southern Steel and again explained that the pollution control machinery and equipment exemption solely applies to machinery and equipment that actually mitigates environmental pollution that results from the operation of a plant or facility and does not apply broadly to exempt anything that might be related pollution control but not actually reducing air and/or water pollution. This statutory exemption must also be considered in light of the narrow construction that must be applied to all tax exemption cases. Holbrook v. Healthport, Inc. et al., 2014 Ark. 146, 432 S.W.3d 593 (stating: "Furthermore, there is a presumption in favor of the taxing power of the state, and all tax -exemption provisions must be strictly construed against the exemption. [Citation omitted). Taxation is the rule, and exemption is the exception; therefore, any doubts should be resolved to deny the exemption."); see also Ark Conference Assn of Seventh Day Adventist, Inc. v. Benton County Bd. of Equalization, 304 Ark. 95, 97, 800 S.W.2d 426, 427 (1990); see also Citifnancial Retail Services v. Weiss, 372 Ark. 128, 133, 271 S.W.3d 494, 498 (2008); and Weiss v. Bryce Co., LLC, 2009 Ark. 412, at 3, 330 S.W.3d 756, 757. To interpret this exemption as broadly as you have proposed would result in a violation of this principle. The Department (following Arkansas Supreme Court precedent) requires that machinery and equipment must actually be a component part of machinery and equipment that actually mitigates environmental pollution to qualify for the pollution control machinery and equipment exemption. Please note that the Department does not have the authority to administratively expand the scope of an exemption beyond that provided in the statute. Consequently, the regulation must be interpreted narrowly to include only such items as are authorized by the express statutory language and Arkansas Supreme Court precedent. Under the binding Arkansas Supreme Court precedent, this office was correct in concluding that the ozone generator chillers and HVAC machinery discussed in Category One (which merely cool machinery involved in the pollution control process) could not qualify for the exemption under Ark. Code Ann. §26-52-402(a)(3). Such items do not act in the actual pollution control process. Further, this office was correct in denying the electrical controls and instrumentation in Category Six, which are also not acting in the pollution control process and are expressly excluded from the exemption under GR - 66(E)(4). Several items discussed in the Original Opinion lacked sufficient detail for the Department to reach a conclusion regarding taxability. Those items were discussed in Category Four. Neither your request for a supplemental opinion or the ADEQ opinion provide any additional information regarding the items listed in Category 4. Consequently, the Department will not revise its conclusions regarding Category 4 at this time. You have also failed to provide any additional proof that the ozone destruction machinery and equipment is required by state or federal pollution control laws to be installed and utilized to control or reduce pollution or contamination that might otherwise result from operation of the wastewater treatment plant. Consequently, the Department will not revise its conclusions regarding Category 5 at this time. As stated above, you have provided no additional information regarding the items claimed to be exempt in your opinion request or proof that any of the relevant items are required by state or federal pollution control laws. Consequently, the Department will not revise any of its conclusions in the Original Opinion. This opinion is based on the facts as set out in your inquiry as those facts are governed by current Arkansas laws, rules, and regulations. Any change in the facts or law could result in a different opinion. Sincerely, Todd Evans, Attorney Revenue Legal Counsel